Lunar Landing Training Vehicle Service and Maintenance Manual

............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ...........
........... ........... ........... ............ . ...

.
. .. . .... .... ....................... ............ ........... ......... ........ ........4:*: ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........................ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ...........
0 .
H&~*~ONALE R O N A U T ' I C S I A N D SPACE ADMINISTRATION A

-s._
- 4
BELL AEROSYSTEMS
-A
C O ~ ~ A * Y
TITLE
LUNAR LANDING TRAINING V E H I C m
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
MAMUAL REPORT NO. 7260-954002
25 AUGUST 1969
............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ .'.'.'.'.'.~:~~ ..................... ..................... .:.:.:.:.:... ........... ...... ::::: ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............. ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ...........
...* .. a .
>;; < % % : I
MANNE-D SPACECRAFT CENTER

HOUSTON.TEXA.5
....,
A -
........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ...........
T B E O CONTENTS AL F SECTION I G N R L INFORMATION EEA Para 1-1 1-3 1-5 1-7 1-11 1-13 1-14. 1-1 5 1-16 1-1 7 1-18 1-1 9 1-23 1-21 1-22 1-23 1-24 1-25 1-26 1-29 1-30 1-32 1-33 1-34 1-35 1-36 1-37 1-38
Title General Scope of Manual Publications Description Vehicle S t r u c t u r e Major S t r u c t u r a l Components Center Bo6y Engine Mount Gimbal Ring Hydrogen Peroxide Tanks 4 ) Fuel 7 ~ ~ Tanks Cockpit S t r u c t u r e Equipment S t r u c t u r e Leg ~ n s t a l lta o n / ~ h o c k S t r u t s i Weight and Balance Weight Crew Capacity Balance Balance Adjustment Jet Engine Center of Gravity J e t Engine System J e t Engine Engine I n s t a l l a t i o n Engine Instruments J e t Fuel System J e t Engine T h r o t t l e Control System Automatic E l e c t r o n i c T h r o t t l e Override and Disengage Capability Auto T h r o t t l e L i m i t Switches T h r o t t l e Instrumentation Y w Control I n s t a l l a t i o n a J e t Engine Gimbal Hydraulic System Rocket Propulsion System Pressure System InstrumentatLon Propellant Storage Subsystem Propellant System Instrumentattion Propellant U t i l i z a t i o n Subsystems A t t i t u d e Control Rockets L i f t Rockets Rocket Instrumentation E l e c t r i c a l System Primary Subsystems
I
7-39
1-40 i -41 1-42 1-43 1-45 1-46 1-47 1-48 1-50 1-51 1-52 1-53 1-55
Fiepcu-t No. 7260-954002
TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I (CONT)
Para 1-56
GENERAL INFORMATION
-Title
Emergency Bystem Data System External Power Circuit Breakers Electrical Instrumentation Electronic Systems Vehicle Attitude Control System Primary Attitude Control System Primary Rate Command with Attitude Hold Primary Direct Command with Attitude Hold Moment Compensation Rocket Thruster Logic Monitor Subsystem Primary Reset Switch Jet Engine Attitude Control System Mode Priority Local Vertical Mode Jet Stabilization Mode Lunar Simulation Subsystem Automatic Jet Throttle Manual Override Automatic Limit Switches Lift Rocket Thrust Lunar Simulation Instrumentation Breathing Oxygen Ejection Seat Cockpit Controls and Indicators Aerodynamic Boom SECTION I1 HANDLING, SERVICING LUBRAICATION
1-57
1-58 1-59 1-60 I -62
1-63 1 -64
1-65
1-66 1-68 1-69

1-70 17 -1 1-73 1 -74 1-75
1-76
1-80 18 -1 1-82
1-83 18 -4 1-85 1 -87 1- 9 8 19 -1
Scope of Section Ground Handling Towing Jacking Casters Hoisting Leveling Provisions Vehicle Ground Operations
Report No. 7260-954002
SECTION I1 Para Title
(CONT) Page
Ground Tiet'lown Runs Center of Gravity F i x t u r e Runs R e s t r a i n t s During CG F i x t u r e Runs P r e p a r a t i o n of LLTV and F i x t u r e f o r CG Check Procedure f o r P l a c i n g t h e LLTV on t h e CG fixture Perform CG Check Procedure f o r Removing t h e LLTV from t h e CG f i x t u r e Leveling P r o t e c t i v e Cover Ground S a f e t y Locks and P i n s Engine Support Cable S t a t i c Ground Wire ACS Safe Switch and Rocket P r o p e l l a n t Switch Safety Pins Parachute and E j e c t o r S e a t 'ID" Ring Safety Pins A S Safe and Rocket P r o p e l l a n t Switches C S a f e t y Lock P i n Extinguishing Ground F i r e s Crash Truck Take-off Pad F i r e F i g h t i n g Equipment Engine Ground Operation Engine P r e - S t a r t Check Cockpit Check A i r S t a r t Unit (GSE) JP4 Fuel S e r v i c i n g JP4 Fuel Lsvel Check Refuel JP4 Tank P r e s s u r i z a t i o n H202 S e r v i c i n g Helium S e r v i c i n g Engine T e s t s Hand S i g n a l s Stopping Engine Servicing ~ ~ d r a u l System S e r v i c i n g ic Hydraulic Test Stand Flushing Procedure
Report No. 7260-954002
iii
SECTION I1
(CONT)
Title Filling Testing Accumulator Charging and System F i l l Turbofan Engir~eO i l Servicing Changing O i l M e t a l l i c P a r t i c l e Check E l e c t r i c a l and Pneumatic Test Cart E/P Cart Operations Method f o r Helium Servicing of LLTV Heliwh Supply Tanks. E/P Cart H20 Tank P r e s s u r i z a t i o n 2 Helium and Nltrogen Gas Service Truck Accumulator Pressure Cart Landing Gear Shock S t r u t s Pressure Cart P i l o t ' s Oxygen Cart Lubrication SECTION I11 General LLTV Removal From Shipping Skid X T V Assembly Leg I n s t a l l a t i o n After Unpacking A f t Equipment Platform I n s t a l l a t i o n Rocket System I n s t a l l a t i o n H202 Tank I n s t a l l a t i o n Helium Tank I n s t a l l a t i o n Rocket System Piping I n s t a l l a t i o n L i f t Rocket I n s t a l l a t i o n A t t i t u d e Control Rocket I n s t a l l a t i o n JP4 Tank I n s t a l l a t i o n Landing S t r u t I n s t a l l a t i o n Turbofan J e t Engine Replacement LLTV Disassembly Leg Removal A f t Quipment Platform Removal H202 Tank Removal ~elium Tank- Removal Rocket System Piping Removal L i f t Rocket Removal A t t i t u d e Control Rcoket Removal
Page
Report No. 7260-954002
Para --
Title -
JP4 Tank Removal

Landing S t r u t Removal Transporting LLTV by A i r Preparing Vehicle Loading Vehicle on Special Platform Loading Vehicle Into Transport Plans SECTION I V AIRFRAME OPERATING SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE Scope of Section Description and Leading P a r t i c u l a r s . Major S t r u c t u r a l Components Center Body Engine Mount Gimbal Ring Peroxide Tank Mounts Fuel Tank Mounts Cockpit Struqture Aerodynamic Boom Equipment Structure S Leg ~ n s t a l l a t i o n / ~ h o c k t r u t s Ejection Seat M c t i o n a l Analysis Oxygen System Removal Procedures Cockpit Roof Removal Leg Maintenance Leg Braces o r S t r u t Removal Ejection Seat Removal Oxygen System Removal I n s t a l l a t i o n Procedures Leg I n s t s l l a t i o n Leg Braces and S t r u ~ n s t a l l a t i o n I
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION V HYI3RAULIC GIMBAL SYSTEM

P
Para
Title Scope of Section Description and Leading Particulars Functional Analysis Servicing and Testing Test Equipment Step-by Step Procedures Flushing Procedure Filling Testing Ramoval Procedures Hydraulic Actuators Roll Actuator Pitch Actuator Hydraulic Pump Hydraulic Reservoir Hydraulic Accumulator Installation Procedures Hydraulic Actuators Hydraulic Pump
Page
SECTION VI POWER PLANT MAINTENANCE Scope of Section Description and Leading Particulars Jet Engine Systsm Jet Fuel System h e 1 Storage Tank Pressurization Fuel Lines Lubrication System Fuel Control System Operational Checkout System Troubleshooting Removal and Installation Procedures
Report No. 7260-954002
SECTION V I Para Title
(CONT) Page
6-20 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-38 6-3 9 6-40 6-41 6-43 6-44 6-45 6-46 6-47 6-49 6-50 6-51 6-52 6-53
Turbofan J e t Engine Replacement Removal from LLTV I n s t a l l a t i o n on Maintenance Stand Engine A i r I n l e t Removal Accessory Removal F l e x i b l e Hoses Generat or Hydraulic Reservoir Hydraulic Pump Inverter I n v e r t e r Mounting Base Tachometer Generator Fan I n l e t Removal I n s t a l l a t i o n I n t o Shippping Container JP4 Tank Removal Piping Connections Aft Tank Removal Forward Tank Removal J e t Engine T h r o t t l e Control System'Removal Manual T h r o t t l e and Actuator Cross-Over Valve Hydraulic Actuator Temperature Compensator I n s t a l l a t i o n Procedures Manual T h r o t t l e and Actuator Cross-Over Valve Hydraulic Actuator Temperature Compensator Manual T h r o t t l e Control Servicing and Adjustment I n s t a l l a t i o n of Turbofan Engine Fan I n l e t I n s t a l l a t i o n Engine Mount Tachometer Generator I n v e r t e r Mounting Base Inverter Hydraulic Pump Hydraulic Reservoir Generator F l e x i b l e Hoses Engine A i r I n l e t I n s t a l l a t i o n I n s t a l l a t i o n i n t o LLTV
6-8 6-9 6-16 6-18 6-20 6-21 6-21 6-21 6-23 6-23 6-23 6-24 6-24 6-29 6-30 6-30 6-30 6-31 6-31 6-31 6-33 6-33 6-33 6-34 6-34 6-34 6-34 6-34 6-34
Report No.
7260-954002
vii
SECTION V I Title
(CONT)
JP4 Tank I n s t a l l a t i o n Aft Tank I n s t a l l a t i o n Forward Tank I n s t a l l a t i o n Piping Connections J e t Engine Adjustments J e t Engine a n d JP4 Fuel Tanks Servicing SECTION V I I R C E PROPULSION OKT Description A t t i t u d e Control Rockets L i f t Rockets Rocket Instrumentation I n s t a l l a t i o n and Removal General H202 Tank Hellum Tank L i f t Rocket A t t i t u d e Control Rockets L i f t Rocket Control System T-Handle Rotary Actuator and T h r o t t l e Valve Remote T h r o t t l i n g P o s i t i o n Control Box Piping Checking and Adjustment Rocket Components Helium Regulator Lockup Pressure Pressure D i f f e r e n t i a l Adjustment A t t i t u d e Rocket Cluster Variable O r i f i c e Valve L i f t Rocket Functional Checkout E l e c t r i c a l and Pneumatic Test Cart (E/P) E & P Cart LLTV Helium Tank Servicing LLTV H 0 Tank Pressurizing 2 Solenold2Valve Operation
viii
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION V I I I COCKPIT INSTRUMENTATION MAINTENANCE Para Title Scope o f S e c t i o n D e s c r i p t i o n and Leading P a r t i c u l a r s Engine and Fuel I n d i c a t o r s JP4 Tank P r e s s u r e I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t O i l P r e s s u r e 1ndica;ar C i r c u i t E T Indicator Circuit G P e r c e n t RPM I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t Rocket System I n d i c a t o r s Helium Source P r e s s u r e I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t H 0 Tank P r e s s u r e I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t ~?f$ Rocket Chamber P r e s s u r e I n d i c a t r C i r c u i t H202 Fuel Remaining I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t F l i g h t Instruments Attitude Indicator ~ l t i t u d e / ~ l t i t u dRate I n d i c a t o r e H o r i z o n t a l V e l o c i t y Omdocatpr ~ h r u s t / ~ e i ~ ndicator Ih t Barometric A l t i m e t e r Wind V e l o c i t y I n d i c a t v C i r c u i t Wind D i r e c t i o n I n d i c a t o r eta Ind ) Inertial-Lead V e r t i c a l Speed I n d i c a t o r Wind D i r e c t i o n I n d i c a t o r AC and DC Voltmetars Clock Annunciator Warning I n d i c a t o r s Master Warning Control Box Cockpit Instrumentation Operational Checkout Cockpit Instruements Trouble Anslysis Removal and I n s t a l l a t i o n Adjustments JP4 Tank P r e s s u r e I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t T e s t Equipment Required Step-by-step Procedure O i l Pressure Indicator Circuit T e s t Equipment Required Step-by S t e p Procedure Wind V e l o c i t y I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t Page
Fteport No. 7260-354002
T BE O C NE T AL F O TNS SECTION
IX
ELECTRICAL S S E YT M
MAIN TENAN C E
Para Title Scope of Section Description and Leading Particulars Functional Analysis Primary Power System Backup Power System Circuit Breakers Trouble Shooting Analysis Service and Testing Vehicle Power Transfer Prooedure Equipment Requirements Step-by-step Procedures Power Status Ground Rectifier t o Truck-Mounted APU Truck-Mounted APU t o Ground Rectifier Removal Procedures Emergency Battery DC Voltage Regulator DC Generator Primary Inverter and Mounting Base Emergency Inverter and Heat Sink 800-Hertz Inverters I n s t a l l a t i o n Procedures Emergency Battery DC Voltage Regulator DC Generator Primary Inverter and Mounting Base Emergency Inverter and Heat Sink 800-Hertz Inverters Generator and Regulator Check and Adjustment Equipmect Required Preliminary Procedure Step-by-step Procedure Page
Report No. 7260*954002
SECTION X RADIO, RADAR AID mLEBETRY MAINTENANCE Para Title Scope of Section Description and Leading Particulars Radio Communication Equipment Radar Equipaent Radar Altimeter Doppler Radar Instrumentation and Telemetry Equipment Instrumentation and Telemetry Block Diagram Analps3.s Analog Voltage Instrumentation Digital Instrumentation AC/DC Signal Conditioner Operational Checkout Radio Communications Radar Equipment Instrumentation Troubleshooting Procedures Installation and Removal UHF Transceiver TR-31 Installation Removal PCM Encoder Installation Removal Telemetry Transmitter TR-2 Installation Removal Adjustment Procedures Emergency AC Power Loss Channel 56-7 Adjustment Test Equipment Required Step-bj-Step Procedure
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION X I AVIONICS SYSTEMS M I T N N E AN E A C Para Title Scope of Section Description and Leading P a r t i c u l a r s Vehicle A t t i t u d e Control System (ACS) Primary A t t i t u d e Control Subsystem Primary-Rate Command w i t h A t t i t u d e gold (Mode 2) Primary D i r e c t Command (0n/0ff ode) Moment Compensation (Model) Rocket Thruster Logic Primary E l e c t r o n i c s Block Diagram Analysis Backup A t t i t p d e Control Subsystem ode 5) Backup Electronics A S Block Diagram Analysis C Monitor Subsystem Monitor Comparator Excess Rate Detection C i r c u i t r y Hand Controller Malfunction Detector Circuitry Primary Reset Switch Valve Stuck Warning Monitor E l e c t r o n i c s Block Diagram Analysis A S Instrumentation C J e t Engine A t t i t u d e Control System Mode P r i o r i t y Gimbal Lock Mode Gimbal Lock Mode Block Diagram Analysis Local V e r t i c a l Mode Local V e r t i c a l Mode Block Diagram Analysis Engine Centered Mode J e t S t a b i l i z a t i o n Mode Lunar Simulation System Lunar Simulation Block Diagram Analysis H 0 Remaining Detector ~ & 6 s t ; s t / ~ e i Computer ~ht L i f t Rocket E l e c t r o n i c Switch Vehicle Axis E r r o r Amplifier Thrust /weight I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t Booster A p and Resolution C i r c u i t m Auto T h r o t t l e Channel Automatic T h r o t t l e Limit Switches C i r c u i t Analysis Primary, Monitor and Backup Electronics Rate Command C i r c u i t Rate Model C i r c u i t xii Report No. 7260-95&002 Page
TABLE 9F CONTENTS SECTION X I (CONT) AVIONICS SYSTPara Title MAINTENANCE
11-91 Direct Model C i r c u i t 11-92 Model Lead C i r c u i t Rate Gyro Feedback C i r c u i t 11-94 Attitude Gyro Feedback C i r c u i t 11-95 11-96 Attitude Hold and S p c ? r o n i z e r C i r c u i t 11-98 Yaw Attitude Gyro Feedback C i r c u i t Yaw Attitude Hold and Synchronizer C i r c u i t 11-99 11-100 Threshold Amplifier and I n v e r t e r C i r c u i t 11-103 Rocket I n h i b i t Logic C i r c u i t Rocket Amplifiers C i r c u i t 11-104 11-105 Monitoring, Detection and Switching C i r c u i t s 11-707 Monitor Comparator 11-109 Attitude Synchronizer Rate Switch 11-110 Excess Rate Detector 11-112 Hand Controller Malfunction Detector C i r c u i t 11-115 Stuck Valve Detector C i r c u i t 2 - ~ e t / & - ~te Switching C i r c u i t 11-1 16 11-117 H202 Fuel Level Detector C i r c u i t J e t Engine Attitude Contro1,Circuits 11-1 19 Excess Angle With R e s p c t t o V e r t i c a l 11-121 Excess Angle Along S t r u t s C i r c u i t ' 11-123 Summing Amplifier C i r c u i t 11-124. Actuator Drive Amplifier C i r c u i t s 11-125 11-12'; Electronic Switch C i r c u i t ~hrust/~ei~ht Computer C i r c u i t 11-1 28 Body Axis Error Amplifier C i r c u i t 11- 130 Th&/weignt Indicator Amplifier 11-132 Booster A p and Resolution C i r c u i t m 11-133 11-134. Auto T h r o t t l e Channel C i r c u i t s Limit Switch C i r c u i t 11-136 11-138 Operational Checkout 11-140 System Troubleshooting 11-142 Removal Procedures 1-4 11 4 Avionics Electronic Units 11-146 Hand Controller. Removal 11-148 I n s t a l l a t i o n Procedures 11-150 Adjustments T e s t Equipment 11-152 11-154 Step-by-step Procedures 11-156 Rate Command Adjustment Rate Gyro Feedback Adjustment 11-157 A t t i t u d e Gyro Feedback Adjustment 11-158 Yaw Attitude Gyro Adjustment 11-159 Report No. 7260-954002
xiii
TABLE O CONTENTS F SECTION X I (COW) AVIONICS SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE Para Title Threshold Amplifier Adjustment A t t i t u d e Hold and Synchronizer Adjustment Yaw A t t i t u d e Hold and Synchronizer Adjustment D i r e c t Model Adjustment Model Rate Adjustment Model Lead Ad j u s t n e n t A t t i t u d e Synchronizer Rate Switch Adjustment Hand C o n t r o l l e r Malfunction Detector Adjustment Excess Rate Detector H202 Fuel Level Detector Adjustment E l e c t r o n i c Switch Adjustment ~ h r u s/weight Computer Adjustment t Z-Axis Error Amplifier Adjustment X-Axis E r r o r Amplifier Adjustment Compensation Network and I n t e g r a t o r Adjustment Rate Gyro Replacement Adjustment Rate Gyro I n i t i a l Potentiometer S e t t i n g s Rate Gyro T e s t s Required Yaw Rate Gyro Non-Repeatability Rate Gyro C i r c u i t s Yaw C a l i b r a t i o n Rate Gyro Yaw A t t i t u d e Hold Sync. C i r c u i t Rate Gyro D i r e c t With Model, Primary and Backup Rate Gyros Rate Gyro Torquing Current S e n s i t i v i t y , Yaw Channel, Primary Rate Gyro Torquing Current S e n s i t i v i t y Yaw Channel Backup P i t c h Rate Gyros - C a l i b r a t i o n of Rate Gyro C i r c u i t s , P i t c h P i t c h Channel A t t i t u d e Hold Sync. C i r c u i t D i r e c t w i t h Model, PRI a d Excess Rate B/U Rate Gyros Rate Gyro Torquing Current S e n s i t i v i t y , P i t c h Channel, Primary Rate Gyro Torquing Current S e n s i t i v i t y P i t c h Channel, Backup C a l i b r a t i o n of Rate Gyro C i r c u i t s , R o l l A t t i t u d e Hold Sync. C i r c u i t Excess Rate D i r e c t w i t h Model, Primary and Backup Rate Gyros Page
11-113
11-114 11-115 11-116 11-117 11-118 11-118
11-119
11-119
11-119
xiv
Report No. 7260-954002
T A B U O CONTENTS F
SECTION X I (CONT) AVIONICS SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE Para Title Rate Gyro Torquing Current S e n s i t i v i t y , R o l l Channel, Primary Rate Gyro Torquing Current S e n s i t i v i t y , R o l l Channel, Backup V e r t i c a l Gyro w i t h Synchros Adjustments V e r t i c a l Gyro with Sychros I n i t i a l Potentiometer S e t t i n g s V e r t i c a l Gyro w i t h Synchros T e s t s Required A t t i t u d e Threshold, P i t c h Channel A t t i t u d e Threshold, R o l l Channel A t t i t u d e I n d i c a t o r , P i t c h Up Channel A t t i t u d e I n d i c a t o r , P i t c h Down Channel A t t i t u d e I n d i c a t o r , R o l l Right Channel A t t i t u d e I n d i c a t o r , R o l l L e f t Channel Local V e r t i c a l Mode V e r t i c a l Gyro with Resolvers Adjustment V e r t i c a l Gyro w i t h Resolvers Test Required Lunar Simulation Check D i r e c t i o n a l Gyro Adjustments D i r e c t i o n a l Gyro I n i t i a l Potentiometer Settings D i r e c t i o n a l Gyro T e s t Required A t t i t u d e I n d i c a t o r , Yaw Channel Page
Report No. 7260-954002
L i s t of I l l u s t r a t i o n s
Figure
Title Lunar Landing T r a i n i n g V e h i c l e (LLTv.) Two View Sketch of t h e LLTV J e t F u e l System T h r o t t l e System Helium and H 0 2 2 L i f t Rocket System A t t i t u d e Rocket System H202 Tank E l e c t r i c a l System Diagram E l e c t r i c a l System Switch Function A t t i t u d e Controm System A t t i t u d e Control Rocket F i r i n g Logic LLTV Cockpit - F r o n t View Cockpit Layout P i l o t ' s Console C i r c u i t Breaker P a n e l R Console H Rocket I n s t r u m e n t s and Annunciator P a n e l Warning L i g h t s P i l o t Instrument P a n e l - Bottom P o r t i o n Lower RH Console Hand C o n t r o l l e r LLTV Vehicle T r a n s p o r t e r LLTV T r a n s p o r t e r T y p i c a l Support P e d e s t a l and Clamp LLTV C a s t e r s Hydraulie T e s t Stand Accumulator P r e s s u r e Decay E/P T e s t C a r t Pnuematic Schematic Helium and Nitrogen Gas S e r v i c e Truck Helium and Nitrogen Gas S e r v i c e Truck C o n t r o l Panel Nitrogen P r e s s u r e C a r t P i l o t ' s Oxygen C a r t V e h i c l e Ready f o r A i r Shipment Connector P r o t e c t i o n During Shipment H202 Tank completely covered
Page xxiv
1-7
1-10 11 - 1
1-14
1-15
1-16
1-18
1-20 1-21 1-24 1-27
1-34 1-35 1-36
Helium Tanks completely covered J P 4 Tank Padded f o r A i r Shipment U-Clamp S e c u r i n g Vehicle t o T r a n s p o r t e r Report No. 7260-954002
(Cont ) Figure Title Transporter, J i g , and Platform LLTV Ready f o r A i r Shipment S p e c i a l T r a i l e r Aligned t o Cargo Area of Transport Plane S p e c i a l T r a i l e r Being Raised S p e c i a l Platform Entering Cargo Area LLTV S t r u c t u r e and Component Arrangement Weber E j e c t i o n S e a t , Front View Weber E j e c t i o n S e a t , Rear View Rocket Catapult and R a i l s E j e c t i o n Seat Operational Schematic Diagram Oxygen System Safet y i n g B a l l i s t i c Components R o l l Actuator and S h u t t l e Valve Hydraulic Reservoir and Pump Hydraulic Accumulator and Pump Miscellaneous Hydraulic Gimbal Components J e t Engine Gimbal Hydraulic System Schematic J e t Engine Fuel and Power Control System Schematic J e t Engine T h r o t t l e Control J e t Engine Schematic Turbofan J e t Engine I n s t a l l a t i o n J e t Engine V e r t i c a l Hoist S l i n g Attachment Turbofan J e t Engine I n s t a l l e d on Maintenance Stand Horizontal Hoist S l i n g Forward L i f t Attachment Engine Mounted on S l i n g Engine Mount Assembly Support Ring and I n n e r Bellmouth Assembly Rocket Propulsion System Schematic Helium Tanks and Typical A t t i t u d e Rockets Right Hand L i f t Rocket and H202 Tank Page
3-7 3-8 3-9
L i f t Rocket Control Components Helium P r e s s u r i z a t i o n System Diagram JP4 Tank Pressure I n d i c a t o r s - Schematic Diagram P i l o t Instrument Panel - Bottom P o r t i o n O i l Pressure I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t Schematic Diagram Report No. 7260-354.032
Figure
Title Exhaust Gas Temperature I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t , Cabling Diagram Percent RPM I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t - Schematic Diagram Helium Source Pressure I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t Schematic Diagram Top Portion P i l o t Instrument Panel Including Annunciator Lights H202 Tank Pressure I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram L i f t Rocket Chamber Pressure I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram H202 Fuel Remaining I n d i c a t o r , Cabling Diagram
Page
Middle Portion P i l o t Instrument Panel A t t i t u d e I n d i c a t o r Interconnection Diagram A l t i t u d e / A l t i t u d e Rate I n d i c a t o r Cabling Diagram Horizontal Velocity I n d i c a t o r Cabling Diagram ~ h r u s/weight I n d i c a t o r Cabling Diagram t Wind Velocity I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t , Wiring Diagram Wind Direction I n d i c a t o r e eta Ind. ) C i r c u i t , Wiring Diagram Wind D i r e c t i o n I n d i c a t o r , Cabling Diagram Typical Annunciator I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Master Warning Control Box, Block Diagram 28 Volt D-C Generator 400 Hertz A-C I n v e r t e r Aft Equipment Rack, Starboard Side LLTV E l e c t r i c a l Power D i s t r i b u t i o n Diagram D-C Generator and Regulator Adjustment Connections,Cabling Diagram Aft Equipment Rack, Starboard Side Model TR-1 Radar ~ e c e i v eIr~ r a n s m i t t e r Aft Equipment Rack, A f t View Instrumentation Telemetry System, Block Diagram AC/DC Signal Conditioner, Block Diagram Avionics Primary, Monitor, Backup and Drag Compensation E l e c t r o n i c s
xviii
Report No. 7260-954002
L i s t of I l l u s t r a t i o n s (C ont ) Figure 11-2 Title Avionics Avionics Avionics Avionics A t t i t u d e Gyro Unit Rate Gyro Accelerometer Triad Typical Gimbal Hydraulic Actuators A t t i t u d e Control - Rocket F i r i n g Logic J e t Engine A t t i t u d e Control System Automatic J e t T h r o t t l e Control System Block Diagram ~ r u s t / ~ e i Computer ~ht Gimbal Lock Mode, Block Diagram Typical Landing Gear Microswitch Rate Command C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Rate Model C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Rate Model Typical Signal Traces D i r e c t Model C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Model Lead C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Rate Gyro Feedback C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram P i t c h and R o l l A t t i t u d e Gyro Feedback C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram A t t i t u d e Hold and Synchronizer C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Yaw A t t i t u d e Gyro Feedback C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram A t t i t u d e Needle C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Yaw A t t i t u d e Hold and Synchronizer C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Threshold Amplifer and I n v e r t e r C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Rocket I n h i b i t Logic C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Rocket Amplifier C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Monitor Comparator C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram A t t i t u d e Synchronizer Rate Switch C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Excess Rate C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Typical Excess Rate Detector Relay Switching Control, Schematic Diagram Hand C o n t r o l l e r Malfunction Detector C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Stuck Valve Detector C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram System System System System Page
11-3 11-4 11-5 11-6 11-7

11-8
11-9
11-10 1-1 11 11-12
11-13
11-14
11-15
11-16 11-17
11-18
11-19
11-20 11-21 11-22 11-23 11-24 11-25 11-26 11-27 11-28 11-29 11-30
11-31
Report No. 7260-954002
L i s t of I l l u s t r a t i o n s (cont ) Figure 11-32 Title ~ - J e t / b - J e t Switching C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram H 0 Fuel Level Detector C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram 2 2 Excess Angle w i t h Respect t o V e r t i c a l C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Gimbal Lock Control C i r c u i t s , Schematic Diagram Excess Angle Along S t r u t s C i r c u i t s , Schematic Diagram Summing Amplifier C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Compensation Network and I n t e g r a t o r C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Valve C o i l Amplifier and Lead C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram E l e c t r o n i c Switch C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram ~hrust/~ei~ht Computer C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram ~hrust/Wei~ht Computer C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Body Axis E r r o r Amplifier C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Z-Axis E r r o r Amplifier C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram ~ h r u s/weight I n d i c a t o r Amplifier C i r c u i t , t Schematic Diagram Booster Amplifier and Resolver C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram Auto T h r o t t l e Channel C i r c u i t s , Schematic Diagram Limit Switch C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram A t t i t u d e Control E l e c t r o n i c s Functional Block Diagram Weight and Drag J e t S t a b i l i z a t i o n and E l e c t r o n i c s Auto Diagram
11-33
11-34
Report No. 7260-954002
L i s t of Tables
Table
Title Applicable Documents Cockpit Controls and I n d i c a t o r s Ground Support Equipment Torque Values f o r F l a r e d Tube F i t t i n g s Torque Values f o r Bulkhead Tube F i t t i n g Torque Values f o r S t e e l Nut-Bolt (screw) Combinations DC Current Versus I n d i c a t i o n DC Current Versus O i l P r e s s u r e I n d i c a t i o n I n p u t Voltage Versus E T I n d i c a t i o n G Voltage I n p u t Versus Helium Pressure Indication. Voltage I n p u t Versus H 0 P r e s s u r e 2 2 Indication Voltage Input Versus Rocket Chamber Pressure Indication Voltage I n p u t Versus H 0 Fuel Remaining Annunciator I n d i c a t o r s 2 2 Cockpit I n s t r u m e n t a t i o n Operational Checkout Procedures A f t Equipment C i r c u i t Breakers Telemetry I n s t r u m e n t a t i o n Channels Wire L i s t A t t i t u d e Control System C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s T y p i c a l P i t c h Channel Logic J e t Engine Modes of Operation Avionics Adjustments Data Sheet Yaw L e f t Rate Gyro T e s t Requirements Yaw Right Rate Gyro Requirements P i t c h Down Rate Gyro T e s t Requirements P i t c h U Rate Gyro T e s t Requirements p R o l l L e f t Rate Gyro T e s t Requirements R o l l Right Rate Gyro T e s t Requirements Gyro P i t c h and J e t Engine P i t c h Angles Gyro R o l l and J e t Engine R o l l Angles Yaw A t t i t u d e I n d i c a t o r T e s t Requirements
Page
Report No. 7260-954002
SECTION I G N R L INFORMATION EEA 1-1. 1-2. GNR L EEA The Lunar Landing Training Vehicle ( h e r e a f t e r r e f e r r e d t o a s e i t h e r
t h e LLTV o r v e h i c l e ) , f i g u r e 1-1, has been designed and manufactured by B e l l Aerosystems Company, Model 7260, under Contract N S 9-6657 f o r t h e A National Aeronautcs and Space Administration. The vehicle c a p a b i l i t i e s provide p o t e n t i a l moon landing a s t r o n a u t s a simulated l u n a r g r a v i t y and atmospheric environment and a l s o t r a i n s t h e a s t r o n a u t s t o cope and r e a c t t o t h e o p e r a t i o n a l problems involved i n t h e f i n a l phases of a l u n a r landing and t h e i n i t i a l phases of a l u n a r t a k e o f f . Areas of t r a i n i n g , The L T operLV using t h e LLTV, include t h e c o n t r o l s , d i s p l a y s , v i s i b i l i t y , o r i e n t a t i o n systems, propulsion, and dynamics i n f l i g h t and landing. a t e s i n f r e e f l i g h t t o simulate t h e l u n a r g r a v i t y and atmospheric environment by compensating f o r aerodynamic drag f o r c e s and moments and excessive ( e a r t h ) g r a v i t a t i o n a l forces. 1-3. 1-4. LLTV. SCOPE O M N A F AUL This s e r v i c e and maintenance manual has been prepared f o r use by
s k i l l e d , t r a i n e d personnel, a s an a i d i n s e r v i c i n g and maintaining t h e
It contains a l l necessary informatlon and i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t r a n s -
p o r t i n g , e r e c t i n g , f l i g h t l i n e s e r v i c i n g and maintenance. 1-5. 1-6. PUBLICATIONS Table 1-1 l i s t s t h e p u b l i c a t i o n s t o be used i n conjunction with
t h i s manual t h a t a r e applicable t o t h e operation, s e r v i c i n g , and maintenance of the LLTV. Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE 1-1. DOCUMENT NO.
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
DOCUMENT TITLE Bell Aerossstems Company
Handbooks and Manuals 7260-954001 7260-954003 7260-954004 LLTV Flight Manual LLTV Weight and Balance Handbook LLTV Avionic Test Cart Operational Manual
Ground Run Checklists 7260-9310 1 0 0 7260-9310 3 7260-9310 4 0 Rocket Operational Ramp Checklist Pilot ACS Familiarization on CG Fixture Jet Engine Run Ramp Checklist
Flight Checkout Inspection and Servicing Checklists 7260-931005 0 7260-9310 6 ! 7260-931007 0 7260-9310 9 7260-931 0 2 1 7260-9310 6 1 1 7260-9310 0 Flight Checklists 7260-931008 7260-9310 1 1 1 7260-931 0 4 1 7260-9310 5
b
Vehicle Preflight Checklist Avionic System Preflight Checklist Instrumentation System Preflight Checklist Radar System Preflight Checklist Vehicle Turnaround Preflight Checklist Avionic System Turnaround Preflight Checklist Vehicle Postflight Checklist
Pilot Flight Checklist Flight Controller Checklist Mission Plan Data Reduction Plan
1-2
Report No. 7260-954002
SECTION I
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-2.
The Lunar Landing Training Vehicle ( h e r e a f t e r r e f e r r e d t o a s e i t h e r
t h e LLTV o r v e h i c l e ) , f i g u r e 1-1, has been designed and manufactured by B e l l Aerosystems Company, Model 7260, under Contract N S 9-6657 f o r t h e A National Aeronautcs and Space Administration. The vehicle c a p a b i l i t i e s provide p o t e n t i a l moon landing a s t r o n a u t s a simulated l u n a r g r a v i t y and atmospheric environment and a l s o t r a i n s t h e a s t r o n a u t s t o cope and r e a c t t o t h e o p e r a t i o n a l problems involved i n t h e f i n a l phases of a l u n a r landing and t h e i n i t i a l phases of a l u n a r t a k e o f f . Areas of t r a i n i n g , The LLTV operusing t h e LLTV, include t h e c o n t r o l s , d i s p l a y s , v i s i b i l i t y , o r i e n t a t i o n systems, propulsion, and dynamics i n f l i g h t and landing. a t e s i n f r e e f l i g h t t o simulate t h e l u n a r g r a v i t y and atmospheric environment by compensating f o r aerodynamic drag f o r c e s and moments and excessive ( e a r t h ) g r a v i t a t i o n a l forces. 1-3. 1 . SCOPE O M N A F AUL This s e r v i c e and maintenance manual has been prepared f o r use by
s k i l l e d , t r a i n e d personnel, a s an a i d i n s e r v i c i n g and maintaining t h e LLTV.
It contains a l l necessary information and i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t r a n s -
p o r t i n g , e r e c t i n g , f l i g h t l i n e s e r v i c i n g and maintenance. 1-5. 1-6. PUBLICATIONS Table 1-1 l i s t s t h e publications t o be used i n conjunction with
t h i s manual t h a t a r e applicable t o t h e operation, servicing, and maintenance of t h e LLTV. Report No. 7260-954002
T B E 1-1 AL
DOCUMENT NO.
APPLICABLE D C M N S OU ET
DOCUMENT TITLE
Bell Aerossstems Company
Handbooks and Manuals 7260-954001 7260-954003 7260-954004 L T Flight Manual LV
LLTV Weight and Balance Handbook LLTV Avionic Test Cart Operational Manual
Ground Run Checklists 7260-931 001 7260-931 003 7260-931 004 Rocket Operational Ramp Checklist P i l o t A S Familiarization on CG Fixture C J e t Engine Run Ramp Checklist
Flight Checkout Inspection and Servicing Checklists 7260-931 005 7260-931 006
,
Vehicle Preflight Checklist Avionic System Preflight Checklist Instrumentation System Preflight Checklist Radar System Preflight Checklist Vehicle Turnaround Preflight Checklist Avionic System Turnaround Preflight Checklist Vehicle Postflight Checklist
7260-931 007 7260-931 009 7260-931 01 2 7260-931 016 7260-931 010 Flight Checklists 7260-931 008 7260-931 01 1 7260-931 014 7260-931 01 5
P i l o t Flight Checklist Flight Controller Checklist Mission Plan Data Reduction Plan
1-2
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE 1-1.
APPLICABLE D C M N S (Continued) OU ET
I DOCUMENT NO.
G.E. SEI-157 G.E. SEI-158 G.E. SEI-133
DOCTJMENT TITLE
General E l e c t r i c Company CF 700-2C Turbofan Engine Operating I n s t r u c t i o n s CF 700-2C Turbofan Engine Maintenance Manual CF 700-2C Turbofan Engine Operation, Maintenance and Overhaul Manual Scott Aviation Company 3 5-30-78 QCP 20-5 S c o t t Overhaul Manual Control of High Pressure Type Cylinders Airline Oxygen Equipment Catalog. Weber A i r c r a f t Company Operation; Periodic Inspection and Maintenance; and Overhaul I n s t r u c t i o n s f o r LLRV/LLTV P i l o t Ejection Seat and Fixed R a i l Assembly and Packing and Inspection Procedure f o r LLRV/LLTV P i l o t Personnel Parachute Assemblies Ryan Aeronautical Company Ryan 54764-1 ban 54764-2 Ryan 54764-3 Ryan Support Manual f o r Model 547 Doppler Velocity Sensor Handbook Operation I n s t r u c t i o n s F l i g h t Data System f o r LLTV Support Manual f o r Model 547 Thrust-To-Weight Indicator Support Manual f o r Model 602 Radar Altimeter Cubic Corporation Operation and Maintenance Manual f o r M ~ d e lTR-31 -- U F Transceiver H
I
Weber Seat Manual Manual DR 5773-1
60264-1
Report No. 7260-954002
1-3
DESCRIPTION
1-8.
The LLTV i s a v e r t i c a l l y r i s i n g f r e e - f l i g h t l u n a r landing t r a i n i n g
v e h i c l e t h a t s i m u l a t e s l u n a r g r a v i t y and l u n a r atmospheric environment. The LLTV o p e r a t e s i n f r e e f l i g h t on e a r t h with compensation f o r aerodynamic d r a g and movement, and e a r t h g r a v i t a t i o n a l f o r c e s . - 9 The LLTV i s manned by a crew of one and p r o p e l l e d by a j e t engine
and a r o c k e t p r o p u l s i o n system. 1-10. During a l u n a r l a n d i n g s i m u l a t i o n , t h e jet engine remains essenThe remaining oneThe a t t i t u d e s
t i a l l y v e r t i c a l r e g a r d l e s s of t h e a t t i t u d e of t h e v e h i c l e , and t h e j e t t h r u s t s u p p o r t s f i v e - s i x t h s of t h e v e h i c l e ' s weipht. s i x t h of t h e weight i s supported by hydrogen-peroxide l i f t r o c k e t s t h a t a r e mounted on t h e main frame and tilt with t h e v e h i c l e . moon where g r a v i t y i s one-sixth t h a t on e a r t h . d e s c e n t by means of two l i f t r o c k e t s . a t t i t u d e control. VEHICLE STRUCTURF: 1-12. The primary a i r f r a m e s t r u c t u r e c o n s i s t s of a pyramid-shaped t u b l a r The c o c k p i t s e c t i o n extends forward and a c c e l e r a t i o n s a r e s i m i l a r t o t h o s e t h a t w i l l be experienced on t h e The p i l o t c o n t r o l s t h e S i x t e e n a t t i t u d e r o c k e t s provide
s t r u c t u r e with four truss-type legs. extends rearward. of t h e v e h i c l e . f i g u r e 4-1.
between t h e two f r o n t l e g s and t h e equipment platform, s i m i l a r l y p o s i t i o n e d , The j e t engine i s mounted in a gimbal r i n g a t t h e c e n t e r The g e n e r a l arrangement and c o n f i g u r a t i o n i s shown i n
1-13.
MAJOR STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS
The major s t r u c t u r a l components of t h e
v e h i c l e a r e : c e n t e r body, engine mounted, gimbal r i n g , peroxide t a n k s , f u e l
Report No. 7260-954002
( J P ~ )t a n k s , c o c k p i t s t r u c t u r e , equipment s t r u c t u r e , and l e g i n s t a l l a t i o n 1
shock s t r u t s . These componentsare b r i e f l y d e s c r i b e d i n t h e f o l l o w i n g paragraphs.
1-14.
CENTER BODY
The c e n t e r body s t r u c t u r e c o n s i s t s of an upper and a Refer t,o s e c t i o n I V and Draw-
lower frame connected by d i a g o n a l t u b e s .
i n g No. 7260-152001 f o r more d e t a i l e d information.
1-15.
ENGINE MOUNT
The engine mount i s a b u i l t - u p s h e e t metal r i n g ,
t h e i n n e r s u r f a c e of which i s contoured t o form t h e o u t e r w a l l of t h e engine f a n i n l e t . fitting. The engine i s a t t a c h e d t c i t l - ~ e mount a t t h e two p o i n t s of t h e lower s u r f a c e and by a s t e a d y r e s t a t t h e t o p of t h e forward Refer t o s e c t i o n I V and Drawing No. 7161-421032 f o r more d e t a i l e d information.
1-16.
GIMBAL R I N G
The gimbal r i n g i s a machined aluminum r i n g t h a t The
s u p p o r t s t h e engine mount t h a t i s supported by t h e c e n t e r body. maintenance o p e r a t i o n s .
gimbal r i n g i s capable of s u p p o r t i n g two ground crewmen d u r i n g ground Refer t o s e c t i o n I V and Drawing No. 7260421001 f o r more d e t a i l e d information. 1-17, H D O E PEROXIDE TANKS Y R GN
Two hydrogen peroxide t a n k s a r e mounted Refer t o s e c t i c n VI and Drawing No. I
on t h e v e h i c l e , one on each s i d e .
7260-471001 f o r more d e t a i l e d information.
1-18.
FUEL (JP4) TANKS
Two JP4 t a n k s a r e mounted on t h e v e h i c l e and one i n Refer t o
a r e spaced symmetrically about t h e v e h i c l e c e n t e r of g r a v i t y : f r o n t of t h e engine and t h e o t h e r d i r e c t l y behind t h e engine.
s e c t i o n VI: and Drawing No. 7260-424017 f o r more d e t a i l e d information.
Report No. 7260-9'54002
1-19.
COCKPIT STRUCTURE
- The
cockpit s t r u c t u r e c o n s i s t s of a sheet metal Refer t o
platform, e j e c t i m s e a t support, and a cockpit enclosure.
V s e c t i o n I and Drawing No. 7260-150008 f o r more d e t a i l e d information.

1-20.
EQUIPMENT STRUCTURE
The equipment s t r u c t u r e c o n s i s t s of a movable Refer t o s e c t i o n IV and Drawing No.
t r a y , ard an a d j u s t a b l e platform.
7260-153001 f o r more d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i ~ n . 1-21.
L G INSTALLATION/SHOCK STRUTS E
- Four i d e n t i c a l interchangeable l e g s
a r e mounted on t h e vehicle.
A conventional a i r - o i l shock strut i s mounted
a t t h e end of each l e g t r u s s t o absorb t h e landing impact. Refer t o s e c t i o n
IV and Drawing No. 7260-155001 f o r more d e t a i l e d information,

1-22. 1-23.
WEIGHT A D B L N E N AA C WEIGHT
- The vehicle
s t r u c t u r e and equipment weight i s approxi-
mately 4000 pounds.

1 1 7 !
%
This weight v a r i e s due t o d i f f e r e n t types of.engines
and payloads, and does not include t h e p i l o t and personal gear. Refer t o I' LLTV ~ e i & a d ~ s ~ s kXanutal i o . &60-95&003 f o r a d d i t i o n a l information. ce
CREW CAPACITY The vehicle i s designed t o carry one p i l o t whose weight, including 15 pounds of personal equipment, i s no l e s s than 115
1-24.
pounds 617 more than 215 pounds.

1-25.
BLNE AA C
- For balance information,

-
r e f e r t o Weight and Balance Hand-
book, Report No. 7260-954003. Figure 1-2 i s a two-view sketch of t h e LLTV.

1-26.
B L N E ADJUSTMENT AA C
The U T V center of gravity can be changed by
simple adjustments of t h e a f t platform and equipment. S u f f i c i e n t adjustment
i s provided t o permit compensation f o r t h e maximum difference of 60 pounds

i n p i l o t weights.
Report No. 7260-954.002
Report No. 7260-954002
1-27.
The weight and adjustment of t h e a f t platform permits c e n t e r of The c e n t e r of g r a v i t y of t h e vehicle i s measurable t o
g r a v i t y adjustments with increments of 0.1 inch o r l e s s a t t h e f u l l y serviced weight. within 0.1 inch i n a l l t h r e e axes. 1-28. Additional minor adjustments t o vehicle C.G. a r e made by variance
of weights i n l e g cans s e a t b a l l a s t system. 1-29.
(which can be mounted on any combination of
l e g s , a s r e q u i r e d ) , o r by adding o r removing b a l l a s t p l a t e s t o t h e under-
JET ENGINE CENTER OF GRAVJTY
The c e n t e r of g r a v i t y of t h e
C 700 2CV j e t engine i s a s follows: F
A.
The engine l o n g i t u d i n a l center of g r a v i t y i s inlet.
7.5 2 0.5 inches
from t h e main engine mounts c e n t e r l i n e and toward t h e engine
B The l a t e r a l c e n t e r of g r a v i t y i s located a t Engine Buttock .

Line 100.3
0.1 (vehicle body s t a t i o n 199.7
- 0, I ) +
and Engine For
Waterline 99.0 No. 6010~65.
0.1 (vehicle buttock l i n e 199.0
2 0.1).
f u r t h e r information, r e f e r t o General E l e c t r i c Company Drawing
1- 30
JET ENGINE SYSTEM The J e t Engine system provides t h r u s t requirements f o r takeoff and
1-31.
f l i g h t , or t o simulate l u n a r g r a v i t y by providing t h r u s t c a p a b i l i t y t o counteract f i v e - s i x t h s of t h e e a r t h ' s g r a v i t a t i o n a l a t t r a c t i o n during t h e Lunar Simulation mode. The system include9 a Turbojet Engine, Fuel, Refer t o system, Gimbal Hydraulic system, and a Power Control system. s e c t i o n V I f o r d e t a i l e d information.
Report No. 7260-954002
1-32.
JET ENGINE
The j e t engine i s a General E l e c t r i c CF 700-2CV a f t
f a n t u r b o j e t having a n SFC of 0.70 o r l e s s , throughout t h e s p e c i f i e d f l i g h t regimes. T h i s engine provides a s t a t i c s e a l e v e l t h r u s t of a t (Refer t o General l e a s t 4200 pounds a t temperatures up t o 82 degrees F. E l e c t r i c Manual SEI-157 f o r d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n . )
1-33.
ENGINE INSTALLATION
The engine i s mounted i n a p o s i t i o n on
g i m b a l l i n g mounts, t h a t permit - 4.0 degrees p i t c h and + r e l a t i v e t o t h e v e r t i c a l p o s i t i o n of t h e v e h i c l e . f o r more d e t a i l e d information. )
25 d e g r e e s r o l l
(Refer t o s e c t i o n V I
1-34.
ENGINE INSTRUMENTS
Instruments f o r c o c k p i t and ground i n f l i g h t
monitoring o f engine performance a r e : o i l p r e s s u r e gage, low o i l p r e s s u r e warning i n d i c a t o r , exhaust gas temperature gage, f a n R M gage P (ground only) and gas g e n e r a t o r p e r c e n t R M gage. P (Refer t o s e c t i o n
V I I I f o r d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n on a l l i n s t r u m e n t a t i o n . )
1-35.
JET FUEL SYSTEY
The J e t F u e l system ( f i g u r e 1-3) c o n s i s t s of
f u e l storage tanks, tank pressurization provision, f u e l l e v e l switches and c a l i b r a t e d f u e l l e v e l probes, p r e s s u r e balancing f u e l flow proport i o n e r , f u e l l e v e l warning i n d i c a t o r s and t a n k p r e s s u r e gages (coc.kpit mounted), check v a l v e s , f i l t e r s , and quick-disconnect f i l l and d r a i n plugs. ( R e f e r t o s e c t i o n VI f o r d e t a i l e d maintenance i n s t r u c t i o n s . )
1-36.
JET ENGINE THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM
A combination h y d r a u l i c and
e l e c t r i c a l manual t h r o t t l e ( f i g u r e 1-4) provides t h e p i l o t w i t h a primary and backup c o n t r o l of t h e j e t engine main f u e l c o n t r o l , r e s p e c t i v e l y . (Refer t o s e c t i o n IV f o r d e t a i l e d maintenance i n s t r u c t i o n s . ) during l u n a r simulation. A auton m a t i c E l e c t r o n i c T h r o t t l e Control subsystem c o n t r o l s t h e j e t t h r u s t The p i l o t can manually o v e r r i d e o r disengage (Refer t o s e c t i o n V f o r d e t a i l e d t h e automatic t h r o t t l e a t any time.
maintenance i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t h e automatic t h r o t t l e c o n t r o l . ) Report No. 7260-954002
1-9
FUEL S Y S T E M
3P-4 CAUTION AMBER LIGHT Prmr AND VAN 117 Les/ TANK REM 6 MlNS REM JP-4 LOW RED LIGHT PICOT AND VAN 46.8 LBS/ TANK REM 2 MIN REM
SCHRADER VALVE
PILOT AND
FUEL CONTRO
USE ONLY
AV IN FLIGHT
TANK PRESS. 2 0 PSI 210

MlCRON FILTEA
ALL FUEL VALUES AT 6.5 LBS/GAL.
NUAL SHUTOFF VALVE WIRED OPEN FOR FLIGHT
CHECK VALVE
NOTE : BOTH TANKS HAVE QUANTITY SENSORS AND PROBE
Figure 1-3 Jet Fuel System
? 2 Y
ct
THROTTLE SYSTEM
ru
0 \
V)
u l
0 0
I U
5.
% I
cD
CAM OPERATED HIGH LIMIT MICROSWITCH JET HOLD LIGHT, IN VAN ONLY
c3
0 rt rt
3 ' Y
cD
CI
3 rt 2
c11
CAM OPERATED LOW THRUST MANUAL LIMIT SWITCH RED LIGHT, PILOT AND VAN DISENGAGES CLUTCH
1-37. AUTOMATIC ELECTRONIC THROTTLE The automatic j e t t h r o t t l e i s used during t h e l u n a r simulation. The p i l o t arms t h e automatic t h r o t t l e with t h e Lunar Simulation A r m switch on t h e l e f t console. By increasing l i f t rocket t h r u s t m t i l t h e chamber pressure i s g r e a t e r than 100 p s i a , t h e system then engages t h e auto t h r o t t l e and commands t h e j e t t h r u s t t o five-sixths of t h e vehicle weight. 1-38. OVERRIDE AND DISENGAGE CAPABILITY
The auto t h r o t t l e system i s
provided with a c l u t c h which permits t h e p i l o t (25 t o 30 pounds force) t o override t h e automatic system with t h e hydraulic t h r o t t l e control without disengaging t h e automatic system. permit hydraulic t h r o t t l e control. A a d d i t i o n a l pushbutton switch on t h e n Actuation of t h e pushbutton or d e a c t i w i l l disengage t h e auto t h r o t t l e . t h r o t t l e a l s o permits disengagement of t h e auto t h r o t t l e a t any time t o vation of t h e Lunar Simulation A r m switch
1-39.
AUTO THROTTLE LIMIT SWITCHES
- Three auto t h r o t t l e microswitches
disengage o r l i m i t t h e motion of t h e auto t h r o t t l e actuator s o t h a t t h e t h r o t t l e w i l l not exceed t h e required range of engine operation f o r t h e Lunar Simulation mode.
1-44).
(Refer t o section X I f o r d e t a i l e d description.)
THROTTLE INSTRUMENTATION
- A potentiometer
- An
i s i n s t a l l e d on t h e Jet
t h r o t t l e f o r ground monitoring and recording of t h r o t t l e position.

1 -
YAW C N R L INSTALLATION OTO
a i r j e t u t i l i z i n g j e t engine com-
pressor bleed a i r i s used t o counteract j e t engine exhaust gas swirl induced moments on t h e vehicle. The system i s sized t o reduce yaw moments from amount80ft-lb t o l e s s than 20 f t - l b . 1-42. JET ENGINE GIMBAL HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
- The hydraulic
system supplies
power t o two electro-hydraulic servo-actuators f o r p i t c h and r o l l a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l of t h e j e t engine during t h e Gimbal Lock, Local Vertical, Engine
1-12
Report No. 7260-954002
Centered, and J e t S t a b i l i z a t i . c n modes of operation.
Emergency h y d r a u l i c
accumulator i s used f o r c e n t e r i n g t h e engine i n t h e emergency Gimbal Lock mode i n t h e event of main system h y d r a u l i c p r e s s u r e l o s s , o r i n c a s e t h e normal Gimbal Lock switch f a i l s t o f u n c t i o n . d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n on t h e h y d r a u l i c system.) ( ~ e f e r o section V f o r t
1-43.
ROCKET PROPULSION SYSTEM
1-44. The t h r e e major subsystems a r e : ( I ) . A p r o p e l l a n t p r e s s u r i z a t i o n

( f i g u r e 1-3) subsystem containing h i g h 'pressure helium which i s r e g u l a t e d down t o p r e s s u r i z e p r o p e l l a n t t a n k s , ( 2 ) a p r o p e l l a n t s t o r a g e subsystem ( f i g u r e 1-5) c o n s i s t i n g of two hydrogen peroxide tanks w i t h a s s o c i a t e d plumbing and v a l v e s , and (3) a p r o p e l l a n t u t i l i z a t i o n subsystem ( f i g u r e s 1-6 and 1-7) c o n s i s t i n g of two v a r i a b l e t h r u s t l i f t r o c k e t s and 16 pulse-type f i x e d (ground ad j u s t a b l e ) t h r u s t a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l r o c k e t s . (Refer t o s e c t i o n V I I f o r d e t a i l e d information.)
1-45.
PRESSURE SYSTEM INSTRUMENTATION
P r e s s u r i z a t i o n s e n s o r s f o r both
cockpit and ground monitoring d u r i n g f l i g h t include:
A.
B.
C.
P r e s s u r e i n d i c a t o r s f o r both helium t a n k s . Helium Source Low Level Warning i n d i c a t o r t h a t i n d i c a t e s helium source p r e s s u r e below 1775 p s i g . P r e s s u r e i n d i c a t o r s f o r both H 0 p r o p e l l a n t t a n k s .
2 2
1-46.
PROPELLANT STORAGE SUBSYSTEM
The P r o p e l l a n t S t o r a g e system con-
t a i n s two hydrogen peroxide t a n k s , l i q u i d l e v e l probes, temperature probes, f i l l , and vent valves. Each p r o p e l l a n t tank has a nominal T o t a l minic a p a c i t y of 392 pounds of p r o p e l l a n t i n a d d i t i o n t o u l l a g e .
mm c a p a c i t y of t h e two t a n k s without u l l a g e i s approximately 784 pounds. u
A s l o s h and a n t i - v o r t e x b a f f l e minimizes s l o s h i n g t o p r e v e n t gas from

e n t e r i n g t h e L i f t and A t t i t u d e Rocket systems. i n each t a n k a s s u r e s a p r o p e l l a n t r e s e r v e of Report No. 7260-954002
A l i f t rocket standpipe
35 pounds p e r t a n k f o r t h e
1-13
HELIUM STORAGE
EQUA LlZlNG
F z
Y *
4 I U
c n
V)
0 0
ALWAYS OPEN FOR FLlGUTs Figure 1 9 Helium And H 0 2 2
LIFT ROCKET SYSTEM

FOR ATTITUDE ROCKETS T"HANOLE Mum BE OOWN AT THIS POINT TO PREVENT LOSS OF ALL
SOURCE PRESSURE THRU STANDPIPE
35 LBS/TANK STANDPIPE RESERVES
CONTROLLED BY ROCKET PROPELLANT SWITCH
1 I
VALVE
CHECK VALVE
T;:,",:r
SIM PICKUP
14'
C
-LUNAR
/C
9W'Jt
PC
I
PILOT'S DUAL GAGE'
AND VAN DISPLAY
Figure 1-6 L i f t Rocket System
RELIEF FROM
ATT SYSTEM
ATTlTUDE ROCKET SYSTEM

CB.Z EMER BUS
TEST STANVARP BOTU 3WlTCUES
STANDARD SET THERMAL RELIEF

MOTOR OPER
CB-33 PRIM. BUS AFT RACK TESr ATT ITVPE ROCKETS Figme 1 7 .
STANPARD ATTIT UDE ROCKETS A t t i t u d e Rocket System
A t t i t u d e Control system.
A temperature probe permits monitoring of

The t a n k s a r e
hydrogen peroxide temperature during ground o p e r a t i o n s .
f i l l e d o r d r a i n e d through a valve a t t h e bottom of the tank.
A manual
Seal
v e n t valve i s l o c a t e d on l e g memberc-to permit ground s e r v i c i n g . flight.
redundancy i s provided by capping t h e v a l v e s with o r i f i c e caps d u r i n g The hydrogen peroxide f i l l i n g , v e n t i n g and purging v a l v e s a r e l o c a t e d a s remotely a s p o s s i b l e from systems using JP4 f u e l and o t h e r hydrocarbons. 1-47. PROPELLANT SYSTEM INSTRUMENTATION
Propellant storage sensors
( f i g u r e 1-8) f o r both p i l o t and ground monitoring during f l i g h t a r e :
A.
H 0 low l e v e l warnine probes i n both l e f t and r i g h t t a n k s 2 2 a c t i v a t e t h e corresponding H 0 Low i n d i c a t o r i n t h e cockpit 2 2 pounds when p r o p e l l a n t l e v e l i n e i t h e r t a n k i s down t o 85
1;
( s t a t i c level). B. A H202 Remaining d i g i t a l counter s e t p r i o r t o t a k e o f f n i n d i c a t e s t h e t o t a l H 0 remaining. It i s a c t i v a t e d by a 2 2 s i g n a l from t h e H 0 Remaining Computer. 2 2
1-48.
PROPELLANT UTILIZATION SUBSYSTEMS The two u t i l i z a t i o n subsystems a r e t h e l i f t r o c k e t s and t h e
1-49.
valving 1-50.
a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l r o c k e t s with t h e i r r e s p e c t i v e p r o p e l l a n t l i n e s and
ATTITUDE CONTROL ROCKETS
Two s e t s of e i p h t a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l Two motor-operated
r o c k e t s w i t h s e p a r a t e f u e l l i n e s provide redundancy.
i s o l a t i o n v a l v e s permit t h e p i l o t t o s e l e c t t h e Standard, T e s t , o r Both s e t s of a t t i t u d e r o c k e t s f o r f l i g h t o p e r a t i o n o r t o i s o l a t e one s e t of a t t i t u d e r o c k e t s i n t h e event of f a i l u r e of e i t h e r system and e f f e c t a s a f e landing. The valves a r e c o n t r o l l e d by manual o p e r a t i o n of t h e s e l e c t o r switch i n t h e c o c k p i t . Each 1-17 A t t i t u d e Rockets Test-Standard-Both Report No. 7260-954002
)-bO=, TANK
540+20PSl I
I
He SOURCE
RELIEF VALVE
b
22 LBS IN LINES
" I l l TANK PRESS.

BOTH T A N S HAVE IDENTICAL EQUIPMENT
XDCR
PILOT & V A N
VENT VALVE
85 LSS R E M
A T LOW LI HT 85 LBS R L L Q T 35 LESS E ~ T A N K STANWIPE R AT

I
I
N
I I
I
)
LOW LEVEL SENSOR
NOMINAL
LIFT UKT FEED

I
b
TEMP PROBE GROUND USE FILL4 DRAIN
11 FT-7Lf
A m RUT F E E D
70 LBS
MAY
T C 0 NDITIO N TIME REMAINING LOW LIGHT 1 0 LBS TIME REMAINING A STANDPIPE 7 OWESET A T T I T U M i.5 MINUTES 4 MINUTES RUTS
rU
V)
u l
T W O SETS MAY LIMIT C Y C L E ATTITUDE RUTS 1.5 MINUTES ONE SET I 3 SECONDS ATTITUDE RUTS TO STANDPIPE AND LIFTRKTS
Figure 1-8. H
0
LIMIT C Y C L E 30 SECONDS 'T'HAUDLE BE DOWN TO MU T PREVENT LOS O F ALL SOURCE PRESSURE T H RU STANDPIPE
g
Tank
r o c k e t chamber h a s an a s s o c i a t e d s o l e n o i d valve t o c o n t r o l t h e flow of p r o p e l l a n t and a v a r i a b l e o r i f i c e hand valve t o provide ground a d j u s t ment of t h e r o c k e t t h r u s t between 30 and 90 pounds. Control Rocket system.
A Guarded A t t i t u d e
Control System switch marked ACS-SAFE i n h i b i t s o r arms t h e A t t i t u d e
1-51.
LIFT ROCKETS
- Two l i f t
r o c k e t s provide a v a r i a b l e l i f t t h r u s t
nominally e q u a l t o one-sixth of t h e v e h i c l e weight when t h e remaining f i v e - s i x t h s of t h e weight i s supported by t h e J e t Engine system (simulated l u n a r g r a v i t y ) .
A "T" handle i s provided i n t h e c o c k p i t f o r
c o n t r o l of l i f t r o c k e t t h r u s t during l u n a r simulation o p e r a t i o n . (Refer t o s e c t i o n V I I f o r d e t a i l e d information.) 1-52. ROCKET INSTRUMENTATION
P r e s s u r e t r a n s d u c e r s monitor a l l 16 (1) t h e s t u c k valve mal-
a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l r o c k e t chamber p r e s s u r e s f o r :
f u n c t i o n d e t e c t i o n c i r c i u t ( a c t i v a t e s valve s t u c k warning i n d i c a t o r i n c o c k p i t and i s monitored i n t e l e m e t r y van), and ( 2 ) f o r i n f l i g h t ground monitoring. Two p r e s s u r e t r a n s d u c e r s monitor both l i f t r o c k e t chamber
A t h i r d transducer
p r e s s u r e s f o r c o c k p i t d i s p l a y and ground monitoring.
s u p p l i e s s i g n a l s f o r t h e T/W computer, and t h e H202 Remaining computer, and f o r a c t i v a t i n g t h e automatic j e t t h r o t t l e f o r l u n a r s i m u l a t i o n . ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1-54.
The Vehicle E l e c t r i c a l system ( f i g u r e 1-9) s u p p l i e s both d i r e c t
and a l t e r n a t i n g c u r r e n t , and c o n s i s t s of a Primary system f o r normal operation and an Emergency system i n t h e event of a primary subsystem failure. ( ~ e f e r o s e c t i o n I X f o r d e t a i l e d information.) t
1-55.
PRIMARY SUBSYSTEMS
The source of d i r e c t c u r r e n t f o r t h e Primary
system ( f i g u r e 1-10) i s a 28-volt DC g e n e r a t o r t h a t i s mechanically d r i v e n by t h e j e t engine. Report No. 7260-954002 A l t e r n a t i n g c u r r e n t i s s u p p l i e d by a main
1- 19
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM

I
CUT
j1
4
D C VOLT , REGULATOR
EMER6ENCY 400 HZ
INVERTER
O C EXT PWR RELAY
, DC
P I A Y RM R 0lJS
,
EMERSENGV 0 C BUS
EXT P W R
1 5V 400 HZ 1 E%T PWR
BATTERY RELAY
BCSlTERY
sw
Figure
1-9 Electrical System Diagram
DC
BATT
AC
CB
6
LlGWTS
PRIMARY DC BUS
666
I9
OFF
OFF
AC OVERUNOER BOARDS DETENT SWITCHES, ACS MONITOR ELECTROW ICS DC OVERUNDER BOARDS-AC- DC FAILURE
OFF
2
3
20 EMERGENCY THROTTLE-DRAG GOMPENSATlON SYSTEM 28 3 AXlS BALL IND-INST LIGHTS 40 ATTITUDE RKT SY3 VAWES, TEST STANDARD, B M H
EMER PC BUS (ESSENTIAL)
4
8 28
35
COMMUNICATIONS He XOVER VALVE, LIFT RKT TANK ISOL VALVES ATTITUDE RKT SYS VALVES, TEST STANDARD, BOTH DC VOLTMETER, ANN PANEL, ClzO, LEVEL INDICATOR AC POWER SWITCH, MASTER WARNING BOX 800 k INVERT, ATT GYRO, NORMAL GIMBAL LOCK C I R C U l r 20 V MODULE FOR FLIGHT INST LIFT ROCKET THROTTLE EMERGENCY GIMBALS LOCKED CIRCUIT
6
PRIMARY AC BUS
.bO
FOR CfiRCOlT BREAKERS ON P ~ L PANEL ONLY ~ S
JET ENGINE EGT XDUCER H,O, REMAINING INDICATOR A C RADAR INST LIGHTS, ANEMOMETER P S 3 AXlS BALL (FUSED)
Figure 1-10 Electrical System Switch Functions
i n v e r t e r which converts t h e generator's output t o three-phase, 400 cps. operation and checkout c a p a b i l i t y . 1-56. E E G N Y SYSTEM MR E C
115 + 2.5 v o l t s , AC,
External DC and AC power r e c e p t a c l e s provide ground
The Emergency system power source i s a 24-cell

A b a t t e r y switch, located o n , t h e
n i c k e l cadmium b a t t e r y t h a t i s continually t r i c k l e charged by t h e primary

AC system during normal operation.
P i l o t ' s Console, arms.-the b a t t e r y r e l a y t o provide DC power from t h e b a t t e r y t o t h e emergency DC bus. This switch is. actuated by t h e p i l o t before t a k e o f f t o ensure t h a t emergency power from t h e b a t t e r y w i l l be a v a i l a b l e without p i l o t a c t i o n during f l i g h t .
1-57.
DATA SYSTEM EXTERNAL POWER
-A
r e c e p t a c l e i s provided under t h e a f t
s e c t i o n of t h e vehicle t o permit t h e operation of t h e d a t a system with e x t e r n a l power when t h e v e h i c l e e l e c t r i c a l system i s on emergency power. The necessary r e l a y switching i s accomplished automatically when a powered plug i s placed i n t o t h e receptacle.
1-58.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Overload p r o t e c t i o n i s provided by c i r c u i t
breakers. ities.
Those breakers which contribute t o f l i g h t s a f e t y a r e located i n
t h e cockpit within reach of t h e p i l o t and a r e provided with r e s e t capabilOther c i r c u i t breakers a r e located a t t h e a f t equipment s h e l f , and j e t engine. 1-59. ELECTRICAL INSTRUMENTATION
Voltmeters i n t h e cockpit i n d i c a t e
primary AC and DC voltages.
The DC voltmeter monitors t h e emergency DC
bus, and, when t h e generator i s off , a l s o monitors b a t t e r y voltage (backup).

AC and DC warning i n d i c a t o r s f o r cockpit and ground monitoring i n d i c a t e
primary e l e c t r i c a l f a i l u r e s , phase A and phase C.
The AC warning i n d i c a t o r monitors both
Report No. 7260-954002
1-60.
1-61.
ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS The major Electronic systems a r e t h e Vehicle Attitude Control
system, J e t Engine Attitude Control system, and Lunar Simulation system t h a t includes t h e j e t engine s t a b i l i z a t i o n control, thrust/weight computer, and automatic j e t t h r o t t l e control. 1-62. VEHICLE ATTITUDE C N R L SYSTEM (ACS) - The Vehicle A t t i t u d e OTO
Control system provides t h e i n t e l l i g e n c e t o f i r e 16 a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l rockets t o produce control moments i n response t o p i l o t commands and/or vehicle motions. The A S system c c n s i s t s of a Primary Control system, C Backup Control system, and Monitor systems f o r detection of f a i l u r e s and f o r automatically switching t h e Control system t o a s a f e mode of operation. 1-63. ( ~ e f e r o section X I f o r d e t a i l e d maintenance i n s t r u c t i o n s . ) t PRIMARY ATTITUDE C N R L SYSTEM OTO
- The Primary Attitude
Control
subsystem ( f i g u r e 1-11) i s normally used f o r t h e e n t i r e mission (including l u n a r simulation phase). The Primary Attitude Control system includes primary Rate Command with a t t i t u d e hold, Primary Direct, with a t t i t u d e hold i n r o l l and p i t c h , no a t t i t u d e hold i n yaw, moment compensation, and t h e a t t i t u d e rocket logic. 1-64. OD PRIMARY RATE COMMAND WITH ATTITUDE H L
I n t h i s mode, a vehicle
angular r a t e i s commanded proportional t o s t i c k d e f l e c t i o n when t h e s t i c k d e f l e c t i o n exceeds t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r deadband of approximately
+ - 1.5 degrees.
Attitude hold i s engaged whenever t h e s t i c k i s i n t h e When
d e t e n t p o s i t i o n , and t h e vehicle r a t e i s l e s s than t h e r a t e switching value (adjustable from I t o 3O/sec, presently s e t a t 3O/sec). operating i n a t t i t u d e hold, t h e vehicle a t t i t u d e i s maintained with an average d r i f t l e s s than $O/min i n p i t c h and r o l l and 6O/min i n yaw. Refer
11 t o t a b l e 1 - . There i s no option given t h e p i l o t f o r engaging o r
Report No. 7260-954002
1-23
ATTITUDE CONTROL SYSTEM

STUCK VALVE IND
THRESHOLD
RKT PRESS
*
IND
I -
TRANSDUCER POTS
STUCK VALVE SWITCH TO DETECTOR BOTH SETS
PITCH ROLL
BACK UP
BACK UP ELECTRONICS MAM ELECTRONICS
. I -
AND RKT +
HC IN DETENT
disengaging t h e a t t i t u d e hold f e a t u r e i n primary r a t e command. above conditions a r e met, t h e a t t i t u d e hold f e a t u r e i s s e l e c t e d automatically. 1-65. P I A Y DIRECT COMMAND WITH ATTITUDE H L RM R OD
When t h e
When t h i s mode i s in
s e l e c t e d , and t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r d e f l e c t i o n exceeds approximately any d i r e c t i o n , t h e vehicle i s commanded a t a r a t e of 1 0 . 5 ~ / s e c . The a t t i t u d e hold f e a t u r e i s present i n t h e r o l l and p i t c h a x i s . There i s no a t t i t u d e hold present i n t h e yaw channel. 1-66.
MOMENT COMPENSATION
This i s
i d e n t i c a l t o t h e a t t i t u d e hold f e a t u r e described i n paragraph 1-64.
The moment compensation l i m i t s t h e maximum
average p i l o t commanded a c c e l e r a t i o n c a p a b i l i t y of t h e vehicle t o a fixed 2 value p r e s e n t l y s e t a t 8O/sec i n each a x i s . This maximum average accele r a t i o n c a p a b i l i t y i s independent of t h r u s t e r s e t t i n g s o r t h e number of thrusters firing. i.e., Accelerations which a r e n o t commanded by t h e p i l o t , those which a r e i n response t o r a t e and a t t i t u d e gyro feedback,
a r e n o t l i m i t e d by t h e model and w i l l be l i m i t e d only by t h e t h r u s t e r c a p a b i l i t y . The model a c c e l e r a t i o n s a r e ground adjustable. When t h e system i s operating i n t h e Direct mode, t h e p r e s e t angular a c c e l e r a t i o n i s commanded when t h e three-axis c o n t r o l l e r s t i c k i s deployed i n excess of of t h e n e u t r a l p o s i t i o n . After t h e c o n t r o l l e r i s returned t o within 29O, t h e c o n t r o l system maintains t h e v e l o c i t y developed. When t h e system
i s operating i n t h e Rate Command mode, an angular r a t e i s commanded prop o r t i o n a l t o hand c o n t r o l l e r r o t a t i o n . The angular a c c e l e r a t i o n command t o acquire t h e d e s i r e d r a t e i s p r e s e t i n t o t h e model. 1-67. The p i l o t does have t h e option of engaging or disengaging moment However, manual separate a x i s s e l e c t i o n i s n o t provided;
compensation.
a l l t h r e e axes a r e engaged o r disengaged together.
Report No. 7260-954.002
WARNING
Whenever f l y i n g with Moment Compensation

ON, t h e Test s e t of a t t i t u d e rockets
should be selected.
This i s because the
yaw moment arm i s g r e a t e r i n Test than i n Standard, thus allowing g r e a t e r accelerat i o n s t o be commanded with t h e fixed thrusters. 1-68. R C E THRUSTER LOGIC OKT
The a t t i t u d e rocket engines f i r e i n an
ON/OFF manner.
Two s e t s of 8 control rockets each ( ~ e s and standard) a r e t Normally those designated a s Test a r e used during The Standard s e t i s used i n an
provided (figure 1-12).
l u n a r simulation t r a i n i n g operations. Both s e t s . redundancy.
emergency through t h e Backup mode when control i s automatically switched t o E i t h e r one o r both s e t s may be selected t o f i r e t o provide ( ~ e f e t o paragraph 2-3-3-1, r Attitude Control Rockets, i n t h e For individual p i t c h , r o l l , o r For combined p i t c h This s e l e c t i o n
F l i g h t Handbook, Report No. 7260-954001.)
yaw commands, t h e system w i l l f i r e two rockets i f t h e Standard or Test s e t
i s s e l e c t e d , o r f o u r rockets i f Both s e t s a r e chosen.
and r o l l commands, however, only one rocket w i l l f i r e i f t h e Standard o r Test s e t i s s e l e c t e d , o r two rockets i f Both s e t s a r e chosen. prevents opposing rockets from f i r i n g a t t h e same time. i n another a x i s . 1-69. MONITOR SUBSYSTEM
i s automatically controlled by t h e opposing rocket i n h i b i t l o g i c , which

The system i s a l s o designed s o a l a r g e command i n one a x i s does not r e s u l t i n l o s s of c o n t r o l
- Nonitor
comparator, excess r a t e , and hand (~efero t
c o n t r o l l e r malfunction detection c i r c u i t s a r e used t o monitor operation of t h e Primary Rate and Primary Direct a t t i t u d e control modes. s e c t i o n X I f o r d e t a i l e d information. )
Report No. 7260-954002
(D
ATTITUDE CONTROL ROCKET FIRING LOGIC
'd
Y r+
z
m m
I U
(3\
0 I
V)
P 0 0
ul
I U
ROCKETS WITH SUBSCRIPT S DENOTE STANDARD ROCKETS FIRE ROCKETS WITH SUBSCRIPT 7" DENOTE TEST ROCKETS FIRE FOR DUAL-SYSTEM OPERATION, BOTH STANDARD AND TEST ROCKETS FIRE
Figure 1-12 A t t i t u d e Control-Rocket F i r i n g Logic
1-70.
PRIMARY RESET SWITCH
I n t h e event t h e monitor comparator sub-
system automatically switches t h e A S from Primary t o Backup a s a r e s u l t C

of spurious s i g n a l s emitted by e i t h e r t h e primary o r monitor channel, but i n f a c t t h e two systems a r e operating s a t i s f a c t o r i l y , t h e p i l o t i s a b l e with Moment Compensation switch OFF, t o manually switch t h e A S from C Backup t o Primary by momentarily actuating t h e Primary Reset Control switch on t h e l e f t console. Caution must be exercised i n t h e use of t h e During normal operation, (Refer t o section X I f o r Primary Reset switch, i n a s much a s t h e p i l o t cannot be completely s u r e t h a t t h e Primary system i s working properly. r e s e t w i l l be attempted on t h e ground only. d e t a i l e d information. )
1-72.
The J e t Engine Attitude Control system performs i n four s e l e c t e d GLmbal Locked, Local V e r t i c a l , Engine Centered, and
modes of operation:
J e t S t a b i l i z a t i o n mode (performs a s a portion of Lunar Simulation mode). For f l i g h t s a f e t y , one mode has p r i o r i t y over another.
1-73.
MODE PRIORITY
- For
f l i g h t s a f e t y , t h e modes have t h e following When t h e vehicle i s on t h e ground o r when t h e
priority.
The Gimbal Locked mode, whether p i l o t o r automatically s e l e c t e d ,
overrides a l l other modes. Lunar Simulation mode)
j e t engine d e f l e c t s more than
15 +, lo from t h e v e r t i c a l (including i n t h e
I f the jet
, the
Local Vertical mode s h a l l be automatically
a c t u a t e d and override a l l modes except t h e Gimbal Locked mode. engine d e f l e c t s more than 15
lo from l o c a l v e r t i c a l and Local V e r t i c a l I f no mode has been (Refer
mode i s n o t automatically selected within 0.35 t o 1.0 second, t h e system s h a l l automatically switch t o t h e Gimbal Locked mode. s e l e c t e d and t h e vehicle i s airborne, actuation of t h e Local V e r t i c a l Release switch s h a l l place t h e system i n t h e Engine Centered mode. t o s e c t i o n X I f o r d e t a i l e d information. )
Report No. 7260-954.002
1-74.
L C L VERTICAL M D OA OE
The Local V e r t i c a l mclclc: a l i g n s jet, engine The signal. from t h e . v e h i c l e a t t i t u d e gyros
w i t h t h e l o c a l v e r t i c a l a s senseti by t h e a t t i t m d e gyros, r e g a r d l e s s of v e h i c l e o u t e r frame motion. on t h e gimbal actuat.ors. switch on t h e console. i s compared w i t h t h e engine ginibal a n g l e s chtainetl from potent,ic~meters 'The r e s u l t i n g e r r o r s i p n a l i s used a s an i n p u t 'The p i l o t , may selcct, t h i s mode with a This mode i s a u t o m a t i c a l l y se?e c t e d when : command t o t h e gimbal a c t u a t o r s .
A.
The v e h i c l e i s crn f , f ~ grcr~m(ianti any one c b I;he f o u r l e g f micro-switches l o c a t e d or1 each of t h e f o u r shock s t r u t s i n d i c a t e s a compression of more than one-half i n c h ,
rJr
B. The j e t engine d e v i a t e s more than 15 + l o from t,he l o c a l

v e r t i c a l while i n t h e Engine Centered o r Lunar Simulation modes. To manually disengage t h i s mode, t h e p i l o t must momentarily a c t i v a t e t h e Local V e r t i c a l Release switch on t h e console, wtlich p l a c e s t h e j e t engine a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l i n t h e Engine Centered mc~dei f no o t h e r mode i s s e l e c t e d .
1-75.
JET STABILIZATION M D OE
This Jet A t t i t u d e Control mode performs
a s a p o r t i o n elf t,he Lunar Simulation system ( r e f e r t c ~ paragraph 1-76), and i s i n i t i a + e d when:
A. The Lunar Simulation switch i s p l a c e d . a t L N R SIM. UA B. L i f t r o c k e t s have been i n i t i a t e d and chamber p r e s s u r e has
exceed 100 p s i a ( p r e s s u r e t r a n s d u c e r measurement )
C.
Gimbal Lock switch i s OFF. Engine angle i s l e s s than 15
D.
lo frcjtn t h e l o c a l v e r t i c a l .
Deactivation of t h i s mode i s accomplished by a c t u a t i n g t h e Lunar Simulat i o n Arm switch t o OFF, or a c t u a t i n g t h e Lunar Simulation Release button on t h e j e t t h r o t t l e , o r by a c t u a t i n g t h e Gimbal Lock switch t o ON. E i t h e r of t h e f i r s t two d e a c t i v a t i o n methods p l a c e t h e jet, engine a t t i t u d e cont r o l i n t h e Local V e r t i c a l Mode.
1-76.
L N R SIMULATION SUBSYSTEM UA
Report No. 7260-954.002
1-77. The Lunar Simulation mode is comprised of: (I) Drag Compensation, and (2) ~hrust/~ei~ht cmtrol through the automatic jet engine throttle command of five-sixths of the vehicle weight. Drag compensation is accomplished through the jet stabilization. Lunar simulation is effected in two steps: A The Automatic Jet Engine Throttle system is activated with the . jet engine in Gimbal Lock mode; this resluts in jet engine thrust equal to five-sixths of vehicle.weight,without any
B.
drag compensation. Unlocking the Gimbal Hydraulic system by positioning Gimbal Lock switch in the hand controller to OFF, thus activating the drag compensation (jet stabilization) mechanism.
1-79. The Lunar Simulation system creates an artificial lunar gravity situation in which five-sixths of the vehicle weight is automatically supported by the jet engine and a pseudo lunar vacuum by automatically tilting and controlling the jet engine thrust to cancel aerodynamic drag on the vehicle. The system establishes a reference signal of 5/6 g which is resolved into vehicle coordinates using a vertical gyro and gimbal resolvers. To this signal, acceleration caused by lift rockets (computed based on rocket thrust and vehicle weight) are vectorially added. The resulting acceleration information is compared with the measured vehicle accelerations obtained from body-mounted accelerometers. The resultant errors are used as command signals to the automatic throttle and jet engine attitude control. 1-80. AUTOMATIC JET THROTTLE
- The automatic jet throttle continuously
controls jet engine thrust so that the local vertical component of force equals five-sixths of the instantaneous vehicle weight plus or minus the vertical drag force. The throttle control loop, which employs a linear acceleration feedback, is capable of adjusting the jet engine main fuel 1-30 Report No. 7260-954002
c o n t r o l angle a t t h e r a t e of 6 deg/sec.
The same automatic j e t t h r o t t l e
serves a s t h e emergency system f o r t h e primary hydraulic t h r o t t l e . When used a s t h e emergency t h r o t t l e , a synchro feedback i s used f o r j e t engine f u e l control. 1-81.
MANUAL OVERRIDE
The manual j e t t h r o t t l e i s hydraulically
coupled t o t h e main j e t engine f u e l c o n t r o l such t h a t t h e p i l o t can manilally override t h e automatic t h r o t t l e system through t h e range of 70 t o 100 percent RM without exceeding force l i m i t s a t t h e t h r o t t l e P gradient. 1-82. The override force i n lunar simulation i s 25 t o 30 pounds.
AUTOMATIC THROTTLE LIMIT SWITCHES
- Three microswitches
l i m i t the
motion of t h e automatic t h r o t t l e actuator such t h a t t h e angular d i s placement of t h e j e t t h r o t t l e w i l l not exceed t h e engine operating range during t h e Lunar Simulation mode. engine and a r e nominal s e t t i n g s ) : A. Maximum automatic t h r o t t l e s i g n a l cutoff 98.5% R M P . These switches a r e p r e s e t a s follows (degrees given r e f e r t o main f u e l control s h a f t p o s i t i o n on t h e j e t
- 75'
-
o r 96 t o
B. Low automatic t h r o t t l e s i g n a l cutoff

84% RPM.
45' o r 82 t o
40' o r 78 t o
C .
Low automatic t h r o t t l e clutch disengage 80% R M P .
The maximum and low cutoff switches l i m i t and motion of t h e automatic t h r o t t l e actuator. The l i m i t s a r e based on sea l e v e l a l t i t u d e and I n t h e event of an excesGeneral E l e c t r i c curves f o r CF700-2V engines.
s i v e command by t h e auto t h r o t t l e , t h e engine main f u e l c o n t r o l w i l l remain a t t h e limited position u n t i l t h e lunar simulation commands t h e t h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n within t h e l i m i t s s e t . The low clutch disengage When t h e low c l u t c h switch a c t s a s a backup t o t h e low cutoff switch.
disengage switch has been activated, t h e p i l o t must take over manual
Report No. 7260-954002
1-31
c o n t r o l of t h e j e t t h r o t t l e . or ~utomatic) 1-83.
This switch operates t h e low t h r u s t manual
warning i n d i c a t o r i n t h e cockpit on a l l t h r o t t l e modes ( ~ y d r a u l i c ,E l e c t r i c ,
LIFT R C E THRUST C N R L OKT OTO
-A
closed loop position system connects
t h e l i f t rocket c o n t r o l (T-handle) with t h e l i f t rocket t h r o t t l e valve. Thrust i s l i n e a r l y p r o p o r t i o n a l t o s t i c k d e f l e c t i o n .
1-84.
LUNAR SIMULATION INSTRUMENTATION
A cockpit and ground monitored

The
thrust-to-weight
i n d i c a t o r d i s p l a y s normal a c c e l e r a t i o n i n l u n a r g's.
t h r u s t / w e i g h t computer output s i g n a l s a r e a l s o telemetered f o r ground s t a t i o n monitoring. Cockpit and ground monitored s t a t u s i n d i c a t o r s i n d i c a t e when t h e automatic t h r o t t l e has been engaged (green l i g h t ) and when t h e a u t o t h r o t t l e has been disengaged by t h e Low Auto T h r o t t l e Clutch Disengage switch, low t h r u s t manual (red l i g h t ) . Additional telemetry data recorded by t h e ground s t a t i o n include j e t engine t h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n (potentiometer output) and low a u t o t h r o t t l e s i g n a l c u t o f f . BREATHING O Y E X GN 1-86. The p i l o t s h a l l b r e a t h oxygen a t a l l times when t h e j e t engine i s This oxygen i s provided i n The tank The oxygen tank
operating, t o avoid i n h a l a t i o n of exhaust gas.
a s i n g l e tank equipped with a shutoff valve, r e g u l a t o r , and gage.
i s l o c a t e d under t h e r i g h t hand s i d e of t h e cabin f l o o r .

1800 p s i , when f u l l y charged. flow.
ccntains 22 cubic f e e t of breathing oyygen pressurized t o approximately This amount of oxygen provides t h e p i l o t with breathing oxygen f o r approximately 20 minutes when used a t demand Recharging i s accomplished through a charging f i t t i n g on t h e tank and r e q u i r e s removal from t h e LLTV.
Report No. 7260-954002
1-87. 1-88.
EJECTION SEAT
(See f i g u r e s 4-1, 4-2, and 4-3.)
The Weber p i l o t e j e c t i o n s e a t provides s e a t i n g f o r t h e p i l o t ( ~ e f e t o Weber Seat Manual r
during normal vehicle operation and emergency escape, i f required, when vehicle emergency conditions warrant. information.) capabilities. 1-89. 1-90,
DR 5773-1 and B e l l P i l o t ' s F l i g h t Manual 7260-954001 f o r d e t a i l e d
The s e a t i s designed f o r zero velocity and zero a l t i t u d e (Refer t o section I V f o r d e t a i l e d information. )
COCKPIT CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
A l l c o n t r o l s and i n d i c a t o r s necessary f o r p i l o t operation 0.f t h e

A l l controls and i n d i c a t o r s
LLTV a r e located convenient t o t h e p i l o t . f i g u r e s 1-13 through 1-21.
located in t h e cockpit a r e described i n t a b l e 1-2 and a r e i l l u s t r a t e d 'in
1-92.
An aerodynamic boom i s mounted t o t h e l e f t s i d e of t h e cockpit
f l o o r and extends four f e e t forward from t h e cockpit. vanes t o measure i n f l i g h t aerodynamic data.
The boom has two
Report No. 7260-954002
Figure 1-13. U T V Cockpit
- Front View
Report Bo. 7260-954002
1-34
Figure 1-14
Cockpit Layout
Left Hand Side
Report No. 7260-954002
--I
L N R SIrrULAiCION UA RELEASE
EMERGENCY ( JET) THROTTLE
8 b
LUNAR SIM Switch
I I
ENGINE MODE LOCAL VERTICAL Switch
F i g u r e 1-1 5 P i l o t ' s Console
Report No. 7260-954002
" ,
RADAR INST U T E (CB 3 0 )

DOP
ANN LTS (cB EMERG THROTTLl3 (CB 2 0 )
3)
H202 SET
ACS
DC CONT
POST LITE
Figure 1-16.
C i r c u i t Breaker Panel
Figure 1-17
RH Console
1-38
Report No. 7260-954002
LINE 0,
Figure 1-18 Rocket Instruments and Annunciator Panel Warning Lights
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No. 7260-954002

1-41
Figure 1-21.
Hand Controller
Report Bo
. 7260-954002
TABLE 1-2 COCKPIT CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
C N R L OR INDICATOR OTO
FUNCTION
PILOT C N O E ( ~ i g u r e1-15) OSL

ELECTRICAL DC P W R O E S d t ch I n t h e ON p o s i t i o n , a p p l i e s 28 vdc from DC generator t o a c t u a t e DC generator voltage regulator. B T P W R Switch AT O E I n t h e ON p o s i t i o n , a p p l i e s ground t o arm b a t t e r y r e l a y K 1 which a p p l i e s 28 vdc from t h e emergency b a t t e r y t o t h e 28 vdc. emergency bus when
K 5 control r e l a y de-energizes
by l o s s of primary power.
A S SAFE Switch C (~ttitude Control System)

MOMENT COMPENSATION
A r m s a t t i t u d e rocket f i r i n g
circuit. With t h i s switch engaged, t h e e l e c t r o n i c model commands 8O/sec each a x i s i n response t o p i l o t commands. 2 nominal angular accelerations i n
Switch
R C E PROPELLANT OKT Switch
I n t h e OFF p o s i t i o n , applies 28 vdc from t h e 28 vdc emergency bus t o valve-close terminals of t h e r i g h t l i f t rocket shutoff valve, and t h e
Report No. 7260-954002
l e f t l i f t rocket shutoff valve.

L
1-43
TABLE 1-2.
Cockpit Controls and Indicators (continued) FUNCTION
PILOT CONSOLE (Figure 1-15 Continued)
Rc OW
PROPELLAE
I n t h e ON p o s i t i o n , a p p l i e s 28 vdc
from t h e 28 vdc emergency bus t o valve-open terminals of t h e r i g h t l i f t rocket shutoff valve and l e f t l i f t rocket shutoff valve.
Switch (Continued)
K T -R_KETS S e l e c t o r
S e l e c t s Test, Standard, o r Both s e t s of a t t i t u d e rockets f o r a t t i t u d e control.
Switch
In t h e TEST position, applies 28

v o l t s DC from t h e 28-volt DC emergency bus across closed contacts of energized r e l a y K t o t h e valve-close 2 terminal of t h e Standard a t t i t u d e rocket shutoff valve and t o t h e valve-open terminal of t h e Test a t t i t u d e rocket shutoff valve and t o t h e A S power amplifier t o condition C
it f o r t h e Test mode.
In t h e STD position, a p p l i e s 28
v o l t s DC from t h e 28-volt DC emergency bus across closed contacts of energized r e l a y K2 t o t h e valve-open terminal of t h e Standard a t t i t u d e rocket shutoff valve, t o t h e
a
1-44
Report No. 7260-954-002
TABLE 1-2.
Cockpit Controls and I n d i c a t o r s (Continued)
FUNCTION
PILOT CONSOLE ( ~ i g u r e1-15 continued)

ATT ROCKETS S e l e c t o r Switch ( Continued)
valve-close terminal of t h e Test a t t i t u d e rocket shutoff valve, and t o A S power a m p l i f i e r t o condition it C f o r t h e Standard mode. I n t h e BOTH p o s i t i o n , a p p l i e s 28 volds DC t o valve-open t e r m i n a l s of Standard a t t i t u d e rocket s h u t o f f valve and Test a t t i t u d e rocket shutoff valve. Section D of t h i s switch provides the ATTITUDE Switch
TIM functions.
Used t o switch power t o a t t i t u d e gyros.
R T Switch AE
Used t o switch power t o t h e r a t e gyro package.
AFCS PRIMARY RESET Switch
I f a malfunction i s detected by t h e monitor comparator, t h e system autom a t i c a l l y switches t o r a t e backup. I f t h e p i l o t momentarily a c t u a t e s t h i s switch a f t e r a malfunction i n d i c a t i o n , t h e system s h a l l r e v e r t t o and s t a y i n t h e primary
L
Report No. 7260-954.002
1-45
TAELE 1-2.
Cockpit Controls and Indicators (Continued)
FUNCTION
PnOT C N O E ( ~ i g u r e OSL 1-15 Conkinued) AFCS P I A Y mSET RM R Switch (Continued) AFCS PITCH, ROLL, AND YAW
BACK U P I A Y Switch P RM B
electronics only i f the malfunction has disappeared. (Ground Use Only)
P i l o t ' s manual selection of primary o r backup a t t i t u d e control system electronics. Used t o switch from voltmeter phase A t o phase C.
AC P W R C E K Switch O E HC
LUNAR SIM Switch
A r m s auto j e t t h r o t t l e system and engine a t t i t u d e systems such, t h a t subsequent f i r i n g of the l i f t rocket

(excess of 100 l b pressure) w i l l r e s u l t i n automatic control of j e t engine t h r u s t and engine a t t i t u d e .
ENGINE M D L C L OE O A VERTICAL Switch
Aligns j e t engine with respect t o gyro v e r t i c a l (earth v e r t i c a l ) . Manual s e l e c t switch. Manually releases from l o c a l v e r t i c a l when Local Vertical switch i s OFF, but cannot override Local Vertical switch i f ON.
I
:ENGINE M D OE
LOC V R ET
RELEASE Switch (~ushbutton)
1-46
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE 1-2.
Cockpit Controls and I n d i c a t o r s (continued)

a-
CONTROL OR INDICATOR
FUNCTION
PILOT CONSOLE ( ~ i g u r e1-15 continued)
JET THROTTLE
C o n t r o l s j e t engine t h r u s t . A i d l e n d e t e n t p r e v e n t s t h r o t t l e from r e t a r d i n g below i d l e p o i n t .
E E G N Y (JET) THROTTLE MR E C
Used i n t h e event of a h y d r a u l i c t h r o t t l e system f a i l u r e t o engage e l e c t r i c a l t h r o t t l e system and t h u s n u l l i f i e s j e t t h r o t t l e hydraulic pressure.
L N R SIMULATION RELEASE UA
Disengages a u t o t h r o t t l e c l u t c h f o r manual c o n t r o l of engine t h r o t t l e and r e s t o r e s t h e Local V e r t i c a l mode; a l s o throws Lunar Sim switch OFF.
L i f t Rocket T h r o t t l e
T-handle f o r c o n t r o l l i n g l i f t rocket thrust.
Report No. 7260-954O02
TABLE 1-2.
FUNCTION
PILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL ( ~ i g u r e1-16) POST UTES Switch D P Switch O A T ON Switch L LITE TEST Switch Controls cockpit i n s t r u m n t i n d i c a t o r s Provides power t o Doppler radar. Provides power t o radar a l t i m e t e r . Used t o v e r i f y lamp operations of warning i n d i c a t o r s . H202 SET (Slew) Switch This switch i s used f o r a d j u s t i n g t h e hydrogen peroxide remaining i n d i c a t o r t o any s e t t i n g . (up t o advance, down t o reduce, center i s neutral.) D P TEST (slew) Switch O Used t o v e r i f y operation of Doppler radar. A T TEST Switch L Used t o v e r i f y operation of t h e radar altimeter. H202 LITE Test Switch Used t o v e r i f y operation of H202 low l e v e l c o n t r o l l e r and i n d i c a t o r s . E E G B L C - RESET MR ML O K . Pushbutton
r
Breaks l a t c h i n g c i r c u i t t o emergency Gimbal Lock relay. (Ground Use Only)
1-48
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE 1-2.
FUNCTION
PILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL ( ~ i g u r e 1-16 Continued) ASS- ELECT C i r c u i t CB7

RADAR INST LITE
Attitude gyro, A S monitor, 3-axes C s i d e arm c o n t r o l l e r . MI7 ~ l t i t u d e / ~ l Rate i n d i c a t o r , t. aneoniometer power supply.
C i r c u i t Breaker CB30
COMM C i r c u i t Breaker CB I
Radio and interphone c o n t r o l box.
ANN LTS C i r c u i t Breaker
Master warning control box, Annunciator i n d i c a t o r s , DC voltmeter, Power switch.
cB3
HYD C i r c u i t Breaker
Gimbal lock solenoid, 800 h e r t z generator, and a t t i t u d e Wro. Instrument i n d i c a t o r s , a t t i t u d e indicator. DC v o l t sensor, AC + DC F a i l u r e i n d i c a t o r s , and master warning box. 20V supply module ( o i l Pressure i n d i c a t o r , a f t f u e l tank, fwd f u e l tank p r e s s , l i f t rocket chamber
CB4.
POST LITE C i r c u i t Breaker CB29
DC CONT C i r c u i t Breaker
CB19 FLT INST C i r c u i t Breaker
CB8
Report No. 7260-954002
:TABLE 1-2.
FUNCTION
PILOT CIRCUIT B E K R PANEL (Figure 1-16 continued) RA E

FLT INST C i r c u i t Breaker CB8 (continued) INVERTER G i r c u i t BreakeiCB5 E E G THROT-TLE SwitchMR Type C i r c u i t B r e a h r *CB20
LIFT' RKT V ACTR SWITCHType C i r c u i t Breaker
p r e s s , helium source p r e s s and H202 tank press indicator). AC sensors and AC f a i l u r e i n d i c a t o r
Emergency t h r o t t l e switch, drag compensation, t h r o t t l e crossover valve. L i f t rocket valve actuator.
*CB28 E E G G B L C Circuit M R ML O K Breaker CB35 PROP C i r c u i t Breaker CB2 Attitude rocket valves, l i f t rocket valves, helium crossover valve, supplies power t o A S switch C Emergency gimbal lock solenoid.
*Toggle Switch-Type C i r c u i t Breaker

C
1-50
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE 1-2.
FUNCTION
PILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL ( ~ i g u r e1-16 continued) 115V400 cB6
@ A
H 0
2 2
remaining, j e t engine exhaust
C i r c u i t Breaker
temp t r a n s d u c e r .
ATT RKT SOL PRIM

Circuit CB4O Breaker
Standard and T e s t a t t i t u d e r o c k e t s h u t o f f valves.
' I
Report No. 7260 -9544l02
TABLE 1-2.
4
FUNCTICRJ
PILOT INSTRUMENT PANEL '$Figure 1-17) Primary F l i g h t Instruments ATTITUDE I n d i c a t o r 3-axes b a l l i n d i c a t i n g p i t c h , r o l l , and yaw.
ALTITUDE/ATTITUDE
Indicator
RATE
Tape meters, d r i v e n by t h e r a d a r a l t i m e t e r , i n d i c a t e a l t i t u d e and r a t e of descent o r ascent.
Horizontal Velocity Indicator
A c r o s s p o i n t e r , v e c t o r sum i n d i c a t o r a s derived by t h e Doppler r a d a r ; h o r i z o n t a l needle i n d i c a t e s l o n g i t u d i n a l v e l o c i t y , and v e r t i c a l needle i n d i c a t e s l a t e r a l v e l o c i t y .
~hrust/~ei~ht Indicator
Displays body a x i s referenced normal a c c e l e r a t i o n i n l u n a r g's w i t h a f i x e d s c a l e and moving p o i n t e r .
Secondary F l i g h t I n s t r u m n t s Wind D i r e c t i o n Indicator Located i n f r o n t - r i g h t corner of cockpit c e i l i n g . P o i n t e r i n d i c a t e s wind d i r e c t i o n . Wind V e l o c i t y I n d i c a t e s wind speed i n f e e t p e r second.
1-52
Indicator
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE 1-2.
I
I
FUNCTION
PILOT INSTRUMENT PANEL ( ~ i g u r e 1-17 continued) Secondary Flight Instruments (continued) Inertial-Lead V e r t i c a l Speed I n d i c a t o r
A pressure sensing meter with
acceleration lead which displays v e r t i c a l velocity.
Clock
Includes a sweep second hand and runs f o r 8 days on one winding.
Report No. 7260-954.002
TABU 1-2.
I
I
FUNCTION
PILOT INSTRUMENT PANEL
- TOP SECTION ( ~ i g u r e1-18)

I n d i c a t e s pressure of helium i n r i g h t and l e f t helium tanks, operates from e l e c t r i c a l s i g n a l s from pressure transducers i n r i g h t and l e f t helium tanks. A d u e l needle pressure i n d i c a t o r displays pressure f o r each tank (0-4500psia).
Rocket Instruments Helium Tank Pressure
H202 Tank Pressure
I n d i c a t e s r i g h t and l e f t H202 tank pressures; operations from e l e c t r i c a l s i g n a l s from pressure transducers i n r i g h t and l e f t H202 tanks. A d u a l needle pressure i n d i c a t o r d i s p l a y s pressure f o r each tank (0-600 p s i a ) .
L i f t Rocket Chamber Pressure
I n d i c a t e s chamber pressure ( l i f t ) of r i g h t and l e f t l i f t rockets; operates from e l e c t r i c a l s i g n a l s from pressure transducers a t r i g h t and l e f t l i f t rocket t h r u s t chambers. A dual needle pressure i n d i c a t o r displays chamber pressure i n each l i f t rocket (0-400 p s i a )
1-54
Report No. 7260-954.002
TABLE 1-2.
CONTROL OR INDICATOR PILOT INSTRWNT PANEL
- TOP SECTION
I
FUNCTION (~igure 1-18 Continued)
Rocket Instruments (continued) H202 R M E D i g i t a l counter i n d i c a t e s H 0 2 2 remaining t o nearest two pounds. Adjustable i n i t i a l source weight.
Annunciator Panel Warning I n d i c a t o r s JP4 L W LEVEL O Red warning i n d i c a t o r i l l u m i n a t e s when j e t f u e l l e v e l f a l l s below 20$ (46.8
2 1.7
l b ) of i n d i v i d u a l tank Operates from a ground
capacity.
s i g n a l sensor c o n t r o l when JP4 ( f u e l ) supply decreases below 20% l e v e l . JP4 CAUTION LEVEL Amber caution i n d i c a t o r i l l u m i n a t e s when j e t f u e l l e v e l f a l l s below 50%
( 117
+ 2.2
l b ) of i n d i v i d u a l tank
capacity. Operates from a ground s i g n a l sensor control when JP4 ( f u e l )
i s below 50% l e v e l .
AUTO THROTTLE
Green s t a t u s i n d i c a t o r i l l u m i n a t e s when a u t o t h r o t t l e i s engaged, and i n d i c a t e s t h a t power i s applied t o automatic t h r o t t l e c o n t r o l t o i n i t i a t e i t s action; operates from 28 v o l t s DC, from t h e weight and
( ~ e~ngine) t
Report No. 7260-954002
1-55
TABLE 1-2.
CONTROL O INDICATOR R PILOT INSTRUMENT PANEL
FUNCTION TOP SECTION ( ~ i g u r e1-18 Continued)
Annunciator pane? Warning I n d i c a t o r s ( ~ t m u e d ) in A T THROTTLE (Continued) UO ( ~ e ~ngine) t d r a g computer, when a u t o t h r o t t l e switch, on t h e power c o n t r o l l e v e r ,
i s actuated.
ENGINE MAX TILT Red warning i n d i c a t o r i l l u m i n a t e s when j e t engine p i t c h o r r o l l tilt exceeds 15'
+ lo w i t h
respect t o
l o c a l v e r t i c a l o r when sum of t h e p i t c h and r o l l angles of t h e engine r e l a t i v e t o t h e v e h i c l e exceeds 6b0, ard o p e r a t e s from 28-volt DC s i g n a l from j e t s t a b i l i z a t i o n system. GIMBAL L C M D OK OE Green s t a t u s i n d i c a t o r i l l u m i n a t e s when t h i s mode i s manually s e l e c t e d
by p i l o t p l a c i n g Gimbal Lock switch
t o ON. STABILIZATION M D OE Green s t a t u s i n d i c a t o r i l l u m i n a t e s when Lunar Simulation mode i s armed. Operates from 28 v o l t s , DC s i g n a l from j e t s t a b i l i z a t i o n system.
1-56
Report No. 7260-954.002
TABLE 1-2.
Cockpit Controls and Indicators (Continued) FUNCTION
C N R L OR INDICATOR OTO PILOT INSTRUMENT PANEL
- TOP SECTION (Figure

I
1-18 Continued)
Annunciator Panel Warning Indicators (Continued) E E G GIMBALS L C E MR . OKD Red warning i n d i c a t o r illuminates when Gimbal Locked mode i s automatically selected when: 1) Primary hydraulic pressure f a l l s below 1350
+ 50 psig;
the
hydraulic low pressure switch illuminates t h i s l i g h t and t r i p s a solenoid valve allowing accumulator pressure t o command t h e j e t engine t o gimbal lock, 2)
-
J e t engine a t t i t u d e exceeds 15'
lo from l o c a l v e r t i c a l and
Local Vertical mode does not r e s t o r e engine t o within 0.5 seconds. 3)

AC Power Failure
DC Power Failure
15' i n
4)
5) When normal Gimbal Lock switch

f a i l s t o operate.-In which case a pressure switch i n normal system side of t h e s h u t t l e valve loop, t r i g g e r s t h e emergency gimbal lock solenoid i n t h e emergency s i d e of t h e s h u t t l e valve loop.
<
Report No. 7260-954002
1-57
TABLE 1-2.
Cockpit Controls and Indicators (continued) FUNCTION
- TOP SECTION ( ~ i g u r e1-18 continued)

I
5) (continued) The green Gimbal Lock mode i n d i c a t o r and t h e red Emergency Gimbal Lock i n d i c a t o r would be illuminated.
Annunciator Panel Warninn Indicators (continued E E G GIMl3ALS L C E MR . OKD (Continued)
L C L V R MD O A E T OE
Amber caution i n d i c a t o r illuminates when Local V e r t i c a l mode i s s e l e c t e d

by p i l o t , when j e t engine d e f l e c t s
more than 15'
l o from l o c a l vertical,
or when any landing gear shock s t r u t
i s deflected more than one-half inch;

i n t h e l a s t two cases t h e Local Vert i c a l mode i s automatically selected. Operates from 28 v o l t s , DC s i g n a l from j e t s t a b i l i z a t i o n system. H202 LW LEFT TANK O
AND H202
Red warning i n d i c a t o r illuminates when
H 0 82
l e v e l i n e i t h e r tank f a l l s below ~ b . Operates by l e v e l sensor
probes i n each tank. V L E SUK AV T C Red i n d i c a t o r illuminates when chamber pressure i n d i c a t e s two opposing rocket:: a r e f i r i n g . Automatically s e l e c t s BOTH s e t s of rockets. Report No. 7260-954002
1-58
TABLE 1-2.
Cockpit Controls and I n d i c a t o r s (continued) FUNCTIUN
- TOP SECTION ( ~ i g u r e1-18
Continued)
I Annunciator Panel Warning Indicators (continued) HELIUM SOURCE LW O Red warning i n d i c a t o r illuminates when helium tank pressure f a l l s below 1775 psig. Operates from a ground s i g n a l from t h e Helium Low Pressure switch when t h e helium pressure decreases below 1775 psig. DOPPLER Amber caution i n d i c a t o r illuminates when s i g n a l s from Doppler r a d a r a r e unreliable.
RADAR ALTIMETER
Amber caution i n d i c a t o r illuminates when s i g n a l s from radar a l t i m e t e r a r e unreliable.
P A T PILOT BACK U UO
Red warning i n d i c a t o r illuminates when vehicle a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l system switches t o an emergency mode.
AC FAILURE
Red warning i n d i c a t o r illuminates when primary AC voltage f a l l s below 100 v o l t s or increases above 130 volts.
Report No. 7260-954.002
1-59
TABLE 1-2.
CN O --------TROL OR
INDICATOR
FUNCTION
PILOT INSTRUMENT PANEL
- TOP SECTION ( ~ i g u r e1-18 Continued)

Red warning i n d i c a t o r illuminates when primary DC voltage f a l l s below 24 v o l t s o r increases above 32 v o l t s .
Annunciator Pane? Warning Indicators (continued)

DC
FAILURE
G R FAILURE YO
Red warning i n d i c a t o r illuminates when excess r a t e d e t e c t o r senses a r a t e i n excess of 25 deg/sec from any backup r a t e gyro.
M SE W R I G A T R A NN
Red warning i n d i c a t o r above p i l o t instrument panel illuminates, and audio tone sounds i n p i l o t headset, whenever any of t h e annunciator panel red warning i n d i c a t o r s illuminate.
i n d i c a t o r and audio tone
HARD-OVER
Red warning i n d i c a t o r above instrument
panel illuminates when BOTH s e t s of a t t i t u d e rockets have been s e l e c t e d automatically by t h e p i l o t moving t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r t o any extreme o r hard stop. Cancels out moment compensation, NT OE I f any a x i s d i r e c t mode had been s e l e c t e d , BOTH s e t s of a t t i t u d e rockets w i l l not be automatically selected. 1-60 Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE 1-2.
Cockpit C o n t r o l s and I n d i c a t o r s (continued) FUNCTION
CONTROL OR INDICATOR PILOT INSTRUMENT PANEL E T Gage G
B T O PORTION ( ~ i g u r e1-19) GT M Displays engine exhaust gas temperature. I n a d d i t i o n , a d i g i t a l readout displays temperature t o n e a r e s t 2 C , and o p e r a t e s from e l e c t r i c a l s i g n a l from thermocouples i n j e t engine t h r u s t chamber.
0
PERCENT RPM Gage
D i s p l a y s gas g e n e r a t o r speed a s a p e r c e n t a g e of maximum; o p e r a t e s from e l e c t r i c a l s i g n a l s from tachometer g e n e r a t o r on j e t engine.
OIL PRESS Gage
D i s p l a y s j e t engine o i l p r e s s u r e (0-60 p s i g ) .
JP4 T N PRESS Gage AK
Two t a n k p r e s s u r e i n d i c a t o r s d i s p l a y p r e s s u r e f o r each f u e l t a n k (0-50 p s i g ) .
Report No. 7260-954.002
Table 1-2.
*

>
FUNCTION
AUXILIARY SWITCH AND INSTRUMENT PANEL ( ~ i g u r e 1-20
I Electrical
AC Voltmeter
Displays primary i n v e r t e r AC voltage.

AC power check switch allows v o l t -
meter t o be used t o check both phase A and phase C.

DC Voltmeter
Displays emergency DC bus voltage.
h his
i s primary DC during normal
operation. )
Mounting Box Assembly ATTITUDE C N R L M D OTO CE Provides t h e p i l o t with i n d i v i d u a l a x i s s e l e c t i o n of r a t e command o r d i r e c t command about t h e p i t c h , r o l l , and yaw axes. a) b)
c)
R L Switch OL PITCH Switch
~atel~irect ~atel~irect ~ate/~irect Used t o s e l e c t s c a l e on Horizontal Velocity i n d i c a t o r (XI o r XIO).
YAW Switch
HORIZ V L Switch E
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE 1-2.
Cockpit Cont,ruls and I n d i c a t o r s (continued)
FTJNCTION
HAND CONTROLLER ( Figure 1 -2 1) Gimbal Lock C o n t r o l s c e n t e r i n ? of t h e gimbal a c t u a t o r s u s i n g main h y d r a u l i c p r e s s u r e t,o a l i g n t h e j e t e n g i n e w i t h t h e v e r t , i c a l axes of t h e v e h i c l e , o r accumulatcjr p r e s s u r e i n e v e n t of normal Gimbal. Lock swi1,ch malfunctic,n.
Report No.
7260-954-002
SECTION I1 HANDLING, SERVICING, LUBRICATION
2-0. 2-1.
SCOPE O SECTION F This s e c t i o n provides i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r ground handling, servicing, The ground handling i n s t r u c t i o n s a r e To avoid duplication, some
and l u b r i c a t i o n of t h e vehicle.
covered f i r s t , s e r v i c i n g i n s t r u c t i o n s follow, and l u b r i c a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s a s t h e l a s t p a r t of t h i s section. i n d e t a i l t h e required information. 2-2. 2-3. a r e a s of t h i s s e c t i o n r e f e r t o o t h e r s e c t i o n s of t h i s handbook t h a t cover
GROUND HANDLING
T WN O IG
- The v e h i c l e
i s f i r s t placed on t h e LLTV t r a n s p o r t e r
The U T V v e h i c l e t r a n s -
( f i g u r e 2-1 ), then t h e t r a n s p o r t e r i s towed.
p o r t e r c o n s i s t s of a s t e e l I-beam c h a s s i s suspended by f o u r wheels, f o u r p i v o t i n g arms, an i n n e r support frame f o r t h e U T V , and a hydraulic jack system f o r r a i s i n g and lowering t h e U T V support frame. following s t e p s prepare t h e LLTV f o r towing:
A.
The
I n f l a t e t h e landing gear shock struts. 2-61. )
(Refer t o paragraph
B.
C.
Lower t r a n s p o r t e r i n n e r support frame t o i t s lowest p o s i t i o n by r e l e a s i n g Hydraulic By-pass valve. P o s i t i o n t r a n s p o r t e r under v e h i c l e , a l i g n i n g t h e f o u r transp o r t e r pivoting arms c r a d l e t o t h e v e h i c l e l e g s crossarms. (See f i g u r e 2-2. )
D.
Raise t r a n s p o r t e r i n n e r support frame u n t i l t r a n s p o r t e r pivoting arms zradle f i r m l y contact t h e v e h i c l e l e g s jacking points.
Report No. 7260-954002
2-1
Report E o 7260-954002 T.
2-2
Report No. 7260-954002
2-3
E.
Clamp vehicle l e g crossarms t o transporter cradle using clamps attached t o transporter pivoting arms.
F.
Deflate landing gear shock s t r u t s and r e t r a c t s t r u t s by hand, lock off valves.
G.
Raise transporter inner support frame u n t i l vehicle landing pads c l e a r ground approximately s i x inches.
H.
Connect transporter tow handle t o t r a c t o r hitch.
I Transporter and vehicle are ready t o be towed. .
The vehicle i s towed i n t h i s manner within t h e operation and maintenance areas around t h e hangar and f l i g h t areas. However, the vehicle can a l s o be moved i n t h i s manner t o areas outside of these operational areas f o r short distances.
CAUTION
D not exceed o
miles per hour when towing Also, avoid
transporter with vehicle. sudden s t a r t s and stops. 2-4. JACKING
- The vehicle
can be jacked with loads distributed equally
t o t h e four jack locations a t the center of the lower cross tube of each leg. To remove vehicle l e g , e i t h e r the f r o n t or rear of the vehicle i s raised with jacks placed a t two points of the vehicle frame. ( ~ e f e r o t Section I V , paragraph 4-26. 2-5. CASTERS
- The c a s t e r i n s t a l l a t i o n
(figure 2-3) k i t , part number
7161-191005-5, i s i n s t a l l e d on a l l four landing s t r u t s and used f o r positioning o r turning the vehicle within the hanger work areas and a r e i n s t a l l e d a s follows: 2-4
'
Report No. 7260-954002
NOTE I n t h e event of an emergency, such a s a f i r e , t h e c a s t e r s may be used t o move t h e v e h i c l e from t h e area of immediate danger.
A.
While vehicle i s s t i l l on t h e t r a n s p o r t e r , i n t h e hangar a l i g n c a s t e r s under each l e g .
B.
Lower t r a n s p o r t e r bed slowly u n t i l vehicle l e g s r e s t on c a s t e r s . Lower t r a n s p o r t e r bed a s low a s possible and move it out from under vehicle.
C.
D.
2-6.
Vehicle can now be r o l l e d on t h e c a s t e r s .
HOISTING
- To h o i s t
t h e v e h i c l e , an overhead h o i s t i s used, having Hoisting t h e vehicle i s accomplished by A LLTV h o r i z o n t a l h o i s t s l i n g (attached n This h o i s t i n g method i s used f o r . t h e
a l i f t i n g c a p a c i t y of a t l e a s t two t o n s and a minurmun overhead look h e i g h t clearance of 26 f e e t . v e h i c l e c e n t e r body s t r u c t u r e . terminals with four u t i l i z i n g t h e terminals l o c a t e d a t each of t h e f o u r t o p corners of t h e t o t h e overhead h o i s t hook) with drop cables, i s attached t o t h e vehicle
AN5 b o l t s .
f i x t u r e t e s t , weight and balance check, l e g maintenance or removal, and i n preparing t h e vehicle f o r a i r t r a n s p o r t . 2-7. LEVELING PROVISIONS
- To
ensure t h a t t h e v e h i c l e i s l e v e l f o r
p r e f l i g h t checks, one of two methods of l e v e l i n g i s used; (1)Threaded metal rods a r e i n s t a l l e d a t each v e h i c l e lower l e g and r o t a t e d u n t i l t h e v e h i c l e j u s t c l e a r s t h e hangar f l o o r . Further adjustment i s required of each rod u n t i l vehicle i s l e v e l . (2) Four wooden block, each shaped so t h e t o p of t h e block i s a b s o l u t e l y l e v e l when placed on i t s marked space on t h e hanger f l o o r . t h e blocks. Whenever t h e v e h i c l e has t o be l e v e l , t h e blocks a r e placed on t h e i r marked f l o o r space and t h e vehicle l e g s a r e placed on Refer t o Weight and Balance Handbook No. 7260-954003 f o r
2- 5
a d d i t i o n a l l e v e l i n g procedures. Report No. 7260-954002
2-6
Report No. 7260-954002
2-8. 2-9.
VEHICLE GROUND OPERATIONS Ground operation of t h e U T V c o n s i s t s of two major types; ground
tiedotni runs and CG f i x t u r e operations. 2-10.
GROUND TE O N R N ID W US
- These operations a r e normally conducted

For example, turbofan j e t engine runs These
with various l i m i t e d objectives.
can be made, rocket system runs, combined systems runs, o r simulated missions can be performed during these ground tiedown runs. primary f l i g h t controls. a c t i v i t i e s w i l l serve t o acquaint t h e p i l o t with a c t u a l f e e l of t h e Through these operations he w i l l l e a r n how much movement i s necessary t o control a c e r t a i n response i n t h e systems.
In p a r t i c u l a r , he w i l l l e a r n t h e movement of t h e three-axes hand cont r o l l e r ; i.e., how much movement i n one d i r e c t i o n i s required t o f i r e a d e s i r e d combination of a t t i t u d e rockets. Similar f a m i l i a r i z a t i o n
a c t i v i t i e s w i l l a l s o be h e l p f u l i n learning t h e use of t h e l i f t rocket T-handle and t h e j e t engine t h r o t t l e . 2-11. CENTER O GRAVITY FIXTURE R N F US
- The prime
objective of operations
of t h e LLTV on t h e Center of Gravity (CG) f i x t u r e i s t o perform functional operations and checkout of t h e vehicle a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l system about t h e p i t c h and r o l l axes i n addition t o p i l o t f a m i l i a r i z a t i o n with t h e a t t i t u d e control system. by t h e j e t engine mount only. The vehicle i s supported on t h e f i x t u r e When mounted on t h e f i x t u r e , t h e vehicle This clearance allows
l e g s a r e approximately 5 f e e t o f f t h e ground. t h e a t t i t u d e control rocket system f o r about u n r e s t r i c t e d motion and an a d d i t i o n a l before t h e hard stops a r e reached. 13'
vehicle movement about t h e gimbals t o permit closed loop operations of
13' i n p i t c h o r r o l l with
( o r a t o t a l of
_+
26')
of
motion through t h e s o f t stops (bungee cords t i e d t o t h e vehicle l e g s )
Report No. 7260-954002
2-12. The turbofan j e t engine i s not run during f i x t u r e operations. I n addition, t h e primary gimbal hydraulic system i s not i n f l i g h t status;
i.e., t h e gimbal hydraulic actuators a r e removed from the vehicle. In t h i s . way a very r e a l i s t i c evaluation of hovering f r e e f l i g h t a t t i t u d e control i n pitch and r o l l only i s obtained. U S During operations o f , t h e LLTV 2-13. FESTRAINTS DURING CG FIXTURE R N on the f i x t u r e , cables a r e attached t o the vehicle t o prevent t h e vehicle from reaching extreme a t t i t u d e s which could cause damage t o the vehicle. These cables provide a hard stop restraint.' (bungees). I n addition t o the cables, s h o r t e r s o f t stops a r e attached i n the form of stretchable ropes These serve t o gradually stop vehicle motion a s the limits During normal operation on the f i x t u r e , I n an emergency, of a t t i t u d e a r e approached.
handling ropes from the vehicle l e g s a r e l e f t slack.
such a s rocket o r j e t f u e l leakage, these ropes can be used by the ground crew t o return the vehicle t o an a t t i t u d e where p i l o t can safely egress. C UI N A TO Yaw commands must not be i n i t i a t e d by the p i l o t during CG f i x t u r e runs.
2-14.
PREPARATION OF LLTV AND FIXTUIE FOR CG C E K HC
- The following
s t e p s prepare t h e LLTV and t h e f i x t u r e f o r CG checks:
Refer t o t h e Weight and Balance Handbook, Report No. 7260-954003, f o r additional information.
A.
Strap a 200 pound anthropomorphic dummy i n cockpit seat.
Report No. 7260-954.002
B.
Remove pitch and r o l l actuators.and replace with du~mny actuators.

CAUTION
Note location of the pitch and r o l l actuators before removing. These items must be replaced i n the same locations. Ascertain t h a t a l l vehicle tanks a r e empty, except the h y d r a d i c reservoir and the engine o i l reservoir.
C.
Weigh the CG f i x t u r e and l e v e l the f i x t u r e with a hclinometer.
2-15.
PROCEDURF: FOR PLACING THE UV ON THE CG FIXTURE T
- The following
place t h e LLTV on the CG fixture:

A.
Remove 12 NAS674-4H b o l t s from the bottom side of the U T V engine mount.

CAUTION
D not remove the seven 3h6-inch o diameter b o l t s found i n the same general area. B. Loosely attach three engine mount plates with centering pins, using 12 NAS674-16H bolts.
The engine mount p l a t e s consist of two p l a t e s of part no. 503 and one p l a t e of p a r t no. 502. Plate p a r t no. 502 has shorter hole spacings, and should be located a t the most a f t mounting point. Report No. 7260-954002
Remove l a r g e tang from master ring ( a t engine mount location) and position the master r i n g beneath the L T engine so t h a t LV the portion stamped lTWDw and "USE AGAINST VEHICLE11a r e properly oriented with respect t o the LLTV. Raise the master ring up and around the U T V engine assembly u n t i l the a f t tang on the inside diameter of the ring engages the unused a f t main engine mount s l o t . Replace and engage the forward tang i n the unused forward r i g h t engine mount s l o t .
During t h i s operation, the spherical ends of the centering pins i n the loosely attached engine mount plates a r e inserted i n t o appropriate positioning holes of t h e master ring. Attach master r i n g t o L T engine using two captive pins LV inserted through the ring tangs and main engine mounts. Tighten the 12 NAS674-16H b o l t s in the engine mount plates. Remove the l a r g e tang from the master ring and remove the master ring from the LLTV. Replace tang on master ring. I n s t a l l L T gimbal ground locks. LV Attach t h e l i n k of the U T V horizontal h o i s t s l i g h t t o an overhead hoist.
The overhead h o i s t must have a capacity of a t l e a s t two tons, and a minimum overhead hook height clearance of 26 f e e t .
Report No. 7260-954002
M.
Using t h e overhead h o i s t , lower t h e LLTV h o r i z o n t a l h o i s t s l i n g so t h a t t h e drop cables can be attached with of t h e LLTV c e n t e r body s t r u c t u r e .
AN5 b o l t s
t o t h e terminals l o c a t e d a t each of t h e f o u r t o p corners

N.
P o s i t i o n t h e CG f i x t u r e i n t h e a r e a a c c e s s i b l e t o t h e overhead h o i s t i n g device with t h e "FWD" n o t a t i o n on t h e t r i a n g u l a r base oriented properly w i t h r e s p e c t t o forward on t h e U T V .
0.
P o s i t i o n t h r e e platform s c a l e s under t h e 1-?/&inch base.
adjusting
screws, l o c a t e d a t each corner of t h e CG f i x t u r e t r i a n g u l a r
Scales should be l o c a t e d s o t h a t t h e a d j u s t i n g screws a r e a s c l o s e a s p o s s i b l e t o t h e c e n t e r of t h e weighing platform w i t h t h e s c a l e i n d i c a t i n g d i a l s l o c a t e d a s outl i n e d i n s t e p (p) and (q).
P.
The most forward s c a l e should have t h e i n d i c a t i n g d i a l d i r e c t l y forward of t h e CG f i x t u r e a d j u s t i n g screw. The l e f t and r i g h t s c a l e s should have t h e i r i n d i c a t i n g d i a l s forward of t h e s c a l e base and approximately p a r a l l e l t o a l i n e joining t h e a d j u s t i n g screws and t h e c e n t e r of t h e t r i a n g u l a r base. NT OE -
Q .
If t h e f l u s h s c a l e i n s t a l l a t i o n i s
used, it w i l l be necessary t o p o s i t i o n t h e CG f i x t u r e over t h e p l a t f o m s , t h e n l o c a t e t h e 10-+-inch spacers under t h e a d j u s t i n g screws. Report No. 7260-954002
.R.
Transfer t h e weight of the CG f i x t u r e from the c a s t e r s t o the weighing s c a l e s by turning the adjusting screws. Lock t h e CG f i x t u r e c a s t e r s a s directed on t h e t r i a n g u l a r base.
S.
CAUTION
The c a s t e r s must be locked i n the same position f o r each weighing exercise, t o ensure consistent r e s u l t s .
T o Level t h e CG f i x t u r e i n t h e l a t e r a l and longitudinal planes,

using the adjustment screws and a clinometer applied t o t h e t o p support r i n g f i t t i n g s . NT OE Access t o t h e f i t t i n g s w i l l require e i t h e r a ladder o r maintenance stand.
U.
Using t h e overhead h o i s t , l i f t and position and complete LLTV, t o permit clearance between the engine exhaust cone and the t o p of t h e CG f i x t u r e .
V.
Lower t h e complete L T onto t h e CG f M u r e u n t i l t h e centering LV pins of t h e engine mount p l a t e s s l i p i n t o the alignment holes of t h e mount f i t t i n g s attached t o the top r i n g of t h e f i x t u r e . C UI N A TO Proceed with extreme care when lowering the L T t o assure t h a t LV clearances e x i s t between components and t h e f i x t u r e , and t h a t s o damage occurs a s the alignment pins engage t h e mount f i t t i n g s .
Report No. 7260-9511.002
W.
Secure t h e LLTV t o t h e CG f i x t u r e by i n s t a l l i n g t h r e e $-inch diameter socket head cap screws.
WARNING
A t t a c h warning streamers up through t h e t o p of t h e mount f i t t i n g s and i n t o t h e engine mount p l a t e s .
X. Remove t h e UTV h o r i z o n t a l h o i s t s l i n g .
Y.
Perform t h e weight and b a l a n c i n g procedures o u t l i n e d i n t h e LLTV Weight and Balance 2-16 PERFORM CG C E K HC t h e CG check:
and book,
Report No. 7260-954003.
- The
f o l l o w i n g s t e p s a r e r e q u i r e d t o perform
A.
Locate t h e zero p o i n t s : 1) 2) Behind t h e l e f t hydrogen peroxide t a n k . Behind J P 4 t a n k s . f o r complete CG check.
B.
Refer t o P i l o t F a m i l i a r i z a t i o n on CG F i x t u r e , C h e c k l i s t No. 7260-931003,
2-17
PROCEDURE F R mMOVING THE LLTV F O THE CG FIXTURE O RM t h e LLTV from t h e CG f i x t u r e :
The f o l l o w i n g s t e p s o u t l i n e t h e procedure r e q u i r e d t o remove
CAUTION
The LLTV must be i n a h o r i z o n t a l a t t i t u d e w i t h gimbal l o c k s i n s t a l l e d before s t a r t i n g t h e following procedure.
Report No. 7260-954002
A.
Attach the l i n k of t h e LLTV horizontal h o i s t s l i n g t o the overhead h o i s t . Using the overhead h o i s t , lower and position the horizontal h o i s t s l i n g so t h a t the drop cables can be attached witn AN5 b o l t s t o the terminals located a t each of four top corners of t h e LLTV center body structure. CAUTION D not attempt t o r a i s e the o overhead h o i s t a t t h i s time. Severe damage t o the LLTV i s possible. The horizontal h o i s t s l i n g i s attached a t t h i s time only t o eliminate possible LLTV tipping and subsequent damage t o the LLTV during scale and f i x t u r e removal operations.
B.
C.
Transfer t h e weight of the f i x t u r e and the LLTV from the scales t o the casters by turning the adjusting screws. Remove the scales.
D.
NOTE Remove the 10-1 /&inch used.

E.
spacers
i f a f l u s h weighing f a c i l i t y i s
Remove three 1/2-inch diameter socket head cap screws with t h e warning streamers.
NOTE These screws a t t a c h 'the LLTV engine mount p l a t e s t o the mount f i t t i n g s of the CG fixture.
Report No. 7260-954.002
D not attempt, under any o circumstances, t o h o i s t t h e LLTV without f i r s t removing t h e t h r e e 1/2-inch screws. diameter. Serious damage t o
t h e engine mount could occur

i f the LLTV i s hoisted while
s t i l l attached t o t h e f i x t u r e .
F.
Using t h e overhead h o i s t , c a r e f u l l y r a i s e t h e LLTV up and out of t h e CG f i x t u r e t o a point where t h e engine exhaust cone w i l l c l e a r t h e top f i t t i n g s of t h e truss.
CAUTION
Proceed with extreme care when r a i s i n g t h e LLTV out of t h e f i x t u r e , t o assure t h a t clearances e x i s t between vehicle components and t h e f i x t u r e .
G.
Unlock t h e c a s t e r s and remove t h e support t r u s s assembly from beneath t h e LLTV.
H Carefully lower t h e LLTV t o t h e f l o o r using t h e overhead .

hoist. N I Remove t h e four A 5 b o l t s t h a t a t t a c h t h e LLTV h o i s t s l i n g . t o t h e l i f t i n g terminals.
J.
Remove t h e overhead h o i s t and t h e LLTV horizontal h o i s t sling. Secure t h e LLTV terminals t o the b a l l end terminals a t t h e corners of t h e center body s t r u c t u r e with AN5-10 b o l t s .
Report No. 7260-954002
L.
Remove t h r e e engine mount p l a t e s from underside of LLTV engine mounk
NT OE These p l a t e s a r e attached with 12 ~ ~ ~ 6 7 4 bolts. - 1 6 ~
M.
N.
0. 2-18
I n s t a l l 12~As674-4.Hb o l t s i n t h e holes. Remove t h e 200 pound dummy. Place t h e p i t c h and r o l l a c t u a t o r s i n t h e i r o r i g i n a l l o c a t i o n s .
LEVELING
- Leveling of
-A
t h e v e h i c l e i s only necessary during t h e Refer t o Weight and Balance
f i x t u r e check and weight and balance check.
Handbook, Report No. 7260-954003, f o r l e v e l i n g procedure. 2-19 PROTECTIVE COVER portable hanger, made with canvas w a l l s and a The p o r t a b l e hangar i s on wheels and can
s h e e t metal r o o f , i s used a s a p r o t e c t i v e cover f o r t h e vehicle when it i s not i n t h e permanent hangar. is located. e i t h e r be towed by a t r a c t o r , o r pushed by s e v e r a l men t o where t h e vehicle This hangar i s a l s o used a s a wind breaker f o r t h e v e h i c l e and a s a work a r e a while r e p a i r i n g o r t e s t i n g t h e vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not attempt t o p o s i t i o n p o r t a b l e "Roll Overw hangar over L T i n winds above LV I n winds of
15 mph.
15 mph o r l e s s ,
reduce s a i l a r e a by r e t r a c t i n g side wall curtains.
Report No. 7260-954002
2-20
GROUND SAFETY LOCKS AND PINS
- The
ground s a f e t y l o c k s and p i n s
s h a l l b e removed and/or i n s t a l l e d a t s p e c i f i c times d u r i n g p r e f l i g h t , p i l o t e n t r y , o r a f t e r touchdown, !h !e ' removed. 2-21 ENGINE SUPPORT CABLE following paragraphs i n d i c a t e when t h e s e s a f e t y l o c k s and p i n s a r e t o b e i n s t a l l e d and when t h e y a r e t o be
- The
engine support c a b l e h o l d s t h e engine
i n a r i g i d p o s i t i o n t o p r o t e c t t h e engine during movement of t h e v e h i c l e . The f o l l o w i n g s t e p s i n d i c a t e when t h e cable i s t o be removed and installed.
A.
B.
Remove
- J u s t p r i o r t o p i l o t entry. I n s t a l l - A f t e r touchdown. A f t e r t h e
3-way h r d r a u l i c valve
i s switched t o DUMP p o s i t i o n and j u s t b e f o r e t h e v e h i c l e i s

towed from t h e l a n d i n g a r e a .
C.
During Hangar T e s t Procedures, t h e c a b l e i s removed whenever Hydraulic Mule i s connected and operating. CAUTION E x e r c i s e extreme c a r e when i n s t a l l i n g and removing c a b l e . components. Cable f a l l i n g i n t o j e t engine could cause damage t o engine
2-22
STATIC GROUND WIRE
-A
ground r e c e p t a c l e has been provided on
t h e o u t e r gimbal t o which t h e ground c a b l e s h a l l b e a t t a c h e d whenever t h e v e h i c l e i s on t h e cound, and .its j e t engine i s n o t o p e r a t i n g . 2-23 The s t a t i c ground w i r e , when connected, p r o t e c t s personnel from
p o s s i b l e shock hazard due t o f a u l t y GSE.
It a l s o provides a s t a t i c
ground p o i n t t o which f u e l i n g t r u c k grounds can be a t t a c h e d .
Report No. 7260-954002
2-24
The s t a t i c ground wire s h a l l be a t t a c h e d a t a l l times, except Removal of t h e
during v e h i c l e movements, f l i g h t , and ground t r a n s p o r t . t h a t t h e j e t engine i g n i t e r cable i s a t t a c h e d ,
s t a t i c ground wire p r i o r t o f l i g h t s h a l l be accomplished a t t h e time
S a f e t y p i n s a r e i n s t a l l e d through t h e A S Safeand Rocket P r o p e l l a n t C switches t o prevent them from being a c c i d e n t l y tripped. The following s t e p s i n d i c a t e when t h e pins a r e t o be i n s e r t e d a d removed:
A.
Remove
- During p r e f l i g h t
prime check.
A f t e r checking
H 0 vent valves a r e closed and a r e a c l e a r e d f o r 2 2 prime p r e s s u r i z a t i o n .
B.
I n s t a l l - During p r e f l i g h t cockpit check.
A f t e r checking
ACS Safe switch i s a t SAFE p o s i t i o n , and a f t e r p l a c i n g Rocket P r o p e l l a n t switch t o OFF. 2-26 PARACHUTE A D EJECTOR SEAT "Dm RING SAFETY PINS N
- The parachute
Refer
and e j e c t o r
s e a t "Dm r i n g s a f e t y p i n s a r e i n s t a l l e d t o prevent The following
a c c i d e n t a l f i r i n g of t h e e j e c t o r s e a t and parachute.
s t e p s i n d i c a t e when t h e s a f e t y p i n s a r e removed and i n s t a l l e d . t o paragraph 4-16 and Weber A i r c r a f t Company Manual DR information
5773-1 d e t a i l e d
(See-above r e f e r r e d t o s t e p s on next page)
Report No. 7260-954002
Remove
E j e c t o r s e a t M27 and
P r i o r t o i n s t a l l i n g parachute, a f t e r topping off helium tanks and before JP4 tank pressurization. A f t e r p i l o t ' s parachute i s i n s t a l l e d . After p i l o t entry and a f t e r oxygen hose and communications cord a r e connected.
M32 i n i t i a t o r s a f e t y
Lanyard s a f e t y p i n P i l o t ' s parachute "DV1 r i n g s a f e t y pin Ejection s e a t "Dm r i n g safety pin
After p i l o t ' s parachute "D1' r i n g s a f e t y p i n has been removed.
Install
P r i o r t o p i l o t e x i t and immediately a f t e r engine shutdown. A f t e r e j e c t i o n s e a t "Dlt r i n g s a f e t y p i n has been i n s t a l l e d . A f t e r parachute and p i l o t s e a t cushion has been removed.
E j e c t i o n s e a t I'Dw r i n g safety pin P i l o t ' s parachute "DW ring safety pin E j e c t o r s e a t M27 and
M32 i n i t i a t o r s a f e t y
pins Lanyard s a f e t y p i n
P r i o r t o parachute and p i l o t s e a t removal and a f t e r p i l o t e x i t .

WARNING
I n s t a l l s a f e t y pins during any emergency on t h e ground t h a t occurs a f t e r p i l o t e n t r y , especially when p i l o t i s i n c a p i t a t e d , and requires assistance i n leaving LLTV cockpit.
Report No. 7260-954-002
2-27.
ACS SAFE AND ROCKET PROPELLANT SWITCHES s m LOCK PIN A m
-A
s a f e t y lock pin i s i n s t a l l e d through the guards of the A S Safe and C Rocket Propellant switches t o prevent accidental movement from t h e i r SAFE o r OFF positions. The following steps indicate when the s a f e t y lock pin i s removed and i n s t a l l e d .
A.
Remove
- After
H202 servicing when the area i s cleared f o r
prime pressurization.
B.
Install
- During purge
a f t e r the A S Safe switch i s placed C
i n SAFE (GUARDUP) position and the Rocket F Propellant switch i s placed t o O F position. 2-28. EXTINGUISHING GROUND FIRES
- Ground f i r e i s an ever present

The following paragraphs
danger around the vehicle.
It i s important t h a t the ground crew observe
s a f e t y precautions a t a l l times. It i s a l s o necessary t o have the proper f i r e f i g h t i n g equipment on hand a t a l l times. d e t a i l the f i r e f i g h t i n g equipment required and i t s use. 2-29.
A crash truck s h a l l be on s i t e during vehicle t e s t i n g , f l i g h t
and whenever there i s a p o s s i b i l i t y of a f i r e occurring.
The crash The
truck crew i s responsible f o r fire-fighting and p i l o t rescue.
master fireman of the crash truck i s responsible f o r overseeing training of the crash truck crew and directing the operation of p i l o t rescue and fire-fighting during an emergency. so by the Operations Engineer. 2-30. O a l l the L T systems, the hydrogen peroxide propellant f o r f LV Hydrogen When The vehicle ground crew w i l l not become involved i n fire-fighting and p i l o t rescue unless directed t o do
the a t t i t u d e and l i f t rocket systems i s the most dangerous.
peroxide i s a clear, colorless l i q u i d s l i g h t l y heavier than water. oxggen.
hydrogen peroxide i s contaminated, it decomposes rapidly i n t o steam and This decomposition w i l l give off heat with temperatures a s high
Report No. 7260-951c002
With t h i s heat and t h e oxygen l i b e r a t e d , any a f f e c t e d material w i l l burn e a s i e r than i n a i r . Hydrogen peroxide w i l l
a s 1300 degrees F.
mix with water and t h e b e s t way t o make s a f e any s p i l l a g e o r l e a k s i s

t o flood t h e a f f e c t e d a r e a s with water t o d i l u t e t h e hydrogen peroxide t o prevent decomposition. 2-31. C A H TRUCK RS
- The 0-11A
crash truck i s operated by four men The truck has U F and H
working i n heat r e s i s t a n t p r o t e c t i v e clothing.
VHF two-way radio communication.

high and contains a t r a p door. t o water-fog o r semi-fog. of 90 f e e t .
It i s capable of up t o 6-wheel d r i v e
The top of t h e cab i s 12 f e e t Two swiveling nozzles, located on t h e
with a t u r n radius of 40 f e e t 3 inches.
cab roof, can be adjusted t o control t h e water from a s t r a i g h t stream The s t r a i g h t stream can be thrown a distance The downwind range of t h e fog spray i s approximately 50 f e e t . The truck has a 19-inch ground clearance
Three fixed-spray nozzles adjusted f o r l e v e l spray a r e located on t h e lower f r o n t of t h e vehicle. of t h e truck. and two fixed-spray nozzles pointed downward t o p r o t e c t t h e underside Two 150-foot hand l i n e s a r e equipped with nozzles t h a t can I n t h e present configurWith a l l be adjusted from water-fog t o s t r a i g h t stream.
a t i o n , t h e crash truck has a water capacity of 1,100 gallons. exhausted i n 3 minutes.
nine nozzles discharging a t maximum r a t e , t h e water supply w i l l be ( I t i s planned t o f i g h t hydrogen peroxide and j e t engine f u e l f i r e s with water.) 2-32. TAKEOFF PAD FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
- The f i r e - f i g h t i n g
equipment
a t t h e takeoff pad includes one charged 2.0-inch diameter f i r e hose with a nozzle t h a t can vary t h e stream from s t r a i g h t stream t o water-fog, using water a t hydrant pressure, a garden hose with no nozzle (giving low pressure water), and a 100-pound carbon dioxide b o t t l e mounted on a two-wheel c a r t , a v a i l a b l e f o r e l e c t r i c a l f i r e s .
Report No. 7260-954002
2-33.
ENGm GROUND OPERATION
ENGINE PIELSTART C E K HC For t h e engine pre-start check, r e f e r 2-34. t o t h e Lunar Landing Training Vehicle Preflight Checklist No. 7260-931 005. COCKPIT C E K HC For the cockpit checks, r e f e r t o the Lunar Landing 2-35. Training Vehicle P i l o t Flight Checklist No. 7260-931008. 2-36.
A I R START UNIT (GSE)
A.
Blow down hose and connect a i r s t a r t hose t o vehicle.

WARNING
After p i l o t entry, and upon request from the p i l o t (1 finger signal) proceed
'
with t h e following steps. B.

C.
Turn G E u n i t ON. S Switch a i r ON and i g n i t i o n when requested from the p i l o t (2 f i n g e r signal).

WARNING
I f directed by the p i l o t ( t h r o a t cut signal) switch ignition OFF. Leave a i r ON t o purge f u e l from combustion and exhaust sections.
D.
Upon vehicle engine ignition, switch A i r S t a r t Unit ON and i g n i t i o n OFF when directed by the p i l o t (thumb down signal), and disconnect s t a r t e r a.ir hose and ignition cable.
Report No. 7260-954002
2-37. 2-38.
JP4 FUEL sERVICING JP4 FUEL LEVEL C E K HC A. Attach QD and d r a i n hose t o forward JP4 tank f i e 1 l e v e l probe. Release probe and record t h e l e v e l a t which f u e l s t a r t s t o drain.
B.
C.
Secure probe and remove QD and d r a i n hose. Repeat s t e p s A, B, and C f o r a f t JP4 tank.
CAUTION
D.
Check t h a t JP4 LW LEVEL and CAUTION O LEVEL i n d i c a t o r s on t h e annunciator panel a r e illuminated, i f f u e l remaining i s below t h e following levels:
1)
50%
- JP4 CUATION
LEVEL i n d i c a t o r
illuminated when remaining f u e l q u a n t i t y i s approximately 117 l b o r l e s s a s indicated i n e i t h e r tank. 2) 20% - JP4 LW LEVEL i n d i c a t o r O illuminated when remaining h e 1 q u a n t i t y i s approximately 46.8 Ib o r l e s s a s indicated i n e i t h e r tank. 2-39. REFUEL
A.
Disconnect a f t JP4 tank low l e v e l i n d i c a t o r probe cannon plug t o ensure v a l i d operation of JP4 CAUTION LEVEL and LW LEVEL O i n d i c a t o r s on annunciator panel.
B.
Attach QD and d r a i n hose t o forward tank f u e l l e v e l probe. Release probe and s e t t o f u e l l e v e l required.
C.
Report N .7260-954002 o
D.
E. F.
G.
Connect JP4 f i l l hose from supply t r a i l e r t o botton of forward tank. Service JP4 u n t i l f u e l overflows through f u e l probe.
~ ~ Shut o f f J P flow from J P t r a i l e r and disconnect f i l l l i n e s .
When drainage has creased from l e v e l probe., secure f u e l probe and record quantity serviced on Operations Log. Disconnect QD and d r a i n hose. Connect a f t tank l e v e l i n d i c a t o r probe cannon plug and check i n d i c a t o r l i g h t s on annunciator panel a r e illuminated. Repear s t e p s A through I f o r a f t J P tank. ~
H. I.
J. 2-40
JP4 TANK PRESSURIZATION NT OE This servicing procedure requires man i n cockpit.

A.
Check t h a t forward and a f t JP4 tank bleed valves a r e CLOSED and t h e f u e l l e v e l probe i s U and secure. P Verify t h a t t h e t h r o t t l e l e v e r i s i n t h e FULL CLOSE p o s i t i o n with IDLE STOP UP. Connect nitrogen pressure source from t h e helium and nitrogen gas s e r v i c e truck (figures 2-6 and 2-7), with a 60 p s i (max) r e l i e f valve, t o t h e gas charging valve.
B.
C.
D.
Slowly pressure t h e system t o 20
psig.
NOTE Man i n cockpit w i l l v e r i f y correct pressure indicated on t h e cockpit gages. Man operating pressurizing equipment w i l l a l s o v e r i f y c o r r e c t pressure indicated on t h e Service Truck Control Panel. Report No. 7260-954002
E Check system components for visible fie1 leaks. Check cockpit .

JP4 tank pressure gages for indication of nitrogen leaks. 2-41
HqOq SERVICING
A. Connect the H202 tank temperature monitor to the vehicle sensor.

B. Perform the following cockpit functions prior to H202 servicing. Verify that the lift rocket T-handle is down to the CLOSED position. Verify that the LIFT FKT V ACTUR, CB28 is in the OFT (DOWN) position. Place the Helium Crossover switch to the CLOSED position. Verif'y that the Att Rockets selector switch is placed to the BOTH position. Verify that the ACS Safe switch is placed to the SAFE (GUARD UP) position. NOTE A fire truck is required whenever 90% H 0 is serviced. 2 2 WARNING All personnel clear area except for the following assignments that require the wearing of appropriate protective H202 suits. communications and checklist frequently monitoring H202 temperature box. H202 Trailer - Servicing requires two men. Inspector At vehicle, with communications (one also at the van). Crew Chief
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
- With
Report No. 7260-954002
I n s t a l l H202 overflow l i n e t o tank vent valve and i n s e r t other end i n a bucket of water. Open both H 0 vent valves. 22 Attach the f i l l l i n e t o the r i g h t hand H202 tank f i l l e r valve. Open r i g h t hand f i l l valve and fill u n t i l there i s an overflow from vent l i n e .
NOTE -
Certify H202 LOW RIGHT TANK indicator extinguishes, i f applicable. Close r i g h t hand f i l l valve. Repeat steps C through G f o r servicing the l e f t hand H202 tank.
Certify H20Z LOW LEFT TANK indicator extinguishes, i f applicable. After servicing i s completed, close H202 tank vent valves and disconnect vent l i n e s and cap.
WARNING
Clear area. Disconnect H 0 temperature probe wires from vehicle and 2 2 s t o r e i n GSE service truck.
Report No. 7260-954002
CAUTION Throughout helium servicing, monitor the helium tank surface temperature. If necessary, cool the helium tank by running water over the tank surface to 5' maintain temperature below 10 F up to 3800 psi and below lloO F from 3 0 to 4 0 psi. 80 00 NOTE Helium servicing may be continued while other operations are being performed. A . Connect the helium tank temperature monitoring box. Verify that the helium manual shutoff valve is CLOSED.
B.
C Hook up helium servicing harness from GSE helium service . truck to vehicle and commence servicing. D. If applicable, verify HELIUM SOURCE LOW indicator extinguishes at 1775 50 psi.
E. F.
00 Continue servicing helium system to 4 0
+ 50 psi.
Close helium tank schrader valves.
G. Detach and cap helium service hoses.
H .
Cap helium tank schrader valves.
I Disconnect helium tank temperature monitoring box. .

J.
Secure the helium servicing equipment and remove equipment from the immediate area.
2-43. ENGINE TESTS For engine testing, refer to G.S. SEI-133 and to Lunar Landing Training Vehicle Pilot Flight Checklist No. 7260-931008.
Report No. 7260-954002
2-27
2-44.
HAND SIGNALS
A.
- The
hand s i g n a l s covering operations and movement
of t h e v e h i c l e a r e covered i n t h e following s t e p s .
B.
C.
D.
E. F.
- P i l o t - 1 finger. Switch ON A i r and I g n i t i o n - P i l o t - 2 f i n g e r s . Switch I g n i t i o n Off - P i l o t - Throat-cut s i g n a l . Switch OFF A i r and I g n i t i o n - P i l o t - Thumb down s i g n a l . Switch DC P W R Relay ON - P i l o t - ( 1 s t time) T-disconnect O E hands s i g n a l . D i s t r i b u t i o n Box t o OFF Switch OFF Data System - P i l o t - (2nd time) T-disconnect
Turn S t a r t Unit ON Power on Power D i s t r i b u t i o n Box hands s i g n a l .
2-45
STOPPING ENGINE
For i n s t r u c t i o n s t o s t o p the engine, r e f e r t o
Lunar Landing Training 2-46 SERVICING
Vehicle P i l o t Checklist No. 7260-931008.
Servicing i n s t r u c t i o n s include replenishment of JP4
f u e l , H 0 p r o p e l l a n t , helium, engine o i l , hydraulic f l u i d , n i t r o g e n 2 2 and oxygen, and t h e equipment required t o perform these operations. 2-47 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SERVICING
- The
hydraulic system of t h e v e h i c l e The hydraulic pump only operates
provides power f o r t h e p o s i t i o n i n g of t h e turbofan j e t engine mounting gimbals about t h e r o l l and p i t c h axes. when t h e j e t engine i s running, s o a s e x t e r n a l hydraulic t e s t stand such a s t h e t y p e D ~ - D ~ A r equivalent i s required f o r t h e s e r v i c i n g of t h e o hydraulic system.
A l l hydraulic f l u i d s h a l l conform t o M I L - H - ~ ~ O ~ A( r e d
c o l o r ) and s h a l l be f i l t e r e d through a a d d i t i o n a l information)
15 micron
absolute f i l t e r . (Refer
t o Hydraulic Systems Hangar Ground T e s t Procedure No. 7260-928055 f o r
CAUTION The o u t l e t of t h e t e s t stand s h a l l have a
l5
micron absolute f i l t e r t o prevent
contamination of t h e hydraulic system. NT OE
Report No. 7260-954002
The j e t engine gimbal locks must be removed f o r servicing.
2-48. HYDRAULIC TEST STAND The test stand D6 or D6A (figure 2-4) is a self-contained, mobile, testing unit, enclosed in steel weather resistant cabinets mounted on a trailer assembly. Doors are provided to permit access to all components within the cabinet. The test stand consists of the following assemblies: (1) cabinet assembly, (2) trailer assembly, (3) electric motor, (4)hydraulic reservoir, (5) pump, (6) filter and manifold assembly, (7) the control panel mounted opposite the hydraulic compartment, (8)a 50-foot power cable and two hoses for connecting the test stand to the LLTV hydraulic system. 2-49. F'LUSHING PROCEDURE - After installing the hydraulic system (or repair to major portions) flush with fluid which meets MIL-H-5606 and is filtered through a 25 micron absolute filter.
A.
Setup
1 ) At the actuators, disconnect the flexible lines and connect the pressure line to the return line, and disconnect the shuttle valve lines at each shuttle valve and connect together each set of lines. 2) At the reservoir, disconnect the return line and connect it to the return outlet on the test stand. 3) At the pump, disconnect the pressure line and connect it to the pressure outlet on the test stand. 4) Open the 7260-390001-1 manual shut-off valve in the reservoir reline line. 5) Pressurize the accumulator to 1200 50 psi with dry nitrogen. 6 ) Connect a jumper line across the 7260-390005-1 & -3 quick disconnects. 7) Place 7260-390009-1 manual hydraulic 3-way valve in PRESSURIZE position.
Report No. 7260-954002
2-30
Report Ao
. 7269-954002
B. Circulate Fluid
1 ) Disconnect both 7260-390002-1 solenoid valves from the vehicle electrical system and energize either valve with 28 volts, dc. . 2) Adjust the test stand pressure to provide 3 0 GPM and circulate fluid for 15 minutes.
NOTE Place a 25 micron absolute filter on the outlet of the test stand. Use test stand fluid meeting the following standard for minimum contamination ) (NAS 1638, class 5 : Particle Size (microns) 5-1 5 15-25 25-50 50-10 0 Over 1 0 0 Count per 1 0 ml 0 (per ARP 598)
80 00 1425 253
45
8
3) De-energize the 7260-390002-1 solenoid valve and energize

the other 7260-390002-1 valve and circulate fluid for 15 more minutes. 4) Have a sample of the fluid analyzed to show that it meets NAS 1638, class 5. C Reconnect .
1)
Shutdown and disconnect the test stand. Restore the
hydraulic system to normal configuration. 2) Place the 7260-390009-1 manual valve in the accumulator circuit in the CLOSED position.
Report No. 7260-954002
2-50.
FILLING
A.
- After
i n i t i a l i n s t a l l a t i o n and a f t e r major maintenance
f i l l system a s follows. Place the 7260-390001-1 manual valve i n the reservoir return
l i n e i n the C O E position, and the 7260-390009-1 manual L SD 3-way valve i n the PRESSURIZE position.
B.
Connect the hydraulic t e s t stand t o the system through the quick disconnect couplings on the structure ring.
C.
Increase the t e s t stand pressure t o about 300 p s i and cycle t h e actuators through f i v e cycles by applying and reversing
a 5-nia current across pins A and C of both 7260-390008 servo
actuators.
D.
With the actuators i n one extreme position, energize e i t h e r 7260-390002-1 solenoid valve with 28 vdc t o center the actuators with the gimbal centering mechanism.
E .
De-energize t h e solenoid valve and repeat the centering action using the other 7260-390002-1 solenoid valve t o center t h e actuators from the opposite extreme position.
F.
Reduce the t e s t stand pressure t o zero. 7260-390002-1 solenoid valve.
De-energize the
TESTING
- To
t e s t f o r external and i n t e r n a l leakage proceed a s
~ O ~ ~ O W S .
A.
External leaks.
1)
Connect the hydraulic t e s t stand t o the system through t h e quick disconnect couplings. Place the 7260-390001-1 manual valve i n the reservoir return l i n e i n the C O E position, and the 7260-390009-1 L SD manual valve i n the PRESSURIZE position.
2)
Report No. 7260-954.002
2-50.
FILLING
A.
- After
f i l l system a s follows. Place the 7260-390001-1 manual valve i n the reservoir return
l i n e i n the C O E position, and the 7260-390009-1 manual L SD 3-way valve i n the PRESSURIZE position.
B.
Connect the hydraulic t e s t stand t o the system through the quick disconnect couplings on the structure ring.
C.
Increase the t e s t stand pressure t o about 300 p s i and cycle the actuators through f i v e cycles by applying and reversing a 5-~~ia current across pins A and C of both 7260-390008 servo actuators.
D.
With the actuators i n one extreme position, energize e i t h e r 7260-390002-1 solenoid valve with 28 vdc t o center the actuators with the gimbal centering mechanism.
E .
De-energize t h e solenoid valve and repeat the centering action using the other 7260-390002-1 solenoid valve t o center t h e actuators from the opposite extreme position.
F.
Reduce the t e s t stand pressure t o zero. 7260-390002-1 solenoid valve.
De-energize the
2-51.
TESTING
follows
- To
t e s t f o r external and i n t e r n a l leakage proceed a s
A.
External leaks. 1) 2) Connect the hydraulic t e s t stand t o the system through the quick disconnect couplings. Place the 7260-390001-1 manual valve i n the reservoir return l i n e i n the C O E position, and the 7260-390009-1 L SD manual valve i n the PRESSURIZE position.
Report No. 7260-954002
0 3) Increase the test stand pressure to 1 0 psi at a slow
enough rate so that any leak can be immediately detected as it occurs. NOTE -
If any fitting leaks, reduce the pressure to zero and retorque the fitting - but not beyond the following values:
1 4 lines /"
3/8" lines
300 inch pounds 450 inch pounds
4) Energize both 7260-390002-1 solenoid valves with 28 vdc

and check connecting lines for leakage. 40 5) Increase the pressure to 2 0 psi at a slow enough rate so that any leak can be detected immediately as it occurs. 40 Hold this pressure at 2 0 psi for three minutes minimum while checking for leaks. 6 ) Increase the pressure until the 7260-390003-1 relief valve opens (2750 + 275 psi). 7) Reduce pressure to zero. De-energize solenoid valves and reconnect the 7260-390002-1 solenoid valve in the accodator circuit into the vehicle electrical system. Remove the electrical connectors from the 7260-390008 actuator servo valves.
B.
Internal leaks and system tests.
1)
With DC electrical power on the vehicle, increase hydraulic 40 0 pressure from 1200 psi to 2 0 psi in 4 0 psi increments. Check the readings of the accumulator 7260-390006-1 pressure 0 gage versus a master gage. Accuracy shall be 2 8 psi.
NOTE -
The main system hydraulic pressure gage should read approximately in the center of the green band at 2400 'psi. Report No. 7260-954002
2)
OK The E E G N Y GlMBAL L C warning i n d i c a t o r s h a l l extinguish MR E C before 1600 p s i maximum pressure i s reached. i n d i c a t o r t o extinguish.)
ma he
Emergency
Gimbal Lock Reset pushbutton must be held down f o r t h e The following s t e p s a r e required t o check t h e back up pressure switch: a) Place GM A L C switch t o ON p o s i t i o n . I B L OK The green
GM A L C E M D i n d i c a t o r w i l l i l l u m i n a t e . I B L O K D OE b) P u l l c i r c u i t breaker CB4, t o deenergize t h e normal gimbal lock solenoid. This w i l l cause t h e green GIMEAL L C E MODE i n d i c a t o r t o extinguish and t h e OKD red E E G N Y GIMBALS L C E i n d i c a t o r t o i l l u m i n a t e . MR E C OKD c) Push c i r c u i t breaker CB4 back i n , and r e s e t t h e E E G N Y GIMBALS L C E RESET button. NR E C OKD This w i l l energize t h e normal gimbals locked solenoid, causing t h e green GIMBALS L C E MODE i n d i c a t o r O KD t o i l l u m i n a t e , unlatch t h e emergency gimbals locked solenoid, causing t h e red E E G N Y GIMBALS L C E Mn E C OKD i n d i c a t o r t o extinguish. d) Place GM A L C switch t o OFF p o s i t i o n . I B L OK The green GM A L C E M D i n d i c a t o r w i l l extinguish. I B L O K D OE 3) Place t h e 7260-390009-1 3-way manual valve i n t h e CLOSED p o s i t i o n and, a f t e r one minute, record accumulator pressure a t one minute i n t e r v a l s f o r t e n minutes. on f i g u r e 2-5. 4) Plot the data The r e s u l t a n t curve must l i e above curve (1).
I f t h e n a t u r a l unbalance of t h e servo valves has not caused t h e a c t u a t o r s t o go hard-over, apply 5-ma t o Pins A and C of t h e valves.
5)
Reduce hydraulic p r e s s u r e a t a r a t e which w i l l enable d e t e c t i o n of t h e pressure a t which t h e TNERGENCY GM A I BL L C i n d i c a t o r i l l u m i n a t e s and t h e gimbals center. This OK pressure should be 1350 i 50 p s i and gimbal centering should be without o s c i l l a t i o n or hunting. Report No. 7260-954.002
(B)
6)
Place t h e 7260-390009-1 position.
(3-way valve) i n t h e PRESSURISE
Slowly i n c r e a s e t h e t e s t stand pressure t o 2400 p s i .
D n o t p r e s s Emergency Gimbal Lock o Reset pushbutton. remain centered. The engine w i l l E E G N Y GIMBAL MR E C
L C i n d i c a t o r w i l l remain illuminated. OK 7) S e t t h e three-way valve t o OFF ( c e n t e r ) and reduce t e s t stand pressure t o zero. Record accumulator p r e s s u r e a t one minute i n t e r v a l s f o r t e n minutes. P l o t t h e d a t a on f i g u r e 2-5. The r e s u l t a n t curve must l i e above curve ( 2 ) .
8)
9) S e t t h e 7260-390009-1 manual valve i n t h e accumulator

c i r c u i t t o DUMP. 10) Disconnect t h e hydraulic t e s t stand and remove e l e c t r i c a l power from t h e v e h i c l e . valve s Replace t h e e l e c t r i c a l connectors t o t h e main system soienoid valve and t h e a c t u a t o r servo
1 ) Open t h e 7260-390001-1 manual valve i n t h e r e s e r v o i r 1 return line.

2-52 ACCUMULATOR CHARGING AND SYSTEM FILL
A.
Remove cap from charging valve on accumulator. Connect a regulated source of dry, f i l t e r e d n i t r o g e n t o t h e accumulator charging valve and open t h e charging valve. Slowly increase n i t r o g e n pressure t o accumulator u n t i l pressure s t a b i l i z e s a t 1200
B.
C.
50 psig.
D. Close charging v a l v e , reduce source p r e s s u r e , vent hose,

and disconnect hose from charging valve.
Report No. 7260-954002
E.
F.
G.
Cap valve. F i l l hydraulic system r e s e r v o i r on turbofan engine t o FULL indication i n sight glass. Check t h a t manual shutoff valve i s s a f e t y wired in it O E PN position.
I f t h e manual shutoff valve i s not opened, t h e engine gimballing system
w i l l not operate, c r e a t i n g an
o p e r a t i o n a l hazard. TUREOFAN ENGINE O I L SERVICING 2-53 with an i n t e g r a l p r e s s u r e o i l system. throughout t h e engine. a 25 micron f i l t e r .
- The
turbofan engine i s provided
This system supplies o i l under
pressure f o r l u b r i c a t i o n of gears, accessory d r i v e s , and bearings l o c a t e d The engine o i l tank i s l o c a t e d on t h e l e f t s i d e of t h e engine when viewing t h e LLTV from t h e r e a r , and i s supplied with The following s t e p s a r e f o r s e r v i c i n g t h e system by adding o r changing t h e o i l .
A.
Check t h e o i l l e v e l i n t h e tank w i t h i n 10 minutes a f t e r engine shutdown. NT OE While t h e engine i s i n o p e r a t i v e , o i l seeps from t h e tank i n t o t h e gear box and may give a f a l s e i n d i c a t i o n of a low o i l supply i f t h e l e v e l i s checked a f t e r t h e engine has been i n o p e r a t i v e f o r a l e n g t h of time. I f a preflight inspection receals t h a t the o i l l e v e l i n tank i s low, motor engine f o r 30 seconds and recheck o i l l e v e l .
Report No. 7260-954002
Accumulator Pressure Decay' Curves are based on maximum component leakage rates specified on blueprint. For normal operating condi-
Figure 2-5. Accumulator Pressure Decay
CAUTION
Contact with MIL-L-7808 o i l can cause skin irritation. Skin should be washed thoroughly a f t e r contact. well ventilated.
A l l areas i n
which j e t engine o i l i s used should be
B.
Add mL-L-7808 o i l a s required. NT OE Do not m i x o i l s , and o i l should be passed through a 25 micron f i l t e r p r i o r t o using it.
C.
When checking o i l l e v e l , remove t h e o i l tank f i l t e r cap. Check o i l l e v e l on d i p s t i c k (Refer t o I/A/W G Memo, dated E 24 Oct 1968.) and add MIL-L-7808 f u l l mark. o i l t o bring o i l l e v e l t o
D.
2--54 CHANGING OIL

A.
B.
Remove t h e o i l tank f i l t e r cap. Remove t h e d r a i n plugs from t h e o i l tank, accessory gear box, and t r a n s f e r grear box.
7
NT OE
Catch t h e draining o i l i n a s u i t a b l e container.

C
Remove and clean t h e o i l f i l t e r . Examine t h e magnetic d r a i n plugs f o r metal p a r t i c l e s .
D.
Report No. 7260-954002
CAUTION I f metallic p a r t i c l e s are p r e s e n t , perform t h e procedure i n paragraph before proceeding. E. Remove and d i s c a r d t h e O-rings and clean t h e d r a i n plugs w i t h an approved s o l v e n t such a s t r i c h l o r o e t h a n e o r kerosene. I n s t a l l new O-rings on t h e d r a i n plugs and f i l t e r , and replace plugs and f i l t e r .
G.
2-55
F.
F i l l t h e o i l tank with o i l MIL-L-7808
t o t h e f u l l mark.
NOTE Engine w i l l r e q u i r e a d d i t i o n a l o i l , a f t e r f i r s t engine run, t o b r i n g t h e o i l t o f u l l mark on the dipstick. 2- 55 METALLIC PARTICLE C E K HC
CAUTION
Due t o t h e close tolerance t o which t h e engine i s manufactured, m e t a l l i c chips i n t h e l u b r i c a t i o n system can be a s e r i o u s problem. Since each i n c i d e n t has p e c u l i a r circumstances, caution and good judgement must be exercised p r i o r t o operating t h e engine.
Report No. 7260-954002
A.
Determine whether t h e p a r t i c l e s a r e magnetic o r non-magnetic and whether t h e lube f i l t e r i s clogged Check t o see i f t h e p a r t i c l e s a r e non-magnetic and bronze i n color. I f so, suspect a bearing f a i l u r e . Check t h e r o t o r f o r smooth operation and t r y t o determine source of p a r t i c l e s p r i o r t o engine operation. I f t h e p a r t i c l e s a r e only a few i n number and a r e not bronze i n c o l o r , whether magnetic o r non-magnetic and have t h e appearance of a c u r l (machine chip) o r lockwire chip, immedia t e l y suspect f o r e i g n nontamination'. engine f o r a period o f S t a r t and operate t h e
B.
C.
D.
15 minutes a t i d l e power s e t t i n g .
E.
F.
Shut t h e engine down normally and d r a i n t h e l u b r i c a t i o n system i n accordance with paragraph 2-54. Examine t h e f i l t e r and d r a i n plugs f o r m e t a l l i c p a r t i c l e s . none a r e present, continue w i t h t h e o i l change procedure of paragraph 2-54. I f metallic p a r t i c l e s are present, locate the If f a u l t y component and replace and r e f i l l t h e o i l system. If
t h e f a u l t y component cannot be i d e n t i f i e d , replace t h e engine. EUCTRICAL AND PNEUMATIC TEST CART The E l e c t r i c a l and Pneumatic 2-56 t e s t c a r t , P/N 7260-710001, i s used f o r f u n c t i o n a l t e s t i n g of t h e LLTV Rocket system and can be used f o r s e r v i c i n g t h e vehicle Helium supply p r i o r t o v e h i c l e rocket system operations. The c a r t has t h e c a p a b i l i t y of f i l t e r i n g and r e g u l a t i n g an i n l e t gas supply of 0-4500 p s i g t o provide ;T t h e i n d i v i d u a l regulated p r e s s u r i z a t i o n of t h e LL V Helium system and both H202 tanks. Using a 28 vdc supply t o t h e c a r t and t h e f o u r e l e c t r i c a l cables mounted i n s i d e t h e c a r t , i n d i v i d u a l c o n t r o l of t h e 1 6 a t t i t u d e rocket solenoid valves i s provided by connecting t h e e l e c t r i c a l cables t o t h e a p p r o p r i a t e e l e c t r i c a l connector mounted on t h e 90 pound rocket c l u s t e r assembly, a c t u a t i n g t h e E/P c a r t c i r c u i t breaker and a c t u a t i n g t h e i n d i v i d u a l p a n e l switches on t h e c a r t ' s c o n t r o l panel. See f i g u r e 2-6 f o r T e s t Cart Pneumatic schematic. 2-4.0 Report No. 7260-954002
2-57
E/P CART OPERATIONS M T O FOR HELIUM SERVICING O LLTV HELIUM EH D F

The preliminary checkout procedure and s e r v i c i n g i s a s
SUPPLY TANKS. follows :
A.
B.
Check t h a t both fielium tank and H202 tank r e g u l a t o r s a r e backed off f u l l y counterclockwise. Close t h e i n l e t source valve. Close t h e Helium tank supply valve. Close the common H 0 tank supply valve. 2 2 Close both H202 tank vent valves. Open t h e Helium tank vent valve. supply l i n e . Attach t h e supply s e r v i c e manifold t o t h e l i n e Attach Kellum Safety
C.
D.
E.
G.
H. Remove t h e Helium o u t l e t p o r t cap and a t t a c h t h e Helium

and close t h e manifold hand valve. g r i p t o c a r t hook. CAUTION D not a t t a c h manifold t o v e h i c l e o service port.
I.
I n s t a l l t h e helium source supply l i n e t o t h e E/P c a r t i n l e t P o r t A and a t t a c h t h e Kellum s a f e t y g r i p t o t h e c a r t hook, t h e n a t t a c h supply l i n e and Kellum s a f e t y g r i p t o s e r v i c e t r u c k helium supply.
J.
Apply pressure t o source l i n e (4500 p s i g max) using s e r v i c i n g t r u c k valves.
NOTE Check connection f o r t i g h t n e s s i f leakage

i s observed.
K.
L.
O E THE INLET SOURCE V L E AND N T S U C PRESSURE GAGE PN AV OE O R E READING NOT GREATER THAN 45 PSIG. Open t h e Helium system s e r v i c e valve t o apply p r e s s u r e t o Helium regulator.
Report No. 7260-954002
HELIUM TANK RIGHT TANK
H2O 2 LEFT TANK
H2O2
SOURCE PRESSURE
GG AE F i g u r e 2-6. E/P T e s t C a r t Pnuematic Schematic
PORT A INLET
(2-57) M. N.
Slowly open t h e r e g u l a t o r valve and note audible gas flow from Helium vent, t h e n close vent valve. Continue p r e s s u r i z a t i o n of t h e vehicle s e r v i c e l i n e and E/P Cart system t o 4500 psig.
CAUTION
Note t h a t t h e r e g u l a t o r c o n t r o l s t h e pressure i n d i c a t e d on t h e Helium tank gage and check system when pressurized f o r leakage by s h u t t i n g off i n l e t source valve and noting pressure decay. Note t h a t t h e helium r e g u l a t o r has a b u i l t i n r e l i e f valve which may cause pressure loss. Repair l e a k s immediately; i f r e p a i r i s not p r a c t i c a l and leakage i s minimal and not a hazard t o operations, r e p a i r a t a more p r a c t i c a l time. 0. Open t h e s e r v i c i n g manifold hand valve slowly and purge t h e s e r v i c e l i n e s p r i o r t o a t t a c h i n g t o t h e Helium tank schraeder valves; then close manifold hand valve and a t t a c h t h e manif o l d t o t h e tanks.
P.
Q.
Back out t h e r e g u l a t o r and vent any pressure from t h e c a r t system. Check t h a t t h e v e h i c l e Helium manual shutoff valves a r e closed and schraeder valves on Helium tanks a r e open. Open t h e i n l e t source valve closed i n s t e p N . Service t h e Helium tanks t o t h e desired pressure using t h e r e g u l a t or. When p r e s s u r i z a t i o n i s complete, close t h e Helium tank s e r v i c i n g schraeder valves.
R.
S.
T.
Report No. 72600954002
U.
Close t h e source valve on t h e supply truck. Back o u t r e g u l a t o r t o zero. Disconnect and s t o r e t h e Helium servicing l i n e and manifold
i f n o t needed f o r continuation of t e s t s , o r topping o f f
V. W .
Helium tank pressures, cap and plug open p o r t s .
X.
Shut o f f helium source supply valve on truck. Carefully disconnect helium supply l i n e from t h e source truck and allow pressure t o r e l i e v e from t h e loosened f i t t i n g t h e cap and plug t h e opened p o r t s .
Y.
Z.
Disconnect t h e helium supply l i n e from t h e E/P Cart.
Cap and
plug t h e open p o r t s and close t h e E/P Cart i n l e t source valve. 2-58
E/P CART H202 TANK PRESSURIZATION.- The preliminary checkout
procedure and s e r v i c i n g i s a s follows:

A.
Check t h a t both-Helium tank and H202 tank regulators a r e backed o f f f u l l y counterclockwise.
B.
C.
Close t h e i n l e t source valve. Close t h e Helium tank supply valve. CTose t h e common H202 tank supply valve. Open both H202 tank supply valves. Open both H202 tank vent valves on E/P Cart, Close t h e Helium tank vent valve. Remove t h e H202 tank p o r t caps and i n s t a l l t h e H202 tenk service l i n e s a s necessary.
D.
E.
F .
G.
H.
I I n s t a l l t h e helium source supply l i n e t o t h e E/P c a r t i n l e t , .
Report No. 7260-954002
J.
Apply pressure t o source l i n e (4500 psig max) using servicing truck valves. NT OE Check connections f o r tightness i f leakage i s observed.
iC.
O E THE INLET S U C V L E AND N T S U C PRESSURE G G PN O R E AV OE O R E AE
W I N G NOT G E T R THAN 4500 psig. RAE
L.
Open the common H 0 tank supply hand valve. 2 2 Open the H202 tank c a r t vent valve. Open the LH/RH tank H202 supply valves and increase the regulator s e t t i n g t o purge t h e cart; then close the vents.
M.
N.
0.
Increase pressure on the plugged service l i n e s t o 600 p s i and check f o r obvious f i t t i n g leakage; tighten a s necessary any fitting. Shut o f f i n l e t source valve and observe any unusual pressure l o s s .
CAUTION
Note t h a t the regulator has a b u i l t i n r e l i e f system and may be venting. the leakage immediately. Repair
I f the repair i s
not p r a c t i c a l and leakage i s minimal and not a hazard t o operations, r e p a i r a t a more p r a c t i c a l time.
Report No. 7260-954002
P.
With t h e i n l e t source valve shut o f f , vent t h e system by backing o f f t h e r e g u l a t o r t o zero p s i i n d i c a t e d on t h e
H 0
2 2
tank gages.
Q.
R.
Open t h e i n l e t source valve. Remove t h e s e r v i c e l i n e plugs. Using t h e r e g u l a t o r , purge

2 2
t h e l i n e s p r i o r t o i n s t a l l a t i o n on t h e H 0
tank manual vent
valve o u t l e t p o r t , o r o t h e r f i t t i n g i f so d i r e c t e d .
S.
Open the v e h i c l e H 0 Pressurize the H 0 regulators.

2 2
2 2
tank manual vent valves.
T.
tanks a s necessary f o r t e s t s using the
U.
When p r e s s u r i z a t i o n work i s complete, back out r e g u l a t o r t o zero p s i g and open t h e LH and RH H 0 tank vent valves on 2 2 cart.
V.
Close t h e Helium supply truck shut o f f valves.
W Carefully disconnect t h e Helium supply l i n e allowing .

p r e s s u r e t o r e l i e v e through t h e f i t t i n g . t h e opened p o r t s . Then cap and plug
X.
Y.
Z.
Disconnect and s t o r e t h e helium supply l i n e from t h e E/P Bart. Close t h e E/P Cart i n l e t source valve. Disconnect t h e H 0
2 2
tank s e r v i c e l i n e s .
Cap and plug open
p o r t s and s t o r e t h e l i n e s i n t h e E/P Cart. The helium and nitrogen 2-59. HELIUM AND NITROGEN GAS SERVICE TRUCK gas s e r v i c e t r u c k ( f i g u r e 2-7) i s a standard make, flat-bed truck with two s t o r a g e racks t h a t contain helium and nitrogen b o t t l e s . Each s t o r a g e rack has a c o n t r o l panel ( f i g u r e 2-8) containing p r e s s u s gages s h u t o f f valves, and pressure r e g u l a t o r s required f o r helium and nitrogen
2-46
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No. 7260954002
2-47
Report No. 7260-954002
s e r v i c i n g t h e LLTV. t h e UTV.
The s e r v i c e t r u c k a l s o has two independent 28 v o l t
dc generators driven by a gasoline engine t o supply e l e c t r i c power t o Operating procedures f o r t h e service t r u c k a r e contained i n N S Operating Procedures, MSC-12-C, AA 2-60
D, and E.
accumulator pressure c a r t
ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE CART
- The
( f i g u r e 2-9) i s a ho-wheel, p o r t a b l e rack with a nitrogen b o t t l e .
It
a l s o contains a pressure gage, pressure r e g u l a t o r , and a shutoff valve, and i s used t o supply a pre-charge t o t h e hydraulic accumulator on t h e LLTV. Procedures f o r operation of c a r t f o r accumulator use a r e contained i n ~ c c u m u l a t o rPressure Cart Operating Procedure MSC-12-G. 2-61 HC LANDING GEAR S O K STRUTS PRESSURE CART
- The
landing gear shock
s t r u t s pressure c a r t ( f i g u r e 2-9) i s t h e same c a r t t h a t i s used f o r t h e accumulator. Operating procedures f o r s e r v i c i n g t h e shock s t r u t s a r e contained i n Landing Gear Pressure Cart Operational Procedure
MSC-12-J .
2-62 PILOT'S O Y E C R X GN A T
- The p i l o t ' s
oxygen c a r t ( f i g u r e 2-10) i s The
a p o r t a b l e , wheel mounted, rack containing two oxygen b o t t l e s . t h e p i l o t ' s oxygen b o t t l e on t h e U T V . Operational Procedure MSC-12-F. 2-..63 LUBRICATION
c a r t i s equipped with pressure gages and shutoff valves f o r s e r v i c i n g Procedures f o r operating t h e oxygen c a r t a r e contained i n t h e P i l o t ' s Breathing Oxygen Cart
- The
only l u b r i c a t i o n required i s a s follows:
A.
Use Florolube LG-160 (grease) on new H 0 s e r v i c e f i t t i n g s 2 2 t o prevent galled threads.
Report No. 7260-954.002
Figure 2-9. Nitrogen Pressure Cart
Report No. 7260-9 54002
Figure 2-10,PilotVsOwgen Cart
Report No. 7260-954002
2-51/2052
SECTION I11 VEHICLE PREPARATION FOR SHIPPING
3-1. GENERAL
3-2. This section contains the necessary instructions to prepare the vehicle for shipping, removing LLTV components from their shipping containers and to assemble them at their destination. Instructions also include the steps necessary to ship the LLTV, fully assembled, by air.
3-3. LLTV REMOVAL FROM SHIPPING SKID
- The shipping skid has been
fabricated to provide support and protection for the center body, turbofan jet engine, and pilot's compartment, as a single unit, during transportation. Proceed as follows for the removal sequence. NOTE Retain the shipping skid for future shipping requirements.
3 4 LLTV ASSEMBLY
NOTE Assembly of the LLTV requires use of an overhead hoisting device with a minimum capacity of two tons. CAUTION Ladders or maintenance stands shall be used during all erection procedures. The aluminum tubing construction of the LLTV will not support the weight of service personnel.
Report No. 7260-954002
A.
Remove t h e covers from t h e LLTV s t r u c t u r e and r e l e a s e a l l p o i n t s of attachment t o t h e skid.
B. Attach t h e LLTV h o i s t s l i n g t o t h e terminals a t t h e f o u r upper

corners of t h e c e n t e r body.
CAUTION
Do not r a i s e t h e LLTV a t t h i s time.
C.
Check t h a t cable assemblies between t k ~ ediagonally opposite upper corners of t h e c e n t e r body s t r u c t u r e a r e i n place and properly torqued.
D.
C a r e f u l l y r a i s e t h e s t r u c t u r e from t h e skid t o a height of approximately e i g h t f e e t .
E.
.Remove: t h e skipping skid.
3-5.
L G INSTALLATION AFTER UNPACKING E
- Unpack
t h e four l e g and landing
gear s t r u t assemblies, and a t t a c h each l e g t o t h e center body according t o t h e following procedures and B e l l Drawings No. 7260-155001 and 7260-155002. For l e g maintenance, o r r e m o v a l / i n s t a l l a t i o n a f t e r t h e vehicle i s f u l l y assembled, r e f e r t o Section N ,paragraph 4-26.
A.
Align t h e t h r e e longeron attachment c l e v i s f i t t i n g s below tangs a t one upper corner of t h e c e n t e r body s t r u c t u r e and two hard p o i n t s on main support ring. t o engage c l e v i s e s with tangs. Raise l e g assembly i n t o p o s i t i o n
B.
I n s t a l l b o l t , washer, and nut through c l e v i s e s and tangs and tighten finger tight.
C.
P o s i t i o n t h e tube assemblies s o t h e b o l t holes a r e aligned and secure i n place with o r i g i n a l hardware.
D.
Tighten a l l attachment hardware, and torque t o
35 i n c h pounds.
E Repeat s t e p s A through D f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e remaining .

three legs. Report No. 7260-954002
F.
Lower the U T V u n t i l e n t i r e vehicle weight i s supported on landing gear shock s t r u t pads.
G .
I n s t a l l external power receptacle on r i g h t r e a r landing l e g and secure cable t o leg.
H.
I.
Engage e l e c t r i c a l connectors a t each leg. Service shock s t r u t s .

CAUTION
D not remove LLTV hoist s l i n g o until leg installation i s completed. 3-6. A T EQUIPMENT P A F R INSTALLATION F L TO M
The a f t equipment platform Consult the N S AA
i s adjustable according t o balance requirements.

t o the vehicle structure and proceed a s follows: A.
Weight and Balance engineer t o determine the exact points of attachment
~emovethe a f t equipment platform from i t s shipping container. Align the platform attachment flanges with the appropriate s e t of mounting holes i n the vehicle structure and secure with b o l t s , washers, and nuts.
CAUTION
B.
Support the a f t equipment platform t o prevent s t r a i n s a t the attachment points, u n t i l a l l b o l t s a r e i n place, and the diagonal braces i n s t a l l e d .
C.
Loosely a t t a c h the diagonal braces t o the upper corners of the forward equipment structure with b o l t s and washers through the single hole i n braces.
Report No. 7260-954002
D.
S e l e c t h o l e i n t h e a f t end of diagonal braces, checking t h a t platform p o s i t i o n i s perpendicular t o t h e v e r t i c a l H beams. Then s e l e c t t h e appropriate h o l e s i n t h e o t h e r end of t h e diagonal braces and a l i g n them w i t h t h e h o l e s i n t h e ends of t h e a f t equipment platform t u b u l a r beam. and washers. Attach with b o l t s
E. 3-7.
Tighten a l l mounting hardware and torque t o 55 inch pounds.
R C E SYSTEM INSTALLATION OKT
I n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e l i f t and a t t i t u d e Use one
c o n t r o l rocket system i s described i n t h e following paragraphs. on F a l l s , N w ~ o r k ) piping connections. e
o r two drops of Fluorolube LG-160 ( ~ o o k e r Electrochemical Company, Niagara Be c e r t a i n of exact torque values required f o r mounting hardware and f i t t i n g s .
3 .
Hz02 TANK INSTALLATION
Refer t o paragraph 7-22 f o r t h e l e f t and
r i g h t H 0 tank i n s t a l l a t i o n . 2 2
3-9.
HELIUM TANK INSTALLATION
- Refer
t o paragraph 7-23 f o r i n s t a l l i n g
t h e two helium p r e s s u r e tanks. 3-10. R C E SYSTEM PIPING INSTALLATION OKT
- The rocket
system piping i d
i n s t a l l e d i n accordance with B e l l Aerosystems Company Drawings No. 7260460001 and 7260-460002, and 7260-460003. P r i o r t o t h e piping i n s t a l l a The e n t i r e system should t i o n , conditioned valves should be i n s t a l l e d . then be l e a k checked and conditioned f o r H202. WARNING D n o t remove any caps on f i t t i n g s , o u n t i l they a r e t o be connected, t o avoid contaminating t h e H202 system. Wear p r o t e c t i v e c l o t h i n g and have water f l o o d s a v a i l a b l e a t a l l times a f t e r H 0 has been introduced i n t o 2 2 t h e system. Report No. 7260-954002
3-11.
LIFT R C E INSTALLATION OKT
- The
two l i f t rockets a r e i n s t a l l e d on The
brackets attached t o t h e main s t r u c t u r a l r i n g of t h e center body. tamination.
rocket engines a r e sealed i n individual transparent bags t o prevent conUse extreme care t o avoid contaminating t h e rocket engines Apply with o i l , dust, d i r t , o r foreign p a r t i c l e s during i n s t a l l a t i o n .
one o r two drops of Fluorolube LG-160 ( ~ o o k e r Electrochemical Company, Niagara F a l l s , New ~ o r k ) o t h e male threads of a l l f i t t i n g s t o f a c i l i t a t e t assembly. Maintain caps on a l l f i t t i n g s u n t i l j u s t p r i o r t o connection Refer t o parat o prevent contamination of rocket engines and piping. graph 7-24 f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures. 3-12. ATTITUDE C N R L R C E INSTALLATION O TO OKT
- Refer
t o paragraph 7-26
f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures. t o t h e main s t r u c t u r e .
The a t t i t u d e control u n i t s a r e attached Maintain caps
Each c l u s t e r of four a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l rockets
i s i n s t a l l e d according t o t h e procedures l i s t e d i n 7-26.

of piping and valving.
on a l l f i t t i n g s u n t i l j u s t p r i o r t o connection t o prevent contamination Apply two drops of Fluorolube LG-160 t o t h e

A l l a t t i t u d e control
male threads of a l l f i t t i n g s t o a i d i n assembly. rocket c l u s t e r s a r e i d e n t i c a l .
JP4 TANK INSTALLATION 3-13. installation.

3-14.
- Refer
-
t o paragraph 6-66 f o r JP4 tank
LANDING STRUT INSTALLATION
The landing struts, a s shipped, a r e
i n s t a l l e d on t h e legs.
The following procedure i s f o r i n s t a l l i n g t h e
strut on t h e leg.
A. Align t h e lower end of t h e strut with t h e centering guide i n bracket and i n s e r t strut through guide.
B.
Secure strut t o c l e v i s on landing l e g with b o l t , washer, nut, and c o t t e r pin.
C.
I n s t a l l pad on strut and secure with b o l t , washer, nut, and c o t t e r pin.
D.
Connect microswitch leads.
Report No. 7260-954002
3-1
5.
T R O A JET ENGINE R P A E E T UBFN EL C M N The LLTV i s shipped with the turbofan j e t engine installed.
3-1 6 .
Refer t o Section V I f o r j e t engine removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures. 3-17. L T DISASSEMBLY LV
Disassembly of the L T i s the reverse of LV
assembly.
(Refer t o paragraph 3-4).
E OA Removal of the l e g i s the reverse of i n s t a l l a t i o n . 3-18. LEG R M V L (Refer t o paragraph3-5 .)
NOTE Removal of front legs requires removal of several rocket system propellent l i n e s . F L TO M 3-19. A T EQUIPMENT P A F R REMOVAL - Removal of the a f t equipment platform i s the reverse of i n s t a l l a t i o n . (Refer t o paragraph 3-6. ) 3-20. H202 TANK REMOVAL
Removal of the H202 tanks i s the reverse of
installation.
(Refer t o paragraph 3-8.)
3-21.
HELIUM TANK REMOVAL
- Removal of
the helium tank i s the reverse
of i n s t a l l a t i o n . 3-.22.
R C E S S E PIPING FENOVAL O KT YT M
- Removal of
the rocket system
piping i s the reverse of i n s t a l l a t i o n .
( ~ e f e t o paragraph 3-10. ) r
LIFT ROCKET REMOVAL - Removal of the l i f t rockets i s the reverse 3-23. r of i n s t a l l a t i o n . ( ~ e f e t o paragraph 3-11.) 3-24.
ATTITUDE CONTROL ROCKET REMOVAL
- Removal of
the a t t i t u d e control
rockets i s the reverse of i n s t a l l a t i o n .
3-6
Report No. 7260-954002
3-25.
tanks.
JP1 TANK REMOVAL
- Refer
t o paragraph 6-36for removal of the
JP4.
326.
L N I G S R T REMOVAL A DN TU
- Removal of
the landing strut i s the
reverse of i n s t a l l a t i o n .
( ~ e f e t o paragraph 3-14.) r
3-27. 328.
TRANSPORTING UV BY AIR T
The vehicle can be transported, f u l l y assembled (except removal

Figure 3-1 shows the vehicle ready f o r a i r shipment, except
of t h e a f t equipment platform electronic boxes), i n a Super Guppy transp o r t plane. f o r i t s p l a s t i c cover.
329..
PREPARING VEHICLE
- The vehicle
s h a l l be prepared f o r a i r
transportation by performing the following steps:

WARNING
Ensure t h a t a l l tanks ( J P ~ , H202, and ~ e l i u m )and l i n e s a r e empty, before preparing vehicle f o r shipment.
A.
Remove a l l electronic boxes from the a f t equipment platform and place each electronic box i n t o a shipping container.
The only boxes and equipment not removed are the Doppler antenna, c i r c u i t breaker box, and a l l cables.
B.
Place p l a s t i c bag over each cable connector throughout the vehicle and secure p l a s t i c bag with cord or rubber band. (See figure 3-2. )
C.
Tie cables together, when possible, then t i e cable bundle t o nearest s t r u t o r crossbar.
Report No. 7260-954002
3-7
Report No. 7260-954002
3-9
D.
E.
F.
Tie a l l equipment platform cables i n t o one bundle and secure t o bottom of equipment platform with tape. (see figure 3-2) Tape ground cable t o r i g h t r e a r l e g of vehicle. Completely cover H 0 tanks with padded protective covers. 2 2 (see figure 3-3). NT OE The padded cover f o r each tank
i s made up of several pieces, t o
simplify f i t t i n g around brackets, pipe l i n e s , and other obstacles. A velcron border on each piece simplifies i n s t a l l a t i o n .
G.
Completely cover helium tanks with padded, protective covers. (See figure 3-4).
H.
Cover only the top half of each JP4 tank with padded, protective cover. (see figure 3-1 and 3-5).
I.
Plug exhaust nozzles of a l l a t t i t u d e rocket clusters with special plugs, i f available, or with p l a s t i c bags, or aluminum foil.
J.
Place aluminum f o i l over the exhaust nozzle of both l i f t rocket engines and secure aluminum f o i l with rubber band.
L T O M The following steps are 3-30. LOADING VEHICLF: ON SPECIAL P A F R required t o load vehicle on the special platform:
A.
Move vehicle on transporter t o a c l e a r area of ramp. Extend each shock s t r u t by servicing with nitrogen t o 150 psi. Remove U-clamps t h a t secure vehicle s t r u t t o transporter cradle; one from each l e g of vehicle. (see figure 3-6). Report No. 7260-954002
B.
C.
Fignre
3-3. H202 Tank Completely Covered
3-1 2
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No. 7260-954002
3-1 3
3-1 4
Report Ro. 7260-954002
D .
Lower transporter u n t i l c l e a r of vehicle, then p u l l transporter from under vehicle t o a c l e a r area. Fold transporter cradle arms against transporter body and secure i n position with pins. L i f t towing handle t o i t s m a x i m upright position and secure with rope t o transporter frzme. Load special platform (made t o f i t i n t o Super Guppy transport plane) onto t r a i l e r bed.
7
NOTE
T r a i l e r i s a special type t h a t can r a i s e i t s bed t o the height required f o r loading i n t o transport plane. Load special j i g onto platform on t r a i l e r and secure with chains. (see figure 3-7.) This j i g r a i s e s vehicle t o clear bottom of cargo area. Attach wire rope t o transporter axles t o form a s l i n g and h o i s t transporter onto j i g and secure with chains. (See figure 3-8. )
CAUTION
Attach guide l i n e s t o transporter axles t o guide transporter during hoist. Attach horizontal hoist s l i n g t o crane hook and h o i s t over center of vehicle. Lower horizontal h o i s t s l i n g u n t i l the four vehicle l i f t points (one .on each corner of vehicle upper frame) can be attached t o the cables of horizontal h o i s t sling. with four AN5 b o l t s and nuts. Report No. 7260-954002 Secure
Report No. 7260-
Report No. 7260-954002
3-1 7
L.
L i f t v e h i c l e onto t r a n s p o r t e r . NOTE Attach guide l i n e s t o opposing
struts of vehicle.
Four men a r e
required a t t h e t r a n s p o r t e r on t h e t r a i l e r , (one a t each of t h e t r a n s p o r t e r cradle arms) t o guide t h e cradles under t h e vehicle
struts.
M.
Secure vehicle jacking point t o t r a n s p o r t e r cradle arms with U-clamps and nuts.
N.
Place each e l e c t r o n i c box (removed from equipment i n t o shipping container o r box. NOTE I n s e r t cushioning material i n t o shipping container o r box t o p r o t e c t equipment a g a i n s t shipping d a m ge
0.
Place e l e c t r o n i c equipment boxes i n s i d e s p e c i a l j i g under t r a n s p o r t e r on s p e c i a l platform f l o o r .

7
(See f i g u r e 3-8. )
NOTE
Boxes do not need t o be t i e d down.
P. L i f t h o i s t i n g b a r onto s p e c i a l platform and chain down. f i g u r e 3-8. )
(see
Q.
Cover e n t i r e top h a l f of vehicle with a black p l a s t i c sheet, t y i n g down corners and o t h e r sections t o vehicle tubing and frame. ( s e e f i g u r e 3-8. )
Report No. 7260-954002
3-31.
LOADING VEHICLE INTO TRANSPORT P A E LN
- The following
steps a r e
required f o r loading vehicle i n t o the transport plane: A. T w t r a i l e r t o an area about 100 f e e t i n f r o n t of a transport o plane.
B.
C.
Open nose of plane t o i t s maximum position.
(See figure 3-9. )
Back t r a i l e r t o transport plane u n t i l platform i s about s i x inches away from the cargo area of the transport plane, aligning the t r a i l e r t o the platform r a i l s of the cargo area. (See figure 3-9. )
D .
Slowly r a i s e t r a i l e r bed t o l e v e l of cargo r a i l s . figure 3-10.) CAUTION While raising t r a i l e r bed, continuously check and adjust t r a i l e r alignment, when necessary, t o transport plane cargo r a i l s .
(see
E.
Attach cargo area winch cable t o special platform.
F. Slowly s l i d e platform into cargo area u n t i l platform i s

completely inside cargo area and lock platform i n t h i s position. (See figure 3-1 1 )
Report No. 7260-954002
3-20
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No. 7263-954002
3-21
SECTION I V
AIRFRAME OPERATING SYSTEMS

MAINTENAN CE
4-1. SCOPE OF SECTION.

- 2 This section provides a description, functional analysis, removal and installation procedures, adjustments and test equipment for the LLTV airframe structure, ejection seat, and oxygen system.
4-3. DESCRIPTION AND LEADING PARTICULARS. 4 4 The Lunar Landing Vehicle (figure 1-1 ) , primary airframe structure -.
consists of a pyramid-shaped tubular structure with four truss-type legs. The cockpit section extends forward between the two front legs. The Weber pilot ejection seat is located in the cockpit. The oxygen system is beneath the cockpit floor. See Bell Drawings 7260-099001 and 7260-1 53001. 4-5. MAJOR STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.
- 6 The major structural components (figure 4-1) consists of a center

body, an engine mount, a gimbal ring, peroxide tank mounts, fuel tank mounts, a cockpit structure, an equipment structure, and four leg structures with shock struts.
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No. 7260-954002
4-7.
C N E BODY. E TR
- The
center body structure consists of an upper and The upper frame i s formed by The
a lower frame connected by diagonal tubes.
four equal length tubular side members and two wire diagonals. spaced locations f o r attachment of the l e g lower longerons. longerons of adjacent legs share each f i t t i n g . diagonals a l s o terminate a t each of the four f i t t i n g s .
lower frame i s built-up sheet metal ring with f i t t i n g s a t four equally Adjacent T o of the center body w One t h i r d of the
forward f u e l tank weight i s supported a t the forward f i t t i n g , and one t h i r d of the a f t f u e l tank weight i s supported a t the a f t f i t t i n g . Trunnions f o r mounting the j e t engine gimbal pitch bearings a r e attached t o the right' and l e f t hand f i t t i n g s . See Bell Drawing No. 7260-1 52001 The l i f t rocket mounting brackets a r e also attached t o the bottom of the r i g h t and l e f t hand f i t t i n g s .
48.
ENGINE MOUNT.
- The
engine mount i s a built-up sheet metal ring,
the inner surface of which i s contoured to-form the outer wall of the engine fan i n l e t . Closely spaced r a d i a l r i b s s t i f f e n t h e contoured inner surface and the other three surfaces, and r e d i s t r i b u t e primary ring bending and torsion loads i n t o a x i a l and shear forces on the four surfaces. T o machined f i t t i n g s located 180 degrees apart i n the fore w The forward f i t t i n g also incorporates the crank The engine i s attached t o the mount a t the
qt
and a f t direction a r e b u i l t i n t o the ring t o provide hardpoints f o r the r o l l bearing trunnions. arm f o r the r o l l actuator. forward f i t t i n g .
two points of the lower surface and by a steady-rest
the top of the
One of the lower mounts has s u f f i c i e n t freedom i n the
r a d i a l direction t o accommodate the thermal expansion of the engine.
Report No. 7260-954002
GIMBAL RING. - The gimbal ring i s c i r c u l a r i n shape with a uniform -9. rectangular cross-section three inches wide and four inches deep. It i s
constructed of two machined rings which a r e riveted together. The l a r g e r machined r i n g incorporates t h e bottom and both sides of the rectangular cross-section, plus a l l the i n t e g r a l i n t e r n a l r i b s and bearing housings.
'
The other machined ring forms the top surface and has a channel-shaped cross-section with the flanges extending downward over the sides of the lower r i n g t o provide s u f f i c i e n t overlap f o r a row of r i v e t s on each side. The top surface i s attached t o the i n t e r n a l r i b s by c l i p angles which a r e riveted t o the r i b s and the upper surface. i n t e g r a l housings 90 degrees apart. Bearings a r e mounted i n the The The f r o n t and r e a r bearings permit
the engine (and engine mount) t o r o l l r e l a t i v e t o the gimbal ring. bolted t o the basic ring. body.
r o l l actuator i s anchored t o the gimbal ring by a machined f i t t i n g which i s The r i g h t and l e f t hand bearings permit the engine mount assembly and gimbal ring t o pitch r e l a t i v e t o the center A f i t t i n g bolted t o the basic gimbal ring a t the starboard bearing The pitch actuator i s provides the crank arm f o r the pitch actuator.
anchored t o a f i t t i n g attached t o the main frame of the center body. 4-10. PEROXIDE TANK M U T . O NS
A peroxide tank i s mounted on each side of
the vehicle by a tubular t r u s s .
Each t r u s s supports the spherical tar&
a t diametrically opposed trunnions on the tank equator, and attaches t o the center body a t two upper corners and four points on the main frame. 4-11. F'UEL TANK M U T . The forward JP-4 f u e l tank i s mounted i n a cradle O N Sbetween the two lower longerons of the cockpit structure. The cradle i s supported by three f i t t i n g s , spaced 120 degrees apart, a t the equator. T o f i t t i n g s a r e forward and a t t a c h t o the longerons. The t h i r d f i t t i n g w
i s a f t and attaches t o the forward f i t t i n g of the center body main frame. The a f t JP-4. f u e l tank i s supported i n the a f t equipment section t r u s s
s t r u c t u r e i n a similar fashion. See Bell drawing No. 7260-420001.
4-4
Report No. 7260-954002
4-12.
COCKPIT STRUCTURE.
- The
cockpit structure consists of a sheet The
metal platform, ejection s e a t support, and a cockpit enclosure. platform f l o o r i s attached t o the center body by a tubular t r u s s structure.
Center body attachment i s accomplished by multibolt f i t The seat support i s a combination of
t i n g s a t the two upper corners and by single b o l t s i n double shear a t each of the two lower longerons. body and f l o o r t r u s s . a sheet metal box and tubular t r u s s structure attached t o the center The cockpit instrument pedestal, controls, and
A ballast installation is
console a r e mounted t o the platform floor. drawing No. 7260-1 50001
provided under the ejection s e a t t o balance the vehicle.
See Bell
An aerodynamic boom i s mounted t o the cockA R D N MC BOOM. EOYA I 4-13. p i t f l o o r and extends 4 f e e t forward from the cockpit. The boom has 2 vanes t o measure aerodynamic data i n f l i g h t . the pilot. The angle of attack i s measured by the alpha ( K ) vane and i s used f o r v i s u a l reference by The s i d e s l i p angle i s measured by th6 beta (
) vane and
i s displayed on a 45 degree top the r i g h t corner of the l i g h t s . The s i d e s l i p angle The o< and 0 vane angles
Left t o 45 degree Right gage, mounted on Instrument Panel, above the annunciator
i s r e a l time monitored i n the T/M Van. a r e recorded by TM f o r post f l i g h t analysis.
EQUIPMENT STRUCTURE. The equipment structure consists of a 4-14. moveable t r a y , and an adjustable platform supported by a tubular t r u s s attached t o the center body i n the same fashion a s the cockpit t r u s s . The platform i s adjustable v e r t i c a l l y and the t r a y i s adjustable fore, a f t , and l a t e r a l l y t o allow basic center of gravity adjustments f o r p i l o t weight variation. See Bell Drawing No. 7260-1 53004.
Report No. 7260-954002
4-1 5.
LEG INSTAUATION/SHOCK STRUTS.
- Four
i d e n t i c a l interchangeable two-bay tubular t r u s s
l e g s a r e mounted symmetrically a t 45 degrees t o the longitudinal centerl i n e of the vehicle. Each l e g i s a three-longeron, attached t o the center body a t the inboard end of each longeron by a single b o l t i n double shear. v e r t i c a l component of energy. shock s t r u t . A conventional a i r - o i l shock s t r u t i s Lateral impact loads a r e attenuated by mounted a t the end of each l e g t r u s s t o absorb the landing impact rubber shear mounts which permit l a t e r a l excursion of the lower end of the Ballast i s provided f o r , on the fr6nt legs and under the seat, See Bell Drawing No. 7260-155001 t o balance the light-weight p i l o t s and provide a more rapid between-flight method of center of gravity adjustments. and 7161-191005. 4-16. 4-17. Refer t o paragraph 3-5 f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures.
.EJECTION SEAT.
The weber p i l o t ejection seat provides seating f o r the p i l o t The seat i s designed f o r zero The ejection s e a t system (figures seat assembly
during normal vehicle operation and emergency escape, i f required, when vehicle emergency conditions warrent. velocity, zero a l t i t u d e capabilities.
4-2, 4-3, and 4-4) consists of the following components:
fixed r a i l assembly, parachute assembly, fixed r a i l assembly, parachute assembly and drogue gun, rocket catapult i n i t i a t o r and a release initiator. DR-5773-1. 4-18. FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS. See Bell Drawing No. 7260-501001 and Weber Seat Manual
- Emergency ground
egress o r over-the-side Action of
bailout i s accomplished by pulling upward on the lanyard release handle (figure 4-5) located on the l e f t hand side of the seat bucket. the lanyard release handle releases l a p b e l t and shoulder r e s t r a i n t s and
Report No. 7260-954002
Figure 4-2.
Weber Ejection S e a t , Front View
Report No. 7260-954002
RAIL A S s m ~ y
'ATAPULT INITIATOR
Figure 4-3. Weber Ejection Seat, Rear V i e w
Report No. 7260-954002 4-8
Figure 4 4 . Rocket Catapult and Rails
Report NO. 7260-954002
SEAT-MAN SEPARATOR 1
PARACHUTE TIMER
LANYARD RELEASE HANDLE NORMAL EGRESS
CATAPULT
"IT' HANDLE
0
SEQUENCE INITIATOR
0
DISCONNECT (INITIATOR PIN)
~9
CATAPULT INITIATOR INSTANTANEOUS 2.3 SECOND INSTANTANEOUS INSTANTANEOUS 1.0 SECOND AUTOMATIC
NOTE: THE FOLLOWING CARTRIDGE ACTIVATED DEVICES WILL BE USED IN THIS EJECTION SYSTEM:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
INITIATOR - CATAPULT PARACHVI'E DROGUE GUN ROCKET CATAPULT ROTARY ACT. (S/M SEP.) INITIATOR - LAP BELT LAP BELT TYPE MA-6
Figure
4-5. Ejection Seat Operational Schematic Diagram
disconnects the parachute lanyard t o permit e x i t of the p i l o t with parachute from the seat. harness. In emergency ejection the p i l o t must grasp the ejection seat 4-19. D-ring assembly with both hands and p u l l sharply upward t o f i r e catapult initiator.
(25 t o 50 lb p u l l may be required).
In over-the-side,bailout the parachute must
be deployed by the manual parachute D-ring located on the l e f t shoulder
After the i n i t i a t i o n of the rocket catapult the following sequence of events occurs:
A.
I n i t i a l motion of the seat upward i n the r a i l s actuates the f i r i n g lever of the man-seat separation delay i n i t i a t o r by contact with t r i p p e r on the fixed r a i l s .
B.
After the delay i n t e r v a l of 1 second during which rocket burnout occurs, gas pressure i s supplied t o the release system through a hose. The gas pressure energizes the The release
r o t a r y actuator f o r seat-man separation.
system cylinder assembly then actuates the three releases, p u l l s the drogure gun cable which f i r e s the delay cartdridge i n the parachute drogue gun, and releases the drogue gun cable from the disconnect.
C.
Following the man-seat separation, the one second delay cartridge i n the drogue gun mounted i n the personnel parachute f i r e s , deploying the p i l o t chute and main canopy.
Report No. 7260-954002
Refer t o Weber A i r c r a f t Company manual DR 5773-1 f o r a d d i t i o n a l maintenance d e t a i l s on t h e e j e c t i o n s e a t . O Y E SYSTEM X GN 4-21. The oxygen system ( f i g u r e 4-6) i s required t o provide breathing
oxygen f o r t h e p i l o t because of t h e exhaust gas from t h e j e t engine. The system c o n s i s t s of t h e oxygen tank, a shut-off valve, a demand-type regulator, an .oxygen pressure gage, and an oxjgen 'hose assembly f o r attachment t o a T-block on t h e p i l o t ' s harness. t h e system a r e i n t e g r a l l y mounted on the tank. Connector, S c o t t Model 7025).
A l l component p a r t s of
ask
Breakaway
See Bell drawing No. 7260-501001. NT OE -
A t an average maximum demand r a t e
t h e oxygen supply w i l l l a s t approximately 20 minutes. R M V L PROCEDURES E OA 4-23. The removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e airframe s t r u c t u r e i s provided i n s e c t i o n 111. The removal procedures f o r t h e cockpit roof, e j e c t i o n s e a t , and oxygen system a r e provided i n paragraphs 4-24 through 4-28. 4-24. COCKPIT R O R M V L O F E OA
4-25. To remove t h e cockpit roof, proceed a s follows:
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No. 7260-954002
4-1 3
CAUTION Roof i s made of styro-foam and must be handled with care.
A.
Disconnect wind d i r e c t i o n i n d i c a t o r leads. Remove s e l f -locking n u t , b o l t (AN3-&A), and washer ( ~ ~ 9 6 0 - 0)D ~ P from t u b e brace (7260-15007-1) Drawing 7260-150008). a t roof end of brace. (see B e l l
C.
Remove p i n s from t h e two hinges a t t a c h i n g r i g h t hand forward a r e a of roof t o f r o n t panel of cockpit enclosure.
D.
Remove b o l t s (AN3-4A) and washers ( ~ ~ 9 6 0 - P D ~ from r i g h t s i d e OL) and l e f t s i d e t a b s (7260-15006-37,

NO.
-39).
See B e l l Drawing
7260-150006).
E. F.
Remove p i n from a f t piano p i n hinge. L i f t cockpit roof from vehicle.
E OA 4-26. LEG MAINTENANCE OR R M V L
CAW I O N
4-27. To remove t h e v e h i c l e forward l e g s , proceed as follows:
N o t h e r maintenance operation should o be performed during t h i s operation.
A.
Place v e h i c l e on t r a n s p o r t e r and remove from hangar. (Refer t o Section 11, paragraph 2-3)
B.
I n s t a l l two chain h o i s t s on hangar "1" beam. NT OE I n s t a l l h o i s t s i n such a way t h a t proper clearance i s a v a i l a b l e with vehicle suspended.
Report No. 7260-954002
Attach t h e vehicle h o r i z o n t a l h o i s t s l i n g (with drop cables) t o chain h o i s t s . Using t r a n s p o r t e r , c e n t e r t h e vehicle under t h e h o i s t s then lower vehicle and remove t r a n s p o r t e r from area. (Refer t o Sectlon 11, paragraph 2-3). Deflate a l l vehicle l e g s t r u t s . Lower horizontal l i f t i n g s l i n g and a t t a c h t h e drop cables t o v e h i c l e l i f t i n g terminals. (Refer t o Section 11, paragraph 2-6). Remove a l l plumbing and e l e c t r i c a l wiring attached t o t h e forward legs. P o s i t i o n two wing jacks ( 1 t o n minimum capacity) symmetrically under t h e forward s e c t i o n of t h e main frame c e n t e r body t o support t h e forward s e c t i o n of t h e vehicle. Place wooden blocks between each jack and t h e v e h i c l e frame and snug jacks t o frame. Extend t h e jacks and r a i s e t h e forward s e c t i o n of t h e vehicle u n t i l t h e footpads c l e a r t h e hangar f l o o r by approximately one-half
( 1/2 ) inch.
Take up slack on chain h o i s t s u n t i l a l l l i f t i n g cables a r e snug. P o s i t i o n sandbags around both of t h e r e a r landing s t r u t footpads t o hold down l e g and prevent any s l i d i n g tendencies
While supporting t h e l e g assembly, remove t h e attachment b o l t s a t the
3 attachment p o i n t s on t h e upper corner of t h e c e n t e r
body s t r u c t u r e (1) and main frame (2) and remove a forward l e g .
Report No. 7260-954002
4-28.
To remove t h e a f t l e g s , t h e procedure i s the same a s removing t h e
forward l e g s , except t h a t the jacks w i l l be positioned under the a f t s e c t i o n of t h e main frame center body, t o support the a f t section of t h e vehicle. B a l l a s t w i l l be positioned on t h e forward legs. A l l plumbing and wiring w i l l be removed from the a f t leg. 4-29. LEG B A E OR S R T E N V L R CS TU GOA To remove l e g braces or s t r u t removal, perform steps A through K
4-30.
of paragraph 4-26, then proceed t o remove braces or s t r u t . 4-31. 4-32. EJECTION S A REMOVAL ET P r i o r t o removal of e j e c t i o n s e a t , remove cockpit roof i n accordance To remove t h e e j e c t i o n s e a t two men are required and
with paragraph 4-24. proceed a s follows:
The e j e c t i o n s e a t assembly has two actuators and three i n i t i a t o r s f o r explosive charges. Refer t o the Weber manual DR
5773-1 t o deterTreat
mine how the i n i t i a t o r s a r e s e t off.
t h e i n i t i a t o r s and assemblies attached t o them a s a p o t e n t i a l source of bodily harm. NT OE Safety pin i n s t a l l a t i o n a t i n i t i a t o r be made so t h a t the s t r a i g h t pin be i n s t a l l e d through hole i n annular grove of i n i t i a t o r and loop up so it can be e a s i l y seen.
Report No. 7260-954002
A.
Ensure t h a t t h e maintenance s a f e t y p i n (see f i g u r e 4-7) i s i n each i n i t i a t o r and a c t u a t o r a s follows:
1) Seat I n i t i a t o r s and Actuator

a) b) c) D-ring M-32 M-27
- pilot/seat
NT OE -
- s e a t harness r e l e a s e charge
separation charge
- c a t a p u l t charge
I n s e r t s a f e t y p i n w i t h loop up so it can be e a s i l y seen. 2) Parachute I n i t i a t o r s and Actuator: a) b) Drogue gun cable Manual f i r i n g cable CAUTION Actuators a r e e a s i l y fouled by f o r e i g n matter. Cap cables when disconnected and keep u n i t s clean.
B.
Detach e j e c t i o n c o n t r o l cable (4, f i g u r e 4-8) from c a t a p u l t i n i t i a t o r (1, f i g u r e 4-9).
C.
Remove t r i p p e r
(9) from f i x e d r a i l assembly (10) by removing
a t t a c h i n g screws.
WARNING
The c a t a p u l t contains t h e l a r g e s t charge of explosives i n t h e s e a t assembly. When t h e c a t a p u l t charge Advoid i s unbolted from t h e t r a c k i n cockpit,
it i s awkward t o handle.
jaring t h e catapult. Report No. 7260-954002
-D"unto A B I I E M R I , ~
Figure 4-7.
Safetying
Report No. 7260-954002
1. "D" rlng 2 . Tuhe aeeembly 3. Block 4. Cable aneembly 6 . Plne
"D" Ring Assembly
F i g u r e 4-9. Report No. 7260-954002
B a l l i s t i c Components
D.
E.
Detach s e a t from rocket c a t a p u l t (2). Remove s e a t from v e h i c l e by s l i d i n g upward u n t i l separated from f i x e d r a i l assembly (10).
O Y E SYSTEM REMOVAL X GN
4-34.
To remove t h e oxygen system, proceed a s follows:

A.
Disconnect supply hose a t oxygen tank regulator. Loosen two lock-nuts on r e t a i n i n g s t r a p b o l t s s u f f i c i e n t l y t o free' tank.
B.
C.
Remove tank from r e t a i n i n g s t r a p s .
D. Remove hose clamp from oxygen hose and remove hose.
4-35.
4-36.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES I n s t a l l a t i o n of components i s performed i n t h e reverse order of Refer t o paragraphs 4-24 through 4-33.
removal.
Ensure exheme care i s taken during i n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e e j e c t o r s e a t and initiators. NT OE Two men a r e required t o i n s t a l l t h e ejector seat. 4-37. 4-38.
LF;G INSTALLATION
I n s t a l l a t i o n of vehicle l e g s i s t h e reverse of removal ( r e f e r t o
1 , Section 1 1 paragraph
3-5 and 4-26 through 4-28).

Report No. 7260-954002
CAUTION
A l l l e g hardware must be f u l l y i n s t a l l e d b e f o r e lowering v e h i c l e .
LEG EBACES AND STRUT INSTALLATION

4-40. I n s t a l l a t i o n of l e g b r a c e s and s t r u t s i s t h e r e v e r s e of removal.
( ~ e f e r o paragraph 4-29). t
Report No. 7260-954002
SECTION V
HYDRAULIC GIMBA1.I S S E YT M
M I TN NE AN E A C
5-10
5-2.
SCOPE OF SECTION This section provides a descript,ion, functional analysis and The
maintenance instructions on the L T hydraulic gimbal system. LV i n s t a l l a t i o n , and t e s t equipment. 5-3. DESCRIPTION AND IsEADING PARTICULARS
removal and maintenance instructions include servicing and t e s t i ~ g
5-4.
The hydraulic gimbal system consists of a r o l l (figure 5-1) and a
p i t c h actuator, a hydraulic reservoir and pump (figure 5-2), a hydraulic accumulator (figure 5-3) and various valves, switches and couplings (figure 5-4). The hydraulic system supplies power t o two electro-hydraulic servo-actuators f o r pitch and r o l l a t t i t u d e control of the j e t engine during the Local Vertical mode, Engine Centered mode, Luna.r Simulation mode, and Gimbal Locked mode of operation. The hydraulic actuators a r e controlled by one of the following methods:
(1) e l e c t r o n i c a l l y through the servo valve o r (2) electro-mechanically

through t h e actuator centering port. Refer t o section X I f o r a description of the electronic control subsystem,
F'UNCTIONAL ANALYSIS
5-6.
Primary hydraulic pressure i s supplied by an engine-driven,
Report No.
7260-954002
5-2
Report No.
7260-954002
Report No.
7260-954002
5-4
Report lo.
7260-954002
Report No.
7260-954002
5-5
IIIIIIIIIIIIIII Hydraulic Line r e m m ~ ~ Hydraulic Pressure Line . Reserve Hydraulic Pressure Line ; p Reseme Hydraulic Fill Line
(el (el
ure
I
ltcr
Accurn
A
check'
Valve
enoid
Ive
-
Roll
Actuator
Figure 5-5 Jet Engine Gimbal Hydraulic System Schematic
v a r i a b l e displacement-type pump ( f i g u r e 5-5) using hydraulic f l u i d from the reservoir.

A reserve hydraulic pressure source i s provided by
t h e hydraulic accumulator and i s used f o r centering t h e engine i n t h e Emergency Gimbal Locked mode i n t h e event t h e hydraulic system pressure d r q s below 1350
+ 50 p s i .
Check valves a t t h e pump o u t l e t and i n t h e The r e l i e f valve
r e t u r n p o r t of both solenoids prevent reverse flow during ground operation with an a u x i l i a r y hydraulic power supply. prevents system over-pressurization i n event of a pump malfunction. Self-sealing couplings, a manual r e s e r v o i r shutoff valve, t h e pump check valve and t h e check valves i n t h e r e t u r n p o r t s of t h e solenoid valves, provide t h e necessary i s o l a t i o n f o r ground checkout of t h e hydraulic sysbem. 5-7
A hydraulic accumulator provides t h e source of hydraulic pressure
during t h e Ehergency Gimbal Locked mode. t h e Z-body a x i s .
This mode moves t h e engine t o

A decrease i n normal
A cam operated centering valve i n each a c t u a t o r
provides t h e mechanism t o c e n t e r t h e engine.
hydraulic pressure i s sensed by t h e hydraulic low pressure switch and energizes an emergency r e l a y K which a c t u a t e s t h e emergency Gimbal 6 lock solenoid, L2. This causes t h e normally closed 3-we.y solenoid This pressure overrides t h e valve t o apply pressure from t h e accumulator t o t h e c e n t ~ r i n g( s h u t t l e ) valves on t h e r o l l and p i t c h a c t u a t o r s . servo-controlled valve t o hold t h e gimbals i n t h e c e n t e r position.
When t h e Gimbal Lock mode i s s e l e c t e d by t h e p i l o t , t h e gimbal
lock solenoid L1 i s energized and a p p l i e s hydraulic pressure from t h e normal source t o t h e centering ( s h u t t l e ) valves on t h e p i t c h and r o l l actuators. system. 5-9 The L1 solenoid valve can a l s o be energized by t h e al.ionic
In t h e event t h e gimbal lock switch on hand c o n t r o l l e r f a i l s t o
operate, a pressure switch located i n t h e normal gimbal lock s i d e of t h e s h u t t l e valve loop, t r i g g e r s t h e emergency gimbals locked solenoid i n t h e emergency s i d e of t h e s h u t t l e valve loop. Report No. 7260-954002 5-7
5-11.
The servicing and t e s t i n g procedures f o r t h e hydraulic gimbal Step-by-step pro-
system a r e provided i n paragraphs 5-11 through 5-17. cedures and t e s t equipment a r e provided. 5-1 2. 5-13. TEST EQUIPMENT
A accumulator pressure c a r t and Iiydraulic. Test Stand D6 and D6A n
a r e required f o r servicing and t e s t i n g t h e hydraulic gimbal system. 5-14. STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURES
The following paragraphs provide step-by-step procedures f o r 5-15. flushing, f i l l i n g and t e s t i n g t h e hydraulic gimbal system. 5-16. 5-17. F'LUSHING PROCEDURE
- Refer
t o paragraph 2-49 f o r flushing procedure.
FILLING
- After
f i l l system. 5-18.
(Refer t o paragraph 2-50)
TESTING
paragraph 2-51 5-1 9. 5-20.
- To t e s t
f o r external and i n t e r n a l leakage r e f e r t o
R M V L PROCEDURES E OA The removal procedures f o r t h e n a j o r components of the hydraulic
gimbal system a r e described i n paragraphs 5-21 through 5-31 HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS
Report No. 7260-954002
5-22.
The removal procedure of t h e r o l l and p i t c h hydraulic a c t u a t o r s
i s e s s e n t i a l l y t h e same f o r both actuators.

NT OE P r i o r t o removal of any hydraulic .components, vent t h e accumulator hydraulic pressure by placing manual 3-way valve, 7260-390009-1 i n DUMP position. 5-23. To remove and actuator, proceed a s follows:
A.
Remove, cap, and i d e n t i f y a l l hydraulic f l e x l i n e s t o a c t u a t o r and s h u t t l e valve, using clean pressure type caps and plugs. Assure wire bundles a r e protected. f l u i d drainage from system. Prepare t o catch some Cap a l l actuator ports.
B.
Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l connector. Block gimbal r i n g i n s t a t f o n a y p o s i t i o n , using wooden blocks between i n n e r and o u t e r ring.
C.
R L ACTUATOX OL
To remove t h e r o l l a c t u a t o r proceed a s follows:

CAUTION
Exescxs3 extreme care t o preventdamage t o

a c t u a t o r during removal.
A.
Remove b o l t and washer securing a c t u a t o r t o engine mount. Remove b o l t and washer securing a c t u a t o r t o gimbal ring. Remove r o l l a c t u a t o r and secure piston. I n s t a l l dummy a c t u a t o r immediately.
B.
C.
D.
Report No. 7260-954002
5-25.
PITCH ACTUATOR A.
- To
remove pitch actuator proceed a s follows;
Remove b o l t and washer securing actuator t o gimbal ring. Remove b o l t and washer securing actuator t o vehicle main frame
B.
C.
Remove pitch actuator and secure piston. I n s t a l l dummy actuator immediately.
D.
5-26 5-27.
HYDRAULIC P M U P
Refer t o paragraph pump 6-30 f o r removal procedures f o r the hydraulic
5-28. 5-29.
HYDFtAULIC RESERVOIR Refer t o paragraph 6-28 f o r removal procedures f o r the hydraulic
reservoir. 5-30. 5-31.
HYDRAULIC ACCUMULATOR
To remove t h e hydraulic accumulator proceed a s follows: NT OE Dump hydraulic pressure i f any i s i n accumulator p r i o r t o r %lease. A. Open Schrader Valve t o release pre-charge nitrogen pressure from accumulator.
B.
Disconnect hydraulic l i n e from f i t t i n g . with clean press type f i t t i n g s .
Cap tubing and port,
Report No. 7260-954002
5-32. 5-33.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES The i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures a r e provided f o r msjor components of See B e l l
t h e hydraulic gimbal system i n paragraphs 5-34 through 5-41. drawing 7161-382003 and 7260-382004.
5-35.
The i n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e a c t u a t o r s i s e s s e n t i a l l y i n t h e reverse
o r d e r of removal. NT OE After i n s t a l l a t i o n of any major component of t h e hydraulic gimbal system, perform t h e f l u s h i n g and f i l l i n g procedures provided i n paragraphs 5-16 and 5-17. 5-36. 5-37.
HYDRAULIC PUMP
The hydraulic pump i s i n s t a l l e d i n t h e reverse order of removal
Refer t o paragraph 6-30.
Report No. 7260-954002
SECTION V I P W R PLANT MAINTENANCE O E SCOPE O SECTION F
6-2.
This s e c t i o n providesthe description and maintenance I n s t r u c t i o n s These systems a r e f u e l , l u b r i c a t i o n , com~reseor i r bleed. a Refer t o General E l e c t r i c J e t Engine CF730
f o r t h e j e t engine and r e l a t e d systems which compose t h e U T V j e t engine power plant. and control linkage. j e t engine.
Mainkenance Manual SEI133 f o r d e t a i l e d maintenance i n s t r u c t i o n on t h e
6-3.
6-4.
DESCRIP.TI0N AND LEADING PARTICWS The functional r e l a t i o n s h i p s of t h e systems comprising t h e vehicle The modified CF700-2CV j e t engine
power p l a n t a r e shown i n figure 6-1. gravity.
provides t h r u s t requirements f o r t a k e o f f , f l i g h t and simulation of l u n a r During l u n a r simulation t h e t h r u s t c a p a b i l i t y counteracts The vehicle f u e l system provides A combination hydraulic five-sixths of t h e e a r t h ' s gravity.
storage and f u e l i n j e c t i o n t o t h e j e t engine. backup c o n t r o l of the f u e l system. external a i r s t a r t unit. o i l t o p a r t s requiring
and e l e c t r i c a l manual t h r o t t l e provides the p i l o t with a primary and Engine s t a r t
i s provided by an
Lubrication of t h e j e t engine is' provided l u b r i c a t i o n during engine operation. Various cockpit

An a i r
through a vented, pressurized, closed-circuit system designed t o f u r n i s h bleed system on t h e vehicle provides J P 4 f u e l tank pressurization, by bleeding a i r from t h e J e t engine compressor. instruments monitor engine performance. Refer t o section V I I I f o r d e t a i l e d maintenance i n s t r u c t i o n s p e r t a i n i n g t o cockpit instruments.
Report No. 7260-954002
6-5.
JET ENGINE SYSTEM
- The modified CF700-2CV
i s provided with
bellmouth-type i n l e t f a i r i n g s f o r t h e gas generator and a f t f a n i n l e t s . The engine i s mounted i n a v e r t i c a l p o s i t i o n on gimballing mounts, which permit
- '40' +
p i t c h and
+ 25' -
r o l l r e l a t i v e t o t h e v e r t i c a l p o s i t i o n of
t h e vehicle. engine.
Refer t o s e c t i o n I of General E l e c t r i c J e t Engine CF7OO
Maintenance Manual SEI-133 f o r a d e t a i l e d d e s c r i p t i o n of t h e b a s i c Refer t o B e l l drawing 7260-421010 f o r other modifications necessary t o engine i n s t a l l a t i o n with quick engine change (($3~) components.
6-6.
JET FUEL SYSTEM
- The j e t
f i e 1 system ( f i g u r e 6-1 1 c o n s i s t s of
f u e l storage tanks f o r JP4 f u e l
(MIL-J-5624~) tank p r e s s u r i z a t i o n
provision ( a i r b l e e d ) , f u e l l e v e l switches, c a l i b r a t e d f u e l l e v e l d r a i n probes, p r e s s u r e balancing f u e l flow proportioner, f u e l l e v e l warning l i g h t s , tank p r e s s u r e gages, check valves, f i l t e r s , and quick-disconnect
f i l l and d r a i n f i t t i n g s .
6-7.
FUEL STORAGE
Two J P tanks a r e mounted symmetrically about t h e ~ The d e s i r e d balance and vehicle c e n t e r of
v e h i c l e c e n t e r of gravity.
g r a v i t y i s obtained by mounting one tank i n f r o n t of and s l i g h t l y below t h e engine and t h e o t h e r tank d i r e c t l y behind and s l i g h t l y above t h e engine.
A quick-disconnect f i t t i n g a t t h e c e n t e r of t h e tank bottom A manually operated, r e t r a c t a b l e , c a l i b A quick-disconnect on t h e probe a l s o

The probe i s marked
provides access f o r f i l l i n g . and q u a n t i t y checking of f u e l .
r a t e d f u e l l e v e l i n d i c a t o r probe i n each tank permits p a r t i a l f i l l i n g providers a c c e s s f o r d r a i n i n g and ground venting. Quantity a t t h i s d e n s i t y i s 234 pounds per tank. 6-8.
i n increments of f i v e pounds of JP4 f u e l f o r a density of 6.5 ~ b / ~ a l l o n .
TANK PRESSURIZATION
- The f u e l tanks a r e pressurized p r i o r t o
f l i g h t t o 20
+_
p s i g w i t h gaseous n i t r o g e n through a permanently
Report No. 7260-954002
i n s t a l l e d charging valve i n t h e a i r l i n e s .
The r i g i d a i r l i n e s a r e
aluminum a l l o y with f l a r e d f i t t i n g s and a r e proof-tested t o 500 psig. The f l e x i b l e hose a i r l i n e s a r e adequate f o r 1500 p s i g working pressures w i t h f l a r e d tube f i t t i n g s . During f l i g h t , tank pressure ismaintained. a t approximately 22 p s i g by bleed a i r taken from t h e j e t engine compressor. However, during pretakeoff checks, t h e ground s e r v i c e p r e s s u r e decreases t o l e s s than
psig.
As t h e RPM i n c r e a s e s a t takeoff and during f l i g h t , Pressure i n An a i r f i l t e r i s
t h e tank pressure i n c r e a s e s up t o approximately 22 psig. b o t h t a n k s should i n c r e a s e evenly p r i o r t o t a k e o f f .
l o c a t e d i n t h e a i r l i n e between the charging valve and t h t a n k s t o prevent contamination from t h e engine bleed a i r or t h e p r e f l i g h t p r e s s u r i z a t i o n . Check valves a t each of t h e tank p r e s s u r i z a t i o n i n l e t s increase f l i g h t r e l i a b i l i t y f o r r e t a i n i n g tank pressure. r e q u i r e d f o r f l i g h t operation. 6-9. FUEL LINES N pressure r e l i e f valve i s o
- The f u e l l i n e s c o n s i s t of
r i g i d aluminum and f l e x i b l e
sections.
A f u e l flow proportioner equalizes f u e l flow from t h e two tanks.

These f i l t e r s minimize contamination of t h e prcThe *ank o u t l e t check valves prevent o r i f i c e t o provide f o r thermal
Loca.ted between t h e f u e l proportioner and tank o u t l e t check valve f o r each tank i s a f u e l f i l t e r . p o r t i o n e r and engine f u e l c o n t r o l .
flow back i n t o t h e tanks i n t h e event of l o s s of pressure i n one tank. The a f t tank check valve has a 0.050-inch p r e s s u r e r e l i e f f o r trapped f u e l i n t h e engine feed l i n e s . intake.
A manual
f u e l s h u t o f f valve i s l o c a t e d between t h e proportioner and engine f u e l The valve i s detented i n a spring-loaded open p o s i t i o n and i s safety-wired i n t h e open p o s i t i o n f o r f l i g h t . 6-10.
LUBRICATION
SYSTEM
- The
vented, pressurized, closed-circuit lube
system i s designed t o f u r n i s h o i l t o p a r t s which require l u b r i c a t i o n during engine operation. system. 6-4 A f t e r o i l has been supplied t o t h e s e p a r t s it flows t o t h e sumps where it i s recovered and r e c i r c u l a t e d throughout t h e
A l l system components a r e engine furnished and engine mounted.

Report No. 7260-954.002
Refer t o s e c t i o n I of General E l e c t r i c J e t Engine CF7OO Maintenance Manual SEI-133 f o r a d e t a i l e d d e s c r i p t i o n of t h e l u b r i c a t i o n system. 6-11. FUEL C N R L SYSTEM OTO
-A
combination hydraulic and e l e c t r i c a l
manual t h r o t t l e provides t h e p i l o t with a primary and backup control of t h e J e t engine main f u e l control, respectively. l u n a r simulation.
An automatic
e l e c t r o n i c t h r o t t l e c o n t r o l subsystem controls t h e j e t t h r u s t during The p i l o t can manually override o r disengage t h e 0verrri.de f o r c e s a r e usually The manual hydraulic system automatic t h r o t t l e c l u t c h a t any time. of coming out of t h e a u t o t h r o t t l e mode.
high (25 t.o 30 pounds), ar?d disengagement i s t h e preferable means (figure6-i) c o n s i s t s of th manual t h r o t t l e , two hydraulic a c t u a t o r s , a motor-operated cross-over valve, a temperature compensator with a volume i n d i c a t o r and hydraulic l i n e s . Located on t h e manual t h r o t t l e i s a Sim Release switch and an Emergency-Normal switch. The two hydraulic a c t u a t o r s provide a closed loop j e t engine Movement of t h e manual t h r o t t l e r e s u l t s i n movement
6-12.
t h r o t t l e system.
of t h e f u e l c o n t r o l cam mounted on t h e j e t engine (figure 6-2). The spring-operated temperature compensator absorbs t h e pressure bv.ildup caused by temperature changes i n t h e t h r o t t l e system. c o n t r o l of t h e engine f u e l control. 6-13. The Sim Release switch disengages th a u t o t h r o t t l e c l u t c h f o r manual
An emergency e l e c t r i c j e t t h r o t t l e switch permits p i l o t
operation of a motor-operated cross-over valve which interconnects t h e two s i d e s of t h e t h r o t t l e hydraulic system, thus allowing t h e p i l o t t o operate t h e t h r o t t l e l e v e r with n e g l i g i b l e back pressure. This switch a l s o simutaneously engages t h e e l e c t r i c a l t h r o t t l e c o n t r o l a c t u a t o r used a s t h e automatic e l e c t r o n i c t h r o t t l e t o control j e t t h r u s t during t h e l u n a r simulation mode. The e l e c t r i c a l c o n t r o l
Report No. 954002
6-5
Figure 6-2. Jet Engine Throttle Control
Report No. 7260-954002
originate from a synchro i n s t a l l e d on t h e j e t engine t h r o t t l e . circuits.
Refer
t o section X I f o r a description of the e l e c t r i c a l and electronic control An operational check of the emergency e l e c t r i c a l control can be made without need f o r reservicing of the primary control.
The emergency e l e c t r i c t h r o t t l e operates slower (6'. sec) than the manual hydraulic throttle.
WARNING
The power source of the backup e l e c t r i c a l t h r o t t l e i s derived from the primary AC bus (phase A). Thus, .the emergency t h r o t t l e i s
inoperative i f the primary AC or DC busses become inoperative. OPERATIONAL C E K U HC O T 6-15. A operational checkout of the j e t engine power plant and n
associated systems i s performed by t h e following procedures outlined i n Report Number 7260-928058, J e t Engine Functional Ramp Test. Test equipment requirements a r e l i s t e d in paragraph 3.3 of Report Number 7260-950014. 6-16. 6-17. S S E TROUBLESHOOTING YT M J e t engine system troubleshooting can be i n i t i a t e d by performing
the steps outlined i n paragraphs 4.0 through 4.4 of J e t Engine Report No. 7260-954002 6-7
Functional Ramp T e s t , Report Number 7260-928058. F a i l u r e Mode Analysis Report Number 7860 -950014.
For a s s i s t a n c e i n
troubleshooting t h e j e t engine system, r e f e r t o paragraph 4.2.1 of
6- 18.
6-19.
R M V L AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURES E OA The removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures f o r t h e j e t engine, A l i s t of graund s u p p o ~ tequipment required f o r removal of Refer t o s e c t i o n I1 f o r
a c c e s s o r i e s , j e t f u e l storage tanks, and hydraulic a u t o t h r o t t l e system a r e provided. t h e j e t engine i s provided i n t a b l e 6-1.
a d d i t i o n a l d e s c r i p t i o n of t h e ground support equipment.
TABLE 6- 1 GROUND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT

1
Nomenclature V e r t i c a l Hoist S l i n g Hoist Adapters Yaintenance Stand Simbal Assembly Adapter K i t Chain Hoist Horizontal Hoist S l i n g
P a r t Number 7161-753001
Use and Application Supports Engine i n Hoist Provides Connections
1740-554-1667 Supports and Transports Engine 7161-752002.A Mounts Engine t o Maint Stand Provides L i f t i n g Force t o Eng 7161-753003 Supports Engine i n Hoist
*
6-20. 6-21.
TURBOFAN JET ENGINE REPLACEMENT The i n s t r u c t i o n s provide: (1 engine removal from the LLTV, (2)
accessory removal, (3) removal of t h e replacement engine from i t s shipping container, (4) engine buildup and (5) j n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e engine
Report No. 7260-954002
into the UTV. ation. engine buildup.
See figures 6-3 2nd 6-4 f o r engine i n s t a l l a t i o n inform-
Other i l l u s t r a t i o n s i n t h l s section highlight the d e t a i l s of
Do not stand on the U T V structure;
use
ladders or maintenance stands f o r access. 6-22. listed: A. I n s t a l l j e t engine f a n and compressor i n l e t covers. Relieve the tension of t h e center body s t r e s s cables by unscrewing t h e i r turnbuckles and swing the cables c l e a r of the center body structure.
REMOVAL F O L T RM L V
- Perform
the following procedures i n order
B.
C.
Attach t h e l i f t ring of the j e t engine v e r t i c a l hoist s l i n g t o an overhead hoisting device (chain Tall), having a hook height of a t lea,& 22 f e e t , and attach the hoist adapters t o the engine mount pivot f i t t i n g s . NT OE The emergnecy e l e c t r i c t h r o t t l e operates slower (6'1 sec ) than the manual hydraulic throttle. (Refer t o figure 6-5).
Report No. 7260-954002
M A I N ENGINE MOUNTS
BCLCAN VAL^ AND
I1 RLMOIC J N L
ARLRKE
KNITION UNIT AND ONE IGNITOR RUG 5 E L T PER~OD~CALLI TO A55URE AIQ LEAKAGL IS WIT# IN DL5lGN UMll5 9 RLFER T BPS M I 6 F R WRENCH TORaUES. O O @ I f 1 STA6C 5 COOL *IR T U I S TO FAN WITU TFCLOI HOSE ASYPMLl ~1800-~-xm AoAPrEa TU~Y TI*~-*ZIOI~-I SUPPORT ILI-UIOZO-I AND TUBE A 3 1 i OF 1260-~LIOII-I IDBFAN SLAV HOSE AND TUBE Wl?H TCTLON HG%E ASSEMBLV a m x - 6 - o r m , CLAMP r s SVOWN ClfAN LUBE U O V AN0 5UBf WlTY TEFLON W S E ASSEMKr Q 3 H 1 - 0 0 1 1 2 CLAMP AS S M W N In1 FAN SEAL PlESSUllL 111 T U L Y I WITH TCFLON m)5f A S Y M 8 L l R38a)OLC -6-OIII C L ~ A5 SWWN P 111 SUMP VENT r u n t 5 W,TY T r r w u ~ 0 ASSEM&? RS~C*-CM++ 5 ~ CLAMP IS SIKINN THE ~ O L L O W I N ~ S T A N U A R O LNGINL TO F A N SCRVICE L l N C L W I T H THC SfiLClLD 8 A C HODlFlED PART IRLTAIN CLAMP5 A N 0 BRACKETS IF A P P L K A ~ L E )
7 U R l A ~ GEOMfTIl ACTUATORS 5 U U bL R l g L D O F A111 I F PIPIN6 I 9 U W V E D I BY UOT0slN6 fNGlNL WITH TUL A I S A W DRAINIffi W l AN1 AIR T Y M U THL L H SIDE YTUATOR UNUSED PORR PIAP* CONNECTIONS ~ U L L CAPPLD OR a w e 0 WUENLVER ANY R R M 15 RfWVtO OR OISCONNECTLD IfN61N1 llllL1 AND EIUAl6T COVERS WALL lY I N RACE O U l l U G ENCINL INITALLATMI 4 w NOT u n c n ANI TAGS cu ENGIW. I DO NOT 0% LACING OR CORD ON CNGINE ATTACHTO HARDWAU. ULC b X T L D CLAMPS ONLY. Z L a K WIRE K R MSUIUI WHERE RLQUlRLD I C W T ALL TURLClOLO FASTENER WITH A LIGHT CCAT OF SYNTH OIL PLR MIL-1-1888 PRIOR T AS51 O
G A L L CXPOXD C G NE I
F i g u r e 6-3.
J e t Engine Schematic
Report No. 7260-954002
WIN EWW MWNT
YUers rssY
1 -
Report No. 7260-954002
Sheet 1 of 2
6-1 1
Figure 6-5 Jet Engine V e r t i c a l H o i s t Sling Attachment
Report No, 7260-954002
6-1 3
D.
Remove slack from h o i s t cables, but do not take up any weight with hoist. CAUTION The overhead h o i s t i s attached a t t h i s time a s a precautionary measure. Attempting t o
r a i s e the engine a t t h i s time w i l l r e s u l t i n l i f t i n g the e n t i r e vehicle off the ground.
E.
Disconne~t,tag, and place dust covers on connectors P88, Pl25, P139, and P330. clamps. ring. Remove the three e l e c t r i c a l cable Lay harness back over gimbal Remove clamps from wiring harness, a s necessary, I d e n t i f g and storeclamps and mounting hardware f o r
t o f r e e harness from engine. installation. C UI N A TO
Closed loop hydraulic t h r o t t l e system normally has 100 t o 120 p s i of hydraulic pressure trapped i n system. Observe t h r o t t l e system compensator,
while releasing trapped pressure t o zero. Piston rod should move inboard a s pressure bleeds off.
F.
Remove hydraulic f l e x l i n e s t o engine t h r o t t l e acutator a t actuator end. caps. Remove a l l attaching clamps a l l the way t o Cap actuator ports with clean pressure inner gimbal ring.
Use clean pressure plugs f o r f l e x l i n e s .
Report No. 7260-954002
G.
Close manual f u e l shut o f f valve: position.
Safety wire i n closed
Have container ready t o catch f u e l draining from f u e l f l e x l i n e .
H.
Disconnect main f u e l f l e x l i n e t o engine a t r e a r r o l l gimbal
point.
Cap and Plug disconnected f u e l l i n e s with press type
cap and plug.
I.
Remove,engine a i r s t a r t adapter, p a r t no. 7260-429013-3.

WARNING
Ensure t h a t hydraulic system gage reads zero before opening gimbal hydraulic f i t t i n g s . J. Disconnect and cap hydraulic pressure and r e t u r n f l e x i b l e l i n e s a t manual shutoff valve and f i l t e r , respectively, on engine. Use clean press type caps and plugs.
K.
Safety wire manual shutoff valve i n closed position.
L. Disconnect yaw compensator bleed l i n e and JP4 tank bleed

a i r source.
M.
Remove b o l t and washer securing r o l l a c t u a t o r t o engine. Allow r o l l a c t u a t o r t o swing down and replace b o l t and washer on actuator. Safety wire r o l l actuator i n a p o s i t i o n t o prevent damage t o actuator.
N.
Check t h a t a l l slack i s out of engine v e r t i c a l h o i s t s l i n g cables.
Report No. 7260-954002
0 .
Cut s a f e t y wire and remove four b o l t s , washers, and retaubers securing engine mount assembly t o forward r o l l trunnion .(,below engine steady r e s t )
P.
Repeat s t e p 11011 t a f t r o l l trunnion, a CAUTION Ensure t h a t r o l l a c t u a t o r i s not damaged a s engine i s r a i s e d from vehicle.
Q.
Carefully r a i s e engine with overhead h o i s t so t h a t engine mount c l e a r s forward and a f t r o l l trunnions. t h a t a l l l i n e s a r e disconnected. NT OE The t a i l cone may be removed from t h e turbofan j e t engine a t t h i s time i f s u f f i c i e n t clearance i s not available. Perform v i s u a l check
S.
Raise engine u n t i l exhaust cone i s c l e a r of center body and move h o i s t i n g device and engine c l e a r of t h e LLTV.
T.
Reconnect s t r e s s cables and t i g h t e n t o 18-inch/pounds with torque wrench.
6-23.
TN INSTALLATION ON MAINTENANCE S A D
- The
turbofan j e t engine i s
i n s t a l l e d on t h e j e t engine gimbal assembly adapter k i t which i s mounted on t h e p a r a l l e l r a i l engine maintenance stand f o r accessory removal and buildup. This i s a l s o necessary t o r o t a t e t h e engine from a v e r t i c a l t o a The following procedures apply when h o r i z o n t a l a t t i t u d e , o r v i c e versa. horizontal hoist sling.
t h e turbofan j e t engine i s supported on t h e j e t engine v e r t i c a l o r (see f i g u r e 6-6. )
6-1 6
Report N 7260-954002 o
Report No. 7260-954002
A.
Position the engine between the adapters on the p a r a l l e l r a i l maintenance stand.
B.
Align the mounting points on the engine mount assembly with the trunnions on the adapter A-frames. NOTE Trunions must be oriented and locked i n the position corresponding t o the engine a t t i t u d e .
L i f t eyes on the adapter trunnions should be up
f o r v e r t i c a l i n s t a l l a t i o n of engine.
C.
Secure the engine mount t o the adapter trunnions with b o l t s , nuts, and washer removed i n paragraph "0" of section 22.
D.
Adjust position of adapter A-frameson engine and stand r a i l s so t h a t engine i s c l e a r t o rotate. Tighten adapters on r a i l s .
6-Z+..
ENGINE A I R INLET REMOVAL
- The
engine a i r i n l e t i s removed and the
forward l i f t adapter of the horizontal h o i s t s l i n g i s attached according t o the following procedures before the accessories, fan i n l e t , and engine mount a r e removed.
A.
(See figure 6-7. )
Remove engine a i r i n l e t cover and disconnect and cap piping 2 sensor a i r ducts.
conncetors on T
B.
Remove the following 10/32 s i z e screws. 1) Three located a t top of t h r o t t l e box.
2) Three located a t inboard side of t h r o t t l e box. 3) Two located a t bellmouth t o engine parting surface.
C.
Remove clamps holding t h r o t t l e l i m i t microswitch leads t o bracket on bellmouth.
Report No. 7260-954002
HORIZONTAL HOIST SLING
FORWARD LIF'T
ATTACHMENT
AFT LIFT ATTACHMENT
CENTER LIFT ATTACHMENT
FORWARI) LIFT
Figure 6-7
Horizontal Hoist Sling Forward Lift Attachment
Report No. 7260-954002
6-1 q
D .
Remove t h e 32 screws (10/32 s i z e ) and nuts, and 13 screws
( 10/32 ) holding t h e bellmouth t o engine.
Screws removed a t clamp l o c a t i o n s along p a r t i n g surface a r e s l i g h t l y longer. Note
clamp p o s i t i o n , s p e c i f i c a l l y a t t h r o t t l e a c t u a t o r mounting bracket and engine support cable bracket
E .
I d e n t i f y and s t o r e mounting hardware with engine a i r i n l e t f o r installation.
F.
Align t h e h o r i z o n t a l h o i s t s l i n g forward f i t t i n g with flange on engine and secure with 10 b o l t s and n u t s provided with j e t engine h o r i z o n t a l h o i s t s l i n g . f a n case. NT OE The j e t engine horizontal h o i s t s l i n g i s attached t o t h e turbofan j e t engine a t t h i s time f o r removal from t h e engine stand p r i o r t o removal of t h e f a n i n l e t . I n s t a l l l i f t eye b o l t i n engine
G.
I n s t a l l cover on compressor i n l e t
6-25. ACCESSORY R M V L E OA
For convenience, t h e t a i l cone i s removed with The engine i s
t h e turbofan j e t engine v e r t i c a l on t h e maintenance stand. cedures present i n t h e following paragraphs. mounting hardware.
then r o t a t e d and locked i n t h e h o r i z o n t a l a t t i t u d e f o r t h e removal proIdentify and r e t a i n a l l
Report No. 7260-954002
WARNING
Use extreme care when r o t a t i n g the engine. Use a h o i s t , attached t o the forward l i f t lug on the engine t o control it during rotation. Ensure t h a t locking pin i s firmly seated. not r o t a t e engine with t a i l cone i n s t a l l e d . 6-26. D o
FLEXIBLE HOSES
- Five f l e x i b l e hoses
a r e i n s t a l l e d i n place of the (2) fan
o r i g i n a l engine l i n e s t o c l e a r the engine mount assembly and fan i n l e t fairing. These l i n e s are: ( 1 ) fan s e a l pressure a i r l i n e , lubrication l i n e , ( 3 ) fan scavenge l i n e , (4) fan sump vent l i n e and
( 5 ) the engine f u e l supply l i n e (See figure 6-4. ) Tag and remove these
l i n e s and cap and i d e n t i f y a l l f i t t i n g s and openings. t o t h e JP4 tanks, may be removed a t t h i s time. openings. 6-27. In addition, the f l e x i b l e l i n e from the f i f t h stage bleed port, which supplies pressure Tag and cap the l i n e and Remove clamps on engine mount and s t o r e f o r safekeeping.
GNR T R E EAO
A.
To remove, proceed a s follows:
Note generator orientation and loosen nuts securing generator mounting adapter t o upper accessory pad. IdentiQ, tag e l e c t r i c a l leads and disconnect from generator.
B.
Carefully r o t a t e and disengage generator from accessory drive pad and remove generator.
C.
I n s t a l l cover on accessory pad, using o r i g i n a l hardware.
6-28. HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR proceed a s follows:
To remove only a damaged hydraulic reservoir, CAUTION
Cover ecgine and- fan i n l e t s

'
Report 7260-954002
A.
Drain reservoir by removing *-inch
cap a t base and catch f l u i d
in s u i t a b l e container.
Replace %-inch cap.
B.
Remove %-inch f i t t i n g and 3/8 inch f i t t i n g from forward side of reservoir.
C.
Remove 3/8 inch f i t t i n g from a f t side of reservoir. Remove %-inch f i t t i n g a t bottom of reservoir. Remove 10/32 inch b o l t and nut a t support bracket a t r e a r of reservoir.
D.
E.
F.
Remove .reservoir from mounting bracket.
6-29. Removal of the hydraulic reservoir during engine change and buildup requires performance of the following: NT OE Drain ?eservoir while engine i s i n v e r t i c a l position on the maintenance stand.
A.
Remove connector jacks, J88, J125, 5139, and 5330 from reservoir bracket system.
B.
Disconnect and i d e n t i f y a l l e l e c t r i c a l l i n e s t o inverter impedance u n t i l mounted above the reservoir.
C.
Unsolder and i d e n t i f y two leads t o MI4 Running Time meter. Remove one clamp and one b o l t holding hydraulic t h r o t t l e compens a t i o n u n i t t o bracket system.
D .
E.
Remove ground leads a t lower bracket. Disconnect and i d e n t i f g a l l e l e c t r i c a l leads t o power relay K4. Disconnect and i d e n t i f y e l e c t r i c a l leads t o c i r c u i t breaker CB21 on t h e impedance bracket.
F .
G.
6-22
Report No. 7260-954002
H. Unsolder and i d e n t i f y leads t o r e l a y K15.
I.
Disconnect and cap o r plug a l l hydraulic l i n e s t o reservoir. Remove clamp on lower bracket and clamp on top bracket. Remove f o u r 10/32 inch engine. b o l t s and nuts mounting top bracket t o
J. K.
L .
M.
6-30.
Remove four 10/32 inch b o l t s and nuts mounting bottom bracket t o engine. L i f t out r e s e r v o i r mounting bracket.
HYDRAULIC PUMP
A.
To remove, proceed a s follows: Cap a l l p o r t s and
Disconnect a l l piping t o hydraulic pump. fittings.
B.
Remove four n u t s securing hydraulic pump t o accessory pad and remove hydraulic pump.
C.
I n s t a l l cover on accessory pad adapter and secure with n u t s removed i n B.
6-31
INVERTER To remove, proceed a s follows : A.

B.
Remove e l e c t r i c a l leads and t a g f o r i d e n t i f i c a t i o n . Remove four 5/16-inch b o l t s , n u t s and washers, and e i g h t washers securing i n v e r t e r mounting f e e t t o base.
C.
Remove i n v e r t e r . I d e n t i f y and s t o r e hardware f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n .
D.
6-32.
INVERTER MOUNTING BASE

A.
To remove, proceed a s follows:
Remove four s e l f -locking nuts ( ~ ~ 2 1 0 4 3 - 3securing forward end ) of base t o forward flange.
Report No. 7260-954002
B.
Remove s i x self-locking nuts (MS21043-3) securing a f t end of base of r e a r flange and remove inverter mounting base.
C.
Identifg and s t o r e hardware f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n .
E EAO 6-33. TACHOMETER G N R T R

A.
To remove, proceed a s follows :
Disconnect two e l e c t r i c a l cannon plugs t h a t a r e safety-wired. Remove four nuts securing tachometer generator t o engine o i l pump and remove tachometer generator.
B.
C.
Cap tachometer generator access opening. Identify and s t o r e hardware f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n .
D.
6-34. FAN INLET REMOVAL Remove1 of the fan i n l e t includes the removal of the engine mount assembly (outer f a i r i n g ) inner bellmouth, and t h e support r i n g assembly.
A.
Engine mount removal (see figures 6 4 and 6-9. )

1)
Support the turbofan j e t engine with the forward and a f t attachments of the j e t engine horizontal h o i s t sling. NT OE The center attachment may be swung up out of the way f o r access.
2)
Relieve tension on steady r e s t and remove screws securing steady r e s t mount t o engine. engine. Swing steady r e s t back t o clear Identify and s t o r e hardware f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n .
CAUTION
D not allow .the enginemount t o drop or o otherwise subj e c t the fan i n l e t f a i r i n g t o physical damage.
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No. 7260-954.002
6-25
TANG ENGAGED IN CLEVIS (2 PLACES) SECURE WITH THREADED PINS 7161-421028-1 ENGINE MOUNT y
VIEW C
HORIZONTAL HOIST SLING CENTER AND FORWARD ATTACHMENTS (ENGAGED)
MOUNTING
STEADY REST BRACKET
VIEW D
Figure 6-9, Engine M6unt Assembly 6-26 Report No. 7260-954002
3 ) Remove f a n i n l e t covers and screens.
4 ) Remove two engine mount pins (7161-421 028-1 ) securing

engine mount tangs t o c l e v i s engine mounts. 5) Carefully move engine mount forward u n t i l it i s i n contact with forward attachment of j e t engine horizontal h o i s t sling 6) Engage t h e center attachment of t h e j e t engine horizontal h o i s t s l i n g with t h e engine l i f t r i n g and t i g h t e n turnbuckle t o take up load. Disengage forward s l i n g attachment and swing it back out of t h e way. 7) Remove engine mount.
8) Reattach forward s l i n g attachment

B.
Innsr bellmouth
1)
removal (see f i g u r e 6-10. )
Remove 10 screws (AN501ADI 0-7) and washers (AN960ClOL) securing t h e two halves of t h e inner bellmouth together. I d e n t i f g and s t o r e hardware f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n .
2)
Remove
24 screws ( ~ ~ 5 AD^1 0 0-7) and washers ( ~ ~ 9 6OL) 1 0~
securing a f t end of inner bellmouth halves t o engine. Identifg and s t o r e hardware f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n .
3 ) Remove 26 screws ( A . 5 0 1 ~ ~ 1 0 - 7 ) and washers (AN960C10L)

securing forward end of i n n e r bellmouth halves t o support r i n g assembly. Remove bellmouth. I d e n t i f y and s t o r e hardware f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n . 4) Loosen clamps and remove a i r s t a r t tube assembly quick disconnect coupling. installation. I d e n t i f y and s t o r e hardware f c r
Report No. 7260-954002
AIR LMPINGEMENT
f--CLAMP
n,
SUPPORTBRACKETJ SEGMENT
VIEW A
ANGLE BRACKET (16 HIDDEN)
INNER BELLMOUTH 7
Figure 6-10. Support Ring and Inner Bellmouth Assembly

6-28
Report No. 7260-954002
Support r i n g removal 1)
(See f i g u r e 6-1 0. ) Identify
Remove s i x screws ( ~ ~ 5ADA0-7) and washers ( A ~ 9 6 0 ~ 1 0 L ) 01 securing t h e two halves of support r i n g together. and s t o r e hardware f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n .
2)
Remove 16 screws ( ~ ~ 5ADI1 0 0-7) and washers (AN960C10L) securing support r i n g t o angle brackets on engine flange. I d e n t i f y and s t o r e hardware f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n .
3)
Carefully remove t h e two halves of t h e support r i n g assembly.
4 ) Remove 16 angle brackets and b o l t s (GE P a r t Numbers

37B211042P101 and R105P6N) from engine fiange
Identify
and s t o r e angle brackets and hardware f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n . 5) on I n s t a l l 16 b o l t s (GE P a r t Number 327~4.55~012) engine.
r raw b o l t s from stock. )

Replace o r i g i n a l fan s e a l pressure a i r l i n e , f a n l u b r i c a t i o n l i n e , fan scavenge l i n e , fan sump vent l i n e , and engine f u e l supply l i n e on engine. (consult t h e G. E. Technical representative f o r a d d i t i o n a l information. )
6 ) Remove theromocouple harness bracket.

7)
6-35.
INSTALLATION INTO SHIPPING CONTAINER
The shipping container
provided f o r t h e turbofan j e t engine contains a l l of t h e necessary f i t t i n g s and hardware t o support t h e engine during storage o r shipment With t h e engine supported on t h e center and a f t f i t t i n g s of t h e j e t engine h o r i z o n t a l s l i n g , it i s positioned i n t h e container and supported on t h e f i t t i n g s . Replace l i f t i n g eye on f a n case with manufacturer's Wrap t h e engine i n moistureproof paper, with bags of desiccant, part. and s e a l t h e wrapping. I n s t a l l t h e cover on t h e shipping container.
Report No. 7260-945002
6-29
NT OE The shipping support f i t t i n g s may be removed from the container f o r attachment t o the engine, f o r convenience. Consult the G. E. technical
representative f o r additional information. 6-36. JT4 TANK =OVA& 6-37. The two JP4 tanks a r e identical. However, t h e i r removal procedures
vary s l i g h t l y due t o - t h e i r location on the LLTV.

CAUTION
The JP4 tanks a r e extremely lightweight construction and w i l l not withstand any abuse o r rough handling. D not drop o r dent the tanks. o Keep a l l caps and
plugs i n place a f t e r removal t o prevent contamination. 6-38. PIPING CONNECTIONS
- Use
extreme care when disconnecting f i t t i n g s t o
the JT4 tanks so a s not t o damage the tanks.
6-39. AFT TANK REMOVAL
- To remove,
proceed a s follows: NT OE -
JT4 tanks should be completely drained before removal, tanks.

A.
Provide support while removing the JP4
Remove ground wire and e l e c t r i c a l plugs. Disconnect pressurization hose assembly a t top of tank and Report No. 72'60-954092
B.
6-30
disconnect main f u e l o u t l e t hose assembly a t lower s i d e of tank a t f u e l f i l t e r connection.

C.
Remove washer and b o l t from t h e t n forward support arm and. ak attachment.
D.
Remove washers and b o l t s from each hangar and attachment fitting.
E.
Disconnect upper diagonal brace and remove. Raise t h e JP4 tank and saddle and remove from t h e vehicle. Cap and plug a l l connections. NT OE Refer t o paragraph 6-66 f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures
F.
G.
6-40
FORWARD T N R M V L AK E O A
The JP4 f u e l tank and saddle a r e removed However, t h e %snk and saddle a r e
i n a s i m i l a r manner a s t h e A f t tank.
lowered when removing them from t h e vehicle. NT OE Refer t o paragraph 6-68 f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures. 6-41. 6-42 E OA JET ENGINE THROTTLE CONTROL. SYSTEN R M V L The removal procedures a r e provided f o r t h e manual t h r o t t l e ,
hydraulic actuator, cross-over valve and temperature compensator.
6-43.
M N A THROTTLE AND ACTUATOR AUL
- To remove t h e manual t h r o t t l e
and a c u t a t o r , proceed a s follows:
Report No. 7260954002
The closed l o o p h y d r a u l i c t h r o t t l e system normally has 100 t o 120 p s i of h y d r a u l i c p r e s s u r e i n t h e system a t a l l times. Observe t h r o t t l e temperature compensator, while r e l e a s i n g trapped p r e s s u r e t o zero. P i s t o n rod should move inboard a s pressure bleeds off. power be discontinued. Electrical
A,
B.
Remove a c c e s s panel from l e f t s i d e of cockpit s t r u c t u r e . Remove a c c e s s panel from p i l o t ' s console. See B e l l drawing 7260-561001.
C.
Remove b o l t and washer connecting a c t u a t o r t o manual t h r o t t l e .
D. Remove h y d r a u l i c l i n e s t o a c t u a t o r and cap a l l p o r t s and

plug l i n e s .
E.
Remove b o l t and washer from f i x e d end of a c t u a t o r t o f r e e actuator.
F.
Remove two screws holding t h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n legend p l a t e on cover of p i l o t ' s console.
G.
Remove e i g h t screws holding cover on p i l o t ' s console. L i f t cover from p i l o t ' s console t o provide a c c e s s t o t h r o t t l e mounting.
H.
I.
J.
Remove mounting b o l t s from t h r o t t l e gear case. Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l l e a d s t o t h r o t t l e and remove t h r o t t l e .
Report No. 7260-954002
6-44
CROSS-OVER VALVE follows:
- To
remove t h e cross-over v a l v e , proceed a s
A.
Remove two h y d r a u l i c l i n e s t o valve.
See B e l l dwg.7260-435001.
B.
C.
Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l l e a d Cannon plug which i s s a f e t y wired. Remove two lock-nuts from b o l t s on valve mounting b r a c k e t and remove valve. NT OE Refer t o paragraph 6-50 f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures.
6-45
HYDRAULIC ACTUATOR
- To
remove t h e j e t engine-mounted
h y d r a u l i c a c t u a t o r , proceed a s follows:
A.
Disconnect h y d r a u l i c f l e x l i n e s from a c t u a t o r and cap a l l p o r t s and plug l i n e s .
B.
Remove c o t t e r p i n , c a s t l e n u t , washer, and b o l t from f u e l c o n t r o l cam and a c t u a t o r p i s t o n .
C.
Remove c o t t e r p i n , c a s t l e n u t , washer, and b o l t from a c t u a t o r mounting b r a c k e t and a c t u a t o r .
D.
Remove a c t u a t o r from engine.
6-46
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATOR
- To
remove t h e temperature compensator,
proceed a s follows:
A.
Disconnect h y d r a u l i c l i n e s and cap a l l p o r t s and plug l i n e s . Remove b o l t and mounting clamp and t h e n remove temperature compensator.
B.
Report No. 7260-954002
6-47
6-48
INSTALLAT I O N PROCEDURES The i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures f o r replacement of t h e j e t engine i n
t h e v e h i c l e , mounting of a c c e s s o r i e s , i n s t a l l a t i o n of JP-4 f u e l t a n k s and manual h y d r a u l i c t h r o t t l e c o n t r o l system a r e b a s i c a l l y i n r e v e r s e order of removal. I n s t r u c t i o n s a r e provided when i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures vary from t h e removal procedures. 6-49 M N A THROTTLE AND ACTUATOR AUL
The manual t h r o t t l e and h y d r a u l i c
a c t u a t o r a r e i n s t a l l e d i n t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of removal. ( ~ e f e r o parat graph 6-43). 6-50 CROSS-OVER V L E AV
- The
cross-over v a l v e i s i n s t a l l e d i n t h e r e v e r s e
o r d e r of removal. (Refer t o paragraph 6-44).
6-51
,
HYDFtAULIC ACTUATOR
- The
j e t engine-mounted h y d r a u l i c a c t u a t o r i s
i n s t a l l e d i n t h e r e v e r s e order of removal. (Refer t o paragraph 6-45) 6-52 TEMPERATURE COMPENSATOR
- The
temperature compensator i s i n s t a l l e d
i n t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of removal. ( Refer t o paragraph 6-46).
6-53
M N A THROTTU CONTROL SERVICING AND ADJUSTMENT AUL
- Rigging,
s e r v i c i n g and adjustment procedures a r e performed i n accordance w i t h t h o s e provided i n Manual J e t T h r o t t l e System Hangar Ground T e s t Procedure Report Number 7260-928052.
6-54
sling.
INSTALLATION O TURBOFAN ENGINE F
The t u r b o f a n j e t engine i s
removed from i t s shipping c o n t a i n e r w i t h t h e j e t engine..horizontal h o i s t The f o l l o w i n g procedures may be used a s a guide.
A.
Remove shipping c o n t a i n e r cover and open moisture-proof wrapping.
Report No. 7260-954002
CAUTION Use extreme care so a s not t o damage t h e engine.
B. I n s t a l l l i f t eyebolt i n engine f a n case and a t t a c h t h e

c e n t e r and a f t l i f t f i t t i n g s of t h e j e t engine h o r i z o n t a l h o i s t s l i n g t o t h e i r corresponding l i f t r i n g s on t h e engine. Take up s l a c k w i t h overhead h o i s t i n g device. C. Remove a l l a t t a c h i n g hardware securing t h e engine t o i t s shipping container f i t t i n g s .
D. Raise t h e engine c l e a r of t h e shipping supports and cover

t h e i n l e t and exhaust openings.
E.
I n s t a l l t h e j e t engine h o r i z o n t a l h o i s t s l i n g forward attachment f i t t i n g adapter t o t h e engine i n l e t with 10 b o l t s and nuts provided. ( s e e f i g u r e 6-7).
FAN INLET INSTALLATION - The f a n i n l e t c o n s i s t s of t h e engine 6-55 mount and o u t e r f a i r i n g , t h e i n n e r bellmouth, and t h e support r i n g
assembly. cedures.
A.
These items a r e i n s t a l l e d according t o t h e following pro-
Piping removal
-- The
o r i g i n a l f a n s e a l pressure a i r l i n e ,
fan l u b r i c a t i o n l i n e , f a n scavenge l i n e , f a n sump v e n t , and engine f u e l supply l i n e s must be removed a t t h i s time. Cap a l l f i t t i n g s and openings, t o avoid contaminating t h e engine, when l i n e s a r e removed.
B.
Support r i n g 1)
-- To
assembly, proceed a s follows:
Remove 16 b o l t s (GE P a r t Number 327B455P012) on engine flange and r e t u r n t o stock. (See f i g u r e s 6-4 and 6-10 f o r locations).
Report No. 7260-954002
6-35
2)
I n s t a l l 16 angle brackets and b o l t s (GE P a r t Numbers 37B211042P and R 1 0 5 ~ 6 ~ ) flange, using o r i g i n a l nuts. on Torque b o l t s t o
35 t o 39 pounds inches.
3)
C a r e f u l l y a l i g n t h e two halves of t h e support r i n g assembly with angle brackets and a t t a c h with 1 6 screws (AN~O~AD~O-7) washers ( ~ ~ 6 0 ~ 1 0 ~ ) . t h e two and Secure halves of t h e support r i n g t o g e t h e r with s i x screws (AN~OUID~O-7) washers (A~960C10~).Tighten a l l and screws and lockwire.
When a l i g n i n g t h e support r i n g assembly, ensure t h a t cutouts and contoured a r e a s c l e a r engine and piping.
4)
Remove cap from a i r impingement s t a r t e r duct on engine and connect tube assembly (7161-421048-1) place with clamp. ( s e e f i g u r e 6-4). and secure i n
C.
I n n e r bellmouth f i g u r e 6-10) 1)
-- To assemble
proceed a s follows.
(see
Align t h e cutouts i n t h e two halves of t h e i n n e r bellmouth w i t h engine piping and s t r u t s and p o s i t i o n them over t h e support r i n g assembly.
2)
Loosely a t t a c h t h e forward edge of t h e i n n e r bellmouth t o t h e support r i n g assembly with 26 screws ( A N ~ o ~ A D ~ O - 7 ) and washers (AN960~10~).
3) Loosely a t t a c h t h e two halves of t h e inner bellmouth t o

each o t h e r with 10 screws (AN501A~10-7) and.washers (AN960~10~).
Report No. 7260-954002
4)
Attach t h e a f t edge of t h e inner bellmouth t o t h e engine f a n i n l e t housting w i t h 24 screws ( ~ ~ 5 1 0 ~ ~ 1 0 - 7 ) and washers ( A ~ 9 6 0 ~ 1 0 ~ ) .
5)
Secure a l l screws and lockwire.
6-56
ENGINE MOUNT
- To assemble,
proceed a s follows. (see f i g u r e 6-9).
A.
Carefully p o s i t i o n t h e engine mount and o u t e r f a i r i n g over t h e i n l e t end of engine a s f a r a s it w i l l go ( t i g h t a g a i n s t t h e c e n t e r l i f t attachment).

CAUTION
Use extreme care so a s not t o damage or distort the fan i n l e t fairing.
B .
Attach t h e forward l i f t f i t t i n g of t h e j e t engine h o r i z o n t a l s l i n g t o t h e l i f t f i t t i n g adapter i n s t a l l e d a t t h e engine inlet. Tighten turnbuckle t o t a k e up load and r e l e a s e c e n t e r
l i f t f i t t i n g from engine.
C.
Carefully p o s i t i o n engine mount so t h a t mounting tangs engage with c l e v i s mounts on engine. with threaded engine mount pins. Secure i n two places Lockwire engine mount pins.
NOTE Engine steady r e s t attachment c l e v i s on engine mount i s a t 9 o'clock, when viewed from t h e engine i n l e t , when mount i s c o r r e c t l y positioned.
D.
I n s t a l l steady r e s t attachment i n engine mount c l e v i s . Remove nuts from engine flange mounting screws and i n s t a l l steady r e s t attachment w i t h o r i g i n a l mounting screws. screws t o 4-4-to 4 8 - i n ~ h / ~ o u n d s . Torque
E.
Report No. 7260-954.002
6-37
NT OE The steady r e s t turnbuckle must be a l i g n e d with t h e engine c e n t e r l i n e f b r c o r r e c t p o s i t i o n i n g of steady r e s t attachment on engine.
F.
Engage steady r e s t turnbuckle with attachment c l e v i s on engine and secure i n place.
G.
Adjust turnbuckle so t h a t engine c e n t e r l i n e i s perpendicular t o t h e engine mount. Safety wire 'turnbuckle.
H.
I n s t a l l f a n i n l e t cover, i f required. Complete t h e a i r impingement s t a r t e r ducting i n s t a l l a t i o n . I n s t a l l t h e turbofan j e t engine on t h e maintenance stand according t o t h e procedures presented i n paragraph 6-23.
I.
J.
6-57
T C O EE GNR T R AH MTR E EAO
- The tachometer - The
generator i s i n s t a l l e d i n
t h e reverse order of removal. 6-58 AE INVERTER MOUNTING B S
( ~ e f e r o paragraph 6-33). t i n v e r t e r mounting base i s i n s t a l l e d
i n t h e reverse order of removal.
(Refer t o paragraph 6-32) Torque
mounting b o l t s a t forward flange t o 20 t o 25 inch pounds and mounting b o l t s a t a f t flange t o 4 4 t o 48 inch pounds. INVERTER The i n v e r t e r i s i n s t a l l e d i n t h e reverse order of 6-59 removal. (Refer t o paragraph 6-31)
6-60
HYDRAULIC PUMP
- The hydraulic
- The
pump i s i n s t a l l e d i n t h e reverse
order of removal. 6-61
(Refer t o paragraph 6-30]. hydraulic r e s e r v o i r i s i n s t a l l e d i n t h e
HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR
reverse order of removal. 6d38
(Refer t o paragraphs 6-28 and 6-29). Report No. 7260-954002
6-62
GENERATOR
- The
generator i s i n s t a l l e d i n t h e reverse order
of removal.
(Refer t o paragraph 6-27).
6-63
UXIBLE HOSES
- The f i v e items of piping,
removed i n paragraph Prior
6-26, a r e replaced with f l e x i b l e hoses a s shown i n f i g u r e . 6-4. t o i n s t a l l a t i o n , t h e f l e x i b l e hoses should be flushed with
t r i c h l o r e t h y l e n e , o r s i m i l a r solvent, and a i r dried t o ensure against contaminating t h e engine.
6-64
ENGINE AIR IXUT INSTALLATION
- The
engine a i r i n l e t bellmouth
and a u t o m a t i c . t h r o t t l e c o n t r o l mounting bracket a r e i n s t a l l e d with t h e engine i n t h e horizontal a t t i t u d e on t h e maintenance stand. A. Remove forward l i f t attachment f i t t i n g , i f not previously accomplished, and remove a i r i n l e t protective cover.
B.
Align t h e T
a i r sensor piping on t h e engine a i r i n l e t 2 bellmouth with engine piping and p o s i t i o n t h e engine a i r i n l e t bellmouth on engine.
C.
Align t h e s e r r a t i o n s of t h e t h r o t t l e arm of t h e t h r o t t l e c o n t r o l u n i t with t h e missing tooth of s p l i n e s h a f t of t h e engine t h r o t t l e . Tighten clamping nut.
D. Secure t h e engine a i r i n l e t bellmouth t o t h e engine with t h e

screws removed i n paragraph 6-24.D. pounds and s a f e t y a s required. NT OE The lowest mounting screws a r e threaded i n t o a tapped p l a t e and do not require nuts. Torque t o 6 t o 8-inch
E.
I n s t a l l engine a i r i n l e t cover, i f required.
F, Attach t h e overhead h o i s t i n g device t o t h e forward engine

l i f t f i t t i n g and take up slack.
Report No, 7260-954.002
6-39
The h o i s t i s used t o control t h e engine during r o t a t i o n from horizontal t o v e r t i c a l on t h e maintenance stand.

G.
Remove locking pin on engine gimbal adapter A-frame and r o t a t e t h e engine t o t h e v e r t i c a l position. and disengage t h e overhead h o i s t . I n s t a l l locking p i n
H I n s t a l l exhaust cone on engine t a i l pipe. .

6-65 INSTALLATION INTO LLTV
- The
turbofan j e t engine i s i n s t a l l e d
i n t o t h e LLTV i n e s s e n t i a l l y t h e reverse order of removal.(Refer t o paragraphs 6-20 and 6-22). Ensure t h a t s u f f i c i e n t slack i s l e f t i n t h e Instructions f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n e l e c t r i c a l harness a t t h e gimbal crossovers t o enable maximum gimbal movement with no s t r a i n on t h e harness. provided i n paragraph 6-49 through 6-53. 6-66 LLTV. JP-4 TANK INSTALLATION and mechanical adjustment of t h e automatic t h r o t t l e control u n i t a r e
- The two JP-4
tanks a r e i d e n t i c a l .
However, t h e i r i n s t a l l a t i o n d e t a i l s vary due t o t h e i r l o c a t i o n on. t h e The following paragraphs provide t h e procedures f o r i n s t a l l i n g t h e tanks and saddles on t h e LLTV. CAUTION
The JP-4 tanks a r e extremely lightweight construction and w i l l not take any abuse or rough handling. t h e tanks. D not drop o r dent o Keep a l l caps and plugs in
place t o prevent contamination.
Report No. 7260-954002
6-67
A T TANK INSTALLATION F
- To
i n s t a l l t h e a f t tank, proceed a s
follows :
A.
Raise t h e JP-4 tank and saddle up and over t h e frame and lower i n t o p o s i t i o n and a l i g n t h e hangers with attachment f i t t i n g s on t h e s t r u c t u r e ( r a d i a l hanger forward).
B.
I n s t a l l a b o l t through each hanger and attachment f i t t i n g s ; use a washer on e i t h e r s i d e of attachment f i t t i n g a s a spacer; and secure with a washer and nut. Tighten f i n g e r t i g h t .
C.
I n s t a l l t h e forward tank support arm between t h e forward hanger and i t s attachment p o i n t on t h e s t r u c t u r e below t h e tank hanger. Secure i n t h e same manner previously described.
D.
E.
Tighten a l l attachments. Connect plumbing, ground wire and e l e c t r i c a l connectors.
6-68
F R A D T N INSTALLATION OW R AK
- The
forward JP-4 tank and saddle i s However, t h e r a d i a l
i n s t a l l e d i n a manner s i m i l a r t o t h e a f t tank. body s t r u c t u r e .
hanger i s poivted a f t and i t s support arm hangs downward from t h e c e n t e r
6-69
PIPING CONNECTIONS
- Use
extreme care when connecting f i t t i n g s
t o t h e JP-4 tanks so a s not t o damage t h e tanks and applying t h e torques s p e c i f i e d on t h e approved check l i s t . 6-70 JET ENGINE ADJUSTMENTS Refer t o J e t Engine Functional Ramp Test Procedure, Report Number
6-71
7260-928058, f o r adjustments on j e t 'engine. 6-72 JET ENGINE AND JP-4 FUEL T N S SERVICING AK Refer t o s e c t i o n I of t h i s manual f o r general s e r v i c i n g procedures 1
6-73
f o r t h e j e t engine and f u e l tanks. Report No. 7260-954002
6-41 /6-42
SECTION IT1 R C E PROPULSION OKT
The rocket system, Figure 7-1, provides t h e means of maneuvering 7-2 t h e vehicle t o comanded f l i g h t a t t i t u d e s , and a l s o provides l i f t c o n t r o l during lunar simulation f l i g h t .
7-3
7-4
ATTITUDE C N R L ROCKETS OTO Two s e t s of e i g h t a t t i t u d e control rockets (18) with separate Two motor-operated i s o l a t i o n valves
f u e l l i n e s provide redundancy.
(14) permit t h e p i l o t t o s e l e c t t h e Standard, Test, o r Both s e t s of a t t i t u d e rockets f o r f l i g h t operation o r t o i s o l a t e one s e t of a t t i t u d e rockets i n t h e event of f a i l u r e of e i t h e r system and e f f e c t a safe landing. The valves a r e controlled by manual operation of t h e a t t i t u d e rockets Test- Standard
- Both s e l e c t o r switch i n t h e cockpit.
Both
s e t s of rockets may be automatically selected by p i l o t movement of t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r t o any hard stop position i n t h e event of d i f f i c u l t y i n maintaining a t t i t u d e control, o r by avionics system when switching t o Backup i n an emergency. Each rocket chamber has an associated solenoid value (17) t o control t h e flow of propellant and a variable o r i f i c e hand value (16) t o provide ground adjustment of t h e rocket t h r u s t between 30 and 90 pounds. switch marked ACS-SAFE ( f i g u r e c o n t r o l rocket system. A guarded a t t i t u d e control system i n h i b i t s o r arms t h e a t t i t u d e
i 3) -1
LIFT ROCKETS
7-6
Two lift rockets provide a variable l i f t t h r u s t nominally
equal t o one-sixth of t h e vehicle weight when t h e remaining five-sixths

Report No. 7260-954002
7-1
of t h e weight i s supported by t h e j e t engine system (simulated l u n a r gravity). Two motor-operated tank i s o l a t i o n valves (19) c o n t r o l l e d by t h e Rocket P r o p e l l a n t switch ( f i g u r e 1-19 provide i s o l a t i o n c a p a b i l i t y of t h e l i f t system should a l e a k occur, and s h u t d m redundancy i n event t h e l i f t rockets (24) f a i l t o shut down on command by t h e normal c o n t r o l l e v e r (T-handle, f i g u r e 1-14
The t h r o t t l e valve (22) v a r i e s
p r o p e l l a n t flow such t h a t t h e l i f t t h r u s t i s proportional t o t h r o t t l e valve crank angle p o s i t i o n . This valve i s e l e c t r i c a l l y c o n t r o l l e d from t h e cockpit through t h e T-handle.
A f r i c t i o n c o n t r o l knob a t t h e base
The check
of t h e l i f t rocket T-handle may be r o t a t e d clockwise t o increase on t h e T-handle s h a f t so t h a t t h e l e v e r w i l l remain i n any position. and a r e matched t o minimize t h r u s t imbalance. v a l v e s (23) r e t a i n p r o p e l l a n t i n l i n e s t o minimize t h r u s t response time High pressure r e f i e f valves (15) prevent pressure buildup i n propellant l i n e s due t o thermal expansion and decomposition of r e s i d u a l hydrogen peroxide i n f u e l l i n e s . 7-7 R C E INSTRUMENTATION OKT Pressure transducers monitor a l l 16 a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l rocket
7-8
chamber p r e s s u r e s f o r : ( 1 ) t h e stuck valve malfunction d e t e c t i o n c i r c u i t ( a c t i v a t e s stuck valve warning l i g h t ( f i g u r e 1-28) and i s monitored i n telemetry van) and (2) f o r i n - f l i g h t ground monitoring. d i s p l a y and ground monitoring. Two pressure t r a n s d u c e r s monitor both l i f t rocket chamber pressures f o r cockpit
A t h i r d l i f t rocket transducer s u p p l i e s
s i g n a l s f o r t h e T/W avionic computer, t h e H202
remaining computer,
and f o r a c t i v a t i n g t h e automatic j e t t h r o t t l e f o r l u n a r simulation. There a r e s i x t e e n 90-pound t h r u s t a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l rockets and Decomposition of t h e 90 percent The high pressure
7-9
two 500-pound t h r u s t l i f t motors.
concentration of hydrogen peroxide ( ~ ~ i 0 c a t a l y s t packs i n each n ~ ) rocket chamber produces superheated steam,.and oxygen.
7-2
Report No. 7260-954.002
of t h e s e gases escaping a t t h e rocket nozzle provides t h e propulsive force. 7-10 See figure?-2. S t a i n l e s s s t e e l l i n e s c a r r y t h e H202 monopropellant from i t s
The H 0 tanks.have a common 2 2 manifold and mount on t h e r i g h t and l e f t s i d e s of t h e v e h i c l e main two tanks t o t h e t h r u s t chambers. frame. Connecting tubing i s symetrical i n l e n g t h and s i z e t o provide 0n/off flow c o n t r o l i n t h e The L i f t e q u a l flow from each p r o p e l l e n t tank.
L i f t Rocket system i s by motor operated shutoff valves.
Rocket Control system c o n s i s t s of a pilot-operated T-handle, a r h e o s t a t e , a remote t h r o t t l i n g p o s i t i o n c o n t r o l box, a r o t a r y a c t u a t o r and a t h r o t t l e valve. Propellant flow from t h e p r o p e l l e n t tanks i s balanced by o r i f i c e s i n t h e l i n e s .
7-11
The two separate a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l systems a r e i s o l a t e d by
motor operated shutoff valves c o n t r o l l e d by t h e p i l o t operated s e l e c t o r switch. Variable o r i f i c e valves and solenoid valves c o n t r o l t h e t h r u s t of each of t h e 1 6 a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l rockets. t h e p i t c h , r o l l , and yaw axes. of v a r i a b l e o r i f i c e valves. p u l s i n g ope r a t ion. 7-12 gas. The p r o p e l l e n t system i s operated by high pressure helium
/'
E i t h e r t h e tlTestw o r
"Standardm, o r both systems may be s e l e c t e d f o r a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l i n Thrust l e v e l s a r e p r e s e t by adjustment The on/of f solenoid valves provide rapid
The common manifold on t h e two pressure source tanks provides
s e p a r a t e o r common p r e s s u r i z a t i o n of t h e two H202 p r o p e l l e n t tanks. The helium system a l s o has f i l t e r s , o r i f i c e s , and r e g u l a t o r s .
7-13
Safety f e a t u r e s a r e b u i l t i n t o t h e system i n various check
v a l v e s , r e l i e f valves, motor operated valves, and o r i f i c e s .
Report No. 7260-954002
7-14
I n t h e helium system rapid pressure t r a n s f e r between tanks i s Normal serviced pressure i s 4000 p s i g a t ambient.
r e s t r i c t e d by an o r i f i c e i n case of rupture of one s e c t i o n of t h e high pressure system. temperature of 70' p r e s s u r e supply.
F t o 100' F.
Downstream of t h e helium source tanks,
two helium r e g u l a t o r s provide redundant sources of
495
psig propellent The
Due t o t h e high flow r a t e c a p a b i l i t y , each helium
r e g u l a t o r i s r e s t r i c t e d by an o r i f i c e a t t h e r e g u l a t o r i n l e t .
o r i f i c e prevents overpressurization of t h e H 0 tank i n t h e event of 2 2 complete f a i l u r e of t h e helium r e g u l a t o r . The H 0 tanks a r e protected from overpressurization by individual 2 2 r e l i e f valves which s t a r t opening a t about 54-0 + 20 psig. The s i t u a -
7-15
t i o n occurs when a helium r e g u l a t o r f a i l s t o r e s t r i c t pressures below t h i s level. 7-16 The a t t i t u d e rocket tubing and l i f t rocket tubing i s protected These
from trapped p r e s s u r e buildup by high pressure r e l i e f valves which vent on extreme thermal f l u i d expansion pressures above 650 psig. r e l i e f valves vent t h e raw H202 i n t o t h e l i f t rocket chamber where it
i s decomposed i n t o l e s s harmful products.

The H202tanks a r e i s o l a t e d from each other with check valves These valves p r e v e n t t r a n s f e r of propellent from tank t o
7-17
i n t h e manifold i n l e t l i n e s t o both l i f t rockets and a t t i t u d e rocket systems. tank during operations.
7-18
The tanks a r e connected between t h e p r e s s u r i z a t i o n i n l e t p o r t s T y s tubing i s normally o p e r a t i o n a l
by a manifold tubing arrangement.
b u t can be r e s t r i c t e d by c l o s i n g a cockpit actuated motor operated valve, thus making t h e two tanks completely separate.
Report No. 7260-954002
7-19
INSTALLATION AND R M V L E OA
7-21
These procedures a r e f o r t y p i c a l equipment and a r e f o r guidance A.

B.
i n both removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n of u n i t s s i m i l a r . t o those described. I n s t a l l H 0 tubing and u n i t s by routing shown on blue p r i n t 2 2 7260-460001. Lightly l u b r i c a t e male f i t t i n g s with a drop of Flurolube LG-160 before torquing f i t t i n g s . (Since l u b r i c a n t i s detrimental t o rocket' operation, avoid g e t t i n g it i n t o tubing o r on wetted surfaces. )
C.
D.
Keep components in p l a s t i c containers when not a c t u a l l y mounted. Keep caps on openings of components. Support u n i t s a s required when connecting and torquing than. A f t e r clamping tubing i n place and making f i t t i n g s hand t i g h t , v e r i f y t h a t i n s t a l l a t i o n agrees with drawing by u n i t i n d e n t i f i c a t i o n and orientation. applicable. Also, check flow d i r e c t i o n where
E.
F.
G.
When a subsystem i s assembled and checked, torque f i t t i n g s t o valves given. Where torque values a r e not given, r e f e r t o t a b l e s 7-1, 7-2 (0-ring and gasket s e a l s )
, and
7-3.
7-22
H202 Tank A.
(Right tank, a t t i t u d e starboard, outboard, f i g u r e 7-3).
Hand t i g h t e n shoulder b o l t s (NAs 1304-7) with washers (AN 960 P 416) attaching forward and a f t trunnion and tank D support tube assemblies t o main support r i n g a t two points. Refer t o B e l l drawing 7260-460003.
B.
Hand t i g h t e n three b o l t s (AN 4H7A) with bushings (7260-152006-5) a t t a c h i n g forward and a f t trunnion and tank support tube assembly t o upper corners of center body. Engage both H202 tank trunnions with the tank support trunnions.
7 -6
Report No. 7260-954.002
7-8
Report No. 7260-994002
Report No. 7260-954002
T A B L E 7-3 TORQUE VALUES F O R S T E E L NUT-BOLT (SCREW) COMBINATIONS

?
BOLTS AND SCREWS A N3 t h r o u g h A N20 AN42 through AN49 AN73 t h r o u g h AN81 AN173 through AN186 AN502 AN525 AN509 B e l l Std. 6 Z 1
_
BOLTS AND SCREWS MS20004 through MS20024 (NAS144 through NAS158) (NAS17 2) NAS333 through NAS340 NAS464 (Shear) NAS583 through NAS590
NUTS TENSION SHEAR TENSION
NUTS SHEAR AN320 AN364 (NAS1022)
AN256 AN320 AN310 AN364 (NAS1022) AN315 AN361 (NAS1024) AN362 (NAS1023) AN363 AN365 AN366 AN373
b
A N256 AN310 AN315 AN361 (NAS1024) AN362 (NAS1023)
.(NASlO21) (NASlO21) (NAS1023) (NAS1024)
AN363 AN365 AN366 AN373
(NASlO21) (NASlO21) (NAS1023) (NAS1024)
NUT BOLT
TORQUE LIMITS TORQUE LIMITS TORQUE LIMITS TORQUE LIMITS IN.LB IN.LB IN.LR IN.LB MIN MAX. MIN MAX. 8 MIN MAX,+ MIN MAX.
'IZE
8
-36
10
-32 1/4-28 6/16-24 a/cr-a4 7/1eaa 1/2-20
12 20 60 100 160
16 26 70 140 100
7 12 30 40 06
16 40
85
110
380 410 a08 780 1,880
26 80 120 200 820 778 l1l8O 1,260 2,tlbO
90' 100 146 260
16 60 70 120
20 80 00 160 400 $6 0 800 06 0 1,000 2,tlQO 9,300 4,408 8,080
460 480 s/icl-ae 800 6/8-18 1,100 3/4-16 2,300 7/8-14 -14 1/8-12 1/4-12 2,600 8,780 5,000 8,000
$00 270 680 280 1,000 480 1,908 860 %,688 1,888 3,000 11,600 6,600 2,200 7,000 9,000 11,000 h6,4QQ
630 300 850 480 1 , a ~ o 668 1,660 750 3,200 lI6OO 4,350 2,100 6,680 2,700 7,380 3,800 13,4806,000
1
1
1,800 3,660 3,300 4,600 4,200 8,080 BlB00,1I,8O0
Report No. 7260-954002
C.
Hand t i g h t e n b o l t (NAS 501H10A-13) t i t h washer ( ~ ~ 9 6D0 1016) P a t t a c h i n g a f t support trunnion t o tank a f t trunnion. Torque trunnion and tank support assembly mounting b o l t s . Lockwire three b o l t s a t upper corners of center body.
D.
Gap between forward tank trunnion shoulder and mount should be 0.050 t o 0.150 inches. Washers (7260-460003-67) may be used on b o l t (NAs 501~10A-13) t o adjust t h e gap.
E .
I n s t a l l and torque f i t t i n g s on piping t o upper and lower. tanks bosses ( f i g u r e 7-3). 1) *-inch f i t t i n g s t o 270 t o 320 inch pounds (upper and lower),
F .
G.
1-inch f i t t i n g s t o 700 to900 inch pounds (lower). 2) Torque b o l t , (NAS 501H10A-13)in a r t trunnions t o 100 f 10 inch pounds and lockwire. Connect propellent l e v e l sensor t o LLTV main wiring harness.
It i s usually necessary t o remove t h e mount and r e t a i n e r

t o a t t a c h t h e e l e c t r i c a l connector t o t h e probe connector.
H.
I n s t a l l l e f t H202 tank i n a s i m i l a r manner.
HELIUM TANK 7-23 7260-471009.

A. tank.
( f i g u r e 7-2)
See B e l l drawings 7161-460114 and
Verify t h a t plug i s i n s t a l l e d i n pressure p o r t of helium
Report No. 7260-954--2
NOTE Hardware removed i n s t e p B w f i l be used f o r reassembly i n s t e p C.
B. Remove n u t s , b o l t s , and washers securing lower f i t t i n g s t o

t h r e e support brackets and remove lower f i t t i n g s .
C.
P o s i t i o n helium tanks so t h a t mounting trunnions a r e seated i n t o support assemblies w i t h plugged pressure p o r t s outboard. Torque lower f i t t i n g s on support brackets.
Center bracket allows f o r tank expansion, Shims f o r brackets may be required.
D. Remove plug from p o r t s and connect high-pressure piping t o

helium tanks. Torque *-inch bushings t o 270 t o 320 inch pounds, and 318-inch f i t t i n g s t o 220 t o 250 pounds.
7-24 7-25
LIFT ROCKET
( f i g u r e 7-3) See B e l l drawing 7260-460003).
Two i d e n t i c a l l i f t rockets a r e on brackets attached t o main

A.
Match l i f t chambers t o minimize n e t t h r u s t d i f f e r e n c e throughout t h r o t t l e range of 100 t o 500 pounds t h r u s t . S e l e c t two chambers by t h e following c r i t e r i a :
s t r u c t u r a l r i n g of c e n t e r body.
1)
2)
Thrust versus chamber pressure d a t a w i t h i n a 5-pound t h r u s t band through 250 t o 350 pounds t h r u s t range. Chamber pressure versus propellent feed pressure curves most c l o s e l y matched.
Report No. 7260-954002
(7-25)
B o
Hand t i g h t e n f o u r b o l t s (NAS 1304-8H) with washers (AN 960 P 416) i n t o rocket mounting brackets (from t o p ) . D Place t h r e e i n s u l a t o r s (7161-460113-5) and f o u r washers (AN 960 P 416) below mounting bracket on each of f o u r D b o l t s . Alternate i n s u l a t o r s and washers a s shown on dwg. 7260-460003.
C.
D.
Align rocket engine piping with output i n bracket (7260-460001-1) engine. and hand t i g h t e n f o u r b o l t s i n t o ro.cket
Eo
Hand t i g h t e n %02 l i n e t o rocket engine i n l e t . Torque mounting b o l t s t o 20-inch pounds and lockwire. Torque tubing f i t t i n g s t o values on t a b l e Connect chamber pressure transducer t o pressure t a p s on each l i f t rocket chamber and torque t o values on t a b l e
F.
G.
7-26
ATTITUDE C N R L ROCKETS OTO
(see B e l l drawing 7161-470020)
Sixteen i d e n t i c a l a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l rockets a r e mounted i n 7-27 c l u s t e r s of four. One c l u s t e r i s attached t o each of f o u r mounting beams ( f i g u r e 7-2).
A.
Hand t i g h t e n e i g h t b o l t s ( ~ ~ 3 - 4 ~ / - y l ) , washers with (AN960 960 P l o ) , and n u t s (MS 2104543) a t t a c h i n g t h e D bracket on a c l u s t e r w i t h t h e bracket on a mounting beam. (See B e l l drawing 7260-460003).
B.
Hand t i g h t e n H202 piping f i t t i n g s on t h e v a r i a b l e o r i f i c e i n l e t ports.
Use 7260-460051-1 f i t t i n g s i n l o c a t i o n s l i s t e d on t h e blue p r i n t t o f a c i l i t a t e tubing f i t . Report No. 7260-954.002
(7-27) C.
Torque mounting b o l t s t o 20-inch pounds and lockwire. Torque piping f i t t i n g s t o 450 t o 500-inch/~ounds f o r $-inch f l a r e f i t t i n g s , and 270 t o 300-inch/~ounds f o r 318-inch f l a r e fittings
D.
E. F.
7-28
Connect e l e c t r i c a l harness t o LLTV main harness ( f i g u r e 7-3). Dress and secure e l e c t r i c a l harness along support beam. (F'igure 7-4, see B e l l dwg. 7260-541001).
LIFT R C E C N R L SYSTEM OKT O T O
The removal procedures a r e provided f o r t h e T-handle, t h r o t t l e 7-29 valve, r o t a r y a c t u a t o r and remote t h r o t t l i n g p o s i t i o n c o n t r o l box. 7-30 T-HANDLE
- To
remove t h e l i f t rocket T-handle, proceed a s follows:
E l e c t r i c a l power should be disconnected p r i o r t o removal of T-handle.

A.
Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l wiring t o p o s i t i o n i n g r h e o s t a t . Remove s i x mounting screws from T-handle mounting bracket and f r o n t p o r t i o n of p i l o t ' s console. Remove f o u r mounting screws from T-handle mounting bracket and s i d e p o r t i o n of p i l o t ' s console.
B.
C.
ROTARY ACTUATOR AND THROTTLE V L E AV 7-31 t o g e t h e r a s a u n i t , proceed a s follows:
- To
remove t h e s e components
Report No. 7260-954002
WARNING
H202 l i n e s t o components t o be removed must be cleared of H202. Circuit
breaker CB 28 must be pulled.

A.
Disconnect H202 tubing from t h r o t t l e valve. cap l i n e s and ports.
Plug and
B.
Remove s i x mounting b o l t s and washers from mountbg plate. Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l connector t o rotary actuator.
C.
D.
Remove rotary actuator and t h r o t t l e valve s t i l l on mounting p l a t e a s a unit.
7-32
R M T THROTTLING POSITION CONTROL BOX E OE
- To remove
t h i s compon-
ent, proceed a s follows:
A.
B.
Cut s a f e t y wire and remove e l e c t r i c a l connector. Loosen wing nut and remove control box.
7-33 7-34 7-3 5 7-36
PIPING Refer t o paragraph 3-10 f o r rocket system piping i n s t s l l a t i o n . C E KN AND A J S M N R C E C M O E T HC I G DU T E T O K T O P N N S
HELIUM IBGULATOR
Report No. 7260-954002
Figure 7-4.
L i f t Rocket Control Components
Repart So. 7260-954002
7-37
The helium pressure r e g u l a t o r (7260-472120) provides 495 p s i g
pressure t o t h e propellant tanks through t h e network shown i n f i g u r e 7-5. The r e g u l a t o r s normally pressurize both propellant tanks v i a t h e open helium crossover valve. MCKUP PRESSURE Measure t h e lockup pressure of each regulator 7-38 s e p a r a t e l y with t h e helium crossover valve closed. Individual regulator lockup pressures s h a l l be within
5 p s i of each other.
I f an unbalance,
of approximately 20 p s i e x i s t s , e x t r e ~ i e i f f e r e n t i a l i n helium tank d pressures w i l l occur during l i f t rocket f i r i n g . The higher pressufe r e g u l a t o r wil1,meet t h e flow demand, but it may cause helium tank pressure differences a s high a s 700 p s i a f t e r a r e l a t i v e l y s h o r t time of t h r u s t operation.
7-39
The small o r i f i c e between t h e tanks w i l l not allow equalization
of pressure f o r nearly one minute f o r t h i s extreme pressure d i f f e r e n t i a l . . Also, t h e HELIUM L W pressure warning w i l l t r i g g e r e a r l y i f pressure on O t h e r i g h t r e g u l a t o r i s high, o r w i l l t r i g g e r l a t e i f pressure on t h e r i g h t r e g u l a t o r i s low.
7-44
PRESSURX DIFF'EFtENTIAL
- The
regulator lockup pressure d i f f e r e n t i a l
can not be determined by t h e E/P c a r t gage readings unless t h e accuracy of those gages a r e known, except when no pressure d i f f e r e n t i a l e x i s t s (regardless of gage readings). over valve. A f t e r recording t h e regulator lockup With no pressure readings indicated on t h e E/P c a r t gages, open t h e helium crossObserve t h e E/P c a r t gages and record values. change i n t h e E/P c a r t gage readings, t h e pressure d i f f e r e n t i a l i s zero psig. Use a 0-800 p s i t e s t gage w i t h 0.5% accuracy t o measure t h e system lockup pressure. Refer t o LLTV Rocket Propulsion 30-Day Functional & S t a t i c Leakage Test, Report Number 7260-931013 f o r a d d i t i o n a l d e t a i l s on t h i s procedure. and t h e t e s t gage should read 495
Report No. 7260-954.002
7-41
ADJUSTMENT
- Compress t h e s p r i n g guide on t h e top of
the regulator Screw
s l i g h t l y t o r e l i e v e s p r i n g t e n s i o n a s t h e body s e c t i o n i s adjusted. The adjustment can b e made under pressure.
t h e body inward t o increase r e g u l a t i o n pressure; outward t o l e s s e n pressure.
Compress t h e s p r i n g guide using a suppressor w i t h a c e n t e r opening. This provision w i l l allow t h e t u b e ' o n t h e c e n t e r spring guide t o pass through.
ORIFICE
MNA AUL SHllTOFF VLE AV
f- CROSSOVER
VLE AV
Figure
7-5.
Helium P r e s s u r i z a t i o n System Diagram
Report No. 7260-954002
CAUTION
The following mechanical adjustments t o t h e rocket c o n t r o l s a r e necessary before pressure t e s t i n g t h e system. 7-42 ATTITUDE R C E CLUSTER VARIABLE ORIFICE V L E OKT AV
A.
P r e s s u r i z e t h e system t o 500 p s i g w i t h t h e adjustment lock b o l t tightened. Loosen t h e a l l e n screw which r e t a i n s t h e knurled handle on t h e stem of t h e v a r i a b l e o r i f i c e valve (7161-472110-3 t o allow t h e pressure t o move t h e stem t o t h e most extended position. Push t h e knurled knob toward t h e valve body,then t i g h t e n the a l l e n screw t o keep t h i s p o s i t i o n .
B.
C.
Loosen t h e main adjustment lock and t a b and move t h e v a r i a b l e o r i f i c e valve t o a angular s e t t i n g equal t o t h e d e s i r e d t h r u s t ( i . e . 90' engines.
= 90 l b t h r u s t ) .
This s e t t i n g i s
approximate and s h a l l be v e r i f i e d by f i r i n g t h e rocket Safety wire t h e b o l t s i f t h e r e i s a p o s s i b i l i t y of After l i v e them loosening p r i o r t o t h r u s t adjustments. setting.
f i r i n g t h r u s t adjustments a r e made DO NOT d i s t u r b t h e o r i f i c e Torque s t r i p e can be used t o v e r i f y t h e s e t t i n g s have not been disturbed. LIFT R C E ( s e e B e l l drawing 7260-541001). OKT
NOTE Both e l e c t r i c a l and mechanical adjustments a r e required on t h e l i f t rocket c o n t r o l system.
A.
Adjust t h e c o n t r o l potentiomenter.
Report No. 7260-95M02
(7-43) (A)
1)
Adjust t h e NAS 428-3 and -10 b o l t and t h e 7260-541001-15 down t o f u l l y up. ) angular s e t t i n g s .
AN315-3 nut on
t h r o t t l e control t o r e s t r i c k t h e Use c a l i b r a t i o n f i x t u r e t o make
t h e t h r o t t l e s t i c k t r a v e l t o 4.0 degrees (from f u l l y
2)
Apply 28 VDC power t o t h e u n i t through CB 28.
Ensure t h a t t h e l i f t rocket propellant valves a r e closed when pressure i s on t h e vehicle. exhaust Otherwise, pressure w i l l through t h e l i f t rockets when
t h e t h r o t t l e ' v a l v e opens during t h e s e procedures. Move t h e t h r o t t l e slowly upward through t h e 40 degree range. The d r i v e s h a f t on t h e r o t a r y a c t u a t o r should r o t a t e clockwise (as seen from The r e l a t i o n s h i p of (7260-541004)
t h e output s h a f t s i d e ) only.
t h e t h r o t t l e t o t h e 7260-541015-1 r h e o s t a t i s correct, i f t h e a c t u a t o r moves a t any respositioning of t h e t h r o t t l e , but does not reverse d i r e c t i o n , during t h e upward motion of t h e T-handle. (The r h e o s t a t stacked on t h e c o n t r o l l e r r h e o s t a t i s a telemetry transducer.) Also, t h e t h r o t t l e / r h e o s t a t r e l a t i o n s h i p may be v e r i f i e d by checking t h e o c t a l display. i n d i c a t e s c o r r e c t adjustment.
A steady
i n c r e a s e i n t h e reading a s t h e t h r o t t l e moves upward
A l o s s of o c t a l s i g n a l
i n d i c a t e s i n c o r r e c t adjustment ( t h e r h e o s t a t wiper arm i s off t h e r h e o s t a t windings.)
Report No. 7260-954002
(7-43)B.
I f t h e r o t a r y a c t u a t o r reverses d i r e c t i o n between f u l l y on and f u l l y off t h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n , a d j u s t t h e r e l a t i o n s h i p of t h e r h e o s t a t gear t o t h e t h r o t t l e gear by t h e following procedure:
1) Move t h e t h r o t t l e upward.
Mark t h e t o o t h on t h e
r h e o s t a t gear which engages t h e t h r o t t l e gear with a p e n c i l l e a d when t h e r h e o s t a t wiper a m f i r s t touches t h e r h e o s t a t windings a f t e r crossing t h e winding cap.
2)
Lower t h e t h r o t t l e handle completely and lock it. Rotate t h e gear and re-engage t h e marked t o o t h i n t h e t h r o t t l e gear.
3). Remove t h e r h e o s t a t from t h e r e t a i n e r hole.

4)
Compensate any minor e r r o r i n p o s i t i o n by s l i g h t l y r o t a t i n g t h e potentiometer case. rework. )
h his
method allows
t h e r h e o s t a t e l e c t r i c a l connections t o be exposed f o r
C .
Adjust t h e v a r i a b l e o r i f i c e t h r o t t l e valve. NT GE This b a l l type valve has a passage machined i n t o t h e valve b a l l . N marking shows s h a f t o The motor p o s i t i o n versus valve position.
driven r o t a r y i s connected by coupling flange 7260-9541001-11,013 with t h r e e b o l t s and allows f flange has
degrees of adjustment.
The
36 s p l i n e s which mate with t h e
36-tooth s e r r a t e d s h a f t on t h e r o t a r y a c t u a t o r s t o give 360 degree adjustment i n 10 degree increments.
Report No. 7260-954002
(7-43)
(c)
1 Adjust t h e 7260-472060 t h r o t t l e valve t o s h u t off .

completely a s t h e valve i s driven clockwise by t h e rotary actuator. Flange b o l t s may have t o be removed. Find t h e shutoff p o s i t i o n by pressurizing t h e H 0 2 2 system t o about 100 p s i g and r o t a t i n g t h e t h r o t t l e valve manually clockwise t o t h e off p o s i t i o n .
2)
Drive t h e a c t u a t o r f u l l y t o t h e off p o s i t i o n w i t h t h e t h r o t t l e s t i c k and connect t h e 7260-541001 couplings.
NOTE Coupling
-13 may have t o be removed

Be s u r e t h a t t h e s h a f t
completely.
lock screws a r e tightened in t h e flange coupling upon reassembly.
D.
Actuate t h e t h r o t t l e s e v e r a l times and v e r i f y t h e following: 1) 2) 3) Gas flow s t a r t s a f t e r about two degrees of t h r o t t l e s t i c k t r a v e l upward. Gas flow i n c r e a s e s r a p i d l y a s t h e t h r o t t l e i s opened, Gas flow stops a s t h e t h r o t t l e i s closed a t % speed. Adjust t h e a c t u a t o r coupling angular s e t t i n g i f exceeding slow o r f a s t a c t u a t i o n s do not always close t h e t h r o t t l e valve. The t h r o t t l e valve has a 10 S l i g h t g.as leakage i s see blue p r i n t degree shutoff band b u i l t i n . acceptable through valve s e a t , specifications.
i s advisable.
Operational check with H202 p r o p e l l a n t
Report No. 7260-9516002
7-44
FUNCTIONAL C E K U HC O T The following equipment w i l l enable t e s t i n g of f u n c t i o n a l and
7-45
and s t a t i c l e a k s i n components and tubing.
A. B.
C
E l e c t r i c a l and Pneumatic T e s t Cart (E@ Cart) 28 VDC Power Supply. 110 VAC
, 400 HZ
Power Supply.
D.
E.
4000 p s i g Helium Source 2000 p s i g Nitrogen Source
7-46
The 30-Day Functional & S t a t i c Leakage T e s t , 7260-931013, Two o t h e r procedures which a r e not
describes use of t h i s equipment. a l s o use t h e equipment.
p r e s e n t l y used, because they were published f o r acceptance t e s t i n g , They a r e t h e ground t e s t procedures; Hanger 7260-928063. Operational Text 7260-928056 and Ramp Functional Text 7-47 7-48 ELECTRICAL AND PNEUMATIC TEST CART (E/P) The E/P t e s t c a r t i s used f o r f u n c t i o n a l t e s t i n g of the LLTV The c a r t f i l t e r s and r e g u l a t e s With an e x t e r n a l 28-volt, d-c
Rocket system and i s used f o r s e r v i c i n g t h e vehicle Helium supply p r i o r t o vehicle rocket system operations. an i n l e t gas supply of 0-4500 p s i g t o provide p r e s s u r i z a t i o n of t h e LLTV Helium system and both H202 tanks. supply and f o u r e l e c t r i c a l cables mounted i n t h e c a r t , i n d i v i d u a l c o n t r o l of t h e 16 a t t i t u d e rocket solenoid valves i s provided by t h e cart. I n d i v i d u a l switches on t h e c a r t c o n t r o l panel provides s e l e c t i o n of each solenoid.
7-49
&
P CART
Report No. 7260-954-002
NOTE The helium tank may be serviced d i r e c t l y from t h e Helium Gas Supply Truck which has b u i l t i n regulation equipment. 7-50
U T V RZLIUM TANK SERVICING

Check t h a t both helium tank and H 0 backed o f f f u l l y counterclockwise. Close t h e i n l e t source valve. Close t h e helium tank supply valve. Close t h e common H 0 tank supply ,valve. 2 2 Close both H202 tank supply valves. Close t h e H202 tank vent valves. Open t h e helium tank vent valve. Remove t h e helium o u t l e t p o r t cap and a t t a c h t h e helium supply line. Attach t h e supply s e r v i c e manifold t o t h e l i n e and (DOnot a t t a c h maniford t o Attach Kellum s a f e t y g r i p t o t h e c l o s e t h e manifold hand valve. v e h i c l e s e r v i c e p o r t .) c a r t hook. Attach t h e helium source supply l i n e t o i n l e t p o r t A on t h e
2 2
tank r e g u l a t o r s a r e
E&P c a r t , and a t t a c h t h e Kellum s a f e t y g r i p t o t h e c a r t hook.

Attach t h e supply l i n e and Kellum s a f e t y g r i p t o t h e s e r v i c e t r u c k helium supply. Connect helium tank temperature monitoring box. CAUTION Throughout s e r v i c i n g , monitor Helium tank surface temperature. I f necessary, cool t h e tank surface t o maintain temperature
1 ' below 150' F up t o 3800 p s i and below 1 0 F

from 3800 t o 4000 p s i .
K. Apply pressure t o t h e source l i n e (4500 p s i g max) using t h e

s e r v i c i n g t r u c k valves. observed. Report No. 7260-954002 Tighten connections i f l e a k s a r e
(7-50) L.
Open t h e i n l e t source valve.
CAUTION
D not open t h e i n l e t source valve i f source o pressure gage shows g r e a t e r than. 4500 p s i g Burst d i s c w i l l rupture i n E&P Cart.
M.
Open t h e helium system s e r v i c e valve t o apply pressure t o t h e helium regulator. Slowly open t h e r e g u l a t o r valve and note a u d i b l e gas flow from helium vent, then c l o s e t h e vent valve. Continue p r e s s u r i z i n g t h e vehicle s e r v i c e l i n e and F&P c a r t system t o 4500 psig. NT OE The r e g u l a t o r a o n t r o l s t h e pressure i n d i c a t e d on t h e helium tank gage.
N.
0.
P. When t h e system i s pressurized check f o r l e a k s by s h u t t i n g

o f f t h e i n l e t source valve and noting pressure decay. NT OE The helium r e g u l a t o r has a b u i l t i n r e l i e f valve which may cause pressure l o s s . Repair l e a k s a s soon a s possible. a t a p r a c t i c a l time.
If r e p a i r i s not p r a c t i c a l
and leakage i s minimal and not a hazard t o operations, r e p a i r
Q .
Open t h e s e r v i c i n g manifold hand valve slowly and purge t h e s e r v i c e l i n e s p r i o r t o a t t a c h i n g t h e helium tank schraeder valves.
Report No. 7260-954002
(7-50) R.
Close t h e manifold hand valve and a t t a c h t h e manifold t o t h e tanks. Back o u t t h e r e g u l a t o r and vent any pressure from t h e c a r t system. Check t h a t t h e vehicle helium manual shutoff valves are closed and schraeder valves on t h e helium tanks a r e open. Open t h e i n l e t source valve closed in s t e p P. Bring t h e helium tanks t o pressure using t h e regulator. When p r e s s u r i z a t i o n i s complete, c l o s e t h e helium tank s e r v i c i n g schraeder valves. Close t h e source valve on t h e supply truck. Back out t h e r e g u l a t o r t o zero. Disconnect and s t o r e t h e helium servicing l i n e and manifold, and cap and plug open p o r t s ( i f not needed f o r continued t e s t s o r topping off helium tank pressure).
S .
T.
AA.
AB
Shut o f f helium source supply valve on truck. Loosen t h e f i t t i n g on t h e helium supply l i n e from t h e source t r u c k and allow t h e pressure t o release. f i t t i n g and cap and plug t h e opened ports. Disconnect t h e helium supply l i n e from t h e E&P c a r t and cap and plug t h e open p o r t s . Disconnect t h e
AD.
Close t h e E&P c a r t i n l e t source valve.
7-51
XTV H202 Tank P r e s s u r i z i n g
A.
Check t h a t both helium tank and H202 tank r e g u l a t o r s a r e backed o f f f u l l y counterc~ockwise. Close t h e i n l e t source valve, and disconnect H 0 pressure 2 2 transducers. Close t h e helium tank supply valve. Close t h e common H202 tank supply valve.
B.
C.
D .
7-26
Report No. 7260-954002
E. F.
G.
Open both H202 tank supply valves. Open both H202 tank vent valves on t h e E&P c a r t . Close t h e helium tank vent valve. Remove t h e H 0 tank p o r t caps and i n s t a l l t h e H202 tank 2 2 service l i n e s a s necessary. I n s t a l l the helium source supply l i n e t o t h e i n l e t p o r t A on t h e E&P c a r t and a t t a c h t h e Kellum s a f e t h g r i p t o t h e c a r t hook. Attach t h e supply l i n e and Kellum safety g r i p t o t h e service truck helium supply. Apply pressure t o source l i n e (4500 p s i g max) using t h e s e n i i c i n g truck valves. Tighten connections i f they leak. Open t h e i n l e t source valve.
H.
I.
K.
CAUTION
DO NOT O E THE I N U T S U C V L E I F PN O R E AV
THE SOURCE PRESSURE G G S O S M R A E H W OE

THAN 4500 PSIG.
L.
M.
N.
Open t h e common H 0 tank supply hand valve. 2 2 Open t h e H202 tank vent valve. Open t h e LH/RH tank H202 supply valves and increase t h e regulator s e t t i n g t o purge t h e c a r t . purged close t h e vents. When the c a r t i s
0. P.
Increase pressure on t h e plugged service l i n e s t o 600 p s i and check t h e f i t t i n g s f o r leaks ( t i g h t e n a s necessary). Shut off t h e i n l e t source valve and observe an unusual pressure l o s s . NT OE The r e g u l a t o r has a b u i l t i n r e l i e f system and may vent.
Report No. 7260-954002
(7-51)Repair
any l e a k s a s soon a s possible.
I f t h e r e p a i r i s not
p r a c t i c a l and leakage i s minimal and not a hazard, r e p a i r a t a p r a c t i c a l time.
Q.
With t h e i n l e t source valve shut o f f , vent t h e system by backing o f f t h e r e g u l a t o r t o zero p s i a s indicated on t h e H 0 tank gages. 2 2 Open t h e i n l e t , source valve. Remove t h e s e r v i c e l i n e plugs. Using t h e r e g u l a t o r , purge t h e l i n e s before i n s t a l l a t i o n on t h e H202 tank manual vent valve o u t l e t p o r t , o r o t h e r f i t t i n g i f d i r e c t e d .
R.
S.
T.
U. V.
Open t h e vehicle H 0 tank manual vent valves. 2 2 P r e s s u r i z e t h e H 0 tanks a s necessary f o r t e s t s using t h e 2 2 regulators. When p r e s s u r i z i n g work i s complete, back out t h e r e g u l a t o r t o zero p s i g and open t h e L and RH H 0 tank vent valves H 2 2 on t h e c a r t .
W. X.
Close t h e helium supply t r u c k shut off valves. Loosen t h e f i t t i n g on t h e helium supply l i n e t o allow pressure t o release. opened p o r t s . Disconnect t h e f i t t i n g and cap and plug t h e
Y. Disconnect and s t o r e t h e helium supply l i n e from t h e E&P cayt.

Z. Close t h e E&P c a r t i n l e t source valve. Disconnect t h e H 0 tank s e r v i c e l i n e s . Cap and plug t h e open 2 2 p o r t s and s t o r e t h e l i n e s i n t h e E&P c a r t .
AA.
Report No. 7260-954002
7-52
SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION S e t a l l switches on t h e E&P c a r t t o OFF. P u l l t h e c i r c u i t b r e a k e r on t h e E&P c a r t . Remove t h e v e h i c l e e l e c t r i c a l connector t o t h e solenoid v a l v e s a t t h e connector on t h e a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l c l u s t e r . A t t a c h t h e E&P c a r t c a b l e marked f o r t h a t l o c a t i o n t o t h e connector. T i e t h e cable t o t h e s h i p s t r u c t u r e t o r e l i e v e s t r a i n on t h e connectors. Plug t h e 28 VDC l e a d s from t h e E&P c a r t i n t o t h e emergency
DC o u t l e t of t h e ground power supply box and apply power.

Push i n t h e c i r c u i t b r e a k e r on t h e c a r t and observe t h e r e d ON lamp. During t e s t s do not apply power t o solenoids f o r more than t e n minutes a t a time without a cooling p e r i o d f o r t h e s o l e n o i d valve. When t e s t i n g i s complete, s h u t o f f t h e 28 VDC supply and p u l l t h e c i r c u i t b r e a k e r on t h e E&P c a r t . Disconnect t h e c a b l e s from t h e s h i p and s t o r e them i n t h e c a r t . A t t a c h t h e v e h i c l e e l e c t r i c a l connectors.
Report No. 7260-954002
SECTION COCKPIT
VIII
INSTRUMENTATION
SCOPE O SECTION F 8-2. This s e c t i o n p r o v i d e s a funct,ional d e s c r i p t i o n and maintenance The
i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t h e Engine and Fuel i n d i c a t o r s , Rocket System i n d i c a t o r s , F l i g h t I n s t r u m e n t s , and Annunciator Panel i n d i c a t o r s . removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n , adjustments, and t e s t equipment. 8-3. DESCRIPTION AND LEADING PARTICULARS maintenance i n s t r u c t i o n s i n c l u d e s o p e r a t i o n a l checkout, t r o u b l e - s h o o t i n g ,
8-4.
A complete l i s t and b r i e f d e s c r i p t i o n of a l l c o c k p i t i n s t r u m e n t s
and i n d i c a t o r s i s p r e s e n t e d i n t a b l e 1-2, s e c t i o n I of t h i s manual.
8-5.
8-6.
ENGINE AND FUEL INDICATORS

A b r i e f d e s c r i p t i o n of t h e JP4 Tank P r e s s u r e , O i l P r e s s u r e ,
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) and Percentage RPM i n d i c a t o r s i s p r e s e n t e d .
A f u n c t i o n a l a n a l y s i s of a s s o c i a t e d c i r c u i t r y i s a l s o provided.
8-7. JP4 TANK PRESSURE INDICATOR C I R C U I T - The JP4 Tank P r e s s u r e
I n d i c a t o r c i r c u i t c o n t a i n s two cockpit-mounted i n d i c a t o r s , two f u e l t a n k p r e s s u r e t r a n s d u c e r s , two c a l i b r a t i o n p o t e n t i o m e t e r s and two c u r r e n t l i m i t i n g r e s i s t o r s ( f i g u r e s 8-1 and 8-2). Each JP4 Tank P r e s s u r e i n d i c a t o r i s s c a l e d t o i n d i c a t e from 0 t o 50 p s i g w i t h major d i v i s i o n marks a t 10 p s i g i n t e r v a l s and f i n e graduations a t 1 p s i g i n t e r v a l s . c o r r e c t i o n adjustment i s front-mounted on t h e i i d i c a t o r .
A zero
The DC i n p u t
Report No. 7260-954002
8- I
Report No. 7260-954001
c u r r e n t values t o o b t a i n r e l a t e d i n d i c a t i o n s a r e shown i n t a b l e 8-1. i n c r e a s i n g t a n k p r e s s u r e pushes t h e movable c o n t a c t of t h e t r a n s d u c e r r e s i s t i v e element toward t h e more p o s i t i v e v o l t a g e a t p i n c.
A n
A n increased
v o l t a g e i s tapped and a p p l i e d t o t h e Fuel Tank P r e s s u r e i n d i c a t o r through ), t h e c u r r e n t l i m i t i n g r e s i s t o r ( ~ 8 / ~ 9 r e s u l t i n g i n an up-scale d e f l e c t i o n

o f t h e i n d i c a t o r needle.
The v o l t a g e from t h e t r a n s d u c e r s i s a l s o routed Refer t o s e c t i o n X.
t o t h e AC S i g n a l Conditioner f o r t e l e m e t r y processing. paragraph 8-42. 8-8. OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR C I R C U I T
C a l i b r a t i o n procedures f o r t h e JP4 p r e s s u r e t r a n s d u c e r s a r e provided i n
- The
O i l Pressure I n d i c a t o r c i r c u i t
c o n t a i n s a 100-microampere meter c a l i b r a t e d f o r a range of 0 t o 60 p s i g , a c a l i b r a t i o n p o t e n t i o m e t e r , a c u r r e n t l i m i t i n g r e s i s t o r and an o i l p r e s s u r e t r a n s d u c e r ( s e e f i g u r e s 8-2 and 8-3). vals. The i n d i c a t o r i s s c a l e d w i t h major graduatims a t 2 psig interd i v i s i o n marks a t 10 p s i g i n t e r v a l s and f i n e
A z e r o c o r r e c t i o n adjustment i s front-mounted on t h e i n d i c a t o r .
The O i l Pressure I n d i c a t o r and t h e JP4 C a l i b r a t i o n pro-
The DC i n p u t c u r r e n t v a l u e s t o o b t a i n corresponding o i l p r e s s u r e p s i g values a r e shown i n t a b l e 8-2. P r e s s u r e I n d i c a t o r c i r c u i t s a r e i d e n t i c a l i n operation. cedures a r e p r e s e n t e d i n paragraph 8-46. TABLE 8-1. DC CURRENT VERSUS INDICATION
1
DC Current (~icroamperes)
Indication (psig) 10 20 30
20 40 60 80 100
4.0
50
Report N . o
7260-954002
P430-LL
M18
T-
P304-j
AC SIGNAL COND~IONER
COCKPIT DISCONNECT
----I
P87 OIL PrnSSURE TRANSDUCER
- -I
M 8 T
,,,,,--I
F i g u r e 8-3.
O i l Pressure Indicator Circuit
Schematic Diagram
TABLE 8-2.
DC CURRENT VERSUS OIL PRESSURE INDICATION
DC Current (Microamperes)
Indication (psig)
10
20
16.6 33.3 50. o 66.7 83.3 1oo.00
30 40 50 60
Report No. 7260-954002
8-9.
E T INDICATOR C I R C U I T G
The E T I n d i c a t o r c i r c u i t r y c o n t a i n s an E T G G The E T i n d i c a t o r c o n s i s t s of a d i g i t a l G The d i g i t a l readout provides E T readings G
i n d i c a t o r and a thermocouple u n i t . t u r e gage ( f i g u r e s 8-2 and 8-4). i n 2 ' ~ increments. 1 2 0 0 ~n~ 5 0 ' ~ increments. i
r e a d o u t , a 5K-ohm p o t e n t i o m e t e r , a Power F a i l u r e i n d i c a t o r and a temperaThe temperature gage i s c a l i b r a t e d f o r a maximum of The i n p u t v o l t a g e versus temperature equivaThe potentiometer i s used t o r e t r a n s m i t
l e n t s a r e provided in t a b l e 8-3. transmission.
a voltage analog of t h e E T t o t h e DC S i g n a l Conditioner f o r t e l e m e t r y G
8-10. PERCENT R M INDICATOR C I R C U I T - The Percent RM I n d i c a t o r c i r c u i t r y P P c o n s i s t s of an engine-mounted tachometer g e n e r a t o r and t h e Tachometer indicator. The i n d i c a t o r d i a l i s c a l i b r a t e d i n percent of R M i n 2% i n c r e P ments up t o 100%. A s m a l l e r d i a l a l s o on t h e i n d i c a t o r - i s c a l i b r a t e d i n
1% increments up t o 10% ( f i g u r e s 8-2 and 8-5).
Report No. 7260-954002
L- , , , - , , J
Figure 8-4.
Exhaust Gas Temperature Indicator C i r c u i t , Cabling Diagram
P12
A>,
P1 J 1
ENGINE DISC
I
,5139
P22
f~
----I
6
g
B . C
I
I
-
9 2
ENG TACH GEN
b----
Figure
8-5.
P e r c e n t RPM I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t
Schematic Diagram
8- 11. ROCKET SYSTEM INDICATORS 8-12. The Rocket System i n d i c a t o r s c o n s i s t of a Helium Source P r e s s u r e , a n H202 Tank P r e s s u r e , a L i f t Rocket Chamber P r e s s u r e and a n H202 Remaining i n d i c a t o r .
A b r i e f d e s c r i p t i o n and f u n c t i o n a l a n a l y s i s i s
p r e s e n t e d t o t h e s e i n d i c a t o r s and a s s o c i a t e d c i r c u i t r y . 8-13. HELIUM SOURCE PRESSURE INDICATOR C I R C U I T
The Helium Source The i n d i c a t o r
P r e s s u r e I n d i c a t o r c i r c u i t c o n s i s t s of a d u a l needle v o l t m e t e r , and two helium t a n k p r e s s u r e t r a n s d u c e r s ( f i g u r e s 8-6 and 8-7). tank pressures. c o n t a i n s a c e n t e r and a p e r p h e r i c a l n e e d l e f o r l e f t and r i g h t helium The c e n t e r n e e d l e i s marked w i t h a n R s o t h a t when t h e The p e r p h e r i c a l n e e d l e i s The i n d i c a t o r n e e d l e i s t o p dead c e n t e r t h e R i s u p r i g h t .
marked s o t h a t a n L i s u p r i g h t under t h e same c o n d i t i o n . p o i n t s , and minor d i v i s i o n s every 200 p s i on s c a l e . adjustment i s on r e a r of i n d i c a t o r . i n p u t versus p r e s s u r e i n d i c a t o r values.
d i a l i s c a l i b r a t e d up t o 4500 p s i a , w i t h major d i v i s i o n s a t 1000-psi
A zero correction
Table 8-4 p r o v i d e s a l i s t of v o l t a g e Analog v o l t a g e s a r e a l s o r o u t e d
from t h e t r a n s d u c e r s t o t h e AC S i g n a l Conditioner.
Report No. 7260-954002
P430
G
> JI
P304.-5
20 VDC
AC SIGNAL COIJDITIONER
M 3
PI
LEFT HELIUM ~ 5 2 XDCR

f~ C A
m5
--- 1
7
' X
u z
6
B C
P53 RIGHT HELIUM XDCR M 4 T ~ H >->Pso~-~ H

AC SIGNAL CONDITIONER
----T- I I ---
F i g u r e 8-6.
Helium Source P r e s s u r e I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t
Schematic Diagram
TABLE 8-4.
VOLTAGE INPUT VERSUS HELIUM PRESSURE INDICATION Voltage Input

2.182 4.276 6.400 8.498 10.62 12.80 15.07 17.45 20.00
Pressure
500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 MOO 4500
Report No. 7260-954002
SOURcE
LOW
,
a
4~ FAILURE
ALTI
JPq CAUTION G I M B A L LOCI ( MODE LEVEL AUTO THROTTLE S T ~ B I L I Z A T I O N

MODE
DOPPLER
RAD
,!R $m
GRE
LOPERATING RAN
GREEN LINE
F i g u r e 8-7. P i l o t Instrument Panel
Top P o r t i o n I n c l u d i n g Annunciator L i g h t s
8-14. H202 TANK PRESSURE INDICATOR C I R C U I T
The H 0 Tank P r e s s u r e 2 2
I n d i c a t o r c i r c u i t i s almost i d e n t i c a l t o t h e Helium Source P r e s s u r e I n d i c a t o r c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e s 8-7 and 8-8). The d i a l i s c a l i b r a t e d up t o 600 p s i a i n 100 p s i a major increments, and minor d i v i s i o n s of 20 p s i . The i n p u t v o l t a g e s f o r H202 t a n k p r e s s u r e i n d i c a t i o n s a r e p r e s e n t e d i n table
8-5.
Figure 8-8.
'
H 0 Tank P r e s s u r e I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram 2 2
8-15. LIFT ROCKET C A B R PRESSURE INDICATOR C I R C U I T - This c i r c u i t i s HME

a l s o almost i d e n t i c a l t o t h e Helium Source P r e s s u r e I n d i c a t o r c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e s 8-7 and 8-9). The d i a l i s c a l i b r a t e d up t o 400 p s i a i n 100 p s i a The i n p u t v o l t a g e f o r major i n c r e m e n t s , and minor d i v i s i o n s of 20 p s i .
r o c k e t chamber p r e s s u r e i n d i c a t i o n s a r e p r e s e n t e d i n t a b l e 8-6.
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE
8-5.
VOLTAGE INPUT VERSUS
H202 PRESSURE INDICATION
Voltage Input
P r e s s u r e psi
2.786 5.476 8.143 10.86 13.69 16.71
100 200 300 400 500 600
TABLE 8-6.
VOLTAGE INPUT VERSUS ROCKET C W E R PRESSURE INDICATION
R e p o r t No.
7260-954002
D >->~304-p
AC SIGNAL CONDITIONER
m3
LEFT 'LIFT TC PRESSURe P32 TRANSDUCER
---
----P430 CC Figure 8-9.
> -
~ 3 0 4 - 2AC SIGNAL CONDITIONER
RIGHT LIFT T C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
L i f t Rocket Chamber Pressure Indicator C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram
8-16. H,O,
FUEL REMAINING INDICATOR CIRCUIT
An input voltage from the
f u e l l e v e l d e t e c t o r located i n t h e Attitude Control System Monitor Elect r o n i c s i s routed t o t h e H 0 Fuel Remaining i n d i c a t o r . This i n d i c a t o r 2 2 contains a d i g i t a l readout, c a l i b r a t e d i n 2-pound increments, a l a r g e r d i a l c a l i b r a t e d i n 50-pound increments up t o 1000 pounds, a Power F a i l u r e i n d i c a t o r , and a SK-ohm r e t r a n s m i t t i n g potentiometer ( f i g u r e s 8-7 and 8-10). The analog voltage representing H 0 f u e l remaining i s 2 2 retransmitted t o t h e DC Signal Conditioner f o r telemetry proc.essing.
The voltage i n p u t s versus pounds of H202 f u e l remaining a r e provided i n t a b l e 8-7.
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE 8-7.
V L A E INPUT VERSUS H202 FUEL REMAINING OT G Voltage Input Fuel Remaining (pounds )
----
Pi03
C B ~ p23
I
E
A
----~ 6 18
JIA
B
D F
G
I
..
P430
S
P406
nu-- J
\
'
---8
ACS MONITOR ELECTRONICS
CC FE
DC SIGNAL CONDITIONER
I ------
I I
Figure 8-10.
H202 Fuel Remaining I n d i c a t o r , Cabling Diagram
8-17. FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS 8-18. The f l i g h t instruments mounted on t h e P i l o t ' s Console c o n s i s t of an A t t i t u d e i n d i c a t o r , an ~ l t i t u d e l ~ l t i t u d e Rate i n d i c a t o r , a Horizontal Velocity i n d i c a t o r , a ~ h r u s t / ~ e i ~nh t c a t o r , a Barometric Altimeter, i di a Wind Velocity i n d i c a t o r , and an Inertial-Lead Vertical Speed i n d i c a t o r . A Wind Direction i n d i c a t o r i s mounted i n t h e cockpit c e i l i n g . Descript i o n of t h e i n d i c a t o r s and associated c i r c u i t r y i s presented. 8- 14 Report No. 7260-954002
8-19. ATTITUDE INDICATOR
The A t t i t u d e i n d i c a t o r i s a 3-axes b a l l which The v e r t i c a l and
i n d i c a t e s v e h i c l e p i t c h , yaw, and r o l l ( f i g u r e 8-11). p i t c h , respectively.
h o r i z o n t a l needles, i n conjunction with b a l l movement, p o r t r a y yaw and

A zero s e t synchro o r c o n t r o l d i f f e r e n t i a l t r a n s -
former provides course s e t t i n g f o r t h e i n d i c a t o r . Primary E l e c t r o n i c s ( f i g u r e 8-12). d e s c r i p t i o n s of t h e Avionics system. AE 8-20. ALTITUDE/ALTITUDE R T INDICATOR indicator.
The A t t i t u d e indica-
t o r receives input s i g n a l s from t h e A t t i t u d e Gyro package and A S C Refer t o s e c t i o n X I f o r d e t a i l e d
Altitude s i g n a l s and a l t i t u d e
r a t e s i g n a l s from t h e r a d a r assembly d r i v e t h e servo systems i n t h e
A s t h e i n d i c a t o r p o i n t s a r e driven by t h e servo system,

Altitude
s i g n a l s from r e t r a n s m i t t i n g potentiometers a r e routed t o t h e DC Signal Conditioner f o r telemetry processing ( f i g u r e s 8-11 and 8-13). calibrated scale.
i s i n d i c a t e d i n 5-foot increments up t o 1000 f e e t on one v e r t i c a l l y The r a t e of a l t i t u d e change i s i n 2 feet-per-second increments, with a maximum descending and ascending r a t e of 50 feet-persecond i n d i c a t e d on t h e other v e r t i c a l l y - c a l i b r a t e d s c a l e . 8-21. HORIZONTAL VELOCITY INDICATOR
Signals derived from t h e Doppler Longitudinal
r a d a r provide i n p u t s t o t h e i n d i c a t o r servo systems. E c a l i b r a t e d FWD V L s c a l e .
v e l o c i t y i s i n d i c a t e d by t h e h o r i z o n t a l needle on t h e v e r t i c a l l y L a t e r a l v e l o c i t y i s i n d i c a t e d by t h e v e r t i c a l Increasing and needle on t h e h o r i z o n t a l l y - c a l i b r a t e d L T V L s c a l e . A E
decreasing v e l o c i t y f o r both s c a l e s a r e i n major increments of range of t h e s c a l e velocities.
5 fps
The
with f i n e r graduations i n I-fps increments ( f i g u r e s 8-7 and 8-14).
i s s e l e c t e d by t h e XI-XI0 Horiz Vel switch located
on t h e mounting box assembly, thus providing 0-20 f p s and 0-200 f p s s c a l e

A s t h e i n d i c a t o r needles a r e moved by t h e s e r v o motor,
r e t r a n s m i t t i n g potentiometers provide analog voltage i n p u t s t o t h e DC Signal C m d i t i o n e r f o r telemetry processing.
Report No. 7260-954002
8-15
Report No. 7260-954002
115 VAC 400 HZ @A

P2
,>E
; I ATTITUDE GYRO PACKAGE
1 1 1
"LJ
I Figure 8-12.
0-2 x+8 A t t i t u d e I n d i c a t o r ?nterconnection Diagram
VDC
r---1
!
! I
I
Pl.8 351 7
TBlO
18
9
7
s25
,
C 30 B
115 VAC 400 HZ @ A

I---~406
1
I I
I
I I
I
I I
17
16
B
I
15
1
2.
.C
,
I
I
I
6 1..
*
I
J
-b
d
7
tE P&
C
W
54
-, -
I.-----
1 I
1
I
ALTITUDE / ALTITUDE FAT:{ IND ICAT OR
A.
12
p57 f1 1
r
i?-1-
-1
MI7
B
' .
12
13
14
13
14
3 .
4
-,
r
9
e
3
4
I
I I I
UDAR ASSEMBLY
I I
I
i
I
19
8
-19 .
a
A1
- K
a
5
6
-A-
5
L-
I L --
COCKPIT DISCONNECT
1 -J
F i g u r e 8-13. ~ l t i t u d e /A l t i t u d e Rate I n d i c a t o r Cabling Diagram
Report No. 7260-954002
I
I
I
I I
I
2J1 ~ 1 6 2 2 22.
TBlO
2 .
li6]
1 ,
115 VAC 400 H z @A

P430 5430
H
3
15.
16
17. 18
AT-4
J
I
.
I
I
~4061~
-
t I I
- - - - 1DC SIGNAL CONDITIONER
19 6
L--f E
P4 54
K L
. X
I
I
I
HH
7
HORIZONTAL VELOCITY INDICATOR
-! -
I
I i I
8 11 12
p59
11 12 13 14 29 30
-1 -1
153
M 7
13,
14. 29. 30 3.
1:
S
Y - z
I
I
RECEIVER/ TRANSMITTER
w-
-'P
4
3
20
I
1
I
20 37 136,
/
M
C
37
1
I
TR1
I I
I
I
H
i
I
I
--J
I
I
42
COCKPIT DISCONNECT
L .
2;
----
IQG BOX ASSY
Figure 8-14. H o r i z o n t a l V e l o c i t y Indicator C a b l i n g D i a g r a m
Report No. 7260-954002
8-22. THRUST/WEIGHT INDICATOR
- The Drag Compensation
system provides
reference and s i g n a l voltages f o r t h e I n d i c a t o r Servo system ( f i g u r e s
8-11 and 8-15).
COCKPIT
Figure 8-15.
~hrust/~ei~ht Indicator Cabling Diagram
A s t h e servo d r i v e s t h e i n d i c a t o r p o i n t e r , normal acceleration, which i s body-axis referenced, i s displayed on t h e v e r t i c a l l y - c a l i b r a t e d s c a l e a s lunar gravity. The s c a l e i s c a l i b r a t e d i n major divisions of I - G up t o A indication of lunar gravity i s obtained during n
6 lunar gravities.
Lunar Simulation f l i g h t mode.
Report No. 7260-954002
8-23. BAROMETRIC ALTIMETER
-A
standard barometric a l t i m e t e r i s mounted
on t h e P i l o t ' s Console ( f i g u r e 8-2). s e t t i n g of t h e ambient pressure.
A c o n t r o l knob provides manual
Altitude i s displayed by using t h r e e
p o i n t e r s t o i n d i c a t e hundreds, thousands and t e n s of thousand on t h e d i a l , which i s marked 0 through 9 with 50-foot minimum d i v i s i o n marks. The r e a r of t h e i n d i c a t o r i s exposed t o t h e atmosphere f o r operation without a P i t o t system. 8-24. WIND VELOCITY INDICATOR CIRCUIT
- The Wind Velocity
Indicator circuit
c o n s i s t s of a 500-microampere meter, a s p e c i a l amplifier, a 15-volt power supply, and an externally-mounted anemometer ( f i g u r e s 8-2 and 8-16). The voltage generated by t h e anemometer i s d i r e c t l y coupled t o an AC amplifier, which has a gain of 3. The amplified AC is then r e c t i f i e d and t h e DC routed t o t h e Wind Velocity i n d i c a t o r and the DC Signal Conditioner. The v e r t i c a l d i a l on t h e i n d i c a t o r i s c a l i b r a t e d i n feet-per-second i n 10 f p s major d i v i s i o n marks and f i n e r graduations of 5 f p s up t o 85 f p s maximum indication. Refer t o paragraph 8-50 f o r adjustment procedures.
- - -- I
I , J
Figure 8-16. Wind Velocity I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t , Wiring Diagram 8-2 1 Report No. 7260-954002
BETA VANE I---1

I I
D C
I I
I
P502 5502
A\.
a - CONDITIONER 7
SIGNAL
I
I
B
,C
I
P4$0 5430
~406
I
I
L, -J
I I
.A i ; . Y I r
I I 1
++7E
Ill4
+ I
Figure 8-17.
Wind Direction Indicator Wiring Diagram
e eta
Ind. ) C i r c u i t ,
8-25. WIND DIRECTION INDICATOR (BETAIND.) coupled t o a l5K
A boom-mounted vane i s
ohm potentiometer which d r i v e s a meter mounted a t t h e
t o p of t h e P i l o t Console. Although the vane i s f r e e t o r o t a t e 360 degrees, t h e i n d i c a t o r i s scaled t o i n d i c a t e i t s p o s i t i o n over processing. 8-26. INERTIAL-LEAD VERTICAL SPEED INTICATOR
90 degrees.
This
s i g n a l i s a l s o routed t o t h e DC Signal Conditioner f o r telemetry
This i n d i c a t o r is a
self-contained u n i t ( f i g u r e 8-2) designed t o i n d i c a t e v e r t i c a l v e l o c i t y immediately a s i t s i n e r t i a l mass i s affected by vehicle acceleratioc. The d i a l i s non-linearily c a l i b r a t e d f o r an up o r down movement i n 100 feet-per-minute (fpm) d i v i s i o n s up t o 6000 fpm.
8-27. WIND DIRECTION INDICATOR.- An externally-mounted wind vane i s mechanically coupled through t h e cockpit c e i l i n g t o the d i r e c t i o n a l p o i n t e r on t h e Wind Direction indicator. A 5K-ohm potentiometer i s i n s e r t e d i n t h i s mechanical linkage t o provide an input s i g n a l t o t h e
8-22
Report No. 7360-954002
DC S i g n a l Conditioner f o r t e l e m e t r y p r o c e s s i n g ( f i g u r e 8- 18).
F i g u r e 8-18.
Wind D i r e c t i o n I n d i c a t o r , Cabling Diagram
8-28. AC AND DC VOLTMETERS
I n s t a l l e d below t h e P i l o t ' s Console In
( f i g u r e 1-7) i s an AC voltmeter f o r d i s p l a y of primary AC power. can be checked. i s emergency DC. 8-29. COK LC
conjunction w i t h t h e AC Power Check switch ( f i g u r e (1-7), phase A and C Located n e a r t h e AC v o l t m e t e r i s a DC v o l t m e t e r f o r d i s p l a y o f DC power, which i s primary DC o r during backup mode of operati'on
I n s t a l l e d i n t h e P i l o t ' s Console ( f i g u r e 8-2) i s an 8-day
mechanical c l o c k f o r d i s p l a y of mission time. 8-30. ANNUNCIATOR WARNING INDICATORS
Mounted on t h e P i l o t ' s Console

A d i s c u s s i o n i s provided i n
( f i g u r e 8-7) a r e 21 i n d i c a t o r s ; 14 a r e red warning i n d i c a t o r s , 4 a r e amber c a u t i o n and 3 a r e green condition i n d i c a t o r s . paragraphs 8-31 through 8-34. indicators. Refer t o t a b l e
1-5 f o r a complete l i s t of
C i r c u i t a n a l y s i s i s b e s t p r e s e n t e d by use of t y p i c a l i n d i c a t o r
diagrams, t o p r e v e n t r e p e t i t i o n of common.components.
Report No. 7260-954.002
8-23
8-31. The Annunciator i n d i c a t o r s require t h e application of a s i g n a l t o p i n I of t h e i n d i c a t o r s t o t u r n on t h e lamp. The type of s i g n a l and A typical device t o a c t i v a t e t h e i n d i c a t o r i s l i s t e d i n t a b l e 8-8.
i n d i c a t o r c i r c u i t r e q u i r i n g a pressure switch i s shown i n f i g u r e 8-19.
A s a s p e c i f i c i n d i c a t o r i s a c t i v a t e d , a s i m i l a r s i g n a l i s routed t o t h e
DC Conditioner f o r t e l e m t r y processing.
8-32. The O i l Pressure Low Indicator c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 8-19) i s t y p i c a l of t h e i n d i c a t o r s l i s t e d i n paragraph 8-31, except t h e H202 i n d i c a t o r , which
i s a dual indicator.
Whenever t h e o i l pressure i s below
15 2 2 p s i g t h e
O i l Pressure switch c l o s e s and grounds pin Iof DSI.
With c i r c u i t The same ground
breaker CB3 normally closed t h e i n d i c a t o r illuminates. box ( f i g u r e s 8-20 and 8-21).
i s a l s o applied t o t h e one of t h e inputs of t h e master warning control

The Annunciator i n d i c a t o r and t h e master warning c o n t r o l box can both be t e s t e d by placing Warning Light Test switch Sl9 i n t h e t e s t position. 8.33. M S E WARNING C N R L BOX AT R OTO
- In
addition t o providing t h e d r i v e r
c i r c u i t f o r t h e DC Failure i n d i c a t o r , t h e master warning control box a l s o provides an a m p l i f i e r channel t o drive t h e Master Warning i n d i c a t o r which
i s located above t h e P i l o t ' s Console, and an audio o s c i l l a t o r t o provide

an audible warning t o t h e p i l o t , whenever one of t h e red warning i n d i c a t o r s
i s illuminated.
8.34. A simplified block diagram i s provided i n f i g u r e 8-20. drawing 7260-301721 f o r schematic of t h e amplifiers. p r i a t e i n p u t terminal board. See B e l l
With a red warning
i n d i c a t o r a c t i v a t e d , ( t a b l e 8-7) a similar input i s routed t o t h e approThe terminal board diodes and r e s i s t o r s route The ground inputs require an i n v e r t e r t h e input t o t h e master warning i n d i c a t o r d r i v e r amplifier channel and t o t h e audio o s c i l l a t o r t r i g g e r stages. s t a g e and then become common with t h e p o s i t i v e input. 8-24 Report No. 7260-954002
Indicator
O i l Pressure Low
Input Required Ground Ground Ground Ground
Activated By Pressure Switch Limit Switch F u e l s e n s o r Switch Fuel Sensor Switch Lunar Sim Relay Relay Contacts Hydraulic Pressure Relay Contacts Relay Contacts Gimbal Lock Switch Relay Contacts sensor/~ela~ Driver sensor/~ela~ Driver Relay Contacts Pressure Switch ~eceiverl~ransmitter primary/~ackup Switch and Monitor Relays Monitor Relays Master Warning Control Box Relay Driver
AC Power Switch
'
Illumination Red Red Red Amber Green Red Red Amber Green Green Red Red Red Red Amber Red Red Red Red Amber
b
Low Thrust Manual JP4 Low Level JP4 Caution Level Auto T h r o t t l e Engine M x T i l t a b e r g . Gimbals Locked Local Vert. Mode Gimbal Lock Mode S t a b i l i z a t i o n Mode H202 Low L e f t Tank H202 Low Right Tank Valve Stuck Helium Source Low Doppler Auto P i l o t Backup Gyro F a i l u r e
DC F a i l u r e
+
+ + +
+
28 VDC 28 VDC 28 VDC 28 VDC 28 VDC
+ 28 VDC
Ground Ground Ground Ground
+ 28 VDC + 28 VDC
Ground
28 VDC
AC F a i l u r e
+ 28 VDC
+ 28 VDC
Radar Altimeter Hardover
Radar Assembly
+ 28 VDC
Hand ~ o n t r o l l e r / ~ e l a ~ s Red
Report No. 7260-954.002
SWITCH
5430
p406-
- -- -
DC SIGNAL I CONDITIONER I
-7
F i g u r e 8-19.
T y p i c a l Annunciator I n d i c a t o r C i r c u i t , Schematic iliagram
8-35. COCKPIT INSTRUMENTATION OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

8-36. The o p e r a t i o n a l checkout of instruments and i n d i c a t o r s i n t h e cockp i t i s provided i n t a b l e 8-9. The annunciator l i g h t s a r e checked by
p l a c i n g t h e Warning L i g h t T e s t switch i n t h e l i g h t t e s t p o s i t i o n .
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE 8-9. COCKPIT INSTRUMENTATION OPERATIONAL C E K U PROCEDURES HC O T Indicator Altimeter, Barometric Wind Velocity Wind Direction Exhaust Gas Temperature JP4 Tank Pressure H202 Tank Pressure Helium Source Pressure H202 Fuel Remaining O i l Pressure
,
Procedure Check ambient pressure reading Check ground l e v e l wind v e l o c i t y read in^. Check wind d i r e c t i o n i n d i c a t i o n . Check ambient temperature reading. Check p r e s s u r e i n d i c a t i o n a s tanks a r e serviced. Same a s previous item. Check pressure i n d i c a t i o n a s tanks a r e serviced. Use H 0 S e t switch t o increaseldecrease 2 2 i n d i c a t o r reading. Check ind when r k t used., Check i n d i c a t i o n a s j e t engine i s s t a r t e d . Check i n d i c a t i o n a s .jet engine i s s t a r t e d . Check i n d i c a t i o n a s l i f t r o c k e t s a r e f i r e d . Follow paragraphs 1.8 through 1.8.2 of Avionics System P r e f l i g h t Report No. 7260-931006 P r e f l i g h t 7260-931009 P r e f l i g h t 7260-931009 Checked only during f l i g h t . Checked only during f l i g h t . Check f o r reading with power on. Check f o r time i n d i c a t i o n . Follow paragraphs 4.1.2.30 through 4.1.2. 30.7 of Avionics P r e f l i g h t 7260-931050.
,
Percent R M P L i f t Rocket Chamber Pressure Altitude Indicator
~ltitudel~ltitude Rate Horizontal Velocity ~ h r u s/weight t Inertial-Lead V e r t i c a l Speed Voltmeters, AC and DC Clock Hardover
Report No. 7260-95&002
TB 2
733
INPUTS 1
I I I I
I
I
I
TEST
POS INPUTS
Figure 8-20.
Master Warning Control Box, Block Diagram
COCKPIT INSTRUMENTS TROUBLE ANALYSIS
8-38. Failure of t h e cockpit instruments and associated c i r c u i t r y does not

i n d i c a t e an inherent f a i l u r e , a s t h e systems they monitor, e.g., o i l and a l t i t u d e , may be t h e basic source of trouble. a s s i s t i n troubleshooting. 4.2.6.4 fuel, When limited t o
j u s t t h e i n d i c a t o r s and associated c i r c u i t r y , t h e various diagrams w i l l For a d d i t i o n a l a s s i s t a n c e , r e f e r t o paragraph f o F a i l u r e Mode Analysis Report Number 7260-950014. R M V L AND INSTALLATION E OA
8-40. The s i m p l i c i t y of removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n requires only t h e removal

o r connection of rear-mounted connectors, a s required, and t h e removal o r i n s t a l l a t i o n of mounting screws and washers from t h e i n d i c a t o r and cockp i t instrument panel.
Report No. 7260-954002
8-41. ADJUSTMENTS 8-42. The adjustment procedures f o r t h o s e i n d i c a t o r s r e q u i r i n g adjustment p e c u l i a r t o t h e LLTV a r e provided. A d j u s t m n t s procedures f o r t h e followRefer t o Cockpit and h i n g GFE instruments a r e not described : ~ h r u s t / ~ e i ~ A ltt,i t u d e / A l t i t u d e Rate, Horizontal Velocity and A t t i t u d e i n d i c a t o r s . Data Systems Hangar and Ramp Ground Test Procedures, Report Number 7260928057, f o r procedures t o check t h e c a l i b r a t i o n of t h e cockpit instruments. 8-43. JP4 TANK PFESSURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT 8-44. Paragraphs 8-45 and 8-46 provide the t e s t equipment r e q u i r e d , and step-by-step procedures t o a d j u s t t h e forward and a f t JP4 Tank Pressure Indicator circuits.
8-45. TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED - A t e s t gage (0-200 p s i ) and a p r e s s u r e

t e s t c a r t a r e required.
8-46. STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE - Perform t h e following s t e p s i n t h e

i n d i c a t e d order. NT OE Power must be a p p l i e d t o t h e vehicle.
A.
With p r e s s u r e t e s t c a r t , p r e s s u r i z e transducer i n 10-pound increments.
B. Measure pressure with t e s t gage.

C. Read JP4 Tank Pressure i n d i c a t o r ; a d j u s t a p p r o p r i a t e r h e o s t a t ( ~ 4 . 1 ~ 5 o r reading t o correspond t o t e s t gage readings f) ( f i g u r e 8-1).
Report No. 7260-954002
8-47. OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR CIRCUIT 8-48. Paragraphs 8-49 and 8-50 provide t h e t e s t equipment required, and step-by-step procedures t o a d j u s t t h e O i l Pressure Indicator c i r c u i t . 8-49. TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED - A t e s t gage (0-200 p s i ) and a pressure t e s t c a r t a r e required. 8-50. STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE indicated order. NT OE Power must be applied t o t h e vehicle.
A.
Perform t h e following s t e p s i n the
With pressure t e s t c a r t , pressurize transducer i n 10-pound increments.
B. Measure pressure with t e s t gage.

C.
Read O i l Pressure i n d i c a t o r ; a d j u s t R 3 (figure 8-3) a s required f o r reading to correspond t o t e s t gage readings.
8-52. Refer t o Cockpit and Data Systems Hangar and Ramp Ground Test Procedures, Report Number 7260-928057, f o r procedures t o check t h e c a l i bration and adjustment of t h e Wind Velocity indicator.
Report No. 7260-954002
SECTION I X ELECTRICAL SYSTEM M I TN NE AN E A C SCOPE OF SECTION 9-2. This s e c t i o n provides a d e s c r i p t i o n , f u n c t i o n a l a n a l y s i s and mainThe maintenance
tenance i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t h e LLTV E l e c t r i c a l system.
i n s t r u c t i o n s include troubleshooting a n a l y s i s , s e r v i c e and t e s t i n g , adjustments, removal and i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures, t e s t equipment, and v e h i c l e power t r a n s f e r procedures. 9-3, DESCRIPTION AND LEADING PARTICULARS The Primary Power system c o n s i s t s of a 28-volt, 200-ampere, DC
9-4.
generator ( f i g u r e 9-1) driven by t h e j e t engine, a 400-hertz, 3-phase i n v e r t e r ( f i g u r e 9-2), a DC voltage r e g u l a t o r ( f i g u r e 9-3), AC and DC e x t e r n a l power r e c e p t a c l e s ( f i g u r e lines. 7-3), and AC and DC d i s t r i b u t i o n The Secondary Power system c o n s i s t s of b a t t e r y c o n t r o l r e l a y s , Circuit
a 28-volt b a t t e r y ( f i g u r e 9-3), an emergency 400-hertz AC i n v e r t e r , two 800-hertz, AC i n v e r t e r s , and AC and DC d i s t r i b u t i o n l i n e s . rack ( f i g u r e breakers, l o c a t e d i n t h e cockpit ( f i g u r e 1-4) and on t h e a f t equipment
9-3), used i n both systems, i s o l a t e d e f e c t i v e equipment and

Refer t o B e l l drawing No.7260-200001.
a s s u r e power t o t h e a f t equipment. f o r d e t a i l e d e l e c t r i c a l information.
9-5.. E l e c t r i c a l wiring i s separated, where p r a c t i c a l , i n t o f o u r bundles.

AC primary c i r c u i t s run along t h e t o p of t h e l e f t hand outboard s t r u c t u r e
and primary DC and low l e v e l c i r c u i t s run along t h e bottom. Emergency c i r c u i t s run along t h e r i g h t hand outboard s t r u c t u r e , AC along t h e t o p Report No. 7260-954002
9-1
Figure 9-1
28-Volt D-C Generator
9-2
Report NO. 7260-954002
Report KO. 7260-954002
9-3
Figure 9-3. A f t Equipment Rack, Starboard Side
9-4
Report No. 7260-954002
and DC along t h e bottom. 9-6. FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS Analysis of t h e LLTV E l e c t r i c a l system i s presented f o r t h e normal
9-7.
o r primary AC and DC power operation and then f o r emergency or backup operation. 9-8. PRIMARY PaWER SYSTEM
9-9. The source of DC power f o r t h e Primaqy system i s a 28 VDC generator which i s mechanically driven by t h e j e t engine. The generator i s cont r o l l e d by t h e cockpit DC Power switch ( f i g u r e 1-3) which t u r n s it on and o f f , t h e DC voltage regulator which automatically a d j u s t s generator output l e v e l , a d t h e DC ~ver/UnderVoltage c i r c u i t which automatically shuts o f f t h e generator should t h e output vary more than 28 supplies AC power.
+ 4 vdc.
The AC Gver/
The 28 VDC Primary Generator drives a 115v, 400-hertz i n v e r t e r which C m t r o l of t h e i n v e r t e r i s accomplished by t h e cockp i t AC Power switch and t h e AC ~ver/UnderVoltage c i r c u i t . t h e AC voltage exceeds t h e l i m i t s of 115
Under Voltage c i r c u i t automatically drops t h e i n v e r t e r from t h e l i n e i f
2 15 vac.
I n t h e event primary
AC voltage f a l l s below 100 v o l t s o r above 130 v o l t s , avionics w i l l auto-
matically switch t o Rate Backup, s e l e c t and f i r e both s e t s of rockets, and s e l e c t Emergency Gimbals Locked mode of j e t engine control. illuminate. I f t h e DC generator output voltage decreases below
AC
F a i l u r e , Auto P i l o t Backup and Emergency Gimbals Locked i n d i c a t o r s w i l l 24.0 v o l t s o r increases above 32 v o l t s , avionics w i l l automatically switch t o Rate Backup and s e l e c t Emergency Gimbals Locked engine control. Both s e t s of rockets w i l l be selected but only t h e Standard s e t w i l l f i r e . AC F a i l u r e , Auto P i l o t Backup, and Emergency Gimbals Locked i n d i c a t o r s
w i l l illuminate.
Report No. 7260-99002
9-5
9-10.
The DC Power switch ( f i g u r e I-?),
l o c a t e d on t h e P i l o t ' s Control The DC Power switch i s a momentary
Console, a p p l i e s t h e 28-volt DC generator output through t h e voltage r e g u l a t o r t o t h e DC d i s t r i b u t i o n l i n e . t o . t h e DC Volts sensor. a c t i o n switch t h a t i s l a t c h e d closed a s long a s t h e primary DC i s applied The AC Power switch ( f i g u r e 1-3) i s t h e same type
AC v o l t
of switch and i s l a t c h e d closed a s long a s t h e Phase A and Phase C sensors provide a l a t c h i n g i n p u t t o t h e AC Power switch. f o r DC and AC power d i s t r i b u t i o n . line.
See f i g u r e 9-4
Primary DC power i s routed through t h e
de-energized c o n t a c t s of t h e b a t t e r y r e l a y t o t h e emergency DC d i s t r i b u t i o n The emergency 4.00-hertz i n v e r t e r and t w d 800-hertz i n v e r t e r s provide 28 v o l t s , AC d u r i n g operation of t h e Primary Power system. B C U . P W R SYSTEM AKP O E 9-12. lost. The B a t t e r y Power switch ( f i g u r e 1-3) i s placed i n t h e ON p o s i t i o n The emergency b a t t e r y provides 28 v o l t s , DC, t o e s s e n t i a l systems
t o enable t h e emergency b a t t e r y r e l a y t o energize i f primary DC power i s f o r f l i g h t s a f e t y and t o t h e 400-hertz, 28-volt, AC emergency i n v e r t e r and t h e 800-hertz i n v e r t e r s t o provide 28 v o l t s , AC, t o e s s e n t i a l systems f o r f l i g h t safety.
9-13.
9-14.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
The c i r c u i t breakers a c c e s s i b l e t o t h e p i l o t a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 1-2 The c i r c u i t breakers on t h e a f t equipment rack
and shown i n f i g u r e 1-4. a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 9-1. 9-15.
TROUBLE SHOOTING ANALYSIS F a i l u r e of any given c i r c u i t breaker removes DC and AC and someThe symptoms due t o a
9-16.
times both DC and AC from t h e various equipment.
9-6
Report No. 7260-954002
(21 H2D2 TANK PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
(3) L I F T RUT CHAMsER PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS I21 HELIUM TANK PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS(LEFT AND RIGHT1 I ! ) JET ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (21 FUEL TANK PRESSURE TRANSOUCERS FORWARD AND AFT1
ANNUN HNEL LlGnTs JET ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW JET FUEL CAUTION LEVEL DOPPLER LOCAL VERTICAL MODE STABILIZATION MODE ENGIWE MAXIMUM TILT EMERGENCY G l M B l L LOCK GIMBAL LOCK MODE AUTOMATIC THROTTLE LOW TWIUST MANUAL nELlUM s o w LOW Y 2 0 2 LOW GYRO F A l L U l E VALVE STUCK RADAR A L T I I L T E R AUTDPILDT BACRUP MASTER UI*IN(I
Figure 9-4. LLTV Electrical Power Distribution Diagram
c i r c u i t breaker f a i l u r e a r e varied but can be determined, i n p a r t , by an a n a l y s i s of f i g u r e 9-4. However, a s gross symptoms a r e a l s o exhibited by i n d i v i d u a l equipment f a i l u r e , not traceable t o c i r c u i t breaker f a i l u r e , each t r o u b l e must be i n d i v i d u a l l y analyzed by t h e use of t a b l e s 1-2 and 9-1 i n conjunction with f i g u r e 9-4. For example, a f a i l u r e of c i r c u i t breaker However,
CB15 o r CB21 r e s u l t s i n t h e system using t h e emergency battery.

able.
i f c i r c u i t breaker CB15 opens t h e r e i s s t i l l primary 115 v o l t s , AC a v a i l Observation of vehicle system operation and warning i n d i c a t o r s i s Voltage checks and continuity checks a r e required t h e primary source of information t o perform troubleshooting a n a l y s i s a t t h e e l e c t r i c a l system. t o f u r t h e r isola*e defective c i r c u i t s . SERVICE AND TESTING 9-18. Servicing and t e s t i n g of t h e emergency b a t t e r y i s performed by t h e Q u a l i t y assurance
b a t t e r y shop i n accordance with approved procedures.
personnel s h a l l monitor b a t t e r y use and condition and maintain t h e
MSC 772 h i s t o r i c a l record on each battery.

9-19. 9-20. VEHICLE P W R TRANSFER PROCEDURE O E The step-by-step procedures and equipment requirements a r e provided
i n paragraphs 9-21 through 9-27.
9-22.
The following equipment i s required t o perform vehicle power A.

B.
C.
transfer. R e c t i f i e r Cart Ground Power Distribution Box
Truck-mounted Auxiliary Power Unit (APU)
Refer t o Vehicle P r e f l i g h t Checklist 7260-931005
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE 9-1. Dg w Desig NBR CB9
A T EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS F
.
Radar
Title Bus 115-volt Primary Function Radar Altimeter, doppler radar, instrument panel blower, and T/W i n d i c a t o r A S monitor e l e c t r o n i c s , C A S power a m p l i f i e r , C Attitude Gyra Instrument panel blower, A S monitor e l e c t r o n i c s , C A S power a m p l i f i e r , A S C C primary e l e c t r o n i c s , Attitude Gyro Data system Battery charge Data system Drag compensation, Attitude Gyro package, l e g switches Emergency bus feed b a t t e r y control r e l a y Radar a l t i m e t e r , doppler and T/W i n d i c a t o r Rocket valve supply Emergency i n v e r t e r
CBlO
$ A ACS
115-volt Primary
CBil
C AS C
115-volt Primary
CB12
C Inst
115-volt Primary 115-volt $ A Primary 28-volt Primary 28-volt Primary
c ~ 1 6 Battery Charge
CBI3 28 v DC Norm.Inst.
CB14
DC Norm. A S C
CB15 DC Emergency
28-volt Primary 28-volt Primary 28-volt Emergency 28-volt Emergency
CB31 Radar
CB17 Emergency Attitude Rockets CB32 Emergency I n v e r t e r
Report No. 7260-954002
9 -9
TABLE 9- 1.
AFT EQUIPMENT C I R C U I T BREAKERS (continued)

P
I Dwg
CB34
CB33 CB36 CB37 CB38
Desig. NR B
Title DC Emergency A S C Norm A t t i t u d e Rockets Phase A Volt Monitor Phase C Volt Monitor
Bus
28-volt Emergency 28-volt ~ o r m a l 115-volt Primary 115-volt Primary 28-volt Emergency
Function A S primary e l e c t r o n i c s C Emergency power Rocket valve power amplifier Phase A voltage sensor Phase C voltage sensor CB2, CB4, CB35 Fwd emergency bus protection
CBI, CB3, CB28 Fwd emergency bus protection
orw ward DC Emergency

Forward DC Emergency A t t i t u d e Gyro Attitude Gyro
CB39
28-volt Emergency
CB41
115-volt Primary $A
Attitude Wro Attitude Gyro
CB42
@
9 -23. 9-24.
115-volt Primary
STEP-BY -STEP PROCEDURES To accomplish vehicle power t r a n s f e r , perform t h e step-by-step
procedures provided i n paragraphs 9-25 through 9-27. 9-25. P W R STATUS O E
Preliminary s t e p s a r e a s follows:
9-10
Report No. 7260-954002
A.
Vehicle o p e r a t i v e from R e c t i f i e r Cart S e t a t 28.5 v o l t s . S-2 ,on Ground Power D i s t r i b u t i o n Box i n ON (over r i d e ) position. Truck-mounted a u x i l i a r y power u n i t (APU) s t a r t e d and running for
B. C.
10 minutes t o warm up.
The A U DC Load s w i t c h s h a l l P
be "OFF" a t t h i s time and v o l t a g e a d j u s t e d t o 30 v o l t s

NO LOAD.
9-26.
G O N RECTIFIER T TRUCK-MOUNTED A U RUD O P
To t r a n s f e r power from
ground r e c t i f i e r t o t h e truck-mounted APU, proceed a s follows:
A.
B.
I n s e r t DC cord t o t r u c k A U i n t o t h e a v a i l a b l e 28-volt p l u g P (52 o r 53) of Ground Power D i s t r i b u t i o n Box. Hold AC Power s w i t c h i n v e h i c l e c o c k p i t i n ON p o s i t i o n manually u n t i l a f t e r power h a s been t r a n s f e r r e d back t o t h e r e c t i f i e r unit.
C.
Turn t h e APU Load switch t o ON p o s i t i o n . Turn down t h e v o l t a g e of ground r e c t i f i e r t o t h a t v o l t a g e where it i s supplying l e s s t h a n 50 amperes. Power D i s t r i b u t i o n Box. Then t u r n t h e r e c t i f i e r u n i t OFF and remove i t s cordage from t h e Ground
D.
E.
Power t r a n s f e r complete, v e h i c l e may now be t r a n s f e r r e d t o ramp.
9-27.
TRUCK-MOUNTED A U TO GROUND RECTIFIER P
- To
t r a n s f e r power from
t h e truck-mounted A U t o t h e ground r e c t i f i e r , proceed a s follows: P
A.
B.
The c o c k p i t AC Power s w i t c h i s s t i l l being h e l d i n ON position. I n s e r t t h e cord from t h e ground r e c t i f i e r i n t o t h e a v a i l a b l e 28-volt p l u g (52 o r 53) of t h e Ground Power D i s t r i b u t i o n Box. Also, connect t h e ground i n v e r t e r cordage i n t o J1.
C.
Turn t h e ground r e c t i f i e r ON and i n c r e a s e i t s v o l t a g e u n t i l i t s ammeter r e a d s approximately 50 amps. 9-11
Report No. 7260-954002
D.
Turn t h e t r u c k A U Load switch t o OFF and disconnect i t s cord P from t h e Ground Power D i s t r i h t i o n Box. S t a r t t h e ground i n v e r t e r by c l o s i n g S-1 (Ground Power D i s t r i b u t i o n Box)
E. F. G.
H.
The AC Power switch need not be held beyond t h i s p o i n t i n time ana can be released. Reset t h e ground r e c t i f i e r voltage a t 28.5 v o l t s . Place S-2 of t h e Ground Power D i s t r i b u t i o n Box i n i t s OFF position. Power Re-transfer complete.
I.
9-28. 9-29.
R M V L PROCEDURES E OA The.remova1 procedures f o r t h e major components of t h e LLTV e l e c -
t r i c a l system a r e provided i n paragraphs 9-30 through 9-41. 9-30. 9-31. E E G N Y BATTERY MR E C To remove t h e emergency b a t t e r y , proceed a s follows:
A.
Cut s a f e t y wire on f o u r b o l t s (AN~H-IOA) , located on b a t t e r y case cover. See B e l l drawing 7260-202003. Remove f o u r b o l t s and washers ( ~ ~ 9 7 0 - 3 ) from cover and remove cover.
CAUTION
B.
When removing b a t t e r y e l e c t r i c a l connections do not s h o r t terminals t o g e t h e r with t o o l s .

C.
Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l connections from b a t t e r y terminals. Remove b a t t e r y wedges and l i f t b a t t e r y by l a c i n g tape from case. See B e l l drawing 7260-200006. Report No. 7260-954002
D.
9-32.
DC VOLTAGE REGULATOR
9-33.
To remove t h e DC v o l t a g e r e g u l a t o r , proceed a s follows:
A.
B.
C.
Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l connector P55. Remove f o u r screws (MS51957-44) and washers ( A N ~ ~ O P D S ) from r e g u l a t o r c a s e holding b r a c k e t . Remove DC v o l t a g e r e g u l a t o r from a f t equipment rack.
9-34.
DC GENERATOR
9-35.
R e f e r t o paragraph 6-25 f o r removal procedures f o r t h e DC See B e l l drawing 7161-202001.
generator.
9-36.
9-37.
PRIMARY INVERTER AND MOUNTING BASE Refer t o paragraphs 6-29 and 6-30 f o r removal procedures f o r t h e See B e l l drawing 7260-200002.
primary i n v e r t e r and i t s mounting base.
9-38.
EMERGENCY INVERTER AND H A SINK ET To remove t h e emergency 400-hertz i n v e r t e r and h e a t s i n k , proceed
9-39.
a s follows:
A.
B.
Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l connector P72 from t h e emergency inverter. Remove f o u r b o l t s ( A N ? - 6 ~ ) and washers ( ~ ~ 9 6 0 ~ h o1 d0 n g ~ l i) i n v e r t e r and h e a t s i n k t o b r a c k e t mounted on a f t s t r u c t u r e . See B e l l drawing 7260-153502.
C.
Remove e i g h t screws ( ~ ~ 5 0 7 - 1 0 2 1 - 6holding h e a t s i n k t o ) i n v e r t e r t o s e p a r a t e t h e two components. 7260-153503. See B e l l drawing
D.
Clean t h e r m a l j o i n t compound from h e a t s i n k ard i n v e r t e r .
Report No. 7260-954002
9-13
9-44.
800-HERTZ INVERTERS The removal procedures f o r both i n v e r t e r s a r e e s s e n t i a l l y s i m i l a r Access t o t h e mounting To
9-41.
and d i f f e r only due t o i n s t a l l a t i o n location. of t h e access panel i n t h e pedestal. A.
screws f o r .the i n v e r t e r mounted in t h e cockpit i s accomplished by removal See Bell drawing 7260-561004. remove e i t h e r i n v e r t e r , proceed a s follows: Remove e l e c t r i c a l wires t o i n v e r t e r . NT OE I f s e r v i c e loop i s long enough f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n of new i n v e r t e r , t h e wires can be cut. Otherwise remove p o t t i n g
compound and unsolder connections. B.

C.
Cut s a f e t y wire from mounting screws. Remove f o u r screws (~~352276-261) washers ( ~ N 9 6 0 ~ ~ 1 0 L ) and from i n v e r t e r and mounting p l a t e . See B e l l drawing 7260-200006. Clean thermal j o i n t compound from i n v e r t e r and mounting p l a t e .
D .
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 9-43. The i n s t a l l a t i o n procedures f o r t h e major components of t h e LLTV e l e c t r i c a l system a r e provided i n paragraphs 9-44 through 9-54. E E G N Y BATTERY MR E C 9-45. The emergency b a t t e r y i s i n s t a l l e d i n t'he reverse order of removal. Refer t o paragraph 9-30.
Report No. 7260-954002
9-46.
DC VOLTAGE REGULATOR
The DC voltage r e g u l a t o r i s i . n s t a l l e d i n t h e reverse order of Refer t o paragraph 9-32.
9-47.
removal.
9-48.
DC GENERATOR
The DC generator i s i n s t a l l e d i n t h e reverse order of removal.
9-49.
Refer t o paragraph 6-25. 9-50. 9-51. PRIMARY INVERTER AND MOUNTING BASE The primary i n v e r t e r and mounting base i s i n s t a l l e d i n t h e Refer t o paragraphs 6-29 and 6-30.
reverse. o r d e r . of removal. 9-52.
E E G N Y INVERTER AND HEAT SINK MR E C Apply thermal j o i n t compound t o base of t h e emergency i n v e r t e r Refer t o
9-53.
and then proceed t o i n s t a l l i n t h e reverse order of removal. paragraph 9-38.
9-54.
800-HERTZ INVERTERS Apply thermal j o i n t compound t o base of t h e i n v e r t e r and then Refer t o
9-55.
proceed t o i n s t a l l i n t h e reverse order of removal. paragraph 9-40.
9-56. 9-57.
G N R T R AND R G L T R CHECK AND A J S M N E EAO E UAO DU T E T The equipment required, preliminary procedures and step-by-step
procedures a r e provided i n paragraphs 9-58 through 9-64.
Report No. 7260-954002
9-15
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
9-59.
A d r i v e stand capable of d e l i v e r i n g 3570 t o 6000 RPM, and a t e s t
harness ( f i g u r e 9-5) i s required t o check and a d j u s t t h e DC generator and voltage r e g u l a t o r . 9 -60. PRELIMINARY P O E U E R CD R Remove t h e DC generator and DC voltage r e g u l a t o r in accordance with
9-61.
procedures provided i n paragraphs 6-25 and 9-32, respectively.
9 -62.
9-63.
STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE To check and ad j u s t t h e DC generator and r e g u l a t o r , proceed a s
follows :
A.
Mount t h e generator on a d r i v e stand capable of d e l i v e r i n g 3750 t o 6000 R M P .
B. Connect t h e voltage r e g u l a t o r a s shown i n f i g u r e 9-5 using wire

lengths and gages indicated. C. Run up t h e generator t o 4200 RM and c l o s e t h e switch t o t h e P regulator. NT OE I f t h e voltmeter shows t h a t t h e generator
i s n o t e x c i t e d , i n c r e a s e RM u n t i l t h e P
generator i s e x c i t e d , then reduce RM t o 4200. P
D.
Adjust t h e voltage r e g u l a t o r f o r a voltmeter reading of 28.0 volts.
Report No. 7260-954002
E.
I n s t a l l t h e DC g e n e r a t o r and v o l t a g e r e g u l a t o r i n t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of removal. 9-32, r e s p e c t i v e l y . Refer t o paragraphs 6-25 and
9-64.
A a l t e r n a t e procedure f o r a d j u s t i n g g e n e r a t o r v o l t a g e without n
A.
B.
Adjust t h e r e g u l a t o r w i t h t h e j e t engine running a t approximately 48 p e r c e n t RPM. S e t t h e v o l t a g e t o 28.0 v o l t s on t h e cockpit DC voltmeter.
removal from v e h i c l e i s a s follows:
SPST
a
NOTE:
All connector wires are
16 GA, 30 inches long. J. FLUKE 801
Figure
9-5.
DC Generator and Regulator Adjustment Connections, Cabling Diagram
Report No. 7260-954.002
SECTION X RADIO, RADAR AND TELF,METRY MAINTENCE
10-1 SCOPE OF SECTION

10-2 The section provides a functional and general description, and maintenance instructions for the radio communication equipment, radar equipment, and instrumentation and telemetry equipment. The maintenance instructions include operational check out, troubleshooting, installation and removal, adjustments and test equipment.
DESCRIPTION AND LEADING PARTICULARS
10-4.The radio communication equipment consists of a UHF transceiver, an antenna, 'and an intercommunication control box and amplifier The radar equipment consists of a receiver/transmitter, two antennas, a radar assembly, a high voltage power supply, an altitude/altitude rate indicator and a horizontal velocity indicator. The instrumentation and telemetry equipment consists of a PCM encoder, an FM transmitter, an antenna, an AC/DC signal conditioner, a positive and negative 5-volt power supply, various sensors and transducers, and a positive 20-volt power module. The sensors, transducers and power module are also functional components of other systems.
I'
10j RADIO COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
10-6 Located on the left console in the cockpit, is the TR31, UHF transceiver, which provides the pilot with communications to the ground. The UHF transceiver control panel provides a 4-channel
Report No. 7260-954002
10-1
frequency s e l e c t o r control, an audio volume control, an on-off and a squelch control. 233.6, box, See figurel-14.
I -
control
The four UHF frequencies a r e An amplifier and control impedance matching between For detailed mainten-
235.4, 236.6, and 239.5 megahertz.
c ~ ~ ~ A / A I c -(figure I- 14) , provides ~o,
9 ohm headsets and 150 ohm tranceiver output.

manual UHF Transceiver Cubic Model TR31.
ance instructions on the UHF' transceiver, r e f e r t o Cubic Corporation
RADAR EQUIPMENT
10.8 The radar equipment provides a l t i t u d e and a l t i t u d e r a t e signals, The
and horizontal velocity signals t o t h e respective indicators. Refer t o paragraphs 8-20 and 8-21 f o r a description of t h e indicators. AC/DC Signal Conditioner. indicators provide similar signals from i n t e r n a l potentiometers t o t h e
10-9 RADAR ALTIMETER
- Radar
signals a r e transmitted t o and received
6 from t h e ground by the radar assembly ( ~ y a n 0 a , figure 10-1) and two antennas (figure 10-2). The received radar signals a r e processed by The similar type signals. the radar assembly and an a l t i t u d e and an a l t i t u d e r a t e signal i s routed t o the ~ l t i t u d e / ~ l t i t u d e Rate Indicator MI.7. contained i n t h e indicator. a r e provided t o t h e AC /DC Signal Conditioner from potentiometers Refer t o Ryan Support Manual Model 602 Radar Altimeter, Report Number 60264-1 f o r detailed maintenance instruct i o n s on t h e radar assembly and indicator. 10-10 DOPPLER RADAR
- Radar signals transmitted and received by

The forward (horizontal)
~ e c e i v e r l ~ r a n s m e t Model TR-1 ( ~ y a n tir 547A, figure 10-2) provide forward and l a t e r a l velocity signals by measurement of the doppler s h i f t
in t h e transmitted versus received signals.
velocity and l a t e r a l ( d r i f t ) velocity signals a r e routed f o r display
10-2
Report No. 7260-954-002
on t h e Horizontal Velocity Indicator M7.
Equivalent signals a r e
provided t o the AC/DC Signal Conditioner from potentiometers contained i n t h e indicator. Refer t o Ryan Support Manual Model 547 Doppler Velocity Sensor, Report Number 54764-1 f o r detained maintenance .instructions on the indicator and TR-1 receiverltransmitter INSTRUMENTATION AND T L M T Y EQUIPMENT EE ER 10-12 Instrumentation of t h e L T through the use of 27 transducers, LV
7 potentiometers, various switches, sensors, and miscellaneous devices

provides input signals t o t h e AC/DC Signal Conditioner. See figures 10-3 and 10-4. A t o t a l of 63 channels of analog voltage data and 29 b i t s of d i g i t a l data i s provided t o the PM Encoder (figure 10-1). C Refer to.Teledyne Systems Operation and Maintenance Manual, PM C Telemetry System Model CT-77A f o r detailed maintenance instruction on t h e encoder. The output of the encoder i s routed t o FM/'TM Transmitter TR-2 f o r transmission t o the TM van. See figure 10-1. LC INSTRUMENTATION AND TELeMETRY B O K DIAGRAM ANALYSIS 10114 A general functional block diagram analysis i s provided i n A discussion of the 63 channels of
paragraphs 10-15 t o 10-21. data.
analog voltage data preceeds t h e analysis of the 29 b i t s of d i g i t a l The discussion i s supported by a block diagram (figure 10-4) and t a b l e 10-1. 10-15 10-16 A AO V L A E I S R M N A ION N L G OT G NT U E T T ghannels 1through
53 and 58 through 67 ( r e f e r t o t a b l e 10-1)

A comparison of figure 10-4
a r e used t o provide analog voltage data.
and t a b l e 10-1 provides i d e n t i f i c a t i o n of the analog voltage source
Report No. 7260-gyc002
10-3
Report Ho. 7260-954002 Figure 10- 2. Radar ~eceiver/~ransmitter Model TR-1
10-5
10-6
Report No. 7260-954002
e i t h e r t o a component o r system l e v e l . A l l analog voltages & r e routed t o t h e AC/DC Signal Conditioner p r i o r t o processing by t h e P M Encoder. C manual. The c i r c u i t r y f o r t h e analog voltage sources common t o t h e cockpit instrument panel i s provided in s e c t i o n V I I I of t h i s Table 10-1 provided the wiring information f o r analog signals routed from t h e Avionics system, and other s i g n a l sources in addition t o t h e aources oomon t o t h e cockpit instruments.
10-18.
Channels 54 through
57 ( r e f e r t o t a b l e 10-1) a r e used t o
A comparison of f i g u r e 10-4 and
provide t h e 29 b i t s of d i g i t a l data. component l e v e l o r system l e v e l . t o t h e AC/DC Signal Conditioner.
t a b l e 10-1 provides i d e n t i f i c a t i o n of t h e d i g i t a l source e i t h e r t o a The d i g i t a l sources common t o t h e Table 10-1 provides t h e wiring annunciator panel indicators a r e routed through t h e i n d i c a t o r s p r i o r information f o r d i g i t a l s i g n a l s routed from other sources i n addition t o t h e sources common t o t h e annunciator panel indicators. AC/DC SIGNAL CONDITIONER 10-20. The control r e l a y s f o r t h e instrumentation and telemetry Control switches
systems a r e located in t h e DC Signal Conditioner. platform. See f i g u r e 10-2.
f o r t h e s e r e l a y s a r e mounted on t h e underside of t h e a f t equipment The p o s i t i v e and negative 5-volt power supply outputs a r e routed t o t h e DC Signal Conditioner t o provide power t o t h e a t t i t u d e rocket transducers, t h e compressor discharge and accumulator pressure transducers. The p o s i t i v e and negative
5 v o l t s a r e a l s o routed through t h e
Encoder input. See f i g u r e 10-5.
DC Signal Conditioner t o t h e P M C
The a t t i t u d e rocket transducer
output, (channels 27 through 42) a r e routed through t h e DC Signal
Report No. 7260-954.002
FWD FUEL TANK PRESS XDCR MT9
,A
I
AFT FUEL TANK P R E S S XDCR MTlO HELIUM SOURCE LEFT XDCR MT5
IIELIUM SOURCE RIGHT XDCR MT4 ACS MONITOR ELECTRONICS

,
I J
O I L PRESSURE TRANSDUCER MT8 RIGHT H z 0 2 XDCR i ~ 6 ACS PRIMARY ELECTRONICS ACS BACKUP, RKT
rC ELECTRONICS
DRAG COMPENSATION N
LEFT H 2 0 2 XDCR M T ~
LEFT L I F T RKT P R E S S XDCR YT J
ENGINE TACH
I
; - -
RIGHT L I F T RKT PRFSS XDCR MT2 J E T ENGINE EGT I N D M1
FAN TACH
ACCrnULATOR P R E S S XDCR MT28 ALTITUDE/ALT RATE I N D MI 7 HORIZ VELOCITY INDICATOR M 7 L I F T ROCKET WOTTLE
T WIND DIRECTION INDICATOR
v
W
Figure 10-4.
Instrumentation Telemetry System B l o c k D i a g r a m , Sheet 1 of 2 R e p o r t No. 7260-954002
, JP4 LOW & CAUTION
ENG O I L P R E S S LOW SWITCH
LE'IEL SENSORS
++--AM
C GYRO
--
mlm
FAILURE
-+
+
---k
TRANS MITTER
DSlA
A
29 >ITS D I G I T A L DATA
(TIPIcAL)
AC/DC SIGNAL CONDITIOrn
GIMBAL LOCK SW
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL INDICATORS
PCM ENCODER
60 CHANNEIS ANALOG
DATA
*
I I I
H202 LOW LeVEL LH & RH SENSORS
HELIUM LOW P R E S S SWITCH
STD-TEST-BOTH ROCRET SELECTOR
PI
BOTII ATT H I I RELAY !C C S '
ATTITUDE RKTS
XDCRS MTll-MT26
v
W
X
5-VDC POWER SUPPLY
5 C
Figure 10-4. I n s t r u m e n t a t i o n T e l e m e t r y S y s t e m B l o c k D i a g r a m , Sheet 2 o f 2 R e p o r t No. 7 2 6 0 - 9 5 4 0 0 2
Table 10-1. Telemetry Instrumentation Channels Signal

-
Wire L i s t
P M Encoder C Input Output
Chan
I
P303-G P303-N 4 -E P413-10
source P304-b P304-a

4
Conn-Pin
( Interconn
Output I AC/DC Conditioner Input P418-1 P418-2 -3 -4
Vehicle P i t c h A t t i t u d e
1A 1B 2 A 2B
Vehicle Roll A t t i t u d e Primary Elec P304-c

I
I
Primary Elec
3A
Primary Elec P304-e P304-d -P -2
Vehicle Yaw A t t i t u d e
I
-5
-6
Primary Elec
3B
4A
Vehicle P i t c h Velocity Primary Elec
I
-F -M -H
-U
P304-f P304-K P304-s P304-q P304-N P304-P P304-g P304-h P304-H
I
-7
-8
4B
5A
Vehicle Roll Velocity
I
IPrimary Elec
-a
-9
Vehicle Yaw Velocity

Drag Compen.
-v
5B 6 A 6B 7 A 7B -b
Ax Error Signal
8A
Helium Source Left Hand Xdcr MT 5
-W -J
-R
-G
Helium Source R t Hand

Drag Compen
J e t Eng P i t c h A t t i t u d e Drag Compen

Drag Compen
I
Xdcr MT 4
-r -K
-L
-d -e -P
-U
J e t Eng Roll A t t i t u d e
-1 0 -1 1 -1 2 -1 3 -1 4 -1 5 -1 6 -1 7 -1 8 -1 9 -20 -2 1 -22
-2
Ax P i t c h Acceleration Drag Compen
3
-B
+
8B 9 A 93 1OA 10B 11A 11B 12.A 12 B 13 A 13B
Ay Roll Acceleration
l a
Az Yaw Acceleration
I I I
I~ l t / ~ l t
Drag Cornpen Rate 1 Indicator M ~lt/~lt Rate 1 Indicator M Hor Velocity Indicator M 7 Hor Velocity 7 Indicator M
-A -C
'
P406-b P406-d P4O6-Y P4O6-X P~O~-H PJO3-D P40 5-E
Altitude
-24 -25 -26 -27 P418-28 P418-29
A 1 t i t u d e Rate
14B 15s 15B 16 A 16B 17 A 17B 18A
D r i f t Velocity
Horizontal Velocity
-33 -34 -35 P ~8-36 I
p4T 3-1 0
Tahl e 10-1 . Tn ~rnetryT n s t n ~ r n e n t a t i o nC h n n n ~ l sW i r

T,ist. ( ~ n n t i m i n d
Signal Throttle Pot R2 Primary Elec Primary Elec Primary Elec
Source
I
Conn-Pin Interconn *AC/DC Conditioner Input Output
PCM Encoder Input Output
Lift Rkt Throttle Pos
Rate Commsnd Pitch
Rate Command Roll
Rate Command Yaw
Jet Eng Throttle Po8
Throttle Pot R11 Compressor Disch Press Xdcr MT 27
. Lift Rkt Press L Hand Xdcr MT 3
. Lift Rkt Press R Hand Xdcr MT 2 Xdcr MT 15 Xdcr MT 1 6 Xdcr MT 17 Xdcr MT 1 8 Xdcr MT 20 Xdcr MR 21 Xdcr M 1 9 T Xdcr M 22 T Xdcr MT 11 Xdcr MT 12
Att Rkt Press
Att Rkt Press
Table 1 01 Signal Xdcr MT 1 4 2P444-B 2P440-L P402-C P404-C Source Conn-Pin Interconn AC/DC Conditioner Output Input
P M Encoder C Input Output
.
Telemetry Instrumentation Channels Wire List (continued)
Chan
37A 37B
Att Rkt Press Et
-v
38A 33 8
At Dt Ht Xdcr MT 26 a444-B 4P441-B 4P442-B P89-B P91-B 4P440-C P402-J 4P440-H P402-H 4P440-L Xdcr MT 23 Xdcr MT 24 Xdcr MT 1 0 Xdcr MT 9 P402-G Xdcr MT 25 4P443-B 4P440-K P402-K
Xdcr MT 13 2P443-B
2P440-K
P402-D
-D
39A 39B 4oA
403
Ds
41A 4B 1
428
AttRktPress Hs
JP4 Pressure Aft Tank
I
P404-S P302-D
I Ij
P302-A P302-E P404-q
JP4 Pressure Fwd Tank
P332-A Fan Tach Fan RPM P332-B LOW Thrust/Weight Computer Drag Compen P66-g
I
PI 7-k/~~1P304-k ~/P~~o-JJ PI~-~/TBI- P304-m ~/P~~O-ICK P304-A P330-A P330-B P304-B NA P403-N
NA NA P401-r P4Ol -m
1;
~419-21 ~413-i 0 -22 -23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -3 -31 P419-32 p419-33 * -34 -35 -36 -37 -38 -39 -40
423 43A 43B 44A 44B 45A 45B 46A 46B 47A 47B +5 VDC P S .. P464-3 P464-6 -5 VDC P S ..
+ 5 Volt Calibrate
-1 4
-42 -43
48A
- 5 Volt Calibrate
P126-G P41-B
Engine Tach P331-C Gas Gen RPM P331-D LOW T H202 Tank Press L Hand Xdcr M 7 . P35-B
Exhaust Gas Temperature EGT Ind M1
P330-C P304-C P304-D P330-D P1-r/T~10-P304-r 2O/P~~O-EE F430-V P406-U
4 I
P -S/TBIO- P304-n I 19/~4 30-FF NA P304-J
P404-r P302-J P302-K P303-q ~302-P P405-1 P405-BB P303-f P302-R P303-g p303-J
-44
-45 -46 -47 -48 -49 -50
48B 49A 49B 50A 50B 51A 5B 1 52A 52B Drag Compen P66-H
Hz02 Tank Preee Re Hand Xdcr MT 6
+ -51
53h
Ay Error Signal
53B
P419-52 P410- 1 ' I P410- 2 P413-10
Table 10-1 Signal Conn-Pin Interconnections
.
qelemetry Instrumentation Channels Wire List (continued)
I
source
AC/DC Conditioner Pm Encoder Output Input Output Input
JP4 Caution Level P405-n
P413-10 ~416-49
4
JP4 Low Level
P405-U
P416-48
H202 Low Level RH
P405-5
P416-47 P416-46 P4O5-g P405-f P416-45 P405-p P406-g
H202 Low Level LH
Tank Sensors P50-A Fwd PI-X/TBI 0 1/pl 3-L,DS2-1 A28 and A29 P54-A Aft PI-C/TBIO-1/ DS~-~/PI 13-~B/P430-8 P406-y Tank Sensors P5O-C hrd PI-a/TBl0-2/~~3-M/Ds3-1 A28 and A29 P54-C Aft PI-T/TB~O-~/ DS3-4/P11 3-~~/~430-r P406-GC Right Sensor P127-A &C ~42-A&C/PI ~-x&w/P~-A&c ~ 3 2 ( ~8-E/PI 13-X/DSl 3-4/~~1 3-6/ A34 PI1 3-t/~430j P406-v Left Sensor PI43-A &C P36-A&C/pl ~-X&Y/P~-A&C (~31) P~-E/P~ 13-W/DS~ /DSlj-5/ 3-1 A33 PI1 3-w/P430-f P406-w Aft Limit Sw NA P330-F P402-u P139-F/PI~ 3-N/DS~ -1/Dsll-4 1 Pl 1 ~-DD/P~~c-u P406-p
PI-~/~113-~/~~12-1/~~12-4/
Low Auto Throttle Signal Cutoff Low Auto Throttle Clutch Disengage Helium Source Low Low Thrust NA Limit Sw Helium Low PressSwS42 P48-A TR1 Rx/Tx P59-39
P416-44 P405-z
~416-43
Doppler
P113-u/p430-i P4-k/P113- j/DS4-1 /D~4-4/ P113-FF/P~JO-g
Attitude Rkt Test
P406-g
P405-m
iI P416-42
Stablization Mode Drag Compen
Rkt Test-Std Pin 44 Both Sw S6D Drag Compen PlO1-HH P101-CC
Local Vertical
Emerg Gimbals Lockec
T a b l e 1 ~ 1-.
--
Telemetry Inetrumentatior. Channels Sourc~ Input

1
Wire L i s t
(~cntinued)
I~tmn
Conn-Fin Interconnections
S iuna 1
X! Encoder I
Output
AC/DC C o n d i t i o n e r Input Output

P406-j P405-L
R-4
I
A t t i t u d e Flc.cke? Str! i'Cj2-S Packup S l e c Packup E l e c !1;9-c

I I
Hkt Test-S?d- ) i n 45 3 0 t h Sv S62 PlC9-p

NA
1
! F2j-h/?11
J-Y,/D.;I~-~/'DSI 5-4,' I 1 1 1 J-5'FdjG-h P406-5 7405-y
!
P416-34 P413-10
4
55-'
.. .
S t u c k Valve
~416-19
I
I
$5-6
::. r. :.,
,
F416-33
. - ,..,: : ,.,. .: I
I'436-h
X i m relay,"?l l j j-ZC,'
F4Si-u
55-7
Auto T h r o t t l e
Dm6 Compen
FlC1-r
; ~ / / 2 s l v - l / C Sto-4,'Pll
( P433-t
; F2-p/Lurar
P406-AA Y4S6-FF
1!
;
Ij
F4C5-AA P405-FF F416-24 P416-32
i j I
I
I
1
I
55-e J7G-E 38I 6-!

!'b8-F
J e t 5hp b x i m u m T i 1t Compen
1
2x
I ~ 2 - V / P ' j-B/'DY / C S ~ - 4 / I 7-1
$5-9
NA
Gimbal Lock ??ode
I 7'91 C-1 I ,PI

1IA
Pllj-r/?4jO-q 1 )-?/~sR-: pllJ-q/F430-p
/DsB-~,'
P406-f P4D)-g P403-f P406-k
i
Direct latch Pitch
3 i m b l Lock S v i t c h S21 Yonitor Elec

NA
P4O5-v F416-27 ~ 4 0 5 - t P416-16 F405-AS P405-P P416-14 P416-13
j
!
56-2
3 i z v c t Latch Yaw
I w o n i t o r Elcc
56- J Y o c i t c r ?let
PoS-F
HA
CF 7 T r i p
I
C37
/i 1I
P1: J-~?/P450-d
TI
I
!
'
56-4 I i a t t Relay Sanoe

i i a r Velocl t y
Ssckup Gyro P a i l u r e
I Y:-t,'Ftlj-bj3~14-?/D~14-4/' P43S-Y
'
I
F406-N ?4C2-f P406-Z
Fj02-S
1
P4C5-q F405-N F416-12 P416-11
I
I
56-5
:;tale
Cslg T r i p
Pto-9
P72-C PlJ1-b P24-C kA2-4 f4jC-G
56-b
!?or Vel
F405-i
F3C2-T
F416-10
I n d i c a t o r '7 Smert; LC Iower L ~ e e h e r e I n v

L , k --:
I1 II
I
NA
P402-j P434-m P416-9 P416-8
56-7 56-e
'f,.,
L - , .
I
9
hsckup E l c c
.)i! P r e s s Sw
~i
F139-E/Fl-Y,/i'll ~ - K / D s I -1 D 1- 4 j F l l j - X E jP4jO-,; S
56-9 h t c h ?oil Yonitor Elec

!!P:&:;
):a:
O i l F r e s e u r e Lsw
/
~40e-V ~405-v ~416-7
57-1
l'irect
I1 '
F.65-K .
,I.,
a
5 - 7 4 iinrdover 3 0 t h
I
I
T;^
. I :'
f4C2-k 4 -
P404-k P 304-U
P416-2 ~ 4 1 6 - 1 P413-10
Report No.
7260-954002
Conditioner t o t h e Backup E l e c t r o n i c s and t o t h e P M Encoder input. C Channels
15
through 19,23, 24, 46,
51, 58,
60, 61, 62, and 64 a r e a l s o These a r e
routed through without conditioning t o t h e P M Encoder. C l i m i t s acceptable by t h e P M Encoder. C through
analog v o l t a g e s i g n a l s which a r e w i t h i n t h e negative t o p o s i t i v e voltage Channels 54-l through 54-9,
55-1
55-9, 56-1 through 56-6 and channels 56-8, 56-9 and 57-1 a r e
Channbls 20 through 22 a r e a l s o
routed t o 5407 of t h e DC component module assembly (see schematic diagram, B e l l drawing 7206-242032). routed t o 5407. d i v i d e r t o t h e v a r i o u s inputs. The component plugged i n 5407 functions a s a voltage The component plugged i n 54.08 provides
a common ground connection f o r varinus channels. 10-21. The AC power andDC power c o n t r o l r e l a y s a r e l o c a t e d i n t h e AC The remaining channels, 1 through 14, 25, 26, 43, These channels a r e i n t e r n a l l y routed t o 5305, 5306, Channel 45 i s routed t o 5305 which
S i g n a l Conditioner. S i g n a l Conditioner.
44, 45, 49, 50, 52, 53, 56-7, 57-2, 59 and 63 a r e routed t o t h e AC
and 5307 a s shown i n f i g u r e 10-5. acceptable d-c v o l t a g e l e v e l .
contains demodulator c i r c u i t s t o convert t h e f a n t a c h a-c s i g n a l t o an Channel 49 i s routed t o 5307, which The channel 49 contains v o l t a g e d i v i d e r s and Zener diode l i m i t e r s .
(engine t a c h Ac) s i g n a l i s l i m i t e d and t h e n routed t o 5306, which conta.ins demodulator c i r c u i t s s i m i l a r t o 5305 t o convert t h e engine t a c h a-c s i g n a l t o a n acceptable &?c voltage l e v e l .
A l l o t h e r channels a r e a l s o routed
t o 5307 and from t h e voltage d i v i d e r s a r e routed t o output connectors C 5302 o r 5303, except 57-2 which i s routed out 5304, and t o t h e P M Encoder input. The 63 channels of analog d a t a and 29 b i t s of d i g i t a l data a r e converted from p a r a l l e l inputs t o a 9 - b i t binary coded word f o r each input and formatted a s s e r i a l d a t a t o t h e telemetry t r a n s m i t t e r TR-2. OPERATIONAL C E K U HC O T
Report No. 7260-954002
I
P402 54071L
7r
ATT RKT XDCRS CH 27 t o 42, CH 24, 54-5 CH 56-5, 56-8 CH 57-1 , 62.64
- ---- V LA E OT G DIVIDER MDL O UE
L -------A
7r
CH 20 t o 22, 46 CH 56-1, 56-2 BACKUP, RKT ELEC,
*
-
j408
- - - - -- 7
I
i1
P4061
4 PEE
- - - - - - -1
L
I I I
-~ -
CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH
1 5 t o 19 23, 51 , 54-1 54-29 54-3 54-4, 54-6 54-7 t o 54-9 55-1 t o 55-9 56-3, 56-4 56-6, 56-9 58, 60, 61
I
5305-
i CH
- - -- - FAN T C AH MULTIVIBRATOR MDL O UE CH.
I
MULTIVIBRATOR - _M&UULEI -
Ip303
rh ~
C H
ALL OTHER. CH
ZENER DIODES
I P304
AC SIGNAL CONDITIONEFi
Figure 10-5
* 'p
AC/DC Signal Conditioner, Block D i a g r a m
CH
10-23.
Limited operational checkout procedures a r e provided f o r t h e Operational checkout
r a d i o communications equipment and radar equipment.
of t h e instrumentation and telemetry equipment i s accomplished by following t h e procedures provided in Section V I I I of t h i s manual and Cockpit and Data Systems Ground Test Procedures, Report Number 7260928057 10-24. 10-25.
RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
I n order t o check operation of t h e radio communications equipment,
perform t h e procedures outlined in t h e following documents: A. To apply power t o t h e LLTV, perform P a r t A of t h e LLTV Pref l i g h t Checklist, Checklist Number 7260-931005. Instrumentation P r e f l i g h t Checklist, Checklist No. 7260-931007. 10-26. 10-27. R D R EQUIPMENT AA I n order t o check operation of t h e radar equipment, perform t h e A.
B.
B To perform communications check, perform P a r t B-4 of t h e U T V .
procedures outlined i n t h e following documents: P a r t A of t h e LLTV P r e f l i g h t Checklist, Checklist Number 7260-931005.
LLTV Radar Systems P r e f l i g h t Checklist, Checklist Number

7260-931009.
10-28. 10-29.
INSTRUMENTATION I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e references provided in paragraph 10-23, t h e
LLTV Instrumentation P r e f l i g h t Checklist, Checklist Number 7260-931007 provides instnunentation checkout procedures.
Report Number 7260-954.002
10-30. 10-31.
TROUBXSHOOTING PROCEDURES The number of s i g n a l channels t o be checked precludes a
s p e c i f i c troubleshooting procedure f o r each channel. Troubleshooting of t h e telemetry t r a n s m i t t e r , t h e P M encoder, t h e UHF t r a n s c e i v e r , C i n t e r c o m , and radar equipment i s accomplished by performing procedures outlined i n t h e maintenance and support manuals previously referenced. The requirement t o l o c a t e a trouble i n a telemetry channel i n d i c a t e s a f a i l u r e of a s p e c i f i c channel t o meet t h e standards of t h e Cockpit and Data systems Ground Test Procedures, Report Number 7260-928057. A general t r o ~ b l e ' s h o o t i ntechnique i s provided r a t h e r than channel by ~ channel procedural techniques. only t e s t equipment used. 10-32. A f a i l u r e t o obtain t h e desired encoder output f o r channels
A volt-ohmmeter i s i n most cases t h e
whose s i g n a l source i s common with t h e f l i g h t instruments o r annunciator panel i n d i c a t o r s i s analyzed by t h e following steps: A.
B.
C.
Check instruments o r i n d i c a t o r f o r inoperable channel. Use push-to-test involved. switch when annunciator i n d i c a t o r s a r e
Failure of encoder output and instrument o r i n d i c a t o r , i n d i c a t e s common trouble. and 1 Use Table 10-2 t o check wiring source, with volt-ohmmeter.
10-33.
A f a i l u r e t o obtain t h e desired encoder output f o r other A. B. Check input s i g n a l t o AC /DC Signal Conditioner f o r inoperable channel. Use volt-ohmmeter and t a b l e 10-1 t o check wiring and s i g n a l cource
channels i s analyzed by t h e following steps:
Report Number 7260-954002
10-34. 10-35.
INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL I n s t a l l a t i o n and removal of most of t h e radio, radar and telemetry The
equipment requires only standard procedures f o r accomplishment. instructions. 10-36. 10-37.
following procedures a r e provided f o r t h e equipment requiring special
UHF TRANSCEIVER TR-31

The i n s t a l l a t i o n and removal procedures f o r the UHF transceiver
'
TR-31 a r e provided i n paragraphs 10-38 and 10-39.

10-38. INSTALLATION A..
- To i n s t a l l the UHF transceiver,
proceed as
follows : Attach t h e adapter bracket t o the TR-31 transceiver. Position the TR-31 in accordance with Bell drawing 7260561001.
C.
B.
Connect coaxial cables P202 and P201. Connect t h e control d i f f e r e n t i a l transformer Attach screws.
, (cDX)
E.
the TR-31 mounting bracket and the CDX by nine
10-39.
RM V L E OA
To remove the UHF transceiver, proceed i n reverse
order of paragraph 10-38. 10-40. 10-41. PM E C D R C NOE The i n s t a l l a t i o n and removal procedures f o r the P M Encoder a r e C
provided in paragraphs 10-42 and 10-43.
10-42.
INSTALLATION A.
- To i n s t a l l the
P M encoder, proaeed a s follows: C
Move a f t equipment platform &-inches t o the r e a r t o provide . i n s t a l l a t i o n working space. I n s t a l l encoder with four mounting bolts. Connect e l e c t r i c a l connectors.
B.
C.
10-43,
RM V L E OA
- To remove the PCM encoder,
proceed i n reverse
order of paragraph 10-42. 10-44 10-45. TELENETRY TRANSMITTER TR-2 The insttlllation and removal procedures f o r the telemetry
transmitter a r e provided in paragraphs 10-46 and 10-47. 10-46. INSTALLATION

A.
- To i n s t a l l t h e telemetry
transmitter, proceed
a s follows: Remove the P M encoder i n accordance with paragraph 10-43. C I n s t a l l the transmitter with four b o l t s t o mounting plate. Connect e l e c t r i c a l connectors P1, P2 and P3.
B.
C.
10-47.
FI OA U VL M
- To remove the telemetry transmitter,
proceed a s
f o l l m s:
A. B.
Remove the P M encoder in accordance with paragraph 10-43. C Removal of the P M encoder i s now accomplished in reverse C darder of paragraph 10-46.
10-48. 10-49.
A J S M N PROCEDURES DU T E T The adjustment of the instrumentation and telemetry system
i s accomplished by following t h e procedures provided in Section V I I I

of t h i s manual and Cockpit and Data Systems Ground Test Procedures,
10-21
Report Number 7260-928057, except f o r Channel 56-7. 10-50. 10-51. E E G N Y AC P W R LQSS CHANNEL 56-7 A J S M N MR E C O E DU T E T Paragraph 10-52 l i s t s t h e t e s t equipment required and paragraph
10-53 provides step-by-step procedures t o adjust channel 56-7. 10-52. TEST EQUIPMENT REQUlRED
- The following ground support equipment
and t e s t equipment a r e required:
A.
Power c a r t or truck o c t a l box Variable 26-volt, 4-00 hertz, a-c power source.
B.
C.
D. AC voltmeter
10-53. STEP-BY-STEP P O E U E R CD R
- To adjust t h e emergency AC power l o s s
channel, proceed a s follows:
A.
B.
C.
Remove wire ~16A20 from terminal board TB2-4. Apply external power t o vehicle. Place a l l c i r c u i t breakers ON, except CB20 and 28. Vary a-c power source and observe o c t a l box indication f o r
and ground. Dm Apply variable a-c power source t o wire ~16A20
E.
a change i n s t a t e of channel .56-7 a t 22 f 2 v o l t s a-c
F.
G.
indication on a-c voltmeter. Adjust R301 so t h a t channel 56-7 changes s t a t e when voltage drops below 22 f 2 v o l t s a s indicated by a-c voltmeter. Replace wire X16A20 t o terminal board TB2-4. Remove t e s t equipment and external power.
H.
Report Number 7260-9 54002
SECTION X I AVIONICS SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE SCOPE OF SECTION 11-2. This s e c t i o n provides functional and c i r c u i t a n a l y s i s of
avionics systems. This section i s divided i n t o t h r e e separate p a r t s . The f i r s t p a r t covers.maintenance i n s t r u c t i o n s t h a t include operational checkout, t r o u b l e analysis, and removal; t h e second p a r t covers avionic adjustments; t h e t h i r d p a r t covers adjustments required a f t e r t h e replacement of various c r i t i c a l components. DESCRIPTION AND LEADING PARTICULARS
11-4.
The avionics systems a r e t h e Vehicle Attitude Control system,
t h e J e t Engine Attitude Control system, and t h e Lunar Simulation system. The Vehicle Attitude Control system c o n s i s t s of primary control, backup c m t r o l and monitor subsystems. mode of operation. The monitor subsystem provides detect i o n of f a i l u r e s ard automatic switching of t h e control system t o a s a f e The J e t Engine Attitude Control system c o n s i s t s of weight/drag, gimbal hydraulic and j e t engine instrumentation subsystems. The Lunar Simulation system c o n s i s t s of drag compensation, thrust/weight c o n t r o l , j e t s t a b i l i z a t i o n and a u t o t h r o t t l e e l e c t r o n i c subsystems. t h r e e major systems.
b r i e f f u n c t i o n a l a n a l y s i s i s provided f o r t h e subsystems included i n t h e
11-5.
The major equipment included i n t h e avionics systems i s t h e
A t t i t u d e .Control system
Prtmary Electronics, Attitude Control system
Monitor Electronics, Backup Electronics
Rocket Valve Amplifier and
Power Supply, Drag Compensation u n i t ( f i g u r e 11-I), t h e A t t i t u d e Gyro u n i t ( f i g u r e 11-2), two Rate Gyro Triads ( f i g u r e 11-3),two Accelerometer Report No. 7260-954002 11-1
F i g u r e 11-1. A v i o n i c s P r i m a r y , M o n i t o r , Eackup and Drag Compensation E l e c t r o n i c s
Report No.
7260-954002
11-3
11-4
Report KO. 7260-954rX@
T r i a d s ( f i g u r e 11-4) and two Gimbal Hydraulic Actuator servo u n i t s ( p i t c h and r o l l ) . See f i g u r e 11-5. The a s s o c i a t e d equipment and components r e q u i r e d f o r a t t i t u d e b o n t r o l a r e miscellaneous s w i t c h e s and s o l e n o i d s , synchro p i c k o f f s , t h e a u t o t h r o t t l e c o n t r o l , 800-hertz i n v e r t e r . The A t t i t u d e Control Assembly (hand c o n t r o l l e r - s e e f i g u r e 1-20) p r o v i d e s f i r i n g c o n t r o l of t h e a t t i t u d e r o c k e t s , through t h e a v i o n i c s system, i n o r d e r t o maintain v e h i c l e a t t i t u d e i n t h e p i t c h , r o l l and yaw axes a s r e q u i r e d . The r o t a t i o n a l , 3-axes a t t i t u d e hand c o n t r o l l e r i s GFE and i s manufactured by Honeywell f o r Grumman A i r c r a f t Corporation. r Grumman ~ i r c r a f t e p o r t Design Control S p e c i f i c a t i o n f o r Guidance, Navigation, and Control Subsystem A t t i t u d e C o n t r o l l e r Assembly, Number LSP-300-lgB, d a t e d 1 November 1966, d e t a i l s t h e performance requirements The LLTV See B e l l s i x Pulse D i r e c t s w i t c h e s , a and q u a l i t y assurance p r o v i s i o n s imposed on t h e manufacturer. i n s t a l l a t i o n u s e s t h r e e Detent s w i t c h e s , drawings 7260-541503 and 7 260-541006.
DC.
Gimbal Lock s w i t c h , and t h r e e 800-hertz l i n e a r t r a n s d u c e r s .
The Detent switches (d .p. d. t ) a r e normally open, capable of The l i n e a r transducer
a r e normally open, capable of switching 500 milliamperes a t 28 v o l t s , The P u l s e D i r e c t switches (d.p.d.t.) switching 1 ampere a t 28 v o l t s , DC. The Gimbal Lock switch ( s . p . s . t . )
i s capable of switching 2 amperes a t 28 v o l t s , DC.

cal grip rotation.
(syncro) h a s a nominal range of 2 . 8 v o l t s , rms, f o r 10 degrees of physiThe output of t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r i s r o u t e d t o t h e The hand a v i o n i c s system t o provide i n p u t t o t h e v a r i o u s channels. t o p l a c e t h e a v i o n i c s system i n
c o n t r o l l e r , when moved by t h e p i l o t a g a i n s t a h a r d s t o p , a c t i v a t e s r e l a y s
Rate -no Model c o n f i g u r a t i o n and r e s u l t s i n f i r i n g of both s e t s of r o c k e t s . The .HARDOVER i n d i c a t o r i s

illuminated. The a v i o n i c s system a l s o , e i t h e r c o n t r o l s o r r e c e i v e s an The f l i g h t i n s t r u i n p u t from o t h e r cockpit i n d i c a t o r s and instruments.
ments a r e t h e A t t i t u d e I n d i c a t o r (3-axes b a l l ) , t h e H 0 Remaining 2 2 I h I n d i c a t o r , and t h e ~ h r u s t / ~ e i ~n dti c a t o r . The annunciator p a n e l warni n g i n d i c a t o r s a s s o c i a t e d w i t h a v i o n i c s a r e t h e AUTO THROTTLE, LOCAL AV UO VERTICAL MODE, ENGINE MAX TILT, STABILIZATION MODE, V L E STUCK, A T Report No. 7260-954002
11-5
PILOT B C U and GYRO FAILURE i n d i c a t o r s . AK P
Refer t o s e c t i o n V I I I f o r Refer t o s e c t i o n V
maintenance i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t h e cockpit instruments.
f o r maintenance i n s t r u c t i o n s on t h e H y d r m l i c Gimbal system.
11-6.
11-7.
VEHICLE ATTITUDE CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS)

The Vehicle A t t i t u d e Control system provides t h e c o n t r o l s i g n a l s t o Tables 11-1 .and 11-2 l i s t t h e The v e h i c l e a t t i t u d e
f i r e t h e 16 a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l r o c k e t s t o produce c o n t r o l moments i n response t o p i l o t commands and/or v e h i c l e motions. b a s i c a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l system c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s . t h e r a t e command mode w i t h a t t i t u d e hold.
c o n t r o l i s normally performed w i t h t h e primary e l e c t r o n i c s o p e r a t i n g i n The mode may be operated w i t h moment compensation (mode 1 ) o r without moment compensation (mode 2 ) . Moment compensation i s s e l e c t e d by a switch i n t h e c o c k p i t , and when s e l e c t e d , it i s a p p l i e d t o t h e p i t c h , r o l l and yaw channels simultaneously. Independent a x i s s e l e c t i o n i s n o t a v a i l a b l e .
11-8.
A monitor comparator compares t h e output of t h e primary e l e c t r o n i c s
channel w i t h t h a t of an e q u i v a l e n t monitor e l e c t r o n i c s channel and when disagreement e x i s t s , t h e comparator a u t o m a t i c a l l y switches c o n t r o l t o t h e r a t e command back up mode (mode 5 ) . comparator f o r each a x i s . There i s a monitor channel and a A e r r o r d e t e c t e d by e i t h e r t h e p i t c h comparator, n
o r t h e r o l l comparator, w i l l switch both p i t c h and r o l l t o t h e r a t e command back up mode simultaneously, s i n c e t h e same a t t i t u d e r o c k e t s c o n t r o l both p i t c h ard r o l l . The yaw comparator o p e r a t e s independently.
11-9.
I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e switching commanded by t h e comparators, c o n t r o l
w i l l be switched a u t o m a t i c a l l y t o t h e r a t e command back up mode i f t h e primary r a t e gyros e x h i b i t an excess r a t e such a s , i f t h e power supply t o t h e primary r a t e gyro p i c k - o f f s f a i l s , i f t h e primary AC o r DC power s u p p l i e s f a i l , and i f t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r malfunction d e t e c t o r d e t e c t s a
11-6
Report No. 7260-954002
Figure 11-4.
Avionics System Accelerometer Triad
11-8
Report No.
7260-954602
f a i l u r e of t h e function d i r e c t switches i n t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r ( s e e desc r i p t i o n of modes 3 and 4 t h a t follows). Again, p i t c h and r o l l channels a r e switched simultaneously and yaw separately. 11-10. The p i l o t may s e l e c t t h e r a t e command back up mode manually by a switch i n t h e cockpit. simultaneously. I n t h i s case, a l l t h r e e axes a r e s e l e c t e d However, t h e r a t e command back up mode does n o t possess
an a t t i t u d e hold c a p a b i l i t y , or moment compensation.
11-11. I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e r a t e command modes (modes 1, 2 and

axes.
5) already
described, primary d i r e c t command i s a v a i l a b l e i n each of t h e t h r e e The mode i s intended f o r use a s an emergency back up system, but may be s e l e c t e d manually by t h e p i l o t f o r f a m i l i a r i z a t i o n with t h e mode. Axes may.be s e l e c t e d independently by A t t i t u d e Control Mode switches located above t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r . Three-axes moment compensation may be s e l e c t e d with t h i s mode by a c t u a t i n g t h e cockpit switch, but t h i s configuration (mode 3) i s not used i n p r a c t i c e a s it serves no .useful purpose
11-12. I n t h e primary d i r e c t command mode without model (mode 4), movement of t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r 2 s degrees or more, out of t h e c e n t r a l This vehicle d e t e n t p o s i t i o n , commands a vehicle r a t e of 10.5/sec. detent position.
r a t e w i l l be sustained u n t i l t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r i s returned t o t h e I n p i t c h and r o l l t h e primary d i r e c t command mode has a t t i t u d e hold and r a t e feedback. adjustable. control
It d i f f e r s from t h e primary r a t e command mode only i n t h a t t h e r a t e commanded by t h e p i l o t i s not smoothly

I n yaw t h e r e i s no a t t i t u d e hold when t h e d i r e c t mode i s I n t h e primary d i r e c t command mode,
manually s e l e c t e d by t h e p i l o t .
w i l l automatically be switched t o t h e r a t e command back up mode,
i f t h e primary r a t e gyros e x h i b i t an excess r a t e .
Report No. 7260-954.002
Max Angular Rate Command Adjustable from 0 2 to 20/sec. . Each axis independent, exclusive of Rate Gyro. Same as (1 ) Angular Rate Threshold Drift in Attitude Hold Attitude Threshold Angular Acceleration
Table 11-1. Attitude Control System Characteristics
Mode
1. Primary-Rate Command Adjustable from + loo/ with Attitude Hold sec to +, 200/sec. Each and Model* axis is independent, exclusive - of *Model is portion of Controller Hand moment compensation system
.
N/A N/A
Same as (1)
Average drift Adjustable from Average acceleration . . 5 shall be 0.5O/ 0 3 to 1' Each adjustable from 4 to min for pitch axis independent 12 2 0.50/sec~. See Note 1 and 2 for peak and roll l.25O exclusive of min yaw. These Attitude Gyros. acceleration and Note 3 for conditions for values are max 2 Jet and 4 Jet logic Includes Gyros See Note 4 . as per Note land 2 Same as (1 ) Same as (1)
N/A
10.5@/sec - 5/sec +o. Same as (1) Same as (1) N/A
90 l b Thrusters
38.0 t o L0.1 18.9 t o 20.2 53.8 t o 75.5 27.0 t o 37.8
N/A
N/A
B/A
Same as (1 ) Same as (2) Same as (2)
Same as ( I )
2 Primary-Rate command . with Attitude Holdno Model 3 Primary-Direct with . rate feedback,attitude hold and model 4. Primary-Direct with rate feedback,attitude hold & no model 5 Backup-Rate command . Same as (1)
Peak Acceleration '/see2 (both s e t s of t h r u s t e r s std. and t e s t ) . (one s e t of t h r u s t e r std. o r t e s t )
-L
NOTES:
1.
Axis
60 l b Thrusters
Pitch
25.3 t o 26.9 12.6 t o 13.5
Roll
.. ........ (both s e t s of t h r u s t e r s std. and t e s t ) . . . . . . (one s e t of t h r u s t e r s std. or t e s t ) . . . . . . . .

22.8 t o 27.5 7.74 t o 11.6 15.' t o 18.3
Yaw
'2 w
.. .. 35.8 t o 50.3 . . 18.0 t o 25.2 . . 15.2 t o 18.3 . . 5.15 t o 6.28 . .

(both s e t s of thrusters sM. and t e s t ) (std. s e t of t h r u s t e r s ) . ( t e s t s e t of t h r u s t e r s ) .
10.0 t o '2.2
..
...... ............. .............
c +
Z 0
2.
peaks given Peak accelerations shown f o r both s e t s of 60 and 90 lb. thrusters. For other sized t h r u s t e r s , T lbs/thruster, m ~ l t i p l y f o r 90 l b . f o r both s e t s b y q w h e r e both s e t s a r e used or by 2 where one s e t i s used. 90 180
3.
IU
0 \
When model i s used i n the r a t e command mode t h e system simulates 2 J e t logic when t h e Model r a t e e r r o r i s l e s s than 1 2 O.lo/sec. Average accelerations a r e then 112 those l i s t e d above (4 t o 12' sec2 which a r e f o r simulated 4 J e t l o g i c ) . Simulated 4 J e t l o g i c i s I n the Direct Mode only 4 J e t l o g i c i s used. e f f e c t i v e when the model r a t e e r r o r i s greater than 1 2 O.lo/sec.
\b 0
4.
Accuracy t o be met under:
P 0
a.
70'
t o IOO'F
0 IU
b.
20' t o
70F
11-13.
I f a f a i l u r e of a hand c o n t r o l l e r synchro i s diagnosed by t h e
hand c o n t r o l l e r malfunction d e t e c t o r , t h e a x i s concerned w i l l automati c a l l y be switched t o and latched i n t o t h e primary d i r e c t command mode (mode 4). This i s necessary t o prevent t h e p i l o t from attempting t o use e i t h e r of t h e r a t e cominlnd m3des with a fatllty synchro.
I I 14. PRIMARY ATTITUDE C N R L SUBSYSTEM OTO
11-15, The primary a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l subsystem.is normally used f o r an

e n t i r e mission (including lunar simulation phase). f i g u r e 11-49. 11-16. PRIMARY-RATE COMMAND WITH ATTITUDE H L (MODE OD 2) A component block diagram of t h e primary control system f o r a t y p i c a l channel i s shown i n
- In
t h i s mode,
a vehicle angular r a t e i s commanded proportional t o s t i c k d e f l e c t i o n when t h e s t i c k d e f l e c t i o n exceeds t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r deadband of approximately
t 1.5
degrees,
A t t i t u d e hold i s engaged whenever t h e s t i c k
i s i n t h e d e t e n t p o s i t i o n and t h e vehicle r a t e i s l e s s than t h e r a t e

switching value (adjustable from 1 t o 3 degrees second). When operating i n a t t i t u d e hold, t h e vehicle a t t i t u d e i s maintained with an average d r i f t l e s s than minute i n yaw. degree per minute i n p i t c h and 8 degrees per When above There i s no option given t h e p i l o t f o r engaging o r d i s -
engaging t h e a t t i t u d e hold f e a t u r e i n primary r a t e command. primary r a t e command.
conditions a r e met t h e a t t i t u d e hold f e a t u r e i s always present i n t h e
11-17. PRIMARY DIRECT COMMAND (ON/OFFMODE^
- When t h e hand
controller i s
moved 2$ degrees o r more, i n any d i r e c t i o n , t h e a t t i t u d e rockets w i l l f i r e u n t i l t h e vehicle r a t e i s 10.5~/sec. The vehicle angular accelerat i o n s depend upon t h e number of rockets f i r e d and t h e rocket t h r u s t l e v e l s (ground adjusted)
Refer t o t a b l e 11-1 f o r accelerations a v a i l a b l e
i n p i t c h , r o l l , and yaw.
When t h e c o n t r o l l e r i s r e t u r n e d t o t h e n e u t r a l There
p o s i t i o n , t h e v e h i c l e r a t e w i l l r e t u r n t o z e r o , and t h e a t t i t u d e hold c i r c u i t s w i l l h o l d t h e v e h i c l e a t t i t u d e c o n s t a n t i n p i t c h and r o l l .
i s n o a t t i t u d e h o l d i n yaw.
11-18. M M N COMPENSATION (MODEL)- When t h i s p o r t i o n of t h e system i s O ET

engaged, t h e e l e c t r o n i c model w i l l command a p r e s e t (ground a d j u s t e d ) v e h i c l e a n g u l a r a c c e l e r a t i o n i n each a x i s i n response t o p i l o t commands r e g a r d l e s s of r o c k e t t h r u s t e r s e t t i n g . t o controller deflection. command by p i l o t . When t h e system i s o p e r a t i n g i n t h e primary r a t e command mode, an angular r a t e i s commanded p r o p o r t i o n a l The e l e c t r o n i c model w i l l correspondingly command a p r e s e t a n g u l a r a c c e l e r a t i o n command t o a c q u i r e t h e d e s i r e d r a t e
11-19, ROCKET THRUSTER LOGIC
The a t t i t u d e r o c k e t engines f i r e i n an Two s e t s of E i t h e r one o r For i n d i v i d a u l
on/off manner according t o t h e l o g i c shown i n f i g u r e 11-6.
8 c o n t r o l r o c k e t s each ( t e s t and s t a n d a r d ) a r e provided.

both s e t s may b e s e l e c t e d t o f i r e t o provide redundancy.
p i t c h , r o l l , o r yaw commands, t h e system w i l l f i r e two r o c k e t s i f t h e s t a n d a r d o r t e s t s e t i s s e l e c t e d , o r f o u r r o c k e t s i f both s e t s a r e chosen. For combined p i t c h and r o l l commands, however, only one r o c k e t w i l l f i r e i f t h e standard o r t e s t i s s e l e c t e d , o r two r o c k e t s i f both s e t s a r e chosen. The i s a u t o m a t i c a l l y c o n t r o l l e d by t h e opposing r o c k e t i n h i b i t The l o g i c , which p r e v e n t s opposing r o c k e t s from f i r i n g a t t h e same time. l o s s of c o n t r o l i n a n o t h e r a x i s . For example, i f , w i t h t e s t r o c k e t s
AT w i l l
system i s a l s o designed s o a l a r g e command i n one a x i s does n o t r e s u l t i n s e l e c t e d , a s m a l l r o l l r i g h t command i s added t o a l a r g e p i t c h up command, only r o c k e t AT s h a l l f i r e when t h e r o l l t h r e s h o l d i s exceeded. threshold. continue t o f i r e u n t i l t h e small r o l l e r r o r i s reduced t o w i t h i n t h e r o l l
DT w i l l t h e n f i r e along w i t h AT u n t i l . t h e p i t c h e r r o r i s w i t h i n
S i m i l a r s i t u a t i o n s e x i s t f o r o t h e r combined commands.
t h e p i t c h threshold. ( s e e f i g u r e 11-6. ) 11-12
Report No. 7260-954002
[U
in.
i
Rockets with s u b s c r i p t S denote standard r o c k e t s f i r e . Rockets w i t h s u b s c r i p t T denote t e s t r o c k e t s f i r e . For dual-system operation, both standard and t e s t r o c k e t s f i r e .
Figure 11-6. Attitude Control-Rocket Firing Logic
Report No. 7260-954002
11-20.
PRIMARY ELECTRONICS B O K DIAGRAM ANALYSIS LC
The s t a g e s used i n t h e
p i t c h , r o l l , and yaw a t t i t u d e channels a r e very s i m i l a r i f n o t i d e n t i c a l .

A block diagram a n a l y s i s ( s e e f i g u r e 11-49) i s presented f o r a t y p i c a l
channel i n o r d e r t o minimize r e p e t i t i o n . an a n a l y s i s i s presented.
I n a r e a s .of s i g n i f i c a n t v a r i a t i o n ,
11-21. The i n i t i a l a n a l y s i s assumes a s e l e c t i o n of a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l mode i n r a t e w i t h model and f o r r e f e r e n c e t h e p i t c h channel i s described. r a t e command c i r c u i t i n t h e primary and monitor subsystems. amplifier w i l l saturate.
If t h e AC
A n
800-hertz, AC s i g n a l from t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r synchro i s applied t o t h e s i g n a l v o l t a g e i s g r e a t e r t h a n 2.8 vrms (20 degrees p e r second), t h e The r a t e command c i r c u i t converts t h e AC s i p n a l
by a m p l i f i c a t i o n , demodulation, f i l t e r i n g and a m p l i f i c a t i o n t o a DC s i g n a l .
A t maximum command (20 degrees p e r second), t h i s should be 10 v o l t s DC. 11-22. The output of t h e r a t e command c i r c u i t i s applied through t h e deenergized c o n t a c t s of K ~ ct o t h e r a t e model and model l e a d c i r c u i t s . The r a t e model c i r c u i t g e n e r a t e s a s i g n a l w i t h an a d j u s t a b l e l i n e a r r a t e of change ( a c c e l e r a t i o n ) , which i s used t o f o r c e t h e v e h i c l e r a t e change t o t h e same magnitude. outputs. The a t t i t u d e rocket system, through t h e r a t e feedback p a t h attempts t o c r e a t e zero d i f f e r e n c e between t h e model and r a t e gyro The model l e a d c i r c u i t provides a r o c k e t command pulse i n advance This l a g would occur, without a l e a d c i r c u i t , of t h e r a t e model s i g n a l , t h u s preventing a f e e l i n g of l a g between p i l o t ' s command and r o c k e t f i r i n g . s i n c e t h e r a t e model a m p l i f i e r ' s output i s of a ramp form and must i n t e g r a t e up t o t h e t h r e s h o l d magnitude before providing a r o c k e t f i r i n g command. For r a t e with model operation, r e l a y K i s a l s o de-enerpized, and 7 Under no model conditions, t h e r a t e t h e r a t e model and model l e a d outputs a r e applied t o t h e threshold amplif i e r through a summing network. summing network. command s i g n a l i s a p p l i e d d i r e c t l y t o t h e t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r through t h e
Report No. 7260-954002
11-23. A s e l e c t i o n of a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l mode t o d i r e c t w i t h model e n e r g i z e s
K 6 and r o u t e s t h e output from t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r d i r e c t s w i t c h e s t o t h e d i r e c t model c i r c u i t . Relay K7, being de-energized, r o u t e s t h i s output
t o t h e n e g a t i v e i n p u t s i d e of t h e same i n t e g r a t o r a m p l i f i e r t h a t i s used i n t h e r a t e model c i r c u i t . However, a feedback loop i s n o t employed around t h e model. This d i f f e r e n c e e n a b l e s t h e model i n t e g r a t o r t o have a memory and m a i n t a i n a n output a f t e r t h e 3-axes hand c o n t r o l l e r s i g n a l h a s r e t u r n e d t o zero. This allows t h e v e h i c l e t o s i m u l a t e a zero aerodynamic The mode i s n o t normally used. f r i c t i o n o r damping environment, and hence maintain a f i x e d r a t e a f t e r r e c e i v i n g a ' p u l s e d i r e c t command.
11-24, A p i t c h r a t e NO-hertz, AC s i g n a l from t h e primary r a t e gyro i s a p p l i e d t o t h e r a t e gyro feedback c i r c u i t s i n t h e primary and monitor subsystems. This s i g n a l i s nominally 3.0 vrms f o r a 20 degree p e r The r a t e O r o feedback c i r c u i t s convert t h e
AC s a t u r a t e s t h e
second p i t c h r a t e change. 10 v o l t s DC. amplifier.
AC s i g n a l by demodulation, f i l t e r i n g , and a m p l i f i c a t i o n t o a maximum
An i n p u t g r e a t e r t h a n 3.0 v o l t s
The r a t e gyro feedback output s i g n a l i s routed t o t h e t h r e s h -
old amplifier input. 11-25. The a t t i t u d e gyro, w i t h synchro p i c k o f f s , provides a 400-hertz, AC s i g n a l t o t h e a t t i t u d e gyro feedback c i r c u i t and t h e 3-axes a t t i t u d e indicator. degree. Refer t o s e c t i o n V I I I f o r maintenance i n s t r u c t i o n s on t h e The AC s i g n a l i s nominally 206 m i l l i v o l t s RMS p e r attitude indicator. amplification. i n g functions:
The AC s i g n a l i s converted t o DC by demodulation, f i l t e r i n g and This DC s i g n a l i s a p p l i e d t o t h e a t t i t u d e hold and The a t t i t u d e hold and synchronizer h a s t h e follow(1) maintains an a t t i t u d e r e f e r e n c e and computes t h e
synchronizer c i r c u i t .
v e h i c l e a t t i t u d e e r r o r during a t t i t u d e hold (no p i l o t commands) p e r i o d s , ( 2 ) u p d a t e s t h e a t t i t u d e r e f e r e n c e d u r i n g a command maneuver, ana (3) e s t a b l i s h e s t h e r a t i o of r a t e t o a t t i t u d e e r r o r feedback s i g n a l s which c o n t r o l s t h e a t t i t u d e r o c k e t f i n n g commands. Report No. 7260-954002
11-15
11-26.
Dependent upon t h e a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l mode s e l e c t e d , t h e a p p r o p r i a t e
s i ~ n a l s r e routed t o t h e threshold amplifier c i r c u i t r y . a
All s i g n a l s ,
e x c e p t d i r e c t w i t h no model s i g n a l s , a r e a p p l i e d t o a r e s i s t i v e summing network and t h e n t o t h e t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r . I n t h e d i r e c t no model mode (mode 4), t h e o u t p u t of t h e Function D i r e c t switches i s a p p l i e d , a f t e r a t t e n u a t i o n , t o t h e non-inverting i n p u t of t h e t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r . t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r c i r c u i t f u n c t i o n s a s a summing a m p l i f i e r f o r t h e v a r i o u s c o n t r o l s i g n a l s and c r e a t e s a deadzone o r t h r e s h o l d f o r t h e a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l system. The i n v e r t e r c i r c u i t converts a n e g a t i v e 10-volts To ensure t h a t both t h e primary and monitor
DC o u t p u t from t h e t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r t o a p o s i t i v e 10-volts DC, which i s
The
applied t o the rocket logic.
t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r s switch t o g e t h e r , an a s s i s t c i r c u i t f e e d s a s i g n a l from t h e primary t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r ' s output t o t h e p o s i t i v e i n p u t of t h e monitor channel t h r e s h o l a a m p l i f i e r . 11-27. The r o l l primary e l e c t r o n i c s c i r c u i t r y i s i d e n t i c a l to t h e p i t c h The o u t p u t s of These c i r c u i t s
a x i s c i r c u i t r y s o f a r a s t h e r a t e D r o , a t t i t u d e gyro, model c i r c u i t , t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r , and i n v o l v e r a m p l i f i e r a r e concerned. t h e p i t c h and r o l l "opposing r o c k e t i n h i b i t " l o r i c c i r c u i t s . prevent two opposing r o c k e t s from f i r i n g simultaneously. t h e p i t c h and r o l l (primary) t h r e s h o l d i n v e r t e r a m p l i f i e r s a r e a p p l i e d t o This i s n e c e s s a r y
s i n c e t h e r o c k e t s a r e mounted on diagonal c o r n e r s of t h e v e h i c l e and i f more t h a n two r o c k e t s f i r e a t a time, t h e y c a n c e l one another's moments, w h i l e consuming more f u e l . amplifier. The outputs from t h e p i t c h and r o l l "opposing r o c k e t i n h i b i t w l o g i c c i r c u i t s a r e routed t o t h e c o r r e c t j e t r o c k e t power
A p a i r of r o c k e t s (one s e t s e l e c t e d
t e s t o r standard) a r e
always f i r e d f o r a s i n g l e a x i s maneuver and only one r o c k e t - d u r i n g a combined p i t c h / r o l l maneuver. There a r e 16 r o c k e t solenoid d r i v i n g The r o c k e t f i r i n g s i g n a l s a r e The r o c k e t a m p l i f i e r s , each c o n s i s t i n g of a p r e - a m p l i f i e r and a power a m p l i f i e r , which a r e connected a s a d a r l i n g t o n a m p l i f i e r . t h e n f e d through a p p r o p r i a t e r e l a y c o n t a c t s t o t h e r o c k e t s .
11-16
Report No. 7260-954002
f i r i n g s i g n a l s a r e a l s o routed t o t h e comparator i n t h e monitor e l e c t r o n i c s subsystem. 11-28. The yaw a t t i t u d e channel c i r c u i t s a r e s i m i l a r i n o p e r a t i o n t o t h e The exceptions a r e t h e yaw r a t e gyro and yaw The yaw r a t e gyro s i g n a l i s a p p l i e d t o s t a g e s However, t h e yaw r a t e switching
p i t c h and r o l l channels. a t t i t u d e gyro c i r c u i t s .
s i m i l a r t o t h e p i t c h and r o l l channels. yaw primary e l e c t r o n i c s .
c i r c u i t s and 2 - j e t / & - j e t l o g i c c i r c u i t s a r e p h y s i c a l l y l o c a t e d with t h e I n a d d i t i o n t h e yaw r a t e . gyro feedback c i r c u i t

(1) computes t h e v e h i c l e
output s i g n a l i s a p p l i e d t o a yaw a t t i t u d e hoid and synchronizer c i r c u i t . This c i r c u i t has t h e following f u n c t i o n s : a t t i t u d e e r r o r d u r i n g a t t i t u d e hold (no p i l o t commands) p e r i o d s ,
( 2 ) r e s e t s t h e a t t i t u d e e r r o r t o zero during a commanded maneuver and
(3) e s t a b l i s h e s t h e r a t i o r a t e t o a t t i t u d e e r r o r feedback s i g n a l which

c o n t r o l s t h e a t t i t u d e r o c k e t f i r i n g commands. The yaw r a t e gyro feedback s i g n a l and t h e a t t i t u d e hold and synchronizer s i g n a l i s a p p l i e d t o t h e yaw t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r through a r e s i s t i v e summing network. 11-29. The yaw a t t i t u d e gyro s i g n a l i s used p r i m a r i l y f o r instrumentaThe s i g n a l i s a p p l i e d t o See
t i o n and does n o t f e e d back a s i g n a l t o c o n t r o l r o c k e t f i r i n g s o r a t t i t u d e hold a s does t h e p i t c h and r o l l a t t i t u d e gyro. a c o n t r o l d i f f e r e n t i a l transformer i n t h e cockpit which allows t h e p i l o t t o set t h e d e s i r e d heading on t h e 3-axes a t t i t u d e i n d i c a t o r . f i g u r e 8-9.
11-30.
The a t t i t u d e yaw gyro synchronizer r a t e switching c i r c u i t monitors The r e l a y con-
t h e r a t e gyro output and e n e r g i z e s a switching r e l a y whenever t h e r a t e exceeds a p r e s e t q u a n t i t y of 1 t o 3 degrees p e r second. t a c t s enable t h e a t t i t u d e synchronizer t o update i t s a t t i t u d e r e f e r e n c e .
Report No. 7260-954002
11-31.
The 2- j e t / & - j e t switching c i r c u i t i s designed t o energize r e l a y
K 1 , whenever t h e a b s o l u t e value of t h e d i f f e r e n c e between t h e synchro

(hand c o n t r o l l e r ) command and t h e nodel output i s g r e a t e r t h a n approximately I degree p e r second. BACKUP ATTITUDE CONTROL SUBSYSTEM (MODE 5)
11-33.
tion.
The e l e c t r o n i c system provides a r a t e backup c o n t r o l system. The backup system c o n t a i n s s e p a r a t e w i r i n g , independent power
In
t h i s mode v e h i c l e a n g u l a r r a t e s a r e commanded p r o p o r t i o n a l t o s t i c k d e f l e c s u p p l i e s , and r a t e gyros. primary system. a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l system. The system employs t h e same r o c k e t s used by t h e The backup system should only be used in t h e The backup system i s n o t
F i g u r e 11-49 provides a block diagram of t h e backup
event of a malfunction i n t h e primary system.
checked by t h e monitor comparator subsystem and t h e r e i s no p r o v i s i o n f o r automatic ( e l e c t r o n i c ) switching from backup t o primary in t h e event of malfunction i n t h e backup system. backup mode i s o p e r a t i n g p r o p e r l y . t o backup mode. I f necessary, t h e p i l o t may s e l e c t t h e The AUTO PILOT BACK U warning i n d i c a P backup mode f o r a s h o r t p e r i o d of time, however, t o determine t h a t t h e t o r i l l u m i n a t e s when t h e ACS i s e i t h e r a u t o m a t i c a l l y o r manually switched
11-34.
BACKUP EUCTRONICS A S B O K DIAGRAM ANALYSIS C LC
The p i t c h , r o l l ,
and yaw backup e l e c t r o n i c s ACS c i r c u i t s a r e i d e n t i c a l , t h e r e f o r e only t h e p i t c h channel i s d i s c u s s e d . r a t e command c i r c u i t . The same s i g n a l from t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r synchro t h a t i s used f o r t h e primary e l e c t r o n i c s i s routed t o t h e backup
A s e p a r a t e backup p i t c h r a t e gyro f e e d s a s i g n a l t o
t h e r a t e gyro feedback c i r c u i t and a p i t c h r a t e gyro excess r a t e d e t e c t o r . The backup e l e c t r o n i c s does n o t have a model (moment compensation) f e a t u r e . The o p e r a t i o n of t h e c i r c u i t r y f o r t h e r a t e command, r a t e gyro feedback, t h r e s h o l d and i n v e r t e r a m p l i f i e r s and t h e r o c k e t a m p l i f i e r s i s the same a s
Report No. 7260-954002
f o r t h e equivalent c i r c u i t s i n t h e primary e l e c t r o n i c s .
0
The same rockets
a r e used by r e l a y switching action.
11-35.
The gyro excess r a t e d e t e c t o r monitors t h e output of t h e r a t e gyro The 400-hertz, AC r a t e gyro s i g n a l i s r e c t i f i e d , f i l t e r e d and A excessive r a t e t r i g g e r s t h i s stage which energin
and energizes an emergency r e l a y whenever t h e r a t e exceeds a p r e s e t quantity. amplified, which provides an AC s i g n a l t o a t r i g g e r a m p l i f i e r , which has a p r e s e t threshold. cockpit. z e s t h e emergency r e l a y and i l l u m i n a t e s t h e BU GYRO FAIL i n d i c a t o r i n t h e
11-36.
MONITOR SUBSYSTEM
Monitor comparator, excess r a t e , and hand c o n t r o l l e r malfunction These a r e autoTable 11-2
11-37.
d e t e c t i o n c i r c u i t s a r e used t o monitor operation of t h e primary-rate and primary-direct a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l modes ( f i g u r e 11-49). summarizes t h e l o g i c of t h e d e t e c t i o n c i r c u i t s . m a t i c a l l y engaged whenever t h e A S primary system i s s e l e c t e d . C
11-38.
MONITOR C M A A O O PRTR
A " e l e c t r o n i c equivalent of t h e primary n
mode electronic^^^ ( a l s o r e f e r r e d t o a s t h e monitor channel e l e c t r o n i c s ) ( s e e f i g u r e 11-49), generates equivalent rocket f i r i n g s i g n a l s i n t h e same manner a s t h e primary e l e c t r o n i c s . The primary and monitor s i g n a l s When t h e monitor comparator a r e both applied t o t h e monitor canparator.
determines t h a t disagreement e x i s t s between t h e primary and monitor channels i n any a x i s , t h e monitor automatically switches t h e e l e c t r o n i c s t o t h e r a t e backup mode. Switching i s accomplished within 0.5 seconds. P i t c h ard r o l l a r e switched t o g e t h e r , and yaw i s switched separately.
A f a i l u r e matrix has been generated f o r t h e conditions which t h e monitor

comparator has t o s a t i s f y . From t h i s f a i l u r e matrix, t h e l o g i c equation The l o g i c required t o s a t i s f y t h e f a i l u r e matrix has been e s t a b l i s h e d .
Report No. 7260-954002
11-19
a'S A crl
G
0
0-2
I+
g -2
a
5 a ,
d t 4 d Z 1 4 d d d
D D S O 0 0 C 5 0 Q Q Q Z E E E P :
d d d d
3 3 5 s
Q Q Q Q
52
X X X X
X X
t-4
a
C,
a ,
rn
a
k
a a
: -- E
k
S
3
4
X X X X X o X X X o
X X
'E z
E
0
X X O
c3 d Ex . o
a,
&%
C,
2 'z .,+
4
a, -2 a 0
2 s
t-4
X X
a ,
a,
k
d 2 g .,+
&
6 c5 c5 c5 d d d d i d d d d. d. d. d. $ $ " " k * A 3 3 & Z & n a a a a

.4
.r( .r( .r(
d d
&
m * m m
. ~
.4 ,
.
6 6
.,+
k ~
60 a
'"
444 m m m m 4444 3% 3+' i i i K $ $ E E g g i i i a 0

. d
C ,
C ,
Q N
0
0
.r(
a ,
C,
C(
a, 0 %U
-Q)
~ > ; g g m m 4 4 4 4 ~ 4 4 4 4 2 r * d $ i i i i % i i i i E+
I n
d
k
cd
& N
P:
$ 8
m m
X
0 G U
a d
4 N ~ V U 3 W F
b,
c
d
d
d
~
d
Report No. 7260-954002
e q u a t i o n h a s been implemented i n t o a c t i v e c i r c u i t r y i n t h e monitor comparator.
11-39.
EXCESS RATE DETECTION CIRCUITRY
The excess r a t e d e t e c t i o n These f u n c t i o n s ,
c i r c u i t r y p r o v i d e s automatic switching and c o c k p i t d i s p l a y s which funct i o n a s i n d i c a t e d by t h e primary o r backup r a t e gyro. a c c o r d i n g t o o p e r a t i n g c o n d i t i o n , i n c l u d e t h e following:

A.
With t h e system o p e r a t i n g i n t h e r a t e command mode with o r w i t h o u t model, i f t h e primary r a t e gyro i n d i c a t e s a v e h i c l e r a t e of 25 illuminated.
1/sec, t h e system i s a u t o m a t i c a l l y switched
P t o r a t e backup and t h e AUTO PILOT BACK' U i n d i c a t o r i s
B With t h e system o p e r a t i n g i n t h e d i r e c t mode w i t h model, i f .

t h e primary r a t e gyro i n d i c a t e s a v e h i c l e r a t e of 25
AUTO PILOT BACK U i n d i c a t o r i s i l l u m i n a t e d . P f 1/sec,
t h e system i s a u t o m a t i c a l l y switched t o r a t e backup and t h e
C.
With t h e system o p e r a t i n g i n t h e d i r e c t mode w i t h no model, i f t h e primary r a t e gyro i n d i c a t e s a v e h i c l e r a t e of 25 2 l o / s e c , t h e system i s a u t o m a t i c a l l y switched t o r a t e P backup and t h e AUTO PILOT BACK U i n d i c a t o r i s i l l u m i n a t e d .
D.
I n a l l modes, i f t h e backup r a t e gyro i n d i c a t e s a v e h i c l e U r a t e of 22O/sec, t h e B GYRO FAIL i n d i c a t o r i l l u m i n a t e s . The e x c e s s r a t e d e t e c t i o n c i r c u i t r y f o r a l l channels i s s i m i l a r t o t h a t d i s c u s s e d i n paragraph 11-29 ( s e e f i g u r e 11-35).
11-4-0. HAND CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION DETECTION CIRCUITRY

(2) d i r e c t function. are:
The hand c o n t r o l -
l e r o p e r a t e s a synchro and two d i r e c t switches: (1) l o g i c d i r e c t and The c o n d i t i o n s where hand c o n t r o l l e r malfunctions may be encountered and t h e a s s o c i a t e d e f f e c t s , switching and i n d i c a t i o n s ,
Report No. 7260-954002
11-21
A.
Open Synchro
- With
t h e system i n t h e r a t e command mode with o r
without t h e model, i f t h e l o g i c d i r e c t switch i s actuated and g t h e ~ o r r e ~ s p o n d i nsynchro output i s not p r e s e n t , . t h e system automatically switches t o t h e primary-direct model(no model)
as an emergency mode and t h e AUTO P I L O T BACK U P i n d i c a t o r

illuminates.
B.
Hardover Synchro
With t h e system i n t h e r a t e command'mode
with o r without model, i f a synchro output e x i s t s which i s g r e a t e r than t h a t equivalent t o t h e l o g i c d i r e c t switch posit i o n and t h e d i r e c t function switch has not been actuated, t h e system automatically switches t o t h e primam d i r e c t mode (no model) a s an emergency mode and t h e AUTO P I L O T BACK U P indicat o r illuminates. As i n open synchro ( I ) , t h e monitor comparaSwitching i s t o r ,t a k e s precedence over t h i s c i r c u i t r y . accomplished within 0.5 seconds.
C.
D i r e c t (LDS) Switch F a i l u r e
- With
t h e system i n a r a t e mode, The p i l o t can s t i l l
i f e i t h e r d i r e c t switch f a i l s , t h e automatic switching t o primary d i r e c t mode w i l l be i n h i b i t e d . manually s e l e c t t h e primary d i r e c t mode, but i f he does, t h e system w i l l automatically switch t o r a t e backup and t h e AUTO
P I L O T BACK U P i n d i c a t o r w i l l i l l u m i n a t e . D.
Direct (FDs) Function Switch F a i l u r e
- With
t h e system i n t h e
d i r e c t mode with o r without model, i f t h e d i r e c t function switch f a i l s , t h e system automatically switches t o r a t e backup and t h e AUTO PILOT BACK U P i n d i c a t o r illuminates. accomplished within 0.3 seconds. Switching i s This w i l l not happen i f t h e
hand c o n t r o l l e r has been d e f l e c t e d more than 4.5 degrees.
Report No. 7260-954002
11-41.
PRIMARY RESET SWITCH
I n t h e event t h e monitor comparator sub-
system a u t o m a t i c a l l y switches t h e ACS from primary t o r a t e backup a s a r e s u l t of s p u r i o u s s i g n a l s emitted by e i t h e r t h e primary o r monitor channel b u t i n f a c t t h e two systems a r e o p e r a t i n g s a t i s f a c t o r i l y , t h e p i l o t i s a b l e , w i t h Moment Compensation swithc OFF, t o . manually switch t h e ACS from backup t o primary by momentarily a c t u a t i n g t h e AFCS Primary Reset s w i t c h on t h e l e f t console. Caution must be e x e r c i s e d i n t h e use of During normal operat h e AFCS Primary Reset switch, inasmuch a s t h e p i l o t cannot be completely s u r e t h a t t h e primary system i s working properly. t i o n r e s e t w i l l be attempted on t h e ground. 11-42. VALVE STUCK WARNING
Rocket chamber p r e s s u r e t r a n s d u c e r s s e r v e The c i r c u i t monitors t h e r o c k e t s Simultaneous f i r i n g of any
a s s e n s o r s f o r t h e s t u c k valve c i r c u i t .
t o determine i f opposing r o c k e t s a r e f i r i n g .
of t h e p a i r s of r o c k e t combinations would imply a stuck-open valve.
11-43.
MONITOR ELECTRONICS B O K DIAGRAM ANALYSIS LC
A s the r o l l , pitch,
and yaw a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l s channels a r e very s i m i l a r and i n some i n s t a n c e s a r e i d e n t i c a l , only one channel w i l l be discussed. Circuits s i m i l a r t o t h e gyro excess r a t e monitor, t h e r a t e switching and
2- j e t / & - j e t c i r c u i t s a r e discussed i n paragraphs 11-30, 11-31, and
11-35
respectively.
The monitor comparator and hand c o n t r o l l e r malfunction
d e t e c t o r (HCMD). c i r c u i t s a r e a p p l i c a b l e t o primary e l e c t r o n i c s only.
11-44.
The monitor channel comparator c i r c u i t continuously monitors f o u r The f o u r s i g n a l s a r e
s i g n a l s from t h e A S system and determines i f any f a i l u r e has occurred i n C e i t h e r t h e monitor o r primary channel e l e c t r o n i c s . (1) t h e Primary Channel j e t l o g i c output s i g n a l , ( 2 ) t h e Monitor Channel j e t l o g i c o u t p u t s i g n a l , (3) t h e ' Standard Rocket solenoid a m p l i f i e r output s i g n a l (low s i d e of r o c k e t s o l e n o i d ) , and ( 4 ) t h e T e s t r o c k e t solenoid amplifier output signal.
A l l s i g n a l s a r e b i n a r y , b u t t h e two
Report No. 7260-954002
11-23
r o c k e t s o l e n o i d s i g n a l s a r e a t d i f f e r e n t l e v e l s than t h e two j e t l o g i c command s i g n a l s . o n l y two c i r c u i t s . l Each p a i r of ~ i t c h / ~ o rlo c k e t s has a s i m i l a r comparator ll c i r c u i t r e s u l t i n g i n f o u r ~ i t c h / ~ o comparators; whereas yaw r e q u i r e s
If e i t h e r a P i t c h o r R o l l comparator senses a malfunc-
t i o n , t h e system i s switched t o backup i n both t h e P i t c h and R o l l a x i s ; however, a yaw malfunction r e s u l t s i n only t h e yaw a x i s being switched.
11-45.
The hand c o n t r o l l e r malfunction d e t e c t o r (HcMD) i s designed t o
d e t e c t hardover o r open c o n d i t i o n s i n e i t h e r t h e -+axes hand c o n t r o l l e r t s l i n e a r t r a n s f o r m e r ( synchro) o r f u n c t i o n a l d i r e c t switch ( FDS; and switch t h e ACS system ( s i n g l e a x i s ) t o a s a f e backup mode. i n two s e p a r a t e d e t e c t i o n c i r c u i t s , s w i t c h comparator. This i s accomplished by c omparing t h r e e p i e c e s of information ( s i g n a l s ) from t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r One c i r c u i t compares t h e synchro s i g n a l w i t h a Logic d i r e c t switch (LDs) s i g n a l and i s t h e s y n c h r o / d i r e c t The LDS i s t h e same t y p e switch a s t h e FDS, except it The o t h e r c i r c u i t compares t h e two. d i r e c t i s n o t used f o r f i r i n g r o c k e t s o r c o n t r o l l i n g t h e v e h i c l e ; it i s only used i n t h e HCMD l o g i c c i r c u i t s . switch s i g n a l s , LDS and FDS, and i s t h e d i r e c t switch comparator.
11-46.
relay.
The s t u c k v a l v e d e t e c t o r senses when any of e i g h t p a i r s of opposing This i s accomplished by monitoring each of t h e f i v e kilohm a t t i t u d e The output of each "ANDw c i r c u i t i s then "ORtdn i n t o t h e i n p u t Simultaneous f i r i n g of any of t h e following r o c k e t
r o c k e t s a r e f i r i n g , and a f t e r a f i x e d time d e l a y e n e r g i z e s t h e s t u c k valve r o c k e t p r e s s u r e t r a n s d u c e r potentiometers w i t h two i n p u t diode "AND" circuits. of a t r i g g e r c i r c u i t .
combinations would imply a stuck-open valve. Pitch-Roll
Yaw
11-24
Report No. 7260-954.002
I f , f o r example, A
results. firing C
i s s t u c k open, a p i t c h down, r o l l l e f t c o n d i t i o n S To c o u n t e r a c t t h i s , t h e ACS commands a p i t c h up, r o l l r i g h t by Thus, both AS ( s t u c k open) and CS a r e f i r i n g simultaneously, The s t u c k valve c i r c u i t would I n t h e event of a s t u c k valve
so
which i s an i l l e g i t i m a t e f i r i n g command. d e t e c t t h i s a s a s t u c k valve c o n d i t i o n .
i n d i c a t i o n , t h e l o g i c w i l l hold f o r a p e r i o d of approximately
230 m i l l i s e c o n d s before i l l u m i n a t i n g t h e VALVE STUCK i n d i c a t o r i n t h e

cockpit. T h i s allows response time of t h e rocket f i r i n g c o i l s , and p r e v e n t s r o c k e t t h r u s t decay caused by a previous ACS command from f a l s e l y i n d i c a t i n g a s t u c k valve.
11-47.
ACS INSTRUMENTATION
A 3-axes b a l l A t t i t u d e i n d i c a t o r d i s p l a y s
A AUTO PILOT n
v e h i c l e p i t c h , yaw, and r o l l a t t i t u d e s during f l i g h t .
BACKUP r e d warning i n d i c a t o r i l l u m i n a t e s when v e h i c l e A S i s switched t o C a r a t e command backup mode o r l a t c h e d i n t o a primary d i r e c t mode. d e t e c t o r s e n s e s a r a t e i n excess of 25
GYRO FAILURE r e d warning i n d i c a t o r i l l u m i n a t e s when t h e excess r a t e
1/sec from t h e backup r a t e
C gyro. A VALVE STUCK warning i n d i c a t o r t l l u m i n a t e s i f an A S r o c k e t valve i s s t u c k open. The above cockpit i n s t r u m e n t a t i o n i s a l s o recorded by t h e ground s t a t i o n .
11-48. 11-49.
JET ENGINE ATTITUDE CONTROL SYSTEM The j e t engine a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l system performs i n f i v e s e l e c t e d Manual o r Emergency Gimbal Locked, Local V e r t i c a l ,
modes of operation:
Engine Centered, and Lunar Simulation mode ( j e t s t a b i l i z a t i o n )
A simple
block diagram of t h e l a t t e r t h r e e modes i s shown i n f i g u r e 11-7. Table 11-3 l i s t s a l l t h e modes of o p e r a t i o n and r e s p e c t i v e c o n d i t i o n s of use. For f l i g h t s a f e t y , one mode has p r i o r i t y over another. Figure 11-8
i s a block diagram showing major components of weight/drag, j e t s t a b i l i z a t i o n , and a u t o t h r o t t l e e l e c t r o n i c s .
Report No. 7260-954002
M D PRIORITY OE
11-51.
For f l i g h t s a f e t y , t h e modes have t h e f o l l o w i n g p r i o r i t y .
The
Gimbal Lock mode, whether t h e p i l o t o r a u t o m a t i c a l l y s e l e c t e d , o v e r r i d e s a l l o t h e r modes. When t h e v e h i c l e i s on t h e ground o r when t h e j e t e n g i n e d e f l e c t s more t h a n
15 f l o from t h e v e r t i c a l ( i n c l u d i n g i n t h e Lunar SimuI f t h e j e t engine
l a t i o n mode), t h e Local V e r t i c a l mode s h a l l be a u t o m a t i c a l l y a c t u a t e d and o v e r r i d e a l l modes e x c e p t t h e Gimbal Locked mode. d e f l e c t s more t h a n
15 2
lo from Local V e r t i c a l and t h e Local V e r t i c a l mode
i s n o t a u t o m a t i c a l l y s e l e c t e d w i t h i n 0.35 t o 1.0 second, t h e system s h a l l

a u t o m a t i c a l l y s w i t c h t o t h e Emergency Gimbal Locked mode. I f no mode h a s been s e l e c t e d and t h e v e h i c l e i s a i r b o r n e , momentarily d e p r e s s i n g t h e L o c a l V e r t i c a l Release b u t t o n s h a l l p l a c e t h e system i n t h e Engine Centered mode. 11-52. GIMBAL L C M D OK OE I n t h i s mode, t h e j e t engine i s h e l d i n alignment w i t h t h e v e r t i c a l The engine gimbal h y d r a u l i c a c t u a t o r s a r e f i t t e d Under normal c o n d i t i o n s , t h e
11-53.
o r Z a x i s of t h e v e h i c l e .
w i t h p r e s s u r e i n l e t s which, when p r e s s u r i z e d h y d r a u l i c a l l y , cause t h e actuators t o lock i n a c e n t r a l position. mode i s s e l e c t e d by t h e p i l o t by means of a s w i t c h on t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r , and t h e l o c k i n g p r e s s u r e i s s u p p l i e d from t h e h y d r a u l i c pump on t h e j e t engine. The green gimbal l o c k mode i n d i c a t o r becomes i l l u m i n a t e d . I f , when t h e mode i s s e l e c t e d by t h e p i l o t , p r e s s u r e f a i l s t o r i s e
11-54.
i n t h e gimbal l o c k l i n e , t h e n t h e a c t u a t o r gimbal l o c k i n l e t p o r t becomes a u t o m a t i c a l l y p r e s s u r i z e d from an h y d r a u l i c accumulator s o u r c e , charged p r e v i o u s l y w h i l e t h e v e h i c l e was on t h e ground. indicator t o illuminate. This i s t h e emergency gimbal l o c k mode and c a u s e s t h e r e d "emergency gimbals locked'' warning The green mode i n d i c a t o r w i l l n o t e x t i n g u i s h , b u t t h e mode w i l l have been overridden by t h e emergency mode. 11-26 Report No. 7260-954002
11-55.
I f , a t any time, and with t h e Gimbal Lock switch i n e i t h e r
p o s i t i o n , t h e engine hydraulic pressure source drops below .I300 p s i , t h e emergency mode i s actuated and t h e red warning 'indicator illuniinates
11-56.
With t h e Gimbal Lock switch, i n t h e OFF positi.on, i f t h e vehicle
28 vdc normal supply f a i l s , o r i f t h e 115 v o l t 400 H primary AC power f a i l s , then t h e gimbals w i l l lock immediately from t h e engine hydraulic supply and t h e emergency i n d i c a t o r w i l l illuminate. i n t h i s mode; I f t h e f a u l t remains f o r 0.3 second, then a l a t c h i n g r e l a y w i l l cause t h e engine t o remain
11-57.
With t h e Gimbal Lock switch i n t h e OFF position, and t h e angle
between t h e engine a x i s and l o c a l v e r t i c a l remains i n excess of
15 degrees ( 2 1 , . 0 ~ )f o r 0.3 second i n e i t h e r p i t c h o r r o l l , then t h e

gimbals w i l l be locked from t h e engine hydraulic supply and t h e l a t c h i n g r e l a y w i l l close.
11-58.
If t h e j e t engine i s not running when t h e vehicle i s on t h e
ground, pressures w i l l be low and t h e red Emergency Gimbal Lock warning i n d i c a t o r w i l l be illuminated. Since t h i s emergency mode i s latched, A n t h e i n d i c a t o r w i l l remain illuminated a f t e r j e t engine s t a r t . was provided s o t h a t t h e system can be r e s e t t o normal. button i s not used i n f l i g h t .
Emergency Gimbal Lock r e s e t button, located on t h e c i r c u i t breaker panel, This r e s e t
11-59.
GIMBAL L C M D B O K DIAGRAM ANALYSIS O K OE L C
- When
t h e Gimbal Lock
switch, located on t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r , i s placed i n t h e ON p o s i t i o n , p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s DC from t h e emergency bus i s applied t o t h e GIMBAL L C M D i n d i c a t o r on t h e annunciator panel and t o t h e gimbal lock O K OE warning diode box. The 28 v o l t s i s coupled through blocking diodes t o This places t h e j e t engine i n t h e Gimbal When t h e vehicle i s not i n manual gimbal lock, 11-27 t h e gimbal lock solenoid. Locked configuration. Report No. 7260-954.002
8
I-'
Q)
r(
0
I-'
a
I-'
11-28
Report No. 7260-954002
Table 11-3 Jet Engine Modes of Operation Title Emergency Gimbal. Locked
t
Conditions of Use
1.
Avionics will automatically select this mode if the engine angle exceeds 15 degrees from . local vertical for greater than 05 seconds, nominally. Indication to the pilot is illumination of the EM3RG. GIMBAIS KICKED red warning indicator. Low primary hydraulic system pressure (1350 2 50 psig) sensed by the hydraulic pressure switch will open the emergency solenoid valve allowing accumulator pressure to flow to the gimbal actuators, thus centering the engine. Indication to the pilot is illumination of the ENEZG. GIMBALS LOCKED red warning indicator.
2.
3 Primary AC failure will cause avionics to .

switch to Rate Backup and switch engine attitude control to thie mode. Indication to the pilot will be illumination of the AC FAILURE, AUTO PILOT BACK UP, and EMERG. GIMBALS LOCKED indicators.
4 Primary DC failure will cause the avionics .

to switch to Rate Backup and switch engine attitude control to this mode. Pilot indications will be illumination of the DC FAILURE, AUTO PILOT BACK UP, and EMERG. GIMBAIS LOCKED indicators. CAUTION If actuated, thie mode should only be released on %he ground.
i
Report No.
7260-954002
11-29
Table 1 1-3 (continued) Jet Engine Modes of Operation Title Gimbal Lock Conditions of Use
1.
This mode overrides all other modes. It may be activated under any of the following conditions: a . Pilot may select Gimbal Lock mode using the Gimbal Lock switch on the 3-axes hand controller. Indication to the pilot is illumination of the GIMBAL LOCK MODE green status indicator. NOTE This mode is normally w e d for takeoff. It locks the gimbal actuators hydraulically, aligning the jet engine with the Z-axis. To disengage this mode, the pilot places the Gimbal Lock switch to OFF.
b .
1 1-30
Report lo.
7260-954002
Table 11-3 (continued) Jet Engine Modes of Operation
Title
5
Conditions of Use
1.
Lunar
(Jet St.b1i1ization)
Characteristics of this mode are: a Jet engine auto throttle supports 5/6th . vehicle weight. be Jet engine automatically gimballed to provide equal and opposite force to counteract horizontal vehicle drag. c Lift rockets are used to control . altitude and horizontal translations.
2 Activates when all of the following occur: .

a .
Lunar Simulation switch is placed in the LUNAR SIM position. be Lift Rocket T-handle is raised to command a firing where chamber pressure is greater than 1 0 psia. 0 c Gimbal Lock and Local Vertical switches . are OFF. 6 d Jet engine angle is less than 1 degrees . from local vertical.
3 Deactivated normally by: .

a . Depressing SIM REL pushbutton on Jet Throttle. b Advancing Jet Throttle. . c Placing Lift Rocket T-handle down to OFF, . d. Placing Gimbal Lock switch to ON. Engine Centered
4.
This mode is in operation when no other mode has been selected and the vehicle is airborne.
11-32
Report No. 7260-954002
Lift
Rocket Thrust
Thrust/~eight Computer
(See Figure
11-9 )
P,cceleration due t o
L i f t Rockets
n
Vehicle Vert : Gyro
erro
I I
I
I I
5 .
L
Vertical lunar Accelera Command 5/6 g

1,
L ( s e e Figure
. 5I
Engine Gimbal ~esolvers
mrottle
-
I I
Valve
A
Jet Thrust Ms as
111-7)
Vertical Accelerometer
II
I
Gain
II
Figure 11-8.
Automatic J e t T h r o t t l e Control System Block Diagram
Report No. 7260-95400 2
( f i g u r e 11-10) Gimbal Lock switch i s i n OFF p o s i t i o n , a f a i l u r e of hydraul i c p r e s s u r e automatically s e l e c t s t h e emergency gimbal lock configuration. 6 The a c t i o n of t h e hydraulic pressure switch energizes K and a p p l i e s p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s DC t o t h e emergency gimbal lock solenoid and t o t h e gimbal lock warning diode box. t h e master warning c o n t r o l box. returned t o normal. The 28 v o l t s i s diode coupled through t h i s When t h e emergency gimbal r e s e t button i s OKD u n i t t o t h e EMER GIMBALS L C E i n d i c a t o r on t h e annunciator panel, and t o pressed, r e l a y K i s de-energized i f t h e hydraulic low pressure switch has 6 I f t h e r e i s a f a i l u r e of primary DC or AC power o r i f t h e j e t engine angle exceeds
15 degrees, t h e vehicle i s automatically

This a c t i o n i s controlled
placed i n Emergency Gimbal Locked configuration. t i m unit.
by r e l a y s and t h e j e t engine excess angle c i r c u i t s i n t h e Drag CompensaWith t h e gimbal lock switch OFF, p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s DC i s routed through r e l a y s and diodes i n t h e Drag Compensation u n i t , when a power f a i l u r e o r excess angle condition occurs, t o t h e Gimbal Lock Warni n g diode box. indicator. This voltage i s routed t o t h e gimbal lock solenoid and OKD through t r a n s i s t o r switching a c t i o n t o t h e EMERGENCY GIMBALS L C E I f t h e problem i s t h a t of excess angle, MAX ENGINE TILT The excess angle c i r c u i t computes t h e i n d i c a t o r i s a l s o illuminated.
p i t c h and r o l l j e t engine angle with r e s p e c t t o a l o c a l v e r t i c a l reference, which i s defined by t h e v e r t i c a l gyro and energizes t h e emergency r e l a y K10 whenever e i t h s r p i t c h o r r o l l angle exceeds bridge a m p l i f i e r .
15 degrees.
The gimbal
potentiometers and gyro DC s i g n a l s a r e summed and applied t o a threshold Relay Kl9 enables a pressure switch i n t h e normal gimbal lock hydraulic l i n e when gimbal lock i s s e l e c t e d by t h e p i l o t . I f 6 p r e s s u r e i n t h i s l i n e does not r i s e when mode i s s e l e c t e d , K i s energized and t h e emergency mode i s s e l e c t e d . 11-60. L C L VERTICAL M D OA OE The Local V e r t i c a l mode a l i g n s j e t engine with t h e l o c a l v e r t i c a l
11-61.
a s sensed by t h e a t t i t u d e gyros, regardless of vehicle outer frame motion. Report No. 7260-954002
11-35
Report No. 7260-954002
Figure 11-1 1
Typical Landing Gear Microswitch
The s i g n a l from t h e v e h i c l e a t t i t u d e gyro i s compared w i t h t h e engine gimbal a n g l e s obtained from potentiometers on t h e gimbal a c t u a t o r s . The r e s u l t i n g e r r o r i s used a s an i n p u t command t o t h e gimbal, a c t u a t o r s e r v o valves. The p i l o t may s e l e c t t h i s mode with a switch on t h e console. This mode i s a u t o m a t i c a l l y s e l e c t e d when:
A.
The v e h i c l e i s on t h e ground and any one of t h e f o u r microswitches l o c a t e d on each of t h e f o u r shock s t r u t s ( f i g u r e 11-11) i n d i c a t e s a compression of more t h a n one-half i n c h , o r
B.
The j e t engine d e v i a t e s more than 15 t i o n mode.
1 degrees from t h e
l o c a l v e r t i c a l w h i l e i n t h e Engine Centered o r Lunar Simula-
C.
When t h e Lunar Simulation Release button i s depressed t o manually disengage t h i s mode, t h e p i l o t must momentarily a c t i v a t e t h e Local V e r t i c a l r e l e a s e switch on console, which p l a c e s t h e j e t engine a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l i n t h e Engine Centered mode i f no o t h e r mode i s s e l e c t e d .
11-62.
LOCAL VERTICAL M D B O K DIAGRAM ANALYSIS OE L C
The v e r t i c a l gyro
output from t h e a t t i t u d e gyro u n i t i s routed through t h e a t t i t u d e gyro feedback c i r c u i t t o t h e drag compensation u n i t . The outputs from t h e gimbal p o t e n t i o m e t e r s ( f i g u r e 11-5) a r e a p p l i e d t o t h e X-axis and Y-axis summing a m p l i f i e r s and excess a n g l e along s t r u t s c i r c u i t s i n t h e drag c anpensation u n i t ( f i g u r e 11-50).
11-63.
When Local V e r t i c a l i s manually o r a u t o m a t i c a l l y s e l e c t e d , r e l a y
K9
a p p l i e s t h e v e r t i c a l a t t i t u d e s i g n a l s t o t h e summing a m p l i f i e r s . The
r e s u l t a n t output i s r o u t e d through t h e de-energized c o n t a c t s of t h e l u n a r
s i m r e l a y t o t h e compensation and i n t e g r a t o r c i r c u i t and then t o t h e

actuator drive amplifiers. These a m p l i f i e r s a r e c u r r e n t d r i v i n g amplif i e r s capable of supplying a maximum of
5 milliamperes t o t h e h y d r a u l i c
11-38
Report No. 7260-954002
a c t u a t o r s e r v o valve c o i l s .
The r o l l and p i t c h a c t u a t o r s c o n s i s t of
A l e a d c i r c u i t i s incorpo-
two s e r v o v a l v e c o i l s connected i n s e r i e s . d r i v e s t h e same c o i l s .
r a t e d t o compensate f o r delays i n t h e j e t s t a b i l i z a t i o n loops which a l s o
11-64.
The compensating network c o n s i s t s of two RC s e c t i o n s forming a The network s e r v e s a s (1) a servo f i l t e r which main-
low pass f i l t e r .
t a i n s a low bandpass, and (2) a r i p p l e f i l t e r f o r t h e 400-hertz half-wave demodulated s i g n a l from t h e gimbal r e s o l v e r when operating i n Lunar Simulation mode. The I n t e , g r a t o r a m p l i f i e r i s used t o ensure a low s t a t i c I n o t h e r words, e r r o r s i n c e t h e servo flow valve has a c u r r e n t deadzone.
without an i n t e g r a t o r a low DC o f f s e t could e x i s t which would n o t be l a r g e enough t o overcome t h e flow valve's c u r r e n t t h r e s h o l d and t h e r e f o r e a s t e a d y s t a t e engine p o s i t i o n o f f s e t e r r o r would e x i s t . t o r a m p l i f i e r and ensures minimum i n t e g r a t i n g e r r o r . 11-65. The excess angle along t h e s t r u t c i r c u i t computes t h e sum of t h e The MAX ENGINE TILT i n d i c a t o r i s i l l u m i n a t e d
A chopper
s t a b i l i z e d low d r i f t a m p l i f i e r (~urr-Brown 2 5 3 8 ~ )i s used a s t h e i n t e g r a -
a b s o l u t e p i t c h and r o l l gimbal angles and e n e r g i z e s r e l a y K12 whenever t h i s sum exceeds 64 degrees. when t h i s occurs. ENGINE CENTERED MODE
11-67.
This mode i s i n operation when no o t h e r mode has been s e l e c t e d This mode s l a v e s t h e engine along t h e
and t h e v e h i c l e i s airborne.
v e r t i c a l v e h i c l e body a x i s u s i n g t h e potentiometer s i g n a l s on t h e gimbal a c t u a t o r s and t h e gimbal a c t u a t o r servo valves used i n a l l o t h e r modes except Gimbal Locked. With t h e exception, t h a t t h e v e r t i c a l gyro s i g n a l s a r e removed from t h e X-axis and Y-axis summing a m p l i f i e r s , t h e c i r c u i t s i n operation a r e t h e same a s i n l o c a l v e r t i c a l operation.
Report No. 7260-954002
11-39
11-68.
11-69.
A
JET STABILIZATION MODE This jet engine a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l mode performs a s a, p o r t i o n of During t h e Lunar
t h e Lunar Simulation system ( r e f e r t o paragraph 11-70).
Simulation mode, t h e d r a g compensation f u n c t i o n s i n t h e X and Y axes by p o s i t i o n i n g t h e j e t engine t o cancel aerodynamic drag. I n t h e Z a x i s , t h e d r a g compensation i s e f f e c t e d by automatically p o s i t i o n i n g t h e j e t , t h r o t t l e t o c a n c e l aerodynamic drag and t o compensate f o r v e h i c l e changes i n weight r e s u l t i n g from f u e l burnoff. paragraph Refer t o Thrust/weight Computer,
11-75 f o r more d e t a i l e d d e s c r i p t i o n . of t h e Z-axis c o n t r o l .
LUNAR SIMULATION SYSTEM 11-71. The Lunar Simulation mode i s comprised of: ( 1 ) drag compensation,
and (2) t h r u s t / w e i g h t c o n t r o l through t h e automatic j e t engine t h r o t t l e command of f i v e - s i x t h s of t h e v e h i c l e weight. s i m i l a r t o jet s t a b i l i z a t i o n . Lunar Simulation i s e f f e c t e d i n two s t e p s :
A.
Drag compensation i s
The automatic jet engine t h r o t t l e system i s a c t i v a t e d w i t h t h e j e t engine i n Gimbal Lock Mode; t h i s r e s u l t s i n j e t engine t h r u s t equal t o f i v e - s i x t h s of v e h i c l e weight, without any d r a g compensation.
B.
Unlocking t h e gimbal hydraulic system by p o s i t i o n i n g Gimbal Lock switch i n t h e 3-axes a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l l e r t o OFF t h u s a c t i v a t i n g t h e drag compensation ( j e t s t a b i l i z a t i o n ) mechanism.
The Lunar Simulation System c r e a t e s a psuedo l u n a r g r a v i t y f i e l d i n which f i v e - s i x t h s of t h e v e h i c l e weight i s automatically supported by t h e j e t engine and a pseudo l u n a r vacuum by automatically t i l t i n g and c o n t r o l l i n g t h e j e t engine vehicle. t h r u s t t o cancel aerodynamic drag on t h e The system e s t a b l i s h e s a r e f e r e n c e s i g n a l of 5/6 g, which .is
11-4Q
Report No. 7260-954002
resolved i n t o vehicle coordinates using a v e r t i c a l gyro and gimbal resolvers. To t h i s s i g n a l , acceleration caused by l i f t rockets (comput e r e d based on rocket t h r u s t and vehicle weight) a r e v e c t o r i a l l y added. The r e s u l t i n g acceleration information i s compared with t h e measured v e h i c l e accelerations obtained from body-mounted acc,elerometers. and j e t engine a t t i t u d e control, ( f i g u r e 11-50).
. t h r oThel e r e s u l t a n t e r r o r s a r e used a s command s i g n a l s t o t h e automatic tt

The e f f e c t i v e weight of t h e l i f t rocket,'and engine a t t i t u d e ; t h e r e f o r e control of t h e j e t thrust is by t h e automatic response of t h r o t t l e e l e c t r o n i c control c i r c u i t s ' t o t h e i n p u t data.
t h e vehicle i s constantly changing, due t o f u e l consumption, t h r u s t of
11-73.
The a d d i t i o n a l avionics stages i n operation i n t h i s system a r e t h e
thrust/weight computer, l i f t rocket e l e c t r o n i c s switch, accelerometers, body a x i s e r r o r o r summing amplifiers, gimbal resolvers, booster amplif i e r s , e r r o r demodulators and t h e auto t h r o t t l e c i r c u i t s . I n addition, t h e H 0 remaining d e t e c t o r (computer) circuit,which provides a voltage t o 2 2 t h e H 0 remaining i n d i c a t o r , provides required data t o t h e thrust/weight
2 2
computer ( f i g u r e 11-50).
11-74.
H202 REMAINING DETECTOR
- This
c i r c u i t computes t h e f u e l consumed This i s accom-
by t h e s i x t e e n a t t i t u d e rockets and t h e two l i f t rockets.
p l i s h e d by monitoring t h e output t r a n s i s t o r of each rocket power a m p l i f i e r and a l i f t rocket chamber pressure transducer, converting t h e
ON s i g n a l s t o currents representing t h e burnoff r a t e s and summing t h e i r
currents in a chopper s t a b i l i z e d i n t e g r a t o r amplifier.
A T-resistor
network i s used t o b i a s any OFF o r quiescent d r i f t s , and t h e H202 Set switch i s used f o r adjustment of t h e i n t e g r a t o r output and hence t h e H202 REM i n d i c a t o r reading. The i n t e g r a t o r output i s applied t o a bias
Report No. 7260-954002
and s c a l e f a c t o r network t o make it compatible with t h e cockpit f u e l remaining i n d i c a t o r . 11-75.
THRUST/WEIGHT C M U E O P TR
The computer c a l c u l a t e s t h e vehicle
a c c e l e r a t i o n along t h e Z body a x i s when t h e p i l o t a c t u a t e s t h e l i f t t h r o t t l e t o engage t h e automatic t h r o t t l e f o r t h e Lunar Simulation mode. The value of thrust/weight i s continuously updated based on t h e i n t e g r a t i o n of an assumed j e t f u e l flow r a t e , and t h e i n t e g r a t i o n of t h e elect r o n i c rocket f i r i n g s i g n a l s performed by t h e rocket f u e l consumption d e t e c t o r c i r c u i t r y ( i n c l u d e s l i f t rocket f u e l consumption). s i g n a l (ground a d j u s t a b l e ) . The two i n t e g r a t e d s i g n a l s a r e subtracted from t h e i n i t i a l weight potentiometer This s i g n a l i s then compared with one l i f t This value i s applied rocket pressure transducer s i g n a l (measure of l i f t rocket t h r u s t ) t o obtain an instantaneous value of thrust/weight. a s one of t h e i n p u t s t o t h e Z-body a x i s e r r o r c i r c u i t . 11-76. LIFT R C E ELECTRONIC SWITCH OKT
This c i r c u i t enables t h e a u t o
t h r o t t l e and thrust/weight computer wher? t h e l i f t rocket pressure exceeds a predetermined magnitude. The c i r c u i t operates by monitoring t h e
7.5 Kilohm l i f t rocket pressure transducer potentiometer with a comp a r a t o r c i r c u i t whose output i s a t approximately negative O.SVDC when t h e l i f t t h r u s t i s low and p o s i t i v e 10.5VDC when t h e t h r u s t exceeds t h e trigger level. The a m p l i f i e r output i s appl3ed t o r e l a y d r i v e r and Relay K 1 1 contact enables t h e a u t o Relay K18 energizes r e l a y s K 1 1 and K 1 8 .
t h r o t t l e motor d r i v e r ' s output s t a g e and magnetic clutch. s t a r t computing t h e weight change due t o f u e l burnoff.
c o n t a c t s l a t c h i n t h e r e l a y s and enable t h e ~ h r u s t / ~ e i ~ h t computer t o The l a t c h i s necessary t o ensure Lunar Simulation i s not i n t e r r u p t e d i f t h e l i f t rocket pressure drops below t h e t r i g g e r point a f t e r s t a r t of Lunar Simulation. The r e l a y d r i v i n g voltage i s derived from t h e Lunar Simulat i o n switch and t h e r e f o r e w i l l only operate a f t e r t h e Lunar Simulation switch has been p u t i n t h e ON position.
11-42
Report No. 7260-954002
11-77.
VEHICLE AXIS ERROR AMPTIIFIF:&- The X-, Y-, and Z-axis e r r o r
a m p l i f i e r s perform a summing furiction.
The Z-axis e r r o r has f o u r i n p u t s T c o n s i s t i n g of t h e computed thrust/weight value ( L/w), t h e weight and The
drag v e r t i c a l gyro r e s o l v e r , and i n p u t s from two accelerometers.
X- and Y-axis e r r o r a m p l i f i e r s have only t h e 1 a t t e r . t h r e e i n p u t s .
11-78.
The X-axis e r r o r amplifier sums t h e two X-axis l i n e a r acceleroDuring Lunar
meter s i g n a l s and t h e v e r t i c a l gyro s i g n a l t o generate an a c c e l e r a t i o n e r r o r s i g n a l with r e s p e c t to t h e v e h i c l e ' s X-body a x i s . vectof- t o compensate f o r drag along t h a t axis. Simulation ' t h i s e r r o r s i g n a l i s used t o p o s i t i o n t h e X-axis t h r u s t The X-accelerometer s i g n a l s a r e summed t o g e t h e r which compensates f o r r o t a t i o n a l v e h i c l e a c c e l e r a t i o n s and allows f o r only l i n e a r , t r a n s l a t i o n a l a c c e l e r a t i o n s . The v e r t i c a l gyro with r e s o l v e r p i c k o f f s has a 400-hertz output scaled for
516 g s i n
8.
This s i g n a l i s applied t o a phase-sensitive demodulator The output of t h e e r r o r a m p l i f i e r i s scaled f o r and The bandpass f i l t e r shapes t h e
and then f i l t e r e d .
33.2
3.
The e r r o r a m p l i f i e r s i g n a l i s then modulated a t 400,hertz
s e n t through a 4.00-hertz bandpass f i l t e r .
square wave s i g n a l t o a 4-00-hertz s i n e wave output. t h e gimbal r e s o l v e r s .
It i s necessary t o change t h e DC e r r o r s i g n a l t o an AC voltage i n order t o couple it through
11-79.
The Y-axis e r r o r a m p l i f i e r i s very s i m i l a r t o t h e X-axis c i r c u i t . The r e s o l v e r gyro command i s
The only d i f f e r e n c e s a r e i n t h e gyro command s i g n a l and t h e ground t e s t potetiometer feedback channel.
516 g cos
8 sin
15
s i n c e r o l l i s on t h e i n n e r gimbal and r e q u i r e s one more The second d i f f e r e n c e i s t h a t t h e gimbal angle This i s necessary because t h e s i g n a l
r e s o l u t i o n than p i t c h .
potentiometer i s f e d back t o t h e i n v e r t i n g r a t h e r than t h e non-inverting i n p u t of t h e summing amplifier. phasing i n t h e engine channel d i f f e r s i n t h e p i t c h and r o l l a x i s .
Report No. 7260-954.002
11-80.
The Z-axis e r r o r a m p l i f i e r sums t h e two Z a x i s l i n e a r accelerometer
s i g n a l s , t h e v e r t i c a l gyro s i g n a l and t h e T v e h i c l e ' s Z-body a x i s . simulate a
~ computer ( l i f t r o c k e t a c c e l / ~
e r a t i o n ) s i g n a l , and g e n e r a t e s an a c c e l e r a t i o n e r r o r w i t h r e s p e c t t o t h e During Lunar Simulation t h i s e r r o r s i g n a l i s used t o a d j u s t t h e Z-axis t h r u s t t o c a n c e l
516
of t h e e a r t h ' s g r a v i t y and The Z accelerometer s i g n a l s
116 g r a v i t y f i e l d ( l u n a r g r a v i t y ) .
a r e summed ' t o g e t h e r , which compensates f o r r o t a t i o n a l v e h i c l e a c c e l e r a t i o n s , b u t a l l o w s only l i n e a r t r a n s l a t i o n a l Z a x i s a c c e l e r a t i o n s t o be summed. cos The V e r t i c a l Gyro 400-hertz s i g n a l i s s c a l e d f o r
@.T h i s ' s i g n a l i s a p p l i e d t o a p h a s e - s e n s i t i v e
516 g cos
filtered.
demodulator and t h e n VDC The o u t p u t of t h e e r r o r a m p l i f i e r i s s c a l e d f o r 33.2 g-. The

e "
e r r o r s i g n a l i s modulated a t 4.00-hertz,
s e n t through a 400-hertz bandpass
f i l t e r and a p p l i e d t o t h e gimbal r e s o l v e r s .
11-81.
THRUST/WEIGHT
INDICATOR CIRCUIT - This c i r c u i t , c o n s i s t i n g of a a c c e l e r o m e t e r s and provides an
2-stage a m p l i f i e r , monitors t h e 2-axes tiometric T
o u t p u t t o t h e t e l e m e t r y and i n s t r u m e n t a t i o n system and d r i v e s t h e poten-
~ i n/d i c~a t o r .
Refer t o s e c t i o n V I I I f o r maintenance
i n s t r u c t i o n s on t h e i n d i c a t o r . 11-82. BOOSTER
AMP AND RESOLUTION C I R C U I T - The b o o s t e r amp and r e s o l u -
t i o n c i r c u i t c o n v e r t s t h e t h r e e body a x i s a c c e l e r a t i o n e r r o r v o l t a g e s t o
.. and YJE) d r i v e t h e p i t c h and r o l lThe t e sr tr aobr si l ii zna tt ihoen .. X and Y a x i s (xJE je .. i s coupled t o t h e a u t o systems r e s p e c t i v e l y . The Z a x i s e r r o r (zJE)
t h r e e j e t engine a x i s a c c e l e r a t i o n e r r o r s i g n a l s . t h r o t t l e c o n t r o l system t o a d j u s t t h e engine t h r u s t magnitude. f o r t h e temperature compensated gimbal r e s o l v e r s . of t h i s r e s o l v e r c h a i n i s on t h e following page. Four i d e n t i c a l b o o s t e r amps (two p e r package) a r e used a s d r i v i n g a m p l i f i e r s The t r a n s f e r f u n c t i o n
Report No. 7260 -954002
XJE ZJE
= XB E
cos Q
+ ZBE s i n Q
= XBE s i n Q cos
66+
B E
sin
@+
ZBE cos Q cos $6
XBE s i n Q s i n
YB cos @ - ZBE cos Q s i n E
The o u t p u t s of t h e X- and Y-axis s t a g e s a r e demodulated and r o u t e d by t h e c o n t a c t s of t h e l u n a r s i m r e l a y K 8 t o t h e compensation and i n t e g r a t o r s t a g e s , ( r e f e r t o paragraph 11-64) and t h u s t o t h e r o l l and p i t c h actuator drive amplifiers. 11-83. AUTO THROTTLE C A N L HNE
The a u t o t h r o t t l e channel p r o v i d e s a The channel has two modes of o p e r a t i o n ; In
s i g n a l t o d r i v e t h e two-phase, 4.00-hertz r o t a r y a u t o t h r o t t l e a c t u a t o r motor t o t h e d e s i r e d p o s i t i o n . (1) t h e ' l u n a r Simulation Mode and ( 2 ) t h e Emergency T h r o t t l e Mode.
t h e Lunar Simulation Mode a Z-channel a c c e l e r a t i o n e r r o r i s a p p l i e d a t t h e i n p u t and i s f e d t o t h e a u t o t h r o t t l e motor c o n t r o l phase w i t h an AC gain of 3500. The output a m p l i f i e r s i g n a l i s coupled t o t h e motor through During t h e l i m i t switch c i r c u i t r e l a y s during Lunar Simulation Mode.
2 Emergency T h r o t t l e o p e r a t i o n r e l a y s K 1 and K a r e energized, t h e t h r o t t l e command synchro s i g n a l i s a p p l i e d through i s o l a t i n g r e s i s t o r s t o t h e i n p u t a m p l i f i e r and t h e a u t o t h r o t t l e feedback synchro s i g n a l i s a p p l i e d through i s o l a t i n g r e s i s t o r s t o t h e same a m p l i f i e r . The remainder of t h e e l e c t r o n i c s used i s t h e same a s d u r i n g Lunar Simulation, except r e l a y c o n t a c t K A couples t h e o u t p u t a m p l i f i e r t o t h e s e r v o motor d i r e c t l y , t h e r e f o r e 2 bypassing t h e l i m i t switches.
11-84.
AUTOMATIC THROTTLE LIMIT SWITCHES
Three microswitches l i m i t t h e
motion of t h e automatic t h r o t t l e a c t u a t o r such t h a t t h e a n g u l a r d i s p l a c e ment of t h e j e t t h r o t t l e w i l l n o t exceed t h e engine o p e r a t i n g range d u r i n g t h e Lunar Simulation Mode. These switches a r e p r e s e t a s follows (degrees given r e f e r t o main f u e l c o n t r o l s h a f t p o s i t i o n on t h e jet engine): Report No. 7260-954002
11-45
A.
B.
C.
Maximum automatic t h r o t t l e s i g n a l c u t o f f Low automatic t h r o t t l e s i g n a l c u t o f f
75'
45'
Low automatic t h r o t t l e c l u t c h disengage
- 4-0'
The maximum and low c u t o f f switches ( 1 and 2 ) l i m i t t h e motion of t h e automatic t h r o t t l e a c t u a t o r . The l i m i t s a r e based on sea l e v e l a l t i t u d e I n t h e event of an and General E l e c t r i c curves f o r CF700-2V engines.
e x c e s s i v e command by t h e a u t o t h r o t t l e , t h e engine main f u e l c o n t r o l w i l l remain a t t h e l i m i t e d p o s i t i o n u n t i l t h e l u n a r s i m u l a t i o n commands t h e t h r o t t l e position within the l i m i t s set. The low c l u t c h disengage switch When switch (3) has ( 3 ) a c t s a s a backup t o t h e low c u t o f f switch ( 2 ) . throttle. cockpit. 11-85. 11-86.
C I R C U I T ANALYSIS
been a c t i v a t e d , t h e p i l o t must t a k e over manual c o n t r o l of t h e j e t Switch ( 3 ) o p e r a t e s t h e L W THRUST M N A i n d i c a t o r i n t h e O AUL
The d e t a i l e d c i r c u i t a n a l y s i s i s l i m i t e d t o a r e p r e s e n t a t i v e o r Reference d e s i g n a t o r s
t y p i c a l c i r c u i t f o r each t y p e of c i r c u i t when d u p l i c a t e d i n primary, monitor, backup o r d r a g compensation subsystems. a r e f o r e x p l a n a t i o n only. 11-87. 11-88. PRIMARY, MONITOR AND BACKUP ELECTRONICS C i r c u i t a n a l y s i s i s presented i n an o p e r a t i o n a l sequence of t h e r a t e command, r a t e model, d i r e c t model, model l e a d ,
following c i r c u i t s :
r a t e gyro feedback ( c i r c u i t s i m i l a r t o r a t e command), a t t i t u d e gyro feedback, a t t i t u d e hold and synchronizer, yaw a t t i t u d e gyro feedback, yaw a t t i t u d e h o l d and synchronizer, t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r and i n v e r t e r , r o c k e t i n h i b i t l o g i c and r o c k e t a m p l i f i e r s . S p e c i a l monitoring c i r c u i t s and jet engine a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l c i r c u i t s a r e subsequently discussed.
Report No. 7260-954002
11-89.
RATE COMMAND CIRCUIT
The 800-hertz AC s i g n a l from t h e hand
c o n t r o l l e r i s a p p l i e d a c r o s s t h e g a i n a d j u s t p o t e n t i o m e t e r , ( f i g u r e 11-12). The o v e r a l l g a i n from t h e p o t e n t i o m e t e r s l i d e r t o t h e f i n a l a m p l i f i e r o u t p u t i s nominally 4.54 vdc/vrms. The potentiometer i s normally s e t After t o approximately 78% o f i t s f u l l range, l e a v i n g t h e .remainder t o compens a t e f o r hand c o n t r o l l e r s c a l e f a c t o r o r c i r c u i t r y gain change. a m p l i f i c a t i o n , t h e s i g n a l i s demodulated and f i l t e r e d . r i p p l e l e s s t h a n 4 m i l l i v o l t s RMS a t maximum command. offsets. The f i l t e r
A 22-turn a d j u s t -
a t t e n u a t e s t h e s i g n a l by approximately 67 d e c i b e l s , which r e s u l t s i n a ment p o t e n t i o m e t e r i s used f o r n u l l i n g hand c o n t r o l l e r o r demodulator R e f e r t o paragraph 11-149 f o r adjustment procedures. Refer t o paragraph 11-20 f o r d e s c r i p t i o n of a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l mode s e l e c t i o n . I n t h e Rate w i t h Model mode t h e output of t h e r a t e command f i n a l a m p l i f i e r
i s a p p l i e d through t h e a p p r o p r i a t e r e l a y c o n t a c t s (primary and monitor

a t t i t u d e c h a n n e l s ) t o t h e r a t e model i n p u t d i f f e r e n t i a l a m p l i f i e r ( f i g u r e 11-13) and t h e coupling d i o d e s i n p u t of t h e r a t e model l e a d c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-15). 11-90. MTE M D L CIRCUIT OE
The r a t e model c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-13)
o p e r a t i o n can be analyzed by r e f e r e n c e t o t h e t y p i c a l s i g n a l t r a c e s ( f i g u r e 11-14). created. Assume t h e model r a t e , TP-C and s t i c k command r a t e a r e b o t h z e r o , and t h e n a s t e p r a t e command of l o O / s e c from t h e s t i c k i s This c a u s e s a m p l i f i e r , A 1 output t o l i m i t , c r e a t i n g approxiAssume an 8 DEG/SEC
2
mately 10.5 VDC a t TP-A, and t h e t o p of t h e 22 t u r n model a c c e l e r a t i o n adjustment p o t e n t i o m e t e r . i n p u t r e s i s t o r s , TP-B. acceleration i s desired, t h e n approximately 6 VDC w i l l be a p p l i e d t o t h e model i n t e g r a t o r , A2, Since t h e model r a t e s i g n a l i s d i f f e r e n t t h a n t h e command by more t h a n one degree p e r second, r e l a y K w i l l be 2 e n e r g i z e d and t h e i n p u t r e s i s t o r s w i l l be p a r a l l e l e d ( 4 - j e t l o g i c ) . The model o u t p u t s i g n a l , TP-C w i l l i n c r e a s e a t a r a t e of 4 v o l t s p e r second 2 ( 8 DEG/SEC u n t i l t i m e , T I , when t h e model r a t e i s w i t h i n a degree p e r second of t h e s t i c k command s i g n a l . Report No. 7260-954002 A t t h i s time, r e l a y K w i l l 2 11-47
DIRECT
A
1K 1OK
4t
1f
*
NO + OE M D1
1OK PRIMARY THRESHOLD
10 MFD 301~
24
9K
AMP
2K
T O FIGURE T O 11-23 FIGURE 11-32 ADJUST FIGURE 11-1 5
M DL OE 500 MVDC/~/SEC H T FIG= O +15 VDC
NULL ADJUST
Figure 11-13.
Rate Model C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram
STICK DC
AMP A1
-10.5
1 -I
I
VDC
I
AMP A 2
r n
'To F i g u r e 11-14. Rate Model T y p i c a l S i g n a l Traces
de-energize and t h e model o u t p u t w i l l continue t o i n c r e a s e a t a r a t e of

2 v o l t s p e r second ( 4 DEG/SEC ) u n t i l t h e model output i s e q u a l t o t h e
s t i c k command s i g n a l .
The model output w i l l t h e n remain e q u a l t o t h e Relays K1 and
commanded r a t e u n t i l t h e command i s changed. Relay
K3
are
~ a t e l ~ i r e and ~ o d e l / ~ o ct Model mode switching r e l a y s r e s p e c t i v e l y .
K3
c o n t a c t keeps t h e i n t e g r a t o r a t a low (0.003) gain d u r i n g N o I f i n D i r e c t w i t h Model o p e r a t i o n , r e l a y K1 i s
Model mode s o t h a t a l a r g e model command s i g n a l i s n o t p r e s e n t when s w i t c h i n g t o Model mode. d i r e c t model c i r c u i t . e n e r g i z e d and t h e i n p u t t o t h e r a t e model f i n a l a m p l i f i e r A2 i s from t h e
11-91. DIRECT MODEL CIRCUIT
The d i r e c t model c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-15)
r e c e i v e s i n p u t s i g n a l s from t h e d i r e c t s w i t c h e s t o t h e same a m p l i f i e r used i n t h e r a t e model c i r c u i t , however, it i s t h e only a m p l i f i e r s t a g e . Whenever t h e p i l o t moves t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r enough t o c l o s e a f u n c t i o n a l d i r e c t s w i t c h , S1 o r S2, approximately 1 v o l t s 4
DC i s a p p l i e d a t
TP-A
i f r e l a y K1 i s e n e r g i z e d ( D i r e c t Mode s e l e c t e d ) . T h i s provides
11-50
Report No. 7260-954002
approximately 9.3 v o l t s DC across t h e 22 t u r n acceleration adjustment potentiometer. Assume 8 deg/sec2 acceleration i s desired,, then approxThe model amplifier capacitor w i l l imately 4.8 v o l t s DC would be present a t t h e potentiometer arm a s an input s i g n a l t o t h e open loop integrator. charge l i n e a r l y a t 4 v o l t s
DC/S~C
(8 deg/sec 2 ) u n t i l t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r
Resetting of t h e
i s returned t o t h e detent position, ard t h e voltage a t TP-A goes t o zero

o r t h e a m p l i f i e r l i m i t (10.5 v o l t s DC) i s reached. model can be accomplished by switching to No-Model mode and allowing r e l a y contact, K3D, - t o discharge t h e 10 microfarad storage capacitor. Since t h e output of t h e i n t e g r a t o r represents t h e r a t e command t o t h e vehicle i n t h a t a x i s , t h e vehicle r a t e a t t h e time t h a t t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r switches disengage, w i l l be maintained u n t i l a function command i s received from t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r . vehicle a t t i t u d e . However, i f t h i s vehicle r a t e i s l e s s than 3O/second, t h e a t t i t u d e hold system w i l l maintain t h e I n yaw, t h e r e i s no a t t i t u d e hold i n t h e Primary Direct Command mode.
11-92.
MODEL LEAD CIRCUIT
- When
i n t h e r a t e model configuration, t h e r e This requires t o compensate f o r For a 1.4 deg/sec
would be a l a g between p i l o t ' s command and rocket f i r i n g . t h e addition of a model lead c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-16) t h i s l a g time. s e t t i n g divided by t h e selected model acceleration. threshold and an 8 deg/sec f o r e be 175 milliseconds. m u l d be
2
This l a g time i s nominally equal t o the r a t e threshold model acceleration t h e time l a g would there-
Whereas, f o r a maximum r a t e threshold of
2.0 deg/sec and a minimum model acceleration of 4 deg/sec2, t h e l a g time
0.5 second; t h i s large a l a g time could e a s i l y be noticed by
t h e p i l o t and give an undesirable system operation. The lead term can provide a s h o r t duration i n i t i a l rocket pulse a s soon a s t h e p i l o t moves t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r and, therefore, give t h e p i l o t a f e e l i n g of immediate system response. The c i r c u i t operation i s a s follows: when t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r i s moved and provides an output beyond approximately
1.4 deg/sec amplifier A1 becomes saturated and provides a ten-volt s t e p
Report No. 7260-954002
11-51
Report No.
7260-954002
Report No.
7260-954002
voltage t o t h e uncharged c a p a c i t o r , C 1 (TP-A). t e n - v o l t peak p u l s e a t TP-B.
The RC network c r e a t e s a
This pulse i s applied t o a Darlington The threshold
e m i t t e r follower a m p l i f i e r , serving a s a b u f f e r , which overcomes t h e r a t e threshold and generates a rocket f i r i n g command. a m p l i f i e r w i l l remain on u n t i l t h e pulse voltage decays below t h e threshold value, t h u s t h e d u r a t i o n of t h e i n i t i a l rocket f i r i n g i s c o n t r o l l e d by t h e s e t t i n g of t h e time constant adjustment potentiometer. gain (40) a m p l i f i e r A 1 allows t h e shape of t h e lead pulse t o be independent of t h e amount of hand c o n t r o l l e r command, s i n c e any amount of s t i c k command which i s l a r g e r than 1.4 deg/sec w i l l s a t u r a t e amplifier A l . Diodes D l and D2 provide a deadzone area i n order t o prevent c r e a t i n g spurious pulses due t o s t i c k noise o r o f f s e t s . A n u l l adjustment potentiometer i s included t o allow n u l l i n g t h e lead c i r c u i t s
DC o f f s e t a t TP-C.
The high
11-93.
The r a t e gyro and a t t i t u d e gyro outputs a l s o feed a s i g n a l t o
t h e threshold a m p l i f i e r c i r c u i t s , t h u s t h e s e s t a g e s a r e discussed p r i o r t o t h e threshold a m p l i f i e r c i r c u i t . 11-94.
RATE GYRO FEEDBACK CIRCUIT
The r a t e gyro feedback c i r c u i t The input from t h e r a t e
( f i g u r e 11-17) i s very s i m i l a r t o t h e r a t e command circuit,however, t h e i n i t i a l i n p u t a m p l i f i e r i s n o t required. gyro synchro i s applied a c r o s s a 22-turn gain potentiometer which i s normally s e t t o approximately 88%of i t s f u e l range, leaving t h e remainder t o compensate f o r r a t e gyro s c a l e f a c t o r o r c i r c u i t r y gain change. The o v e r a l l gain from t h e potentiometer arm (TP-A) t o a m p l i f i e r A 1 output (TP-D) i s nominally
3.85 vdc/vrms.
A half-wave,
phase s e n s i t i v e demodulator determines t h e feedback s i g n a l p o l a r i t y and a p p l i e s it t o t h e f i l t e r network, a s a half-wave, r e c t i f i e d 400-hertz signal. The demodulator f i l t e r c o n s i s t s of two RC sections which provide approximately 52 d e c i b e l s a t t e n u a t i o n a t t h e 400-hertz demodulat o r f i l t e r frequency, and t h e r e f o r e a t maximum feedback (10 vdc)
, the
11-54
Report No. 7260-954002
Report lo.
7260-954092
output r i p p l e i s l e s s than 20 m i l l i v o l t s RMS.
A 22-turn adjustment
potentiometer i s used f o r n u l l i n g r a t e gyro o r demodulator o f f s e t s and i s capable of a d j u s t i n g f o r maximum o f f s e t s of 980 m i l l i v o l t s DC. output i s routed t o t h e threshold a m p l i f i e r c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-23). The
11-95.
ATTITUDE GYRO FEEDBACK C I R C U I T
The p i t c h a t t i t u d e gyro feed-
back c i r c u i t and t h e r o l l a t t i t u d e gyro c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-18) a r e i d e n t i c a l feedback c i r c u i t s but d i f f e r s l i g h t l y from t h e yaw a t t i t u d e gyro feedback c i r c u i t , ( f i g u r e 11-20). The v e r t i c a l gyro s i g n a l from t h e a t t i t u d e gyro u n i t i s applied t o t h e 3-axes b a l l i n t h e a t t i t u d e i n d i c a t o r and t o t h e i n p u t potentiometer of t h e feedback c i r c u i t . The 22-turn gain adjustment potentiometer i s normally s e t t o approximately 71% of i t s f u l l range, leaving t h e remainder t o compensate f o r a t t i t u d e gyro s c a l e f a c t o r or c i r c u i t r y gain changes. The o v e r a l l gain from t h e gain potentiometer arm (TP-A) t o a m p l i f i e r A 1 output (TP-D) i s nominally
1.41 vdc/vrms.
A half-wave, phase s e n s i t i v e demodulator determines t h e
feedback s i g n a l p o l a r i t y and a p p l i e s it t o t h e f i l t e r network a s a half-wave, r e c t i f i e d 400-hertz signal. The demodulator f i l t e r c o n s i s t s of two RC s e c t i o n s which give approximately a 57 d e c i b e l a t t e n u a t i o n a t t h e 4.00-hertz demodulator f i l t e r frequency, qnd t h e r e f o r e a t maximum feedback t h e output r i p p l e i s l e s s than f i f t e e n m i l l i v o l t s R I G .
A 22-turn
adjustment potentiometer i s used f o r n u l l i n g a t t i t u d e gyro o r demodulator o f f s e t s , and i s capable of a d j u s t i n g over t h e f u l l amplifier range. The output s i g n a l i s a p p l i e d t o t h e Drag Compensation u n i t f o r use i n t h e j e t engine a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l c i r c u i t s and t o t h e a t t i t u d e hold and synchronizer c i r c u i t s i n p i t c h and r o l l channels. 11-96. ATTITUDE H L AND SYNCHRONIZER CIRCUIT OD
The a t t i t u d e hold and
synchronizer c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-19) perf o m s t h e following f'unctions:
( 1) maintains an a t t i t u d e reference and computes t h e vehicle a t t i t u d e

e r r o r during a t t i t u d e hold (no p i l o t command) periods, (2) updates t h e
11-56
Report No. 7260-954.002
-15
VDC VDC
- 4
+15
CART INJECT
TEST
NULL
ADJUST ATTITUDE INDICATOR
*
B
C
A *
1
I
100K
r-----1
lOOK
'7
F i g u r e 11-18.
P i t c h and R o l l A t t i t u d e Gyro Feedback C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram
a t t i t u d e r e f e r e n c e d u r i n g a commanded maneuver, and (3) e s t a b l i s h e s t h e r a t i o of r a t e t o a t t i t u d e e r r o r feedback s i g n a l which c o n t r o l s t h e a t t i t u d e r o c k e t f i r i n g commands. The f i r s t f u n c t i o n i s accomplished by s t o r i n g an a t t i t u d e r e f e r e n c e voltage on t h e i n t e g r a t o r a m p l i f i e r , A2, output TP-C and comparing t h e s i g n a l t o t h e t o t a l a t 5 i t u d e s i g n a l i n difference amplifier, A l . The d i f f e r e n c e a m p l i f i e r w i t h a DC gain of 25.3 has an output s c a l e f a c t o r of
5 vdc/deg a t TP-A.
During an a t t i t u d e
hold p e r i o d , t h e chopper s t a b i l i z e d i n t e g r a t o r a m p l i f i e r , A2, w i t h a high q u a l i t y Mylar s t o r a g e c a p a c i t o r , keeps t h e r e f e r e n c e d r i f t l e s s than 0.05 deg/mili over t h e e n t i r e o p e r a t i n g temperature range of z e r o t o 140'~. 11-97. Updating t h e a t t i t u d e r e f e r e n c e i s accomplished by e n e r g i z i n g This f o r c e s t h e i n t e g r a t o r
r e a l y K 1 and c l o s i n g t h e feedback loop.
a m p l i f i e r , A2, output t o follow t h e t o t a l a t t i t u d e s i g n a l , s i n c e i f a d i f f e r e n c e e x i s t s it c r e a t e s a l a r g e output from a m p l i f i e r , A l , t h a t i s a p p l i e d through r e l a y c o n t a c t KIA t o t h e i n t e g r a t o r i n p u t and d r i v e s t h e a m p l i f i e r t o t h e c o r r e c t value. The i n t e g r a t o r output slewing r a t e f o r a t e n v o l t a t t i t u d e e r r o r s i g n a l i s approximately 25 v o l t s p e r second (125 degrees p e r second) and i s q u i t e s u f f i c i e n t f o r t h e maximum expected v e h i c l e r a t e s of 22 degrees p e r second. During maneuvering, 2 r e l a y c o n t a c t s KIB and K A ground t h e s i g n a l s t o t h e t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r s , t h u s p r e v e n t i n g t h e a t t i t u d e e r r o r from i n f l u e n c i n g t h e rocket commands. The amount of a t t i t u d e e r r o r t o r a t e s i g n a l r a t i o i s c o n t r o l l e d by a 22-turn adjustment potentiometer capable of a d j u s t i n g f o r 0.3 t o
1.5
degrees a t t i t u d e t h r e s h o l d when t h e r a t e t h r e s h o l d i s f i x e d a t any v a l u e from 0.5 t o 2.0 degrees p e r second. This gives a RATE/ATT r a t i o of 0.33 t o 6.7. The a t t i t u d e hold and synchronizer c i r c u i t output i s The same output i s a p p l i e d t o t h e primary t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-23) and t h e t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r s t a g e s i n t h e monitor channel. a l s o a v a i l a b l e t o d r i v e t h e a t t i t u d e i n d i c a t o r needle c i r c u i t , b u t t h i s
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No.
7260-954002
o u t p u t i s n o t used ( f i g u r e 11-21).
I n p i t c h and r o l l , a t t i t u d e hold i s
r e t u r n e d i n t h e primary d i r e c t command mode.
On yaw a t t i t u d e , hold i s
disconnected i n t h e primary d i r e c t command mode.
11-98.
YAW ATTITUDE GYRO FEEDBACK CIRCUIT
The yaw a t t i t u d e gyro
( d i r e c t i o n a l gyro) feedback c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-20) i s used p r i m a r i l y f o r i n s t r u n e n t a t i o n , and does n o t feedback a s i g n a l t o c o n t r o l r o c k e t f i r i n g s o r a t t i t u d e h o l d a s does t h e p i t c h and r o l l a t t i t u d e gyro. The d i r e c t i o n a l gyro s i g n a l i s a p p l i e d t o a Control D i f f e r e n t i a l Transformer (cDX), i n t h e c o c k p i t , which allows t h e p i l o t t o s e t t h e d e s i r e d heading on t h e a t t i t u d e i n d i c a t o r . approximately The output of t h e CDX i s a p p l i e d t o t h e 22-turn g a i n adjustment p o t e n t i o m e t e r which i s normally s e t t o
57% o f i t s f u l l range, l e a v i n g t h e remainder f o r gyro

The o u t p u t s i g n a l from t h e CDX h a s a The o v e r a l l
s c a l e f a c t o r o r c i r c u i t r y changes.
maximum value of 11.9 vrms ( a t t i t u d e b a l l a t E a s t o r w e s t ) . (TP-D) i s nominally 1.56 vdc/vrms.
g a i n from t h e g a i n p o t e n t i o m e t e r ' s arm (TP-A) t o a m p l i f i e r A 1 o u t p u t
A h a l f -wave phase s e n s i t i v e
The demodulator
demodulator determines t h e feedback s i g n a l p o l a r i t y and a p p l i e s it t o t h e f i l t e r network a s a half-wave r e c t i f i e d 400-hertz s i g n a l . f i l t e r c o n s i s t s of two RC s e c t i o n s which g i v e s approximately a 43 d e c i b e l a t t e n u a t i o n a t t h e 400-hertz demodulator f i l t e r frequency, and t h e r e f o r e , a t maximum s i g n a l of 10 vdc t h e o u t p u t r i p p l e i s l e s s t h a n
60 m i l l i v o l t s RMS.
A 22-turn adjustment p o t e n t i o m e t e r i s used f o r

The o u t p u t s i g n a l i s
n u l l i n g t h e d i r e c t i o n a l gyro o r demodulator o f f s e t s and i s capable of a d j u s t i n g over t h e f u l l o u t p u t v o l t a g e range. a p p l i e d t o t h e yaw a t t i t u d e needle c i r c u i t , when used ( f i g u r e 11-21).
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No.
7260-954002
604~
-01 MFD
4)
I L
r'
FROM FIGURE
11-19
32
4K
274K
Figure 11-21.
A t t i t u d e Needle C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram
11-99.
YAW ATTITUDE H L AND SYNCHRONIZER C I R C U I T OD
The a t t i t u d e hold
and synchronizer c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-22) has t h e following f u n c t i o n s : ( 1 ) computes t h e v e h i c l e a t t i t u d e e r r o r d u r i n g a t t i t u d e hold p e r i o d s ( n o p i l o t commands), ( 2 ) r e s e t s t h e a t t i t u d e e r r o r t o zero during a commanded maneuver, and e s t a b l i s h e s t h e r a t i o of r a t e t o a t t i t u d e e r r o r feedback s i g n a l which c o n t r o l s t h e a t t i t u d e r o c k e t f i r i n g commands. The f i r s t f u n c t i o n i s accomplished by applying t h e yaw DC r a t e gyro feedback s i g n a l t o i n t e g r a t o r a m p l i f i e r A l . t h e a t t i t u d e e r r o r w i t h a s c a l e f a c t o r of Over a f i x e d time i n t e r v a l , t h e a m p l i f i e r ' s feedback c a p a c i t o r w i l l accumulate a v o l t a g e r e p r e s e n t i n g
v o l t s ~ ~ / d eIf t.h e yaw ~
r a t e i s z e r o , t h e i n t e g r a t o r i s capable of holding t h e a t t i t u d e e r r o r w i t h l e s s t h a n 0.05 deg/min d r i f t over t h e temperature range of zero t o 11-62 Report No. 7260-954002
agf
P3=
Erc
Report No.
7260-954002
1 4 0 ~ ~However, i n p r a c t i c e , t h e yaw r a t e gyro s i g n a l p o s s e s s e s some .

o f f s e t v o l t a g e , caused by acombination of r a t e gyro n u l l s h i f t , h y s t e r i s i s , and s t r i c t i o n which causes a t t i t u d e e r r o r s i g n a l d r i f t much g r e a t e r t h a n t h e i n t e g r a t o r and e l e c t r o n i c c i r c u i t d r i f t . r e s u l t s i n 2.4 t o Typical r a t e gyro o f f s e t v o l t a g e s a r e i n t h e range of 20 t o 80 m i l l i v o l t s DC, which
9.6 deg/mim a t t i t u d e e r r o r d r i f t .
During maneuvering
r e l a y c o n t a c t K I A e s t a b l i s h e s a low gain (0.01) f o r a m p l i f i e r A 1 and d i s c h a r g e s t h e 10 microfarad a t t i t u d e e r r o r s t o r a g e c a p a c i t o r , t h e r e b y r e s e t t i n g t h e a t t i t u d e e r r o r t o zero. Relay c o n t a c t s KIB and K A ground 2 The amount of t h e s i g n a l s t o t h e threshold amplifiers, thus preventing t h e a t t i t u d e e r r o r from i n f l u e n c i n g t h e r o c k e t f i r i n g commands. ment p o t e n t i o m e t e r capable of a d j u s t i n g f o r 0.3 t o 0 . 5 t o 2.0 degrees p e r second. a t t i t u d e e r r o r t o r a t e s i g n a l r a t i o i s c o n t r o l l e d by a 22-turn a d j u s t -
1.5 degrees of
a t t i t u d e t h r e s h o l d when t h e r a t e t h r e s h o l d i s f i x e d a t any value from This g i v e s a r a t e / a t t r a t i o of 0.33 t o
6.7.
The o u t p u t of t h e yaw a t t i t u d e hold and synchronizer c i r c u i t
d r i v e s t h e t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r c i r c u i t s ( f i g u r e 11-23) i n t h e primary and i n t h e monitor channels. 11-100. THRESHOLD AMPLIFIER AND INVERTER CIRCUIT o p e r a t e s a s follows: zero volts.
The t h r e s h o l d ampli-
f i e r ( f i g u r e 11-23) employs a feedback diode b r i d g e network which w i t h a l l i n p u t s i g n a l s z e r o , a l l bridge diodes Dl through D 4 a r e forward b i a s e s t h e r e f o r e keeping t h e a m p l i f i e r output a t The forward biased diodes e f f e c t i v e l y provide a v e r y low The feedback impedance which c r e a t e s an extremely low gain. s e t by adjustment p o t e n t i o m e t e r s . increased positively.
T - r e s i s t a n c e networks provide a f i x e d c u r r e n t t o t h e diodes which can be Assume an i n p u t s i g n a l i s now This w i l l c r e a t e a c u r r e n t , 10,t o unbalance t h e would d e c r e a s e by t h e same amount, s i n c e a
c u r r e n t s i n t h e b r i d g e d i o d e s such t h a t t h e c u r r e n t i n P3 would i n c r e a s e by 10and t h e c u r r e n t i n I % c o n s t a n t c u r r e n t i s maintained through t h e 10 kilohm r e s i s t o r , R2. E v e n t u a l l y , t h e c u r r e n t 10w i l l become e q u a l t o t h e f i x e d c u r r e n t through
11-64
Report No. 7260-954002
TO MONITOR
THRE!SHOLD
A m
. .
Figure 11-23. Threshold Amplifier and Inverter Circuit, Schematic Diagram
r e s i s t o r R2 and diode Dlc w i l l become c u t o f f , s i n c e i t s c u r r e n t w i l l be zero. Now, any more c u r r e n t , 10w i l l cause t h e a m p l i f i e r summing junct i o n t o change voltage i n a p o s i t i v e d i r e c t i o n and d r i v e t h e output negative.
A t t h i s time, t h e anode of diode D w i l l be approximately 2

The switch-
-10 vdc and hence diode D l w i l l be back biased and cutoff.
ing a c t i o n i s r e g e n e r a t i v e , s i n c e when t h e diodes begin t o cutoff t h e feedback impedance i n c r e a s e s , c r e a t i n g a higher gain and l a r g e r output which c u t s t h e diodes o f f harder and again c r e a t e s more feedback impedance. The switching time i s l i m i t e d p r i m a r i l y by t h e a m p l i f i e r slew The summing r a t e and a ' t y p i c a l switching time i s t e n microseconds. summation of t h e i n p u t c o n t r o l signals.
junction (negative i n p u t ) i s a v i r t u a l ground and provides f o r c o r r e c t The threshold potentiometers can be adjusted independently without any cross e f f e c t and can provide threshold c u r r e n t s from 50 t o 500 milliamperes, corresponding t o 0.2 t o 2.0 degrees p e r second. hard forward conduction. Although t h e potentiometers could e s t a b l i s h To avoid an o s c i l l a t i n g output from r i p p l e o r This e f f e c t i v e l y changes lower c u r r e n t s , 25 milliamperes p e r diode i s considered a low l i m i t f o r random n o i s e , a h y s t e r i s i s - c i r c u i t i s included which feeds a p o r t i o n of t h e output s i g n a l back t o t h e p o s i t i v e base. t h e i n p u t c u r r e n t s and changes current 10. The amount of c u r r e n t change i s determined by t h e equivalent impedance attached t o t h e 2 microamps. During Model mode t h e negative base ard i s expressed a s l R equivalent r e s i s t a n c e i s 500 ohms and t h e c u r r e n t becomes 25.6 microamperes, which corresponds t o approximately 0.1 degree p e r second. When i n t h e No-Model mode t h e equivalent r e s i s t a n c e i s 645 ohms, which gives a h y s t e r i s i s of approximately 0.08 degrees p e r second. 11-101. To ensure t h a t both t h e primary and monitor threshold a m p l i f i e r s switch t o g e t h e r an a s s i s t c i r c u i t i s included which feeds a s i g n a l from t h e primary threshold a m p l i f i e r ' s output t o t h e p o s i t i v e input of t h e monitor channel t h r e s h o l d amplifier. The amount of a s s i s t can be varied
11-66
Report No. 7260-954002
by s e t t i n g a 500-kilohm a s s i s t adjustment potentiometer.
During Model
modes, t h e amount of a s s i s t can be adjusted from 0.21 t o 0.36 degree p e r second and during No-Model model from 0.16 t o 0.28 degree p e r second.
A t t h e minimum s p e c i f i e d r a t e threshold s e t t i n g of 0.5 degree
p e r second and maximum a s s i s t , an o f f s e t margin of 0.14 degrees p e r second i s allowed before a hardover primary threshold a m p l i f i e r t u r n s on t h e Monitor Channel Threshold a m p l i f i e r and does not t r i g g e r t h e Monitor Comparator c i r c u i t . The threshold a m p l i f i e r output i s i n t r i n a r y - s i n g l e l i n e form (-10, 0 , +I0 v o l t s DC) and t h e jet-logic r e q u i r e s a binary-two l i n e form;therefore, an i n v e r t e r a m p l i f i e r i s included t o change t h e threshold a m p l i f i e r ' s negative output t o a p o s i t i v e ten-volt output on a separate line. 11-102. .The i v v e r t i n g a m p l i f i e r i s c o n t r o l l e d by t r a n s i s t o r Q1and t h e clamping zener diode. With a non-negative output from t h e threshold With a negative ten-volt output from a m p l i f i e r , The autputs of t h e p i t c h and r o l l The yaw a m p l i f i e r , A l , t r a n s i s t o r Q1 i s turned ON and t h e i n v e r t e r output, TP-C i s kept near zero v o l t s .
A l , t r a n s i s t o r Q1 i s c u t o f f and t h e output, TP-C i s clamped a t t h e zener

diode voltage, nominally +I0 v o l t s DC. threshold a m p l i f i e r and i n v e r t e r c i r c u i t a r e applied t o p i t c h and r o l l opposing rocket i n h i b i t l o g i c c i r c u i t s f o r these two channels. primary and monitor channels do not r e q u i r e t h i s stage. 11-103. ROCKET INHIBIT LOGIC CIRCUIT inputs.
The rocket i n h i b i t l o g i c c i r c u i t
( f i g u r e 11-24) r o u t e s t h e i n p u t s t o t h e c o r r e c t j e t rocket power a m p l i f i e r Diode-Transistor Logic (DTL) i s used t o implement t h e j e t l o g i c For an operational a n a l y s i s , assume a s i g n a l a x i s TP-A goes t o t e n v o l t s and diode D l i s of t h e c i r c u i t .
P i t c h U command, 8 up, i s given. p back biased while diode TP-A t o t r a n s i s t o r Q2. approximately
D5 forward conducts and couples t h e voltage a t

T r a n s i s t o r Q i s an e m i t t e r follower and provides 2 Since t h e r e a r e no P i t c h Down o r R o l l L e f t 11-67
9.3 v o l t s DC rocket f i r i n g command (TP-C) t o t h e AT Cs
rocket power amplifier. Report No. 7260-954002
commands, t h e v o l t a g e a t TP-B i s approximately -0.7 v o l t s DC which allows 2 d i o d e D t o conduct and TP-E i s near zero v o l t s . t r a n s i s t o r Q1 o f f and TP-F a t a s d e s c r i b e d above. This keeps I n h i b i t
+ 15 v o l t s
DC.
Therefore, diode
D 3 i s cut-
o f f and allows t h e command s i g n a l t o p a s s through e m i t t e r f o l l o w e r , Q2 Now, assume while t h e P i t c h U command i s p r e s e n t , p This w i l l d r i v e t h e v o l t a g e a t TP-B t o With both diodes a R o l l L e f t command i s given.
approximately +I0 v o l t s DC and back b i a s diode D2.
D l and D2 c u t o f f , I n h i b i t T r a n s i s t o r Q1t u r n s ON, which t u r n s ON, diodes
D3 and D 4 keeping t r a n s i s t o r Q2 and Q3 e m i t t e r s clamped a t approximately
0.6 v o l t s ' DC and p r e v e n t i n g any A o r C r o c k e t from t u r n i n g ON.
From
f i g u r e 11-24 it can be seen t h a t r o c k e t c l u s t e r B D w i l l be commanded S T ON i n s t e a d , t h e r e f o r e providing one r o c k e t p e r s e t t o f i r e . The o u t p u t s a r e a l s o r o u t e d t o t h e monitor comparator s t a g e . 11-104. ROCKET AMPLIFIERS CIRCUIT
There a r e 16 r o c k e t s o l e n o i d d r i v i n g The two s e c t i o n s a r e
a m p l i f i e r s , ( f i g u r e 11-25) one f o r each r o c k e t s o l e n o i d , and each c o n s i s t s of a p r e a m p l i f i e r and power a m p l i f i e r s e c t i o n . connected a s a Darlington a m p l i f i e r and d r i v e t h e
15 ohm r o c k e t s o l e n o i d
c o i l . The r e q u i r e d c u r r e n t g a i n of 720 i s e a s i l y m e t by t h e two t r a n s i s t o r s w i t h minimum gains of 25 f o r t h e 2N2015 and 40 f o r t h e 2N2297 throughout t h e o p e r a t i n g temperature range of 0' t o 1 4 0 ' ~ . ground t e s t i n g o r whenever t h a t p a r t i c u l a r rocket s e t has n o t been selected. Relay K2 i s used f o r s e l e c t i n g t h e Primary o r Backup Rocket Amplifiers t o d r i v e t h e r o c k e t s o l e n o i d s , and i s c o n t r o l l e d by t h e Emergency Relay Logic.
A two
kilohm dummy l o a d r e s i s t o r r e p l a c e s t h e r o c k e t s o l e n o i d c o i l d u r i n g
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No. 7260-954002
+28 VDC
a
470
2K DUMMY LA OD
FROM
BACKUP POWER AMP
TO MONITOR COMPARATOR FIG 11-26

Figure 11-25. Rocket Amplifier C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram
11-105. MONITORING, DETECTION AND SWITCHING CIRCUITS 11-106. C i r c u i t a n a l y s i s i s provided f o r t h e monitor comparator, a t t i t u d e synchronizer r a t e s w i t c h , excess r a t e d e t e c t o r , hand c o n t r o l l e r malfunct i o n d e t e c t o r , s t u c k valve d e t e c t o r , 2 - j e t l 4 - j e t level detector. 11-107. MONITOR COMPARATOR switching, and H202 f u e l
A l l i n p u t s i g n a l s t o t h e monitor comparator
The r o c k e t s o l e n o i d
( f i g u r e 11-26) a r e b i n a r y , b u t t h e two r o c k e t solenoid s i g n a l s a r e a t d i f f e r e n t l e v e l s t h a n t h e two j e t command s i g n a l s . s i g n a l s a r e approximately p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s DC w i t h a 15-ohm o r 2-kilohm source impedance when OFF and approximately a p o s i t i v e 11-70 Report NO. 7260-954002
0.1 v o l t DC with 0.5-ohm source impedance when ON. when OFF.
The j e t command
s i g n a l s a r e p o s i t i v e 10 v o l t s DC when ON and approximately zero v o l t s DC
11-108. Operational a n a l y s i s i s made with an assumption t h a t t h e r e a r e no command s i g n a l s from e i t h e r t h e Primary or Monitor channels, P and M, and both s e t s of r o c k e t s a r e OFF. T r a n s i s t o r gate Ql w i l l be OFF, gate Q2 Nw assume t h e primary o
w i l l be ON, t h e 330 ufd capacitor w i l l be charged t o p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s
DC, and t h e r e l a y c o i l voltage w i l l be zero.

and t u r n s ON the' AT rocket continously.
channel power a m p l i f i e r output t r a n s i s t o r s h o r t s c o l l e c t o r t o e m i t t e r This w i l l t u r n gate' QlON and The c a p a c i t o r w i l l provide a discharge path f o r t h e charged capacitor. i n g voltage drop across r e l a y Kt's c o i l . approximately
d i s c h a r g e towards approximately p o s i t i v e 16 v o l t s DC,creating an increasRelay K 1 w i l l p u l l - i n a f t e r
360 milliseconds and i t s contact w i l l cause t h e r e l a y l o g i c t o switch t o Rate Backup. T r a n s i s t o r s Q3 and Q i n v e r t the monitor 4
channel j e t l o g i c and rocket solenoid s i g n a l s r e s p e c t i v e l y , and t r a n s i s t o r s Q1and Q2 function a s . t h e gating t r a n s i s t o r s which provide a ground p a t h t o discharge t h e 330 ufd capacitor. 11-109. ATTITUDE SYNCHRONIZER R T SWITCH AE f i l t e r e d by capacitor C1, ( f i g u r e 11-27),
The 400-hertz, AC r a t e gyro
s i g n a l i s amplified and then r e c t i f i e d by r e c t i f i e r diode CR1 and When t h e s i g n a l voltage exceeds t h e b i a s on t r a n s i s t o r &I, r e l a y d r i v e r t r a n s i s t o r Q2 conducts and r e l a y
K 1 and K a r e energized. 2
The b i a s on &I i s fixed by Zener diode a t
7.5 v o l t s DC.
The i n p u t s i g n a l l e v e l i s proportional t o t h e r a t e of The t r i g g e r adjustment c o n t r o l s t h e gain of t h e input As t h e
a t t i t u d e changes.
a m p l i f i e r and i s a d j u s t a b l e between 1 t o 3 degrees p e r second. a t t i t u d e reference.
r e l a y i s energized, t h e a t t i t u d e synchronizer c i r c u i t s updates i t s
Report No. 7260-954002
NOTE : +O. 1 VDC = ON +28 VDC = OFF
Repcrt No.
7260-954002
11-110. EXCESS RATE DETECTOR
The e x c e s s r a t e d e t e c t o r ( f i g u r e 11-25)
monitors t h e o u t p u t of t h e r a t e gyro and e n e r g i z e s t h e emergency backup r e l a y whenever t h e r a t e exceeds a p r e s e t q u a n t i t y nominally 25 p e r second. 400-hertz r a t e gyro s i g n a l . ment p o t e n t i o m e t e r .
2 1 deg
The c i r c u i t o p e r a t e s by half-wave r e c t i f y i n g t h e incoming This g i v e s a DC output' s i g n a l from ampli-
f i e r , A 1 whose g a i n i s a d j u s t a b l e by u s i n g t h e 22-turn t r i g g e r a d j u s t The output of a m p l i f i e r A 1 t u r n s on t h e t r i g g e r The p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s DC output of t r a n s i s t o r Q2 The adjustment c i r c u i t and DC c u r r e n t a m p l i f i e r Q1, Q when it exceeds approximately 2 p o s i t i v e 7.6 v o l t s DC. e n e r g i z e s an approximately 600-ohm r e l a y c o i l , and causes t h e r e l a y l o g i c t o s w i t c h t o t h e r e q u i r e d emergency c o n d i t i o n . p o t e n t i o m e t e r a l l o w s s e t t i n g of t r i g g e r from 2 4 t o 26 degrees p e r secord.
11-111. The r e l a t i o n s h i p between t h e excess r a t e c i r c u i t s f o r t h e

primary monitor channel and t h e backup channel i s shown i n f i g u r e 11-29. When an approximately 22 degree p e r second r a t e gyro output ( r o l l o r p i t c h ) i s d e t e c t e d by t h e monitor excess r a t e c i r c u i t s , K17 i s energized. Relay Kl7 C c o n t a c t s s e r v e t o l a t c h Kl7 and de-energize r e l a y s K 1 , K3 and
K i n t h e backup e l e c t r o n i c s package ( ~ r i m a r ~ / B a c ksu ~i t c h S7 i n 4 w

PRIMARY p o s i t i o n a s shown). Relay K 1 c o n t a c t s a p p l i e s p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s The c o n t a c t s of K3 and
DC t o i l l u m i n a t e t h e AUTO PILOT BACK U i n d i c a t o r . P
K4 a r e switched from t h e primary r o c k e t a m p l i f i e r s t o t h e backup r o c k e t

amplifiers.
A backup gyro hardover c o n d i t i o n , a power f a i l u r e i n t h e
a t t i t u d e gyro package, o r any o t h e r cause of a n excess r a t e o u t p u t from t h e backup e x c e s s r a t e d e t e c t o r a u t o m a t i c a l l y p l a c e s t h e system i n t o t h e primary channel (when ~ r i m a r ~ / B a c ksu ~ t c h i s i n PRIMARY p o s i t i o n ) wi a p p l i e s p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s DC t o t h e r e l a y s K 1 , e l e c t r o n i c s package.
Relay K 4 , l o c a t e d i n monitor e l e c t r o n i c s i s energized and c o n t a c t s B
K3, and K4, i n t h e backup
Relay K A c o n t a c t s a p p l i e s a ground t o t h e 4 I f t h e output from t h e backup excess r a t e
GYRO FAILURE i n d i c a t o r .
d e t e c t o r i s momentary, t h e n t h e system r e t u r n s t o t h e backup mode. When
11-74
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No.
7260-943002
t h e GYRO FAILURE i n d i c a t o r remains illuminated, i n d i c a t i n g a continuing backup excess r a t e d e t e c t o r output, t h e system remains i n primary. The a p p r o p r i a t e A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch s h a l l be placed i n t h e DIRECT p o s i t i o n by t h e p i l o t . detector circuit. 11-112. HAND CONTROLLER M L U C I N D T C O CIRCUIT A F N TO EET R Control of r e l a y K17 ( f i g u r e 11-29) i s a l s o accomplished through operation of t h e hand c a n t r o l l e r . m a l f u n c t i o n
- The hand
controller
( malfunction d e t e c t o r (HCMD) f i g u r e 11-30) i s destgned t o d e t e c t hardover o r open conditions i n e i t h e r t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r ' s l i n e a r transformer (synchro) o r f u n c t i o n a l d i r e c t switch (FDS) and switch t h e A S system C ( s i n g l e a x i s ) t o a s a f e backup mode. separate detection c i r c u i t s . comparator. This i s accomplished by comparing t h r e e p i e c e s of information ( s i g n a l s ) from t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r i n t w o One c i r c u i t compares t h e synchro s i g n a l with a l o g i c d i r e c t switch (LDS) s i g n a l and i s t h e synchro/direct switch The LDS i s t h e same type switch a s t h e FDS, except i t i s not The o t h e r c i r c u i t compares t h e two d i r e c t switch Each comparaused f o r f i r i n g r o c k e t s o r c o n t r o l l i n g t h e vehicle; it i s only used i n t h e HCMD l o g i c c i r c u i t s . s i g n a l s , LDS and FDS, and i s t h e d i r e c t switch comparator. t o r c i r c u i t w i l l be considered s e p a r a t e l y .
11-113. The d i r e c t switch comparator operates by adding t h e voltages from

t h e LDS and FDS switches, and applying t h e r e s u l t a n t voltage t o a f i x e d threshold t r i g g e r c i r c u i t . approximately zero. Since t h e LDS and FDS switches a r e excited w i t h equal but opposite p o l a r i t y voltages t h e sum a t TP-K w i l l always be However, i f e i t h e r switch s t i c k s open ( 0 v o l t s DC) The t r i g g e r voltage, approximately o r hardover (15 v o l t s DC) t h e other s t i l l continues t o operate and t h e voltage a t TP-K w i l l increase.
3.3 v o l t s DC a t TP-K, i s s e t low enough so t h a t t h e 7.5 v o l t s DC r e s u l t i n g

from a switch malfunction can overcome i t , y e t power supply and c i r c u i t o f f s e t s o r noise during normal operation w i l l n o t t r i g g e r it. The t r i g g e r c i r c u i t a m p l i f i e r output, TP-M i s applied t o r e l a y K 1 contact which allows Report No. 7260-954002
11 -77
Report No.
7260-954002
t h e s i g n a l t o energize r e l a y K and switch t h e A S t o Rate Backup mode 4 C i f operating in Direct mode; o r i f operating i n Rate mode an i n h i b i t s i g n a l i s s e n t t o t h e synchro/direct switch comparator c i r c u i t . This i n h i b i t s i g n a l i s necessary i n t h e case where t h e LDS malfunctions. Since
it i s used i n common with both comparators, each would attempt t o switch

t h e A S system. C However, t h e r e i s no need t o switch while operating i n Another need f o r t h e In Rate mode s i n c e t h e synchro i s s t i l l functional.
i n h i b i t a r i s e s i f a FDS malfunctions while operating i n Rate mode.
3 t h i s case it i s mandatory t h a t r e l a y K not be energized, s i n c e it w i l l

l a t c h t h e system i n t o t h e Direct mode which already has a bad FDS. Since t h e L S and FDS a r e not e x a c t l y matched and t h e r e f o r e break and make a t D s l i g h t l y d i f f e r e n t amounts of hand c o n t r o l l e r motion, an enable c i r c u i t a m p l i f i e r A&, i s included which keeps a m p l i f i e r A 3 from switching f o r hand c o n t r o l l e r d e f l e c t i o n s l e s s than approximately 4.5 degrees. A n enable i n p u t and d i r e c t switch i n p u t s a r e included f o r t e s t i n g of t h e d i r e c t switch comparator from t h e t e s t c a r t .
11-114. The synchro/direct switch comparator operates by changing t h e

D l i n e a r DC s t i c k voltage i n t o t r i n a r y , d i g i t a l form, adding t h e L S switch v o l t a g e t o i t , and applying t h e r e s u l t a n t voltage t o a f i x e d threshold trigger circuit. The t r i n a r y , d i g i t a l s i g n a l i s obtained from a m p l i f i e r , Since t h e a m p l i f i e r output, TP-A
DC l e v e l , s c a l i n g r e s i s t o r s a r e A five
A 1 by using a threshold o r deadzone a m p l i f i e r adjusted t o switch a t about t h e same time a s t h e L S switch. D a t a positive
i s a t p o s i t i v e 10, 0 o r negative 10 v o l t s DC l e v e l , and t h e L S switch i s D
15, 0 , o r negative 15 v o l t s
used t o c r e a t e a zero sum f o r normal hand c o n t r o l l e r operation. microfarad c a p a c i t o r i s used t o c r e a t e a delay before t r i g g e r i n g a m p l i f i e r A2.
The t r i g g e r voltage, approximately 3.1 v o l t s DC a t TP-E,
i n conjunction with t h e R-C time constant determines t h e time delay which
i s t y p i c a l l y 360 milliseconds f o r a hardover L S switch and 300 m i l l i D

seconds f o r a hardover synchro s i g n a l . drives r e l a y when a m p l i f i e r A i s t r i g g e r e d it 2
K 3 which l a t c h e s t h e malfunctioning a x i s i n t o t h e Direct-No

11-79
Report No. 7260-954002
Model mode.
This mode can only be r e s e t by t u r n i n g off power o r energizing Since t h e LDS switch possesses
a r e l e a s e r e l a y from t h e Avionic t e s t c a r t .
h y s t e r i s i s (approximately 0.3 deg) an a s s i s t path i s added from t h e switch t o t h e synchro t h r e s h o l d a m p l i f i e r i n p u t through a s s i s t r e s i s t o r , RA. This allows t h e LDS switch and threshold a m p l i f i e r t o switch together and avoid c r e a t i n g a pseudo backup within t h e regions of t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r where switch h y s t e r i s i s i s e f f e c t i v e . The a s s i s t r e s i s t o r i s scaled such t h a t it cannpt overcome t h e threshold by i t s e l f , but w i l l add enough s i g n a l t o t h e synchro i n p u t s i g n a l t o allow simultaneous switching of a m p l i f i e r ~ l ' t h e LDS. and conditims.
.
Diodes D l and D a r e included i n order t o 2
maintain a n e a r l y equal time delay f o r a l l Synchro o r LDS type f a i l u r e This i s done by keeping a m p l i f i e r A 1 from generating an outp u t of t h e same p o l a r i t y a s t h e LDS, and prevents charging t h e f a r a d c a p a c i t o r f a s t e r than t h e s i n g l e hardover s i g n a l case.
5 microAmplifier A 1
i s kept a t zero by feeding t h e LDS s i g n a l through diodes D l and D i n t o 2

t h e t h r e s h o l d bridge and i n c r e a s i n g t h e equivalent threshold c u r r e n t such t h a t t h e synchro s i g n a l cannot overcome it and t u r n t h e a m p l i f i e r ON. It should be noted t h a t t h e synchro/direct switch comparator i s always enabled, u n l i k e t h e direct, switch comparator which i s only enabled when t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r i s d e f l e c t e d beyond 4.5 degrees.
11-115. STUCK VAL'JE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
The stuck valve d e t e c t o r ( f i g u r e This i s
11-31) senses when any of e i g h t p a i r s of opposing rockets a r e f i r i n g , and a f t e r a f i x e d time d e l a y energizes t h e s t u c k valve r e l a y . accomplished by monitoring each of t h e f i v e kilohm a t t i t u d e rocket p r e s s u r e t r a n s d u c e r potentiometers with two i n p u t diode AND c i r c u i t s . The output of each AND c i r c u i t i s then OR'd i n t o t h e i n p u t of a t r i g g e r c i r cuit. Consider t h e opposing rocket p a i r AT CS: when both rockets a r e o f f t h e v o l t a g e a t t h e arm of each potentiometer i s about negative 4.7 v o l t s DC, allowing diodes D and D3 t o forward conduct and put approxi2 mately n e g a t i v e 4.0 v o l t s DC a t TP-A. This i s n o t enough t o t u r n ON t r a n s i s t o r s Q 1 , Q2, which a r e referenced t o negative 5.0 v o l t s DC, and 11-80 Report No. 7260-9511002
t h e r e f o r e t h e c i r c u i t remains u n t r i g g e r e d .
I f r o c k e t AT now f i r e s ,
i n c r e a s i n g t h e potentiometer v o l t a g e t o s a y p o s i t i v e 1 v o l t DC,and r o c k e t C remains o f f a t n e g a t i v e 4.7 v o l t s DC, on t h e p o t e n t i o m e t e r arm, S TP-A i s s t i l l h e l d a t n e g a t i v e 4.0 v o l t s DC by diode D3 and d i o d e D w i l l 2 cutoff. Since TP-A v o l t a g e i s unchanged, t h e c i r c u i t w i l l a g a i n n o t be However, i f both r o c k e t s t u r n ON such t h a t t h e v o l t a g e a t The time-delay o p e r a t e s a s triggered.
TP-A i n c r e a s e s t o n e g a t i v e 2.9 v o l t s DC a t t h e potentiometer arm and i s e q u i v a l e n t t o t e n pounds of r o c k e t t h r u s t . follows: i n i t i a l l y t h e 36 microfarad timing c a p a c i t o r i s uncharged, a l l t r a n s i s t o r s a r e o f f and TP-B and TP-C a r e a t p o s i t i v e 22.5 v o l t s DC. When t r a n s i s t o r Q2 i s t u r n e d ON, t h e v o l t a g e a t TP-B becomes n e g a t i v e 4.7 v o l t s
DC, and t h e c a p a c i t o r begins t o charge towards t h i s v o l t a g e w i t h approx-
i m a t e l y a 580 m i l l i s e c o n d time c o n s t a n t .
When t h e c a p a c i t o r charges t o
about p o s i t i v e 8.2 v o l t s DC, t r a n s i s t o r Q3 c m d u c t s and l a t c h e s t h e c i r c u i t ON by f e e d i n g a r e g e n e r a t i v e c u r r e n t through t h e IN4104 zener diode back t o &I base. The time-delay r e q u i r e d t o t u r n ON t r a n s i s t o r
Q3
i s nominally 208 milliseconds.
When r e l a y K 1 i s energized it . i l l u m i n a t e s
t h e VALVE STUCK i n d i c a t o r .and switches t h e system t o both s e t s of r o c k e t s , Diode D l p r o v i d e s a quick d i s c h a r g e p a t h (72 m i l l i s e c o n d time c o n s t a n t ) f o r t h e delay capacitor. This h e l p s t o p r e v e n t overlapping p r e s s u r e decay p u l s e s from f a l s e l y t r i g g e r i n g t r a n s i s t o r Q3.
11-116. 2-JET/&-JET SWITCHING CIRCUIT
The 2- jet/&- j e t switching c i r c u i t
( f i g u r e 11-32) i s designed t o e n e r g i z e r e l a y K 1 whenever t h e a b s o l u t e value of t h e d i f f e r e n c e between the synchro ( s t i c k ) command and t h e model o u t p u t i s g r e a t e r t h a n approximately one degree p e r second. a m p l i f i e r A 1 w i t h a gain of 3.65. This i s accomplished by a p p l y i n g t h e DC s t i c k and model s i g n a l s t o d i f f e r e n c e The output of a m p l i f i e r A 1 goes t o t r i g g e r a m p l i f i e r , A whose output t h e n d r i v e s c u r r e n t a m p l i f i e r Q1, Q2. 2 The t r i g g e r a m p l i f i e r ' s output switches from n e g a t i v e 0.5 v o l t s DC t o p o s i t i v e 10.5 v o l t s DC, when t h e v o l t a g e a t TP-A exceeds p o s i t i v e 1.83 v o l t s DC. The c i r c u i t s output t r a n s i s t o r d r i v e s r e l a y K 1 which switches
Report No. 7260-954-002
11-81
11-82
Report No.
7260-954002
+15 VDC
0
DIRECT MODE SELeCT
Figure 11-32.
2 - ~ e / 4 - ~ e t Switching C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram t
t h e model i n t e g r a t o r ' s i n p u t r e s i s t o r and doubles t h e model s l o p e t o sim-
u l a t e 4 - j e t operation. 11-117. H20Z FUEL LEVEL DETECTOR CIRCUIT
The hydrogen peroxide f u e l This i s accomplished
l e v e l d e t e c t o r c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-33) computes t h e f u e l consumed by t h e s i x t e e n a t t i t u d e r o c k e t s and t h e two l i f t r o c k e t s . by monitoring t h e o u t p u t t r a n s i s t o r of each r o c k e t power a m p l i f i e r and a l i f t r o c k e t chamber p r e s s u r e t r a n s d u c e r , c o n v e r t i n g t h e ON s i g n a l s t o c u r r e n t s r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e burnoff r a t e s and summing t h e s e c u r r e n t s i n a chopper s t a b i l i z e d i n t e g r , a t o r a m p l i f i e r .
A T - r e s i s t o r network i s used t o
The out-
b i a s any OFF o r q u i e s c e n t d r i f t s , and a slew s w i t c h i s used f o r a d j u s t ment of t h e i n t e g r a t o r o u t p u t and hence t h e i n d i c a t o r reading. w i t h t h e c o c k p i t f u e l remaining i n d i c a t o r . p u t i s a p p l i e d t o a b i a s and s c a l e f a c t o r network t o make it compatible
11-118. For c i r c u i t a n a l y s i s , assume a l l r o c k e t s a r e OFF except AT. With

AT ON t h e i n v e r t e r t r a n s i s t o r Q1 i s t u r n e d OFF and t h e v o l t a g e a t TP-A
i s clamped a t t e n v o l t s by. t h e 114 M l O Z l zener diode.

network.
TP-B w i l l i n c r e a s e
by 100 m i l l i v o l t s and w i l l be t h e i n p u t s i g n a l t o t h e i n t e g r a t o r i n p u t Relay K l i s e n e r g i z e d i f t h e t e s t r o c k e t s a r e s e l e c t e d , r e l a y K if s t a n d a r d r o c k e t s a r e s e l e c t e d , both r e l a y s i f t h e ACS Safe s w i t c h 2
i s i n SAFE p o s i t i o n , and n e i t h e r r e l a y i s e n e r g i z e d i f both s e t s a r e

selected. Assume t e s t r o c k e t s a r e s e l e c t e d , t h u s t h e i n p u t p a t h i s Similarly, The through r e l a y K2A c o n t a c t and a 22-turn, 500-kilohm t r i m p o t e n t i o m e t e r i s used f o r a d j u s t i n g t h e burnoff r a t e from 0.57 t o 0.82 l b / s e c . f o r a given l i f t r o c k e t t h r u s t , t h e 22-turn, t i o m e t e r can be s e t u s i n g a s c a l e f a c t o r of 10-kilohm adjustment poten-
57 MV/LB/SEC a t TP-E.
i n t e g r a t o r o u t p u t i s s c a l e d f o r zero v o l t s DC t o be e q u i v a l e n t t o 700 pounds and n e g a t i v e 10 v o l t s DC t o be e q u i v a l e n t t o z e r o pounds.
Report No. 7260-954002
JET ENGINE ATTITUDE C N R L CIRCUITS OTO 11-120. C i r c u i t a n a l y s i s i s provided f o r t h e s e c i r c u i t s p a r t l y i n t h e same o r d e r a s t h e block diagram a n a l y s i s , however, a s a t y p i c a l c i r c u i t
i s u s u a l l y d i s c u s s e d , a continuous, o p e r a t i o n a l sequence i s n o t necess a r i l y followed i n t h e discussion. 11-121. EXCESS A G E WITH RESPECT T VERTICAL NL O
The excess a n g l e c i r c u i t
( f i g u r e 11-34) computes t h e p i t c h and r o l l j e t engine angle w i t h r e s p e c t t o a l o c a l v e r t i c a l r e f e r e n c e (defined by t h e v e r t i c a l gyro) and e n e r g i z e s emergency r e l a y K 1 (KIO i n f i g u r e 11-35) whenever e i t h e r t h e p i t c h o r r o l l a n g l e exceeds
15 degrees.
The c i r c u i t f u n c t i o n s by
a l g e b r a i c a l l y adding t h e gimbal potentiometer and gyro DC s i g n a l s and applying t h e sum t o a t h r e s h o l d bridge a m p l i f i e r which i s s c a l e d
(47 mtcroamperes) t o s w i t c h a t 15 2 1 degrees. I f t h e a m p l i f i e r output TP-A i s p o s i t i v e it i s a p p l i e d t o r e l a y d r i v i n g t r a n s i s t o r , Q2; i f t h e output i s n e g a t i v e it i s a p p l i e d t o i n v e r t i n g a m p l i f i e r , Q1and then

passed t o t r a n s i s t o r Q2.' A OR diode network i s used t o connect t h e n p i t c h and r o l l excess a n g l e a m p l i f i e r o u t p u t s t o t h e d r i v i n g t r a n s i s t o r , Q 2 . 11-122. The emergency r e l a y K l (K10 on f i g u r e 11-35) c o n t a c t s a p p l i e s p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s DC t o t h e MAX ENGINE TILT i n d i c a t o r and r e l a y K13
11-35>. Relay K13 a p p l i e s p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s DC from t h e Gimbal 5 Lock s w i t c h ( i n OFF p o s i t i o n ) and de-energized c o n t a c t s of r e l a y K

(figure through diode CR17 t o t h e e m i t t e r of t r a n s i s t o r Q1 i n t h e Gimbal Lo* Warning Diode Box, and t o t h e gimbal l o c k solenoid L1, which e n e r g i z e s , p l a c i n g t h e engine i n gimbal locked (engine centered) c o n f i g u r a t i o n . The OKD conduction of Ql through diode CR39 and t h e EMERG GIMBALS L C E i n d i c a t o r illuminates t h a t indicator. h y d r a u l i c sequence. Refer t o s e c t i o n V f o r a d e s c r i p t i o n of t h e
Report No. 7260-954002
---- j
RCE OKT AMP
i
I
10 VDC
BT
Crn
1 -
INV
1rw-i-RTER
1
A(TO Fig. 11-33 )
1OOK
NVV
* A h .
tI r n
1v
> B(TOFig.
11-33 )
Figure 11-35.
H202 Fuel Level Detector C i r c u i t , Schematic D i a g r a m
(Sheet 1 of 2 )
Report No. 7260-954002
TEST INJECT
+15 VDC
From Fig. 11-33
From Fig. 11-33
From Fig. 11-33 C
t
Figure Report No. 7260-954002
SELECT (TYP-600)
11-33.. H202 Fuel Level Detector Circuit, Schematic Diagram

(Sheet 2 of 2)
1 1-87
+15 VDC
30%
Figure 11-34.
Excess Angle With Respect to Vertical Circuit, Schematic Diagram
11-123. EXCESS ANGLE ALONG STRUTS CIRCUIT
The excess angle along the
s t r u t c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-36) computes t h e sum of t h e absolute p i t c h and r o l l gimbal a n g l e s , and energizes r e l a y K l whenever t h i s sum exceeds 64 degrees. computed.
It should be noted t h a t a l i n e a r and not v e c t o r i a l sum i s

The computer i s mechanized by feeding the p i t c h and r o l l These s i g n a l s a r e then compared t o a f i x e d t r i g g e r
gimbal angle potentiometer s i g n a l s through s t e e r i n g diodes t o t h e i n p u t of a m p l i f i e r , A l . c u r r e n t and when t h e y exceed an equivalent sum of 64 degrees t h e r e l a y ' s t r a n s i s t o r d r i v e r , Qi,i s turned on; t h u s energizing r e l a y K l . (K12 i n f i g u r e 11-35) The r e l a y -contacts apply p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s DC t o i l l u m i n a t e t h e MAX ENGINE TILT i n d i c a t o r .
-22.5
VDC
ROLL GIMBAL POT

725 MV/DEG
Figure 11-36.
Excess Angle Along S t r u t s C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram
Report No. 7260-954002
11-124.
S M I G AMPLIFIER C I R C U I T U MN
The summing a m p l i f i e r ( f i g u r e 11-37) When
f u n c t i o n s a s a summing a m p l i f i e r only during Local V e r t i c a l mode.
r e l a y K I A c o n t a c t s c l o s e , t h e a t t i t u d e gyro s i g n a l from t h e v e h i c l e a t t i t u d e c o n t r o l system i s a p p l i e d , i n conjunction w i t h a n i n p u t from t h e gimbal potentiometer t o t h e n e g a t i v e i n p u t o f . t h e summing a m p l i f i e r . I n t h e Engine Centered mode, t h e only i n p u t i s t h e gimbal potentiometer signal. used. During Lunar Simulation mode, t h e summing a m p l i f i e r i s n o t
The a m p l i f i e r provides a gain of 7.88 v o l t s DC p e r r a d i a n .
This
output i s a p p l i e d t o t h e a c t u a t o r d r i v e a m p l i f i e r .
.001
MFD
ENGINE
7 5K
VERTICAL
TO FIG. 11-38
- VDC
Figure 11-37.
Summing Amplifier C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram
Report No. 7260-954002
11-125.
ACTUATOR DRIVE AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS
The a c t u a t o r d r i v e a m p l i f i e r The network s e r v e s a s
c o n s i s t s o f a comparator network and i n t e g r a t o r ( f i g u r e 11-38) and a v a l v e c o i l and l e a d c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-39) p a s s f i l t e r . ( 1 ) a s e r v o f i l t e r which m a i n t a i n s a low bandpass, and ( 2 ) a r i p p l e f i l t e r f o r t h e 400-hertz half-wave demodulated s i g n a l from t h e gimbal r e s o l v e r when o p e r a t i n g i n Lunar Simulation mode. a c u r r e n t deadzone. The i n t e g r a t o r amplif i e r i s used t o ensure a low s t a t i c e r r o r s i n c e t h e s e r v o flow valve h a s I n o t h e r words, without an i n t e g r a t o r a low DC o f f s e t could e x i s t which would n o t be l a r g e enough t o overcome t h e flow v a l v e ' s c u r r e n t t h r e s h o l d and t h e r e f o r e a s t e a d y s t a t e engine p o s i t i o n o f f s e t e r r o r would e x i s t .
A chopper s t a b i l i z e d low d r i f t a m p l i f i e r i s
used a s t h e i n t e g r a t o r a m p l i f i e r and e n s u r e s minimum i n t e g r a t i n g e r r o r .
A n u l l adjustment p o t e n t i o m e t e r i s included t o z e r o any i n t e g r a t o r o r

circuit drift. Relay c o n t a c t K I A i s used f o r r e s e t t i n g o r zeroing t h e i n t e g r a t o r when o p e r a t i n g i n t h e Gimbal Locked mode, s i n c e during t h i s t i m e t h e i n t e g r a t o r ' s o u t p u t could become l a r g e and c r e a t e a l a r g e t r a n s i e n t engine movement when Gimbal Lock was r e l e a s e d . 11-126. The v a l v e c o i l a m p l i f i e r i s a c u r r e n t d r i v i n g a m p l i f i e r capable The two s e r v o v a l v e c o i l s a r e connected i n s k e s which The Lead c i r c u i t i s formed by a 30.1-Kilohm r e s i s t o r and capacitor p a r a l l e l input path. The l e a d i s r e q u i r e d t o The
of supplying a maximum of f i v e milliamps t o t h e h y d r a u l i c a c t u a t o r s e r v o valve c o i l . current). c r e a t e a maximum of t e n milliamps d i f f e r e n t i a l c u r r e n t ( t h e r a t e d valve 0.68-microfarad
compensate f o r o t h e r l a g s o r d e l a y s i n t h e j e t s t a b i l i z a t i o n l o c p .
DC g a i n of t h i s a m p l i f i e r c i r c u i t i s 2.21 milliamperes p e r v o l t .
Report No. 7260-954002
A
V
A1 2B-TP1
1A
1 OK
d1
LUNAR SIM
I\
2 . 2 MFD 3.16K
52 3K
A
i
7K U
1 OOK
A
P TO FIGURE
11-39
mm
ENGINE CENTEWD
FROM
1 1-37
-1
5 VDC
NULL ADJUST A1 2B-R1 +15 VDC
Figure 1 1 - 3 8 .
Compensation Network and.Integrator Circuit, Schematic Diagram
II
100 PFD
1\
II 4
>
FROM INTEGRATOR
499K 499K -5
.
I
FIGURE 11-38
221K
t m y ,
C
1 OK
I I
I I
1
C O I L S _1
I -
Figure 11-39. 11-127.
Valve Coil Amplifier and Lead C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram
ELECTRONIC SWITCH CIRCUIT
The e l e c t r o n i c switch ( f i g u r e 11-40)
r e c e i v e s an i n p u t voltage proportional t o t h e l i f t rocket chamber pressure. A s t h i s voltage exceeds t h e p r e s e t value e s t a b l i s h e d by t h e t r i g g e r adjustment potentiometer t h e output of a m p l i f i e r A 1 reaches a p o s i t i v e
2 . v o l t s DC. 05
When t h e Lunar Sim switch i s closed, r e l a y d r i v e r t r a n -
sistor & conducts and energizes r e l a y s K1 and K2. I clutch. Relay
2 Relay K contact
enables t h e a u t o t h r o t t l e motor d r i v e r ' s output s t a g e and magnetic
KI c o n t a c t s l a t c h i n t h e r e l a y s and enable t h e T ~ / W
The
computer t o s t a r t computing t h e weight change due t o f u e l burnoff.
l a t c h i s necessary t o ensure Lunar Simulation i s not i n t e r r u p t e d i f the L i f t Rocket Pressure drops below t h e t r i g g e r p o i n t a f t e r s t a r t of Lunar Simulation.
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No.
7260-954002
11-128.
TKRUST/WEIGHT C M U E CIRCUIT O P TR
The JP-4 burnoff weight, i s preThe i n t e g r a t o r a m p l i f i e r *s
programmed by a f i x e d i n p u t t o i n t e g r a t o r a m p l i f i e r , A3, and r e s u l t s i n 34.2 lblmin burnoff r a t e , ( f i g u r e 11-41). o u t p u t , TP-E maintained a t z e r o u n t i l Lunar Simulation i n i t i a t i o n , t h e n r e l a y K 1 i s e n e r g i z e d and t h e output i n c r e a s e s n e g a t i v e l y f o r approximately two minutes a t which time i t reaches s a t u r a t i o n . t h e a t t i t u d e hold synchronizer i n t h e A S system. C The hydrogen peroxide weight burnoff i s computed by a synchronizer c i r c u i t s i m i l a r t o Integrator amplifier,
At
A2 i s c o n t i n u o u s l y updated t o t h e peroxide remaining c i r c u i t ' s output u n t i l t h e i n i t i a t i o n of Lunar Simulation by t h e E l e c t r o n i c Switch. i n i t i a t i o n , r e l a y K 1 i s energized and t h e e q u i v a l e n t H202 f u e l remaining
i s s t o r e d a s a r e f e r e n c e on t h e i n t e g r a t o r a m p l i f i e r A2, o u t p u t , A22-TP4.
D i f f e r e n c e a m p l i f i e r , A 1 o u t p u t , TP-A then r e p r e s e n t s t h e change o r burnoff of H202 a f t e r r e l a y K 1 i s energized and hence t h e H 0 weight 2 2 l o s s d u r i n g Lunar S i m u l a t i o n f l i g h t . The l i f t t h r u s t and combined weights a r e applied t o a s o l i d s t a t e divider c i r c u i t t o generate t h e acceleration caused by t h e l i f t r o c k e t t h r u s t . 11-129. The d i v i d e r ( f i g u r e 11-42) o p e r a t e s a s follows: amplifier A 1 i s
a s t a n d a r d d i f f e r e n t i a l a m p l i f i e r except a v o l t a g e c o n t r o l l e d r e s i s t o r (field-effect t r a n s i s t o r ) i s added i n s e r i e s w i t h t h e feedback r e s i s t o r . The f i e l d - e f f e c t t r a n s i s t o r , SU-412, has a d r a i n t o source r e s i s t a n c e , R~~ ' which can be v a r i e d from 400 t o 4000 ohms q u i t e a c c u r a t e l y by cont r o l l i n g t h e g a t e t o source v o l t a g e , VGS. A matched f i e l d - e f f e c t t r a n s i s t o r i s i n c l u d e d a s p a r t of an i n p u t b i a s network t o a m p l i f i e r A2, whose o u t p u t becomes a f u n c t i o n o f V Assume a p o s i t i v e v o l t a g e , 2 V2' c r e a t e s i n p u t c u r r e n t i t o a m p l i f i e r A2. The a m p l i f i e r w i l l t h e n 2 a d j u s t i t s o u t p u t v o l t a g e u n t i l t h e n e g a t i v e b i a s c u r r e n t flowing through t h e SU-412 t r a n s i s t o r e q u a l s i2.
Report No. 7260-954002
u u x r UT
1OK
20K
I
Vl
7 CIRCUIT
-1
DIVIDE1
A22-TP4
1 1 m
J -
NULL ADJUST -+I5 VI)c )OK
+15 VDC
1
5'"""
-1
{ A22R1 JP4 NULL

5
VDC
IUK
>
25A24R3
IFiITuL - 1 ADJUST
Figure 11-41
~ h r u s t h e i g h tComputer C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram
F i g u r e 11-42. 11-130.
~ h r u s t l ~ e i Computer Divider C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram ~ht
B D AXIS ERROR AMPLIFIER C I R C U I T OY
The X-,
Y-,
and Z- a x i s e r r o r and ZThe a x i s
a m p l i f i e r s a r e v e r y s i m i l a r i n c i r c u i t design.
The X- and Y-,
e r r o r a m p l i f i e r s a r e s o s i m i l a r t h a t f i g u r e 11-43 r e p r e s e n t s both. F i g u r e 11-44 i s t h e schematic f o r t h e Z-axis e r r o r a m p l i f i e r . l i n e a r a c c e l e r o m e t e r s i g n a l s and t h e v e r t i c a l gyro r e s o l v e r s i g n a l a r e summed by t h e a x i s e r r o r a m p l i f i e r f o r each a x i s ( x , Y , and Z) a m p l i f i e r . During Lunar Simulation t h i s e r r o r s i g n a l i s used t o p o s i t i o n t h e a x i s (x. Y ) t h r u s t v e c t o r t o compensate f o r d r a g a l o n g t h a t a x i s . The
11-98
Report No. 7260-954002
accelerometer s i g n a l s TP-A and TP-B a r e summed together t o compensate f o r r o t a t i o n a l v e h i c l e a c c e l e r a t i o n s and allows f o r only l i n e a r t r a n s l a t i o n a l accelerations. The X-axis h o r i z o n t a l v e r t i c a l ggro with r e s o l v e r picko f f s has a 400-hertz output scaled f o r 5/6g s i n 0. The Y-axis h o r i z o n t a l r e s o l v e r gyro command i s 5/6g cos 8 s i n
6 since r o l l
i s on t h e i n n e r
gimbal and r e q u i r e s one more r e s o l u t i o n than p i t c h . In a d d i t i o n t h e vdc Y-axis 400-hertz i s scaled f o r 7.71 - which r e q u i r e s d i f f e r e n t f i l t e r g The e r r o r amplicomponents. The X-axis output i s scaled f o r 33.2 vdc ge ' f i e r s i g n a l i s then modulated a t 1100-hertz and s e n t through a 400-hertz
bandpass f i l t e r .
The bandpass f i l t e r shapes t h e square wave s i g n a l t o a
400-hertz s i n e wave output a t TP-G. resolvers.
It i s necessary t o change t h e DC
e r r o r s i g n a l t o an AC voltage i n order t o couple it through t h e gimbal For ground t e s t i n g of t h e Lunar Simulation Loop, r e l a y K 1 i s eflergized and a j e t engine gimbal potentiometer s i g n a l i s fed back t o t h e summing a m p l i f i e r , s i n c e t h e j e t engine t h r u s t i s not a b l e t o couple back through t h e accelerometers.
A n u l l adjustment potentiometer i s a l s o
included t o compensate f o r amplifier and i n p u t s i g n a l o f f s e t s .
The
Y-axis a m p l i f i e r has the.gimba1 angle potentiometer output fed back t o t h e i n v e r t i n g r a t h e r than the non-inverting i n p u t of t h e summing amplifier. This i s necessary because t h e s i g n a l phasing i n t h e engine channel d i f f e r s i n t h e p i t c h and r o l l a x i s . 11-131. The Z-axis ( v e r t i c a l ) e r r o r a m p l i f i e r ( f i g u r e 11-44) sums t h e
two Z-axis l i n e a r accelerometer s i g n a l s , t h e v e r t i c a l gyro s i g n a l and t h e t h r u s t l w e i g h t computer ( l i f t rocket a c c e l e r a t i o n ) s i g n a l , and generates an a c c e l e r a t i o n e r r o r with r e s p e c t t o t h e vehicle's Z body a x i s . During Lunar Simulation t h i s e r r o r s i g n a l i s used t o a d j u s t t h e Z - a x i s - t h r u s t t o cancel 5/6 of t h e e a r t h ' s g r a v i t y and simulate a 1/6 g r a v i t y f i e l d ( l u n a r gravity). The Z accelerometer s i g n a l s , TP-B and C , a r e summed t o g e t h e r , The v e r t i c a l gyro which compensates f o r r o t a t i o n a l vehicle a c c e l e r a t i o n s , but allow only l i n e a r t r a n s l a t i o n a l Z a x i s a c c e l e r a t i o n s t o be summed.
Report No. 7260-954002
11-99
1100-hertz s i g n a l i s scaled f o r 516 g cos 0 cos
6.
This s i g n a l i s applied
t o a phase-sensitive demodulator and f i l t e r e d . The output of t h e e r r o r vdc The e r r o r s i g n a l i s modulaa m p l i f i e r , A5A-TP2, i s scaled f o r 33.2 ge t e d a t 400-hertz, s e n t through a NO-hertz bandpass f i l t e r and applied
-.
t o t h e gimbal r e s o l v e r s .
The bandpass f i l t e r shapes t h e square wave For ground t e s t i n g of
s i g n a l i n t o a 400-hertz sine-wave output a t TP-H.
t h e Lunar Simulation Loop, r e l a y K1 i s energized and t h e auto t h r o t t l e feedback synchro i s phase-sensitive demodulated, f i l t e r e d , and fed back t o t h e summing a m p l i f i e r . hangar t e s t i n g . This i s done s i n c e t h e j e t engine t h r u s t i s n o t a b l e t o couple back through t h e Z-accelerometers while ground o r
A n u l l adjustment potentiometer i s included t o compen-
s a t e f o r a m p l i f i e r and i n p u t s i g n a l o f f s e t s . 11-132.. THRUST/WEIGHT INDICATOR AMPLIFIER
The thrust/weight i n d i c a t o r
a m p l i f i e r c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-45) monitors t h e Z-axis accelerometers and provides an output t o t h e telemetry and instrumentation system and d r i v e s t h e potentiometric thrust/weight i n d i c a t o r . The accelerometer s i g n a l s a r e summed t o produce a telemetry s i g n a l a t t h e output of a m p l i f i e r A l , TP-A, with a s c a l e f a c t o r of 6.67 vdclg, which i s applied t o a m p l i f i e r A whose i n p u t has a f i x e d bias. 2 This b i a s converts t h e l g acceleroTherefore during meter s i g n a l t o 116 g a t t h e output of a m p l i f i e r , A2.
a hover o r while s i t t i n g on t h e ground t h e thrust/weight i n d i c a t o r w i l l i n d i c a t e l g ( l u n a r ) and a m p l i f i e r A output, TP-B, w i l l be p o s i t i v e 2

1.1 v o l t s DC.
The r a t e of change about t h i s p o i n t a t TO-B w i l l be
6.67
v/~.
Report No. 7260-954002
. i
75K
ACCELER
TO THRITST/WEIGHT INDICATOR
Figure 11-45.
~ h r u s t / ~ e i ~n dti c a t o r Amplifier C i r c u i t , Schematic Diagram I h
11-133.
BOOSTEiR AMP AND RESOLUTION CIRCUIT
The b o o s t e r amp and
r e s o l u t i o n c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-46) c o n v e r t s t h e three-body a x i s a c c e l e r a t i o n e r r o r s t o t h r e e j e t engine a x i s a c c e l e r a t i o n e r r o r s i g n a l s . e r r o r s i n t h e X and Y a x i s ( XJE and s t a b i l i z a t i o n systems r e s p e c t i v e l y . tude.
..
.. d r i v e t h e p i t c h and r o l l Thet YJE) je ..

The
The Z a x i s e r r o r ( zJE) i s coupled
t o t h e a u t o t h r o t t l e c o n t r o l system t o a d j u s t t h e engine t h r u s t magniFour i d e n t i c a l b o o s t e r amps (two p e r package) a r e used a s d r i v i n g a m p l i f i e r s f o r t h e temperatur'e compensated gimbal r e s o l v e r s . t r a n s f e r f u n c t i o n of t h i s r e s o l v e r chain i s a s follows:
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No.
7260-954002
XBE
coso
ZBE coso cos$
11-134.
A T THROTTLE C A N L CIRCUITS UO HNE
The auto t h r o t t l e channel The channel has
( f i g u r e 11-47) provides a s i g n a l t o d r i v e t h e two-phase, 400-hertz r o t a r y auto t h r o t t l e a c t u a t o r motor t o t h e desired position. two modes of operation: Emergency T h r o t t l e mode. (1) t h e Lunar Simulation mode and (2) t h e I n t h e Lunar Simulation mode a Z-channel The output ampli-
acceleration e r r o r i s applied a t t h e i n p u t , TP-A, and i s fed t o the auto t h r o t t l e inotor c o n t r o l phase with an AC gain of 3500. r e l a y s during Lunar Simulation mode. f i e r s i g n a l i s coupled t o t h e motor through t h e l i m i t switch c i r c u i t During Emergency T h r o t t l e operation r e l a y s K 1 and K a r e energized, t h e t h r o t t l e command synchro si.gnal i s 2 applied a t TP-A, and t h e auto t h r o t t l e feedback synchro s i g n a l i s applied a t TP-B. The remainder of t h e e l e c t r o n i c s used i s t h e same a s during Lunar Simulation, except r e l a y contact K A couples t h e output amplifier 2 t o t h e servo motor d i r e c t l y , therefore bypassing t h e l i m i t switches.
11-135.
The selected s i g n a l o r s i g n a l s , dependent upon mode of operation, A one-microfarad capacitor forms Amplifier A 1 i s
i s amplifier, demodulated and f i l t e r e d .
a l e a d term t o compensate t h e auto t h r o t t l e servo loop.
a DC d i f f e r e n t i a l amplifier and provides u n i t y DC gain f o r t h e f i l t e r e d demodulator s i g n a l and then applies it t o another R-C f i l t e r before modulating t h e s i g n a l a t 4.00-hertz (TP-F)
The modulator output i s The output of t h e
applied t o a 90 degree R-C phase s h i f t network i n order t o provide a correctly-phased s i g n a l f o r t h e two-phase servo motor. phase s h i f t e r , TP-G, i s amplified with an AC gain of 71 and then applied Report No. 7260-954.002 11-105
Report No.
7260-954002
t o t h e Output Driver Amplifier.
The d r i v e r a m p l i f i e r i s a class-B
power a n r p l i f i e r which has a tuned t r a n s f o r m e r o u t p u t , TP-I, which couples
it t o t h e s e r v o motor c o n t r o l phase winding.
11-136.
LIMIT SWITCH CIRCUIT
The l i m i t switch c i r c u i t ( f i g u r e 11-48)
i s designed t o i n t e r r u p t t h e a u t o t h r o t t l e motor v o l t a g e s i g n a l whenever t h e t h r o t t l e d r i v e s t o o f a r forward o r backward, and allows t h e t h r o t t l e t o d r i v e back i n t o t h e accepted r e g i o n when t h e d r i v e s i g n a l i s of t h e correct polarity. off. For c i r c u i t a n a l y s i s , assume t h e t h r o t t l e i s d r i v i n g backward, t h e n t h e v o l t a g e a t TP-A i s n e g a t i v e and t r a n s i s t o r Q1i s c u t When t h e t h r o t t l e i s i n t h e a c c e p t a b l e r e g i o n , both K 1 and K2 a r e When t h e t h r o t t l e engages t h e a f t l i m i t s w i t c h , r e l a y K 1 When t h e d r i v e s i g n a l r e v e r s e s , and t h e v o l t a g e a t TP-A This allows de-energized. motor v o l t a g e .
w i l l be d r i v e n by t r a n s i s t o r Q2 and r e l a y c o n t a c t KIA w i l l c u t o f f t h e
i n c r e a s e s above approximately p o s i t i v e 2.15 v o l t s DC t r a n s i s t o r Q1w i l l t u r n ON and t h e r e f o r e c u t o f f Q2 and de-energize r e l a y K 1 . t h e motor t o run forward out of t h e a f t l i m i t switch.
11-137.
Next assume t h e t h r o t t l e d r i v e s i n t o t h e forward l i m i t switch Relay c o n t a c t K2A i n t e r r u p t s t h e motor v o l t a g e , When t h e d r i v e s i g n a l r e v e r s e s and 2 Relay K 1 and K
As the
and engages r e l a y K2.
and r e l a y c o n t a c t K2B p u t s p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s DC a t TP-B and t u r n s on t r a n s i s t o r Q1which keeps Q2 c u t o f f . a t t a i n s a magnitude g r e a t e r t h a n n e g a t i v e 2.15 v o l t s DC a t TP-A t r a n s i s t o r
&I t u r n s OFF, Q2 t u r n s ON, and r e l a y K 1 i s energized.
now a r e e n e r g i z e d and t h e t h r o t t l e d r i v e s a f t o u t of t h e l i m i t . t h e motor t o continue d r i v i n g .
2 forward l i m i t switch opens both r e l a y s K 1 and K de-energize and allow
Report No. 7260-954002
Report No.
7260-954002
11- 138.
OPERATIONAL C E K U HC O T A o p e r a t i o n a l checkout of t h e a v i o n i c s system i s performed by n
11-139.
f o l l o w i n g t h e procedures provided i n t h e Avionic System P r e f l i g h t Checkout w i t h Checkout C a r t , C h e c k l i s t Number 7260-931006.
A alternate n
checkout can be performed by following t h e procedures provided i n t h e Avionic System Manual P r e f l i g h t Checkout, Checklist Number 7260-931018. 11-140. SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING Avionics system t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g i s performed by following t h e
11-141.
procedures provided i n t h e Avionics System Hangar Ground T e s t Procedures, Report Number 7260-928050.
11 142. -
R M V L PROCEDURES E OA The removal procedures a r e provided f o r t h e a v i o n i c s system
11-143.
e l e c t r o n i c u n i t s and t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r assembly i n paragraphs 11-144 through 11-147. 11-144.. AVIONICS ELECTRONIC UNITS The removal of t h e a v i o n i c s system e l e c t r o n i c u n i t s i s performed
11-145.
by following t h e g e n e r a l procedure: CAUTION Ensure power has been o f f f o r a t l e a s t two hours before disconnecting t h e a t t i t u d e gyro u n i t .
Report No. 7260-954.002
A.
Cut and remove s a f e t y wire. Disconnect e l e c t r i c a l connectors. Loosen f r o n t and r e a r mounting r e t a i n e r s . Remove u n i t from mounting rack.
CAUTION
B.
C.
D.
During removal, . i n s t a l l a t i o n and handling of e l e c t r o n i c u n i t s , do not drop, bump o r otherwise damage t h e s e delicate electronic units.
11- 146. HAND CONTROLLER R M V L E OA 11-147. To remove t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r , proceed a s follows:

A.
Remove p l e x i g l a s cover from hand c o n t r o l l e r grip. Remove s i x b o l t s and remove cover from hand c o n t r o l l e r mounting pedestal. Remove f o u r washer-head screws from hand c o n t r o l l e r mounting pedestal. Disconnect t h e e l e c t r i c a l connections, t a g and i d e n t i f y and remove hand c o n t r o l l e r .
B.
C.
D.
11-148. 11-149.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES I n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e avionics system e l e c t r i c a l u n i t s and t h e
hand c o n t r o l l e r , i s performed i n reverse order of removal.
Report No. 7260-954002
11-150
ADJUSTMENTS The step-by-step procedures and t e s t equipment required f o r
11-151
through 11-152
adjustment of t h e avionics system a r e provided i n paragraphs 11-152
11-175, and t a b l e 11-4.

TEST EQUIPMENT
Adjustments a f t e r component replacement
a r e provided i n paragraphs 11-176 through 11-211.
11-153 The following t e s t equipment i s required - f o r ad ju.stment of t h e

avionics system.
A.
T e s t Cart, P/N 7260-703001-1 Rate Table Angle Indicator Table
B.
C.
1 - 9 STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURES 11
11-155. Adjustment of t h e avionics system i s performed by following t h e

gen:ral circuit. procedure outlined.and by r e f e r r i n g t o t a b l e 11-4 f o r each The general procedure i s f o r c i r c u i t s i n primary, monitor, Differences between channels a r e
backup channels and s p e c i a l c i r c u i t s . noted i n t e x t and t a b l e 11-4.
11-156 RATE COMMAND ADJUSTMENT
- The adjustment
of t h i s c i r c u i t c o n s i s t s
of s e t t i n g t h e gain and n u l l potentiometers. present. The procedure i s a s follows:
The two adjustments must
be made t o g e t h e r , since they i n t e r a c t when hand c o n t r o l l e r o f f s e t s a r e with t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r a t n u l l , Next, f i x t h e hand a d j u s t t h e n u l l potentiometer f o r a minumum output. f o r 10.00 v o l t s , dc.
c o n t r o l l e r a t t e n degrees ( f u l l throw) and a d j u s t t h e gain potentiometer Return t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r t o n u l l and rezero t h e output by using t h e n u l l a d j u s t potentiometer.
F i x t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r
a t t e n degees and r e a d j u s t t h e gain pot,entiometer f o r 10.00 v o l t s , dc.
Report No. 7260-954002
11-111
Return t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r t o n u l l and note t h e output. and l e t it r e t u r n t o n u l l ; note t h e output.
Fix t h e hand
c o n t r o l l e r a t t e n degrees i n t h e opposite d i r e c t i o n t o t h a t moved' before This output w i l l be d i f f e r Adjust t h e e n t s i n c e t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r has mechanical h y s t e r i s i s .
n u l l potentiometer such t h a t voltages a r e equal, but of opposite p o l a r i t y . F i n a l l y recheck and balance t h e output voltage f o r maximum p o s i t i v e and negative hand c o n t r o l l e r commands. range from 2 t o 50 m i l l i v o l t s , dc. and 26. Typical values of o f f s e t voltage The s p e c i f i c adjustment potentio-
meters and t e s t p o i n t s a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 11-4, items 1, 4, 7, 9, 24
11-15?
R T GYRO FEEDBACK ADJUSTMENT AE
- The
adjustment of t h i s c i r c u i t The two adjustments
c o n s i s t s of s e t t i n g t h e gain and n u l l potentiometers. exist. The procedure i s a s follows:
must be .made t o g e t h e r , since they i n t e r a c t when hand c o n t r o l l e r o f f s e t s w i t h t h e r a t e gyro on a r a t e t a b l e Next, (maximum input) and ,adjust t h e Return t h e r a t e gyro t o a s t i l l Rotate t h e gyro a t 20 Rotate and a t n u l l , a d j u s t t h e n u l l potentiometer f o r a minimum output. r o t a t e t h e gyro a t 20 degrees p e r second gain potentiometer f o r 10iOO v o l t s , dc.
condition and r e a d j u s t t h e n u l l potentiometer.
degrees p e r second again and r e s e t t h e gain f o r 10 v o l t s , dc. Return t h e r a t e gyro t o a s t i l l condition and note t h e n u l l voltage. r e t u r n t o a s t i l l condition; note t h e output voltage. and s t r i c t i o n . t h e gyro i n t h e opposite d i r e c t i o n a t 20 degrees per second and l e t it This n u l l output
w i l l be d i f f e r e n t t h a n before s i n c e t h e r a t e gyro possesses h y s t e r i s i s

Adjust t h e n u l l potentiometer such t h a t voltages a r e F i n a l l y recheck and balance t h e output equal, b u t of o p o s i t e p o l a r i t y . gyro r o t a t i o n s . m i l l i v o l t s , dc.
voltage f o r 20 degrees p e r second clockwise and counter-clockwise r a t e Typical values of o f f s e t voltage range from 10 t o 80 The s p e c i f i c . a d j u s t m e n t potentiometers and t e s t p o i n t s
a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 11-4, items 2,5,8, 10, 25 and 27.
Report No. 7260-954002
11-158 ATTITUDE GYRO FEEDBACK ADJUSTMENT
- The
adjustment of t h i s The two
c i r c u i t c o n s i s t s of s e t t i n g t h e gain and n u l l potentiometers. gyro o f f s e t s e x i s t . output. The procedure i s a s follows:
adjustments must be made t o g e t h e r , sunce they i n t e r a c t when a t t i t u d e with t h e a t t i t u d e gyro on a l e v e l tilt t a b l e , a d j u s t t h e n u l l potentiometer f o r a minimum Next r o t a t e t h e t a b l e t o 40 degrees and a d j u s t t h e gain Return t h e t a b l e t o l e v e l and r e a d j u s t There i s no appreciable potentiometer f o r 8 v o l t s , dc.
f o r a minimum using t h e n u l l potentiometer.
h y s t e r i s i s i n t h e v e r t i c a l gyro output and, t h e r e f o r e , no attempt i s made t o bracket o r balance t h e n u l l s i g n a l . The s p e c i f i c adjustment potentiometers a i d t e s t p o i n t s a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 11-4, items 3 and 6.
11-159 YAW ATTITUDE GYRO ADJUSTME'NT
- The adjustment of
this circuit
c o n s i s t s .of s e t t i n g t h e gain and n u l l potentiometers. offsets exist. The procedure i s a s follows:
The two adjustments
must b e made t o g e t h e r since they i n t e r a c t when d i r e c t i o n a l gyro o r CDX with t h e gyro on a t a b l e This can be accomplished Next, w i t h c a l i b r a t e d heading i n d i c a t i o n s , a d j u s t t h e gyro u n t i l an i.n-phase n u l l i s obtained a t t h e g a b potentiometer arm. by using a Phase Angle Voltmeter. Note t h e t a b l e ' s heading angle and
a d j u s t t h e n u l l potentiometer f o r a minimum DC output voltage. above and a d j u s t t h e gain potentiometer t o obtain u s i n g t h e n u l l potentiometer. balance t h e . n u l l s i g n a l .
r a t a t e t h e t a b l e 40 degrees clockwise from t h e t a b l e heading angle noted
6.55 v o l t s , dc. Return
t h e t a b l e t o t h e o r i g i n a l heading angle and readjust f o r a minimum output There i s no appreciable h y s t e r i s i s i n t h e d i r e c t i o n a l gyro output and, t h e r e f o r e , no attempt i s made t o bracket o r The s p e c i f i c potentiometers and t e s t p o i n t s a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 11-4, items 3 and 6. 11-160 THRESHOLD AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENT
- Circuit
adjustment c o n s i s t s of
(1) s e t t i n g t h e two threshold adjustment potentiometers and (2) s e t t i n g t h e primary t o monitor a s s i s t adjustment potentiometer i n t h e monitor threshold amplifier. Report No. 7260-954002 To a d j u s t t h e thresholds t h e A S system should be C
11-113
i n t h e Direct-No Model mode t o avoid o f f s e t s from t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r or feedback gyro channels. Monitor t h e shreshold amplifier output on an o s c i l l o s c o p e , i n j e c t a p o s i t i v e voltage equivalent t o t h e d e s i r e d threshold a t t h e t e s t c a r t i n j e c t i n p u t , and a d j u s t t h e negative output threshold adjustment potentiometer u n t i l it j u s t t u r n s t h e amplifier from OFF t o ON. Reverse t h e i n j e c t voltage p o l a r i t y and s i m i l a r l y a d j u s t t h e p o s i t i v e output t h r e s h o l d adjustment potentiometer. A f t e r potentiometer adjustment, t h e s e t t i n g should be checked by i n j e c t i n g an increasing voltage a t t h e t e s t c a r t t h r e s h o l d i n j e c t input u n t i l t h e a m p l i f i e r output j u s t t u r n s ON, and t h e n note t h e value of . i n j e c t voltage. This voltage should be w i t h i n The s p e c i f i c adjustment 0.1 v o l t s (0.02 deg/sec) of t h e d e s i r e d voltage.
potentiometers and t e s t p o i n t s a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 11-4. 11-1-61 The monitor channel threshold should be s e t 0.15 degrees p e r second
more t h a n t h e primary channel t o ensure t h a t t h e monitor channel threshold a m p l i f i e r does n o t t u r n on f i r s t , but i s i n s t e a d forced on by t h e Primary t o Monitor Assist c i r c u i t . on. This sequence of switching i s necessary s i n c e t h e monitor a m p l i f i e r has n6 means of f o r c i n g t h e primary channel a m p l i f i e r The a s s i s t adjustment potentiometer i s adjusted a f t e r t h e monitor F i r s t note t h e monitor channel threshold Turn ON t h e primary threshold amplifier and measure t h e a s s i s t adjustment potentiochannel t h r e s h o l d has been s e t . w i t h no a s s i s t .
monitor t h r e s h o l d again. The d i f f e r e n c e i s t h e amount of a s s i s t and can be changed by varying t h e 22 turn-500-kilohm meter. i n t a b l e 11-4, items ll, 12, 13 and 28. 11-162 ATTITUDE H L AND SYNCHRONIZER ADJUSTMENT OD The s p e c i f i c adjustment potentiometers and t e s t p o i n t s a r e l i s t e d
- Adjustment
of t h i s
c i r c u i t c o n s i s t s of (1) n u l l i n g t h e a t t i t u d e reference i n t e g r a t o r , A2, d r i f t and (2) s e t t i n g t h e a t t i t u d e threshold. hold period ( t y p i c a l l y t e n minutes) Nulling t h e a t t i t u d e reference d r i f t i s accomplished by monitoring t h e s i g n a l during an a t t i t u d e and a d j u s t i n g t h e 50 kilohm centerF i f t y m i l l i v o l t s (0.28 degrees)
Report No. 7260-954002
tapped potentiometer t o cancel t h e d r i f t .

11-1 14
should be a n upper l i m i t on t h e allowable d r i f t over t e n minutes.
The
C a t t i t u d e t h r e s h o l d potentiometer i s adjusted with t h e A S system i n Rate-No Model mode with t h e s t i c k and r a t e a m p l i f i e r outputs grounded t o a m i d null offsets. While i n a t t i t u d e hold, i n j e c t a t o t a l a t t i t u d e While s i g n a l t o e s t a b l i s h t h e required degrees of a t t i t u d e threshold. so t h e threshold a m p l i f i e r , A 3 , output j u s t t u r n s ON.
maintaining t h i s voltage, a d j u s t t h e r a t e / a t t i t u d e r a t i o potentiometer Reversethe i n j e c t v o l t a g e p o l a r i t y and check t h e coltage a t TP-A when t h e threshold a m p l i f i e r j u s t t u r n s ON; t h i s should be approximately t h e same amount of equivalent degrees a s before, The s p e c i f i c adjustment potentiometers and t e s t p o i n t s a r e l i s t e d ' i n t a b l e 11-4, item 14.
11-163 YAW ATTITUDE H L AND SYNCHRONIZER ADJUSTMENT OD

d r i f t and s e t t i n g t h e a t t i t u d e threshold.
- The
adjustment of
this c i r c u i t c o n s i s t s i n n u l l i n g t h e a t t i t u d e e r r o r i n t e g r a t o r ' s , A l , Nulling t h e a t t i t u d e e r r o r i n t e g r a t o r d r i f t i s accomplished by grounding t h e yaw DC r a t e a m p l i f i e r output, monitoring t h e i n t e g r a t o r output during an a t t i t u d e hold period ( t y p i c a l l y t e n minutes) and a d j u s t i n g t h e 50-kilohm center-tapped One v o l t (0.2 degree) The potentiometer t o cancel any e x i s t i n g d r i f t .
should be an upper l i m i t on t h e allowable d r i f t f o r t e n minutes.
a t t i t u d e threshold adjustment potentiometer should be s e t a f t e r t h e r a t e t h r e s h o l d has been adjusted, and t h e A S system should be i n t h e C Rate-No Model mode with t h e s t i c k DC amplifier's output grounded t o avoid n u l l o f f s e t s . Means should a l s o be made f o r quickly switching The adjustment Continue t o t h e DC r a t e a m p l i f i e r output t o ground a s required. 50 m i l l i v o l t s p e r second) of a t t i t u d e e r r o r change.
procedure i s t o torque t h e yaw r a t e gyro t o o b t a i n a low r a t e (about torque u n t i l t h e voltage corresponding t o t h e d e s i r e d a t t i t u d e e r r o r threshold i s obtained; a t t h i s time quickly ground t h e yaw DC r a t e a m p l i f i e r , thereby e s t a b l i s h i n g zero input s i g n a l t o t h e a t t i t u d e e r r o r i n t e g r a t o r and eliminating r a t e gyro o f f s e t contribution t o t h e threshold amplifier. The a t t i t u d e e r r o r should now remain (hold) a t t h e threshold
11-115
Report No. 7260-954002
value long enough t o ad j u s t t h e 22-turn r a t e l a t t i t u d e r a t i o adjustment potentiometer. The potentiometer should be s e t such t h a t t h e threshold I f t h e a t t i t u d e e r r o r voltage d r i f t s during a m p l i f i e r j u s t t u r n s ON.
t h i s adjustment, it w i l l be necessary t o unground t h e yaw DC r a t e amplif i e r and torque t h e r a t e gyro i n t h e d i r e c t i o n required t o r e - e s t a b l i s h t h e d e s i r e d voltage. proceed a s before. Once t h i s voltage i s obtained t h e procedure can The s p e c i f i c adjustment potentiometers and t e s t
p o i n t s a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 11-4, items 14 and 11-164. 'DIRECT M D L ADJUSTMENT OE
15.
This adjustment c o n s i s t s of s e t t i n g
t h e n u l l adjustment potentiometer t o cancel i n t e g r a t o r d r i f t and s e t t i n g t h e model a c c e l e r a t i o n potentiometer t o a t t a i n t h e desired model r a t e slope. The n u l l adjustment potentiometer i s s e t by monitoring t h e model The maximum allowable d r i f t should be a m p l i f i e r output f o r about t e n minutes, and a d j u s t i n g the n u l l potentiometer t o cancel t h e d r i f t voltage. 20 m i l l i v o l t s p e r minute. ment. c o n s i s t s of t h r e e s t e p s : The model a c c e l e r a t i o n potentiometer a d j u s t (1) a d j u s t i n g t h e
+ 15 VDC power
supplies
which energize t h e f u n c t i o n a l d i r e c t switch, (2) s e t t i n g t h e nominal a c c e l e r a t i o n i n t h e primary and monitor channel i n d i v i d u a l l y , and (3) a c c u r a t e l y matching t h e primary and monitor channel model slopes. nuisance switching t o t h e Backup mode. i n g t h e p o s i t i v e and negative switches t o 15.00 The l a s t s t e p i s extremely important, s i n c e lack of matching can cause a The f i r s t s t e p required a d j u s t -
15 v o l t s applied t o t h e f u n c t i o n a l d i r e c t
This w i l l enable t h e model t o generThe second s t e p i s
- 0.10 +
v o l t s DC.
a t e t h e same model slope f o r both p o l a r i t y commands.
performed by p u t t i n g t h e model outputs, primary and monitor channel, on a c h a r t recorder, p u t t i n g i n a s t i c k command, and measuring t h e model s i g n a l slope obtained. Then r e a d j u s t the a c c e l e r a t i o n potentiometer The t h i r d s t e p i s performed by u n t i l t h e d e s i r e d value i s obtained.
observing t h e d i f f e r e n c e between t h e primary and monitor model outputs and a d j u s t i n g the monitor channel a c c e l e r a t i o n adjustment potentiometer
11-116
Report No. 7260-954.002
t o o b t a i n an average minimum d i f f e r e n c e f o r both p o s i t i v e and negative commands. The model s i g n a l d i f f e r e n c e can be displayed d i r e c t l y on a
Fluke d i f f e r e n t i a l voltmeter o r a record can be made by recording t h e output of a d i f f e r e n t i a l a m p l i f i e r whose i n p u t s a r e t h e two model s i g n a l s . The maximum dynamic d i f f e r e n c e allowed t o e x i s t be-tween t h e primary and monitor channel models should be 50 m i l l i v o l t s DC (0.1 deg/sec) with f u l l s c a l e model output excursions of 10 v o l t s DC (20 deg/sec). items 16 and 17. The s p e c i f i c adjustment potentiometers and t e s t p o i n t s a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 11-4,
11-165.
M D L R T ADJUSTMENT OE AE
- This
adjustment c o n s i s t s of s e t t i n g t h e
model a c c e l e r a t i o n potentiometer t o a t t a i n t h e desired model r a t e slope. The n u l l potentiometer i s adjusted i n t h e more c r i t i c a l Direct with Model mode. Reference paragraph 11-164. The model a c c e l e r a t i o n potentiometer ( I ) s e t t i n g t h e nominal a c c e l e r a t i o n The second s t e p i s extremely imporadjustment c o n s i s t s of two p a r t s :
i n t h e primary and monitor channel i n d i v i d u a l l y and (2) a c c u r a t e l y matchi n g t h e primary and monitor channel. t a n t s i n c e l a c k of matching can cause a nuisance switching t o Backup. The
f i r s t s t e p i s performed by p u t t i n g t h e model outputs, primary and monitor

channel, on a c h a r t recorder, p u t t i n g in a s t i c k command, and measuring t h e model s i g n a l slope obtained. Then r e a d j u s t t h e a c c e l e r a t i o n The second s t e p i s potentiometer u n t i l t h e desired value i s obtained.
performed by observing t h e d i f f e r e n c e between t h e primary and monitor model outputs and a d j u s t i n g t h e monitor channel a c c e l e r a t i o n adjustment potentiometer t o obtain an average minimum d i f f e r e n c e f o r both p o s i t i v e and negative commands. The model s i g n a l d i f f e r e n c e can be displayed d i r e c t l y on a Fluke d i f f e r e n t i a l voltmeter o r a record can be made by recording t h e output of a d i f f e r e n c e a m p l i f i e r whose i n p u t s a r e t h e two model s i g n a l s . Since f o u r i n d i v i d u a l , f i x e d l i m i t e r modules a r e involved (two f o r a m p l i f i e r A1 i n t h e primary and two i n t h e monitor channel), and each i n f l u e n c e t h e matching between t h e channels, it i s necessary t h a t t h e
Report No. 7260-954002
1 1-1 17
d r i v e r a m p l i f i e r s , A 1 , have c l o s e l y matched l i m i t e r modules.
The maximum
dynamic d i f f e r e n c e allowed t o e x i s t between t h e primary and monitor channel models should be 100 m i l l i v c l t s DC, (0.4 deg/sec) with f u l l s c a l e model output excursions of 10 v o l t s DC (20 deg/sec). 16 and 17. 11-166. M D L L A ADJUSTMENT OE E D The s p e c i f i c adjustment potentiometers and t e s t p o i n t s a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 11-4, items
- The adjustment
c o n s i s t s of ( 1 ) n u l l i n g
t h e o f f s e t voltage, and (2) a d j u s t i n g t h e time constant potentiometer f o r t h e d e s i r e d i n i t i a l p u l s e duration. Since t h i s c i r c u i t has a p o s i t i v e temperature d r i f t c o e f f i c i e n t , t h e c i r c u i t output voltage i s s e t a t approximately -40 m i l l i v o l t s DC with t h e box tops o f f ; thus a f t e r t h e tops a r e on a d t h e i n t e r n a l box temperature r i s e s t h e output voltages s t a b i l i z e close t o zero. i n j e c t i n g s t i c k commands. d e s i r e d pulse duration. The time constant adjustment i s performed by The potentiometer i s adjusted t o obtain t h e monitoring t h e threshold a m p l i f i e r ' s output on an oscilloscope while
It should be noted t h a t t h i s pulse i s t h e
rocket solenoid command s i g n a l and t h e e f f e c t i v e rocket f i r i n g pulse

w i l l be l e s s due t o rocket system delays; i n addition a minimum f i r i n g
command time of t h i r t y milliseconds i s necessary t o obtain any rocket response. The s p e c i f i c adjustment potentiometers and t e s t p o i n t s a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 11-4, items 18 and 11-16?.
19,
ATTITUDE SYNCHRONIZER R T SWITCH ADJUSTMENT AE
The adjustment
i s performed by monitoring t h e output voltage r o t a t i n g t h e r a t e gyro a t

t h e d e s i r e d r a t e , and s e t t i n g t h e t r i g g e r adjustment potentiometer u n t i l t h e output voltage switches t o p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s DC. items 20 and 29. The s p e c i f i c adjustment potentiometers and t e s t p o i n t s a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 11-4,
Report No. 7260-954-002
11-168.
HAND CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION DETECTOR ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment of
t h i s c i r c u i t c o n s i s t s i n s e t t i n g t h e p o s i t i v e and negative threshold a m p l i f i e r , A l , potentiometers. hand c o n t r o l l e r . This s e t t i n g should be matched t o each f i r s t monitor i n d i v i d u a l LDS switch, and t h e r e f o r e must be done separately f o r each The adjustment i s performed a s follows: t h e LDS switch, t h e appropriate t e s t point and t h e synchro ( s t i c k ) DC voltage while slowly advancing t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r and determine3he voltage when t h e LDS switch makes; c a l l t h i s V1. switch breaks; c a l l this.V2.
DC, t o V2 and c a l l t h i s V
Next, slowly decrease
t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r back towards n u l l and note t h e voltage when t h e LDS Add t h e equivalent a s s i s t value, 1.1 v o l t s Calculate t h e average of V (make) and V 1 3 (break + a s s i s t ) voltage and c a l l t h i s V4. F i n a l l y , i n j e c t a s t i c k s i g n a l from t h e t e s t c a r t , leaving t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r a t n u l l , t o obtain voltage
3'
Vlc a t t h e a p p r ~ p r i a t e e s t point. t
Adjust t h e appropriate threshold Perform a s i m i l a r
potentiometer t o j u s t switch amplifier A 1 t o ON.
procedure f o r t h e other p o l a r i t y of hand c o n t r o l l e r motion. voltage which should not exceed t a b l e 11-4, item 22.
A s a check
on t h e alignment, exercise t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r and observe t h e e r r o r
1.5 v o l t s peak f o r any s t i c k motion. The
s p e c i f i c adjustment potentiometers and t e s t points a r e l i s t e d i n
11-169.
EXCESS RATE DETECTOR
- The
c i r c u i t adjustment can be performed
by monitoring t h e output a t t h e appropriate t e s t point, r o t a t i n g t h e r a t e gyro a t t h e desired excess r a t e value, and s e t t i n g t h e t r i g g e r adjustment potentiometer.unti1 t h e output voltage switches t o p o s i t i v e 28 v o l t s DC. The s p e c i f i c adjustment potentiometers and t e s t points a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 11-4, items 21 and 29. 11-170. H202 FUEL LEVEZ. DETECPOR ADJUSTMENT
C i r c u i t adjustment c o n s i s t s
of (1) n u l l i n g quiescent d r i f t , (2) s e t t i n g t h e l i f t rocket adjustment potentiometers, and ( 3 ) s e t t i n g t h e four a t t i t u d e rocket potentiometers.
Report No. 7260-954002
11-1 19
Nulling t h e OFF o r quiescent d r i f t i s done by s e l e c t i n g one s e t of r o c k e t s (STD o r TEST), p u t t i n g t h e A S Safe switch t o t h e FLIGHT (GUARDD W ) C O N p o s i t i o n , and s e l e c t i n g a r e s i s t o r f o r t h e T-bias network. f i x e d s e l e c t r e s i s t o r has been chosen. The i n t e g r a t o r n u l l potentiometer i s used f o r any subsequent d r i f t adjustment once t h e The l i f t rocket adjustment The potentiometer i s s e t by p r e s s u r i z i n g t h e l i f t rocket transducer and obt a i n i n g t h e d e s i r e d burnoff r a t e on t h e f u e l remaining i n d i c a t o r . a t t i t u d e r o c k e t adjustment potentiometers a r e s e t by switching t o t h e a p p r o p r i a t e s e t of r o c k e t s and pulsing t h e p i t c h channel with a 5-hertz square wave command. This a l t e r n a t e l y f i r e s t h e four p i t c h / r o l l r o c k e t s
By observing t h e f u e l remain-
and allows averaging of i n d i v i d u a l e r r o r s . s e t t o t h e d e s i r e d value.
i n g i n d i c a t o r and c a l c u l a t i n g t h e burnoff r a t e , t h e potentiometer can be

A s i m i l a r procedure i s used i n t h e yaw channel
t o a d j u s t t h e two a t t i t u d e rocket burnoff potentiometers.
The s p e c i f i c
adjustment potentiometers and t e s t p o i n t s a r e l i s t e d i n t a b l e 11-4, item 23. 11-171. ELECTRONIC SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
- Circuit
adjustment c o n s i s t s of the The d e s i r e d t r i g g e r
t r i g g e r l e v e l with t h e t r i g g e r a d j u s t potentiometer.
p r e s s u r e i s a p p l i e d t o t h e l i f t rocket chamber and t h e 22-turn, 100-kilohm adjustment potentiometer i s s e t t o j u s t t u r n a m p l i f i e r A 1 ON (+10.5 v o l t s DC). The rocket chamber can then be de-pressurized and a v o l t a g e i n j e c t e d a t t h e Test Cart i n j e c t t e s t p o i n t u n t i l t h e a m p l i f i e r j u s t switches t o ON. The i n j e c t voltage should be noted and used f o r f u t u r e t e s t i n g , t h e r e f o r e enabling t h e c i r c u i t t o be checked without p r e s s u r i z i n g t h e rocket chamber every time.
It should be noted t h a t t h e
voltage from t h e l i f t rocket pressure transducer i s never zero s i n c e it measures a b s o l u t e p r e s s u r e and i n d i c a t e s 14.7 p s i a atmospheric p r e s s u r e when t h e l i f t r o c k e t s a r e o f f .
Report No. 7260-954002
11-172.
THRUST/WEIGRT C M U E ADJUSTMENT O P TR
The s t e p s t o a d j u s t t h i s
c i r c u i t c o n s i s t of (1) s e t t i n g an i n i t i a l weight, (2) n u l l i n g t h e d i v i d e r o u t p u t , and (3) zeroing t h e JP-4 and H202 synchronizer i n t e g r a t o r d r i f t s . The i n i t i a l weight i s a d j u s t e d by monitoring A24-TP3 and s e t t i n g t h e d e s i r e d i n i t i a l weight u s i n g a s c a l e f a c t o r of 620 l b / v o l t . i n g f o r i n i t i a l weights of 2020 t o 4130 pounds. ing the input V The 250 kilohm adjustment potentiometer A24R3 gives t h e c a p a b i l i t y of a d j u s t The d i v i d e r c u t p u t i s f g, n u l l e d by monitoring t h e output a m p l i f i e r , ~ 2 3 - ~ ~ i 6 u r e 11-42, groundo r T~ and a d j u s t t h e n u l l i n g potentiometer A23R2, 1 f i g u r e 11-42, f o r a minimum, l e s s than 15 m i l l i v o l t s . The H 0 synchro2 2 n i z e r i n t e g r a t o r d r i f t i s n u l l e d by i n i t i a t i n g Lunar Simulation and f i g u r e 11-41, f o r approximately t e n minutes and a d j u s t i n g t h e H 0 n u l l 2 2 a d j u s t p o t e n t i o m e t e r A22R2, f i g u r e 11-41, t o minimize t h e d r i f t . The d r i f t should be a d j u s t e d t o l e s s than 40 m i l l i v o l t s p e r minute. i n i t i a t i o n of Lunar Simulation. end of 2.0 minutes. The JP-4 i n t e g r a t o r can be n u l l e d by monitoring t h e output a t 2.0 minutes a f t e r The JP-4 n u l l a d j u s t potentiometer A22R1, f i g u r e 11-41, i s a d j u s t e d f o r 68.4 pounds o r -9.75 v o l t s a t t h e
monitoring t h e output d r i f t of i n t e g r a t o r a m p l i f i e r , A o u t p u t , A22-TP4, 2
11-173.
Z-AXIS E R R AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENT RO
The adjustment c o n s i s t s of
s e t t i n g t h e n u l l adjustment p o t e n t i o m e t e r , w i t h r e l a y K 1 de-energized, a s i n f l i g h t , t o avoid o f f s e t s from t h e a u t o t h r o t t l e demodulator and feedback synchro, ( f i g u r e 11-44). With t h e v e h i c l e l e v e l e d t o 0
+ 0.3
degrees,
g e n e r a t e a n e g a t i v e 2.5 v o l t DC, a t t h e i n p u t t h r u s t / w e i g h t ( l i f t r o c k e t a c c e 1 e r a t i o n ) i n p u t , and ad j u s t t h e n u l l potentiometer ~ t h a n 1 0 0 - m i l l i v o l t s DC, a t A5A-TP2. over a &minute 6 t o obtain l e s s ~ 1 This e r r o r s i g n a l should be recorded
p e r i o d and averaged about z e r o , s i n c e t h e v e r t i c a l gyro
w i l l be d r i f t i n g
+ 0.5
degrees w i t h i n i t s v e r t i c a l accuracy cone and
c r e a t i n g a very low frequency s i g n a l a t A5A-TP2.
+ 0.24
v o l t s DC, peak-to-peak wandering
Report No. 7260-954002
11-121
11-174.
X-AXIS E R R AMPLIFIER ADJUSTMENT RO
C i r c u i t adjustment c o n s i s t s
of s e t t i n g t h e n u l l adjustment potentiometer, w i t h r e l a y Kl de-energized, a s i n f l i g h t , t o avoid o f f s e t s from t h e engine angle potentiometer ( f i g u r e 11-43). With t h e v e h i c l e l e v e l e d t o 0'
+ 18 minutes,
ad j u s t t h e
potentiometer A9Rl (y-axis) o r A9R2 (X-axis) t o o b t a i n l e s s than 100 m i l l i v o l t s DC a t A I ~ A - T P(Y-axis) o r AIOA-TP1 (x-axis). ~ This e r r o r s i g n a l should be recorded over a f i f t e e n minute p e r i o d and averaged abcut z e r o , s i n c e t h e v e r t i c a l gyro w i l l be d r i f t i n g f 0.5 degrees w i t h i n i t s v e r t i c a l cone and c r e a t i n g a very low frequency
0.24 v o l t s DC, peak-to-peak
wandering s i g n a l a t a p p r o p r i a t e t e s t p o i n t . 11-175. COMPENSATION N T O K AND INTEGRATOR ADJUSTMENT EW R
Circuit adjust-
ment c o n s i s t s of s e t t i n g t h e Null Adjustment potentiometer t o o b t a i n z e r o d r i f t a t t h e i n t e g r a t o r output. Place t h e J e t S t a b i l i z a t i o n System i n Engine Centered o r Local V e r t i c a l mode, zero t h e s i g n a l a t A12B-TPI
and a d j u s t t h e n u l l a d j u s t potentiometer t o o b t a i n minimum d r i f t a t t h e

i n t e g r a t o r output. Since t h e d r i f t i s low, t h e output should be observed f o r about a ten-minute sample time.
Report No. 7260-954002
Table 11-4.
I
Avionics Adjustments Data Sheet

C A NL HNE (AXIS)
AD.TII::I'MIqW'F
I 'l'i:M
A("IIJ ON primary
PG7'
TP0T Irl)TN'.I' R! ,;<'p. C .
[:A RD
VOT,'I,E.(;I.:
- Rate jus tment .
Command Null Ad-
Place Hand Controller i n centcr neutral position

1'5 t c h
1
,
0 050
AJ All1
1~'~57
'T'P7
IIII~,!,
t.lllri.
~TIII,!
I I ! i
Roll Yaw Adjust Rate Command Null Pot f o r Null a t Specified T e s t Point. 13j.tch Roll yaw 2 Primary
Of:(.
!i
i
h1
I?:]
050 ~ 1 . 4 1 R 050 ~ 1 R:I 6
- Rate Gyro Null

Pitch Roll Yaw
050 A 1
Adjustment. Adjust Rate Feedback S c a l i n g Pot f u l l y CW
1050 050
'l'li7 A I ~
i 1 1
j
A?
fi
vdc
V ~ C
A12
' P
050
~ 1 7'['P%
o
.-
-. -- ----
vdc
-.
Ii
~4
050 ~ 1 1 4R4 050 ~ 1 . 6 4 ~
T F ~
Adjust Rate Feedback Null Pot f o r Null a t S p e c i f i e d Test Point pitch Roll
050 ~1 RP 050
-
050 CfjO 050
A?
o vdc
0 V ~ C 0 V ~ C
~ 1 R2 4
A12 A1.7
. ,-
TP~
~ l %
.-
Primary
Y ~ W
. --
~ 1 R 6 . . --050 --2
..
---
A t t i t u d e Gyro Null
Adjustment Adjust V e r t i c a l Gyro f o r Zero Attitude Indication Pitch Roll Yay Adjust A t t i t u d e C i r c u i t Scaling Pot f u l l y CW Pitch Roll Yw a AdJust A t t i t u d e Null Pot f o r Null a t S p e c i f i e d T e s t Point Pitch
050 ~ l l R 1 050 050 A l l 050 A10 050 A19
I
R3
R3
! : ? I
TP3
0 vdc
~4
Table 1 1-4.
Avionic8 Adjustments Data Sheet (continued)
Table 11-4.
I
Avionics Adjustments Data Sheet

C A NL HNE (AXIS) ADJII:':I'M1.%'I' R,TEST I'OTN'J' ,:! , C. P(')T CARD
I 'Tl.:M
AV""1ON
,.
,IOT,'I,Ar;I,:
primary
Rate Command Null Ad-
justment. Place Hand C o n t r o l l e r i n center neutral position Pitch Roll yaw Adjust Rate [lommand Null Pot f o r Null a t Specified Test Point. Pitch Roll Yaw
2
I
(il,Cj
i
TL'7
TM
1 1 i
A]. b.1 ll
Or$
[]TI.![.
f
i
i
050
~ 1 6 ol'lT
!TII'~,!
1
0 ' .I 050 A l l l
i
I31
050 0:jO 050
13 1
A 2
'T'P:'
c? v(l('
Ij
HI.
0 vdc
0 vdc
050 ~ 1 6 R1
A17
'1'1'2
Primary
- -. --- .-..-
Rate Gyro Null
Adjustment. Adjust Rate Feedback Scaling Pot f u l l y CW Pitch Roll Yw a Adjust Rate Feedback Null Pot f o r Null a t S p e c i f i e d Test Point Pitch Roll
050 A 1 050 050 A 1
~4
050 ~ l l l ~4 050 ~ 1 ~4 6
R 2
050 050 050
A ?
A12
TL%
0 vdc
A14 R2
T P ~
0 vdc 0 vdc
Yw a
050 ~ 1 R 62
A1.7
Primary
---
T F ~
A t t i t u d e Gyro Null
Adjustment Adjust V e r t i c a l Gyro f o r Zero Attitude Indication Pitch Roll Y !.I a Adjust A t t i t u d e C i r c u i t Scaling Pot f u l l y CW Pitch Roll Yaw Adjust A t t i t u d e Null Pot f o r Null a t S p e c i f i e d Test Point Pitch
050 A 4 050All
I
E3
050
050 A10 R3 050 A19
TP3
0 vdc
R3
R1
~4
Table 11-4.
Avionics Adjustments Data Sheet (continued)

TEST PO1 N'1' ADJUSTMT.:NT BOX P.(. T,. Pot
ITEM Primary
ACT1ON
CHANNET, (AXIS)
ARD
VOT,'l A I : I
R a t e ~'ommand S c a l e
F a c t o r Adjustment A d j u s t t h e Hand ( ' o n t r o l l e r ( S t i c k ) Command t o 20 '/:: max Rate Pitch
?I.('.
11.1
nutput
'.8
2.
r r .
V T ~ :
In
1
I
~011
Yaw A d j u s t t h e Ratc Command S c a l i n g Pot t o f u l l y CPM Pitch Roll yaw A j u s t t h e Rate Command d S c a l i n g l'ot f o r 500 mv/"/S Scale Factor Pitch Roll Yaw
0'50 A 1
1l.r
. nutput . rl~t,put
A1
.- . ,
pj
VJ"II
Pj,
050
'TP7 P7
'1 Pr[
0 var
i
I
050 ~ l l kR 3 050 P I C L 3
000
000
Ali/
C va' O -la-
050 A 1
R:
050
A?
TP?
TP2
+I 0 . 0 ~ v l r +10.0 .~dc
t 1 0 . 0 vdc
050 ~ 1 1 4F3 050 ~ 1 R 3 6
050 417 050 017
TP2
Primary
Rate Gyro C i r c u i t S c a l e
F a c t o r Adjustment A d j u s t Rate Gyro S i g n a l f o r 20r'/s Rate Feedback Pitch Roll yaw A d j u s t t h e Rate Feedback S c a l i n g Pot t o f u l l y CCW Pitch Roll Yaw A d j u s t t h e Rate Feedback S c a l i n g P o t f o r 500 mv/"/S Scale Factor Pitch Roll yaw Primary 000 A 1 ~4
GTjO
Rate Gyro Rate Gyro Rate Gyro
3.0 vrms
3 . 0 vrms 3 . 0 vrms
050 A 1 050 A14 ~4
050 050 01,0
A1
T *
TP6
0 vac 0 vac 0 vac
~4
A14
050 ~ 1 ~4 6
A ~ GT
7fl
TF6
A2
A12 A17
-10.0 -10.0
id?
050 A14 ~ 4 05C A ~ G~ 4
050 050
vdc
TI%
- 1 0 . 2 vac
A t t i t u d e Gyro C i r c u i t
S c a l e F a c t o r Adjustment Adjust v e r t i c a l gyro s i g n a l f o r 40' Attitude indication. Pitch
Vert
Gyro
7.6
vrms
Table
T'ASM
1? -4.
Avionics Ad justmente Data Sheet (continued)

C A NL HNE
AD.TTJ.P:I'MI~TlT .
PnT
TEST POINT' (:AW Vori:. (:yro
A(!TION
(AXIS)
~011
Yw a
,,.r : .
,, ,.
,,.
VGTSI'A'; I,.
050
7.6 vrm:;
'V(:rt.
Gyro
7.6
vrrn::
A j u s t A t t i t u d e ri r c u l t S c a l i n g d Pot f u l l y (1CI.J P1.tch Roll Yaw Adjust A t t i t u d e ('ircul'i; Scaling pot f o r : -200 mv/" 200 mv/" Scale Factor Scale Factor: Scale Factor pitch Roll Yw a
OrjO A)I
R3
GI50
0
A~I
TF7'
0 vac 0 vijf. 0 ve : :
050 Al.0 E7 0.50 A].(,! R 3
A A]':
' I '
050
I'V
I
I
I
R?
Ofj(i
L]!
T P ~ -8.0 vdc
050 A1.O 1,:;

050 A
050 A1.c':
050 ALE?
'I'P3
-8.0 v d c
7
Monitor
200 mv/"
. 1 :
r ~ ' ~ h 6. 55 V ~ C -
Rate Command N L UL
Adjustment Place Hsnd C'ontroller i n c e n t e r neutral position Pitch Roll yaw Adjust Rate Command Null Pot f o r n u l l a t specified t e s t point Pitch Roll 070 A R 1 2 070 ~ 6 R l 070 A R 1 9 070 A 1 070 A 7 TP2 TP2 0 vdc 0 vdc 0 vdc
1
i
Monitor
- Rate Gyro Feedback
Yaw
070 A10 TP2
C i r c u i t Null-Adjustment Adjust Rate Feedback S c a l i n g Pot f i l l y CW Pitch Roll Yw a Adjust Rate Feedback Null Pot f o r n u l l a t specified t e s t point Pitch Roll yaw 070 A R 2 2 070 ~ 6 R 2 070 A R 9 2 070 070 070 A 2 ~6 TP1 TP1 TP1 0 vdc 0 vdc 0
V ~ C
070 A R3 2 070 ~ 6 R 3 070 A R3 9
A3
9.
Monitor
- Ra.te Command Scale

I
Pitch
F a c t o r Adjustment Adjust t h e Hand C o n t r o l l e r Command t o 20/S Max Rate

7
I
H.C.Output
2.8 vrms
Table 11-4.

C A NL HNE (AXTS) ~ o l l Yw a AD.TIT::'I'Mt?NT .
I'OT~
TI M T C
ArTTON
'r1:CT POINT P. ( , 1 .P. ' ('ARD

TI.('.~ u t p i j t 1i.c'.
VOT,rI'A,; ,,:
070 A? R: 070
~1.8vlln
P.
Outp~t
8 vrro -
Adjust the Rate ('ommand Scaling Pot t o f u l l y ('('W Pitch Roll Yw a Readjust t h e Rate c'ommand S c a l i n g Pot f o r 000 mv/O/S Scale F a c t o r Pitch Roll Yw a 10 Monitor 070 A R 3 ? 070 ~ 6 : R 070 A R3 9 070 670 070 070 070 076
A:'
TP7 TP7
1 P7
0 var.
0 var
~6 R 3
~k
Af'
070 Ail P3
L. vat
A1
A 7 A30
'PP?
+10 vdc
t 1 0 vdc
TP?
TP2
+I0 vdc
Rate Gyro Feedback
C i r c u i t Scale Factor Adjustment Adjust Rate Gyro S i g n a l f o r 20/S Rate Feedback Pitch Roll Yw a Adjust the Rate Feedback S c a l i n g Pot t o f u l l y CCW Pitch Roll Yw a Adjust t h e Rate Feedback S c a l i n g Pot f o r 500 mv/"/S Scale F a c t o r Pitch Roll Yw a 070 A ~4 2 070 ~ 6 ~4 070 A 9 070 070 070 070 A 2 ~ 4 070 ~ 6 ~ 4 070 ~ 9 ~ 4 070 070 070 A 2 T F ~
T F ~
3.0 vrms 3.0 vrms 3.0 vrms
0 vac 0 vac 0 vac
~6
~g
TP6
A1
A 7 A10
T P ~ -10 vdc
TP6
-10 vdc -10
V ~ C
~4
TI%
1 1
Primary
Rate Threshold C i r c u i t
Adjustment Procedure Place Hand C o n t r o l l e r i n Center n e u t r a l p o s i t i o n Pitch Roll yaw Adjust Rate Gyro s i g n a l t o z e r o Pitch Roll Yw a
050 050 050 050 050 050
A1
414
TP7
0 vac 0 vac 0 vac 0 vac 0 vac 0 vac

I
TP7
A ~ G TP7
A1
TF6
~ 1 4TK
~ 1 6~6
TI'I.:M
ACTION Adjust t h e ~ t t i t u d e Gyro s i g n a l t o zero.
(:lfANNEL (AXIS)
ADJ1J::'f'EI:I~:NI' - PO'I'
s p
EOY P. (:. ('ART)
'1'. 1'.
VOl .'I 8' ;1.;
Pitch Roll Yw a
0'50 A 7
'
'1'M
'I1P7
0 \.rap
050 A10
DOO
41.3
0 var.
o vac
Adjust the Rate Thresho1.d Deadband Adjustment. I'ot ful.ly ('CW Pitch Roll. Yaw Pitch Roll. Yw a Apply a
I
R3 .
t?]~
Orj0A7 050 A2 : ' 050 A 7 050 A 7
13 7
I??
I ?
Ofi(:a
I050
O L j
A ?
A
A17
7'17
'l'P7
' I
3 vdc
0 vAc
j
'
050 A?? R 2
0 vdc
ate
Threshold I n j e c t Pitch Roll Yaw
v o l t a g e equal t o 1.20/S
ii-. r:
!?4
4.0 vdc '

4 . G vdc
T.c. .i/2'3 T.C. 1% .
+6.0 vdc
Readjust t h e Rate Threshold (Deadband) Adjustment Pot t o t u r n on Amplifier Pitch Roll Yaw Apply a Rate Threshold I n j e c t v o l t a g e equal t o 1.20/S Pitch Roll Yaw Readjust the Rate Threshold Deadband Adjustment Pot t o t u r n on Amplifier Pitch Roll yaw 12 Monitor 050 A 7 050 A 7
R2
050A7 050 A 7
R3 R4
050 050 05G
A 2 A12
TP7 TP7 TP7
-1Gvdc
-10
V ~ C
050 A22 R 3
A17
-10 vdc
T.C.
#24
-6.0 vdc -6.0 vdc -6.0 vdc
T.C. $25
T.C. $26
050 050 050
A 2 A12
TP7 TP7 TP7
+10 vdc +10 vdc +10 vdc
R5
050 A22 R3
A17
Rate Threshold Assist
C i r c u i t Adjustment Procedure Adjust t h e Monitor Rate Threshold
Assist P o t s f u l l y CCW
Pitch Roll yaw
070 A15 R 1 070 A15 ~6 070 ~ 1 R 1 4
Table 1i-4. Avionics Adjustments Data Sheet (continued)
Table 11 -4.
Avionics A juatments Data Sheet (continued) d

CHANNEL (AXIS) Roll Yaw AD.TUSTlr?T.:MT TEST POTPIT VOT,TP (; I*
JTEM
ACT1 ON
rm
c.
CARD
T.p.
'lP7
070 A l l ; PO 070 ~ l l lF?
070
A 7
A10
+I0
070
TT.7
+lo
vfjr
111
Primary
A t t i t u d e Threshold
C i r c u i t Adjustment Procedure P l a c e Ifand C o n t r o l l e r i n c ~ n t e r neutral .position Pitch Roll
Yaw
Adjust Rate Gyro S i g n a l t o Zero Pitch Roll Yaw Adjust A t t i t u d e Gyro s i g n a l t o Zero Pitch Roll Yaw P l a c e Rate/Direct i n Direct Position Switch Pitch Roll Yaw A d j u s t t h e A t t i t u d e Threshold (Deadband) Adjustments Pot f u l l y CW Pitch Roll yaw P l a c e Rate/Direct Rate P o s i t i o n Switch i n Pitch Roll Yaw Apply a n A t t i t u d e s i g n a l a t t h e Attitude I n j e c t Test Point Pitch Roll Yaw Adjust t h e A t t i t u d e Threshold (Deadband) Adjustment Pot t o 050 ~4 R2
050 A10 R2 050 A l ? R2
T.C. J'16
T.C. +248 mvdc +248 mvdc +248 mvdc
All7
T.C.
#18
--
ITIIM
ACTION t u r n on a m p l i f i e r
C A NL HNE (AXIS) Pitch Roll
A . I SIM N DTJ '' K T POT 050 A ~ I R:' 050 A 1 0 T<?
TEZI' l'OTN7' ,,, p. p. (: ('ARI)
. .
Vr)I,T Ar;[.,
050
A?
'I'P7
-10 vdc -10 vdr
OrjO I ' 050 A21
'l'P7
15
Adjust Rate Gyro s i g n a l f o r an A t t i t u d e E r r o r Signal of 1.0" Rcadjust t h e Rate Gyro s i g n a l t o :,era Adjust t h e A t t i t u d e Threshold (deadband) kd justmcnt Pot t o t u r n on a m p l i f i e r yaw 050 A 1 0 X? 050 A17
TT'7
---I
I
Yw a
+ 5 . 0 vdr.
Yw a
i I
+1( ~ ( l c
A
I
i
16
Primary
Model C i r c u i t ~ d j u s t -
-i
ment Procedure Place ~ a t e / ~ i r e c t Switch i n Rate Mode P o s i t i o n Pitch Roll Yw a Place Model/No Model Switch i n Model Mode P o s i t i o n Pitch Roll Yw a Adjust t h e Model Adjustment Pot t o f u l l y CW Pitch Roll Yw a Apply a Step Voltage a t t h e R?te Command I n j e c t Point Pitch Roll yaw Readjust t h e Model Adjustment Pot f o r d e s i r e d s l o p e Pitch Roll Yw a 17 Monitor 050 p.3 050 A 3 R3
050 A l l R 3 050
~ 1 R3 8
T.C. //I
+10 vdc +10 vdc
I
vdc
R3
T.C. j42 T.C. $3
+lo
TP1 TP1 TP1
I
/s2?
-
050 050 050
A 6
4.0 v / s ( 8 0 / ~ ~ )
4.0~/~(8"/2~\ 4.0 v / s ( 8
050AllR3 050 ~ 1 R3 8
~8
A21
Model C i r c u i t Adjust-
ment Procedure Place R a t e / ~ i r e c t Switch i n r a t e mode p o s i t i o n Pitch
Table 11-4.

r 4
T1'1,:M
/\?TION
CTIANNRT., (AXIS) Roll Yaw
ADJ1JZTMI':N'T' POT
I I , . ~ I PDTNT I,. (:. T. P. CARD

I"T1
Vr,T,l:A,;
,,:
P l a c e Model/No Model Switch i n Model Modc P o s i t i o n Pitch Rol.1 Yaw A d j u s t t h e Model Adjustm6nt Pot t o f u l l y C W Pitch Roll Yaw ~ p p l y ' aSteP Voltage a t t h e Rate Command I n j e c t P o i n t Pitch Roll Yaw R e a d j u s t t h e Model Adjustment Pot f o r desired slope Pitch Roll 070 A3 070 A5 R3 R3 070 070 070 A25 A25 A12 TP1 4.0 v / s ( 8 / s 6 : 070 A3 070 A;;
i
R3
13:
T.C. T.(:.
T.C. l32
+10 vdc +10 vdc + l o vdc
070 ~ l Rl?
h130
T P ~ 4.0 v/s(8'/sP) TP1 4.0 v / s ( ? , " / s C ' ~
18
Primary
Yaw Model Lead C i r c u i t
070 A l l R3
-1
Pitch Roll Yaw 050 A 3 B1
Adjustment Procedure S e t t h e Model Lead Term Adjustment Pot t o f u l l y CCW
050 A l l R l 050 ~ 1 R 1 8
050
050 0?,0
Adjust t h e Model Lead N u l l Pot t o z e r o t h e Model Lead O u t p u t . Pitch Roll Yaw 050 A3
R2
A3
All
TP2 TP2
0 vdc 0 vdc 0 vdc
050 A l l R2 050 ~ 1 R2 8
TP2 ~ 1 8
1 9
Monitor
Model Lead C i r c u i t Ad-
j u s t m e n t Procedure S e t t h e Model Lead Term Adjustment Pot t o f u l l y CCW Pitch Roll Yaw 070 A3 070 A 5
R1
R1
070 ~ l ~1 l
Table 11-4.
Avionics Adjustments Data Sheet (Continued)

CIfANI'IET, (AXIS) AD*TU.C;TMIQf'I' POrl' TEST POTNT
P. C.
TTEM
ATO CT N Adjust t h e Modcl S,ead Null Pot t o z e r o t h e Model T,ead Output
rr. p.
VOT!l'kl:l.:
(:ARD
Pitch Roll
I
070 A 5
R?
070 070
A;
A';
0 vd(. 0vrI.r.
070A1j P:
':'I)?
Irpa
I
j
Yaw
20
Rate Switching C i r c u i t A jus tment d Procedure
070 A11
mo
A l l
\,dc:
Place t h e Hand C o n t r o l l e r i n t h e n e u t r a l ( I n Detent) P o s i t i o n Pitch Roll Yaw Adjust t h e Rate Gyro S i g n a l f o r l.OO/S Rate Pitch Roll Yaw Adjust t h e Rate Switching Adjustment Pot CW Pitch Roll Yw a Check Rate Switching c i r c u i t output voltage Pitch Roll Yaw Read j u s t t h e Rate Switching Adjustment Pot CCW f o r v o l t a g e PStch Roll Yaw Check Rate Switching c i r c u i t output voltage Pitch Roll Yaw
21
070 A 2 1 R 1 070 A23 R1 050 A P ~ R1

r17O
A31 A23 A24
TP1 RP1 TP1
1 . 3 vrms
1 . 3 vrms 1 . 3 vrms
070 050
070 A21 F1 070 A23 R 1 050 ~ 3 4 1 R
670 070 050
T P ~
Ovdc
C vdc
A23
TP3
~ 2 4 TP4
0 vdc
070 070 050
A21
TP1 TP1 TP1
'
5.3 vrms 5 . 3 vrms
A23
P24
5.3 vrms
+28 vdc
070
070 050
A21
TP4 TL P: TP4
A23 AP4
+28 vdc +28 vdc
Monitor
Rate Gyro Excess Rate
Switching C i r c u i t Adjustment Procedure
Table 1 1-4.
ITEM ACTION

E CIIANNEI. ADCTUSTMEN1I. T T POINT l:O; P.C. T. P. ( AXIS) POT CARD Pitch Roll yaw
V OT!llAf;E
Adjust t h e Rate Gyro s i g n a l f o r 22.0"s Rate
070 A19 R 1 070 A19 R? 070 A19 R 3 070 070 G70 0'70 070 070 070 070 0'70 A20 h22 A13 A19 A19 TF7 TP7 TP7
TP2
Adjust t h e Excess Rate Switching Adjustment Pot CW f o r voltaye
Pitch Roll
Y ~ W
+b.'7 v(Jr +6.7 vdc
+<. (
+?':
v<J(.
I(>(.
Checlc t h e Excess Rate Switching output
Pitch Roll yaw
070 A19 1x1 070 A19 R? 070 A19 R3
TP5
+2$3 !<I(-
TP8 ~ 1 3 A19 Alg A19 TP? TP5
+2Y
+7.0 +7.0
vdc
icJr
Adjust t h e Excess Rate Switching Adjustment Pot CCW
Pitch Roll yaw
ldc
TPB
+7.0 v d r
22
Monitor
Hand C o n t r o l l e r Malf.
Detection C i r c u i t Adjustment Procedure Adjust t h e Hand C o n t r o l l e r Malf. Detection C i r c u i t Pot f u l l y CCW Pitch Roll yaw Pitch Roll yaw Adjust t h e Hand C o n t r o l l e r ( S t i c k ) f o r a 3.32O/S Command Check Hand C o n t r o l l e r Malf u n c t i o n Detection C i r c u i t Amplifier output Readjust t h e Hand C o n t r o l l e r Malf u n c t i o n Detection C i r c u i t Pot t o t u r n on a m p l i f i e r Adjust t h e Hand C o n t r o l l e r ( S t i c k ) f o r a 3.32O/S Command Rate Rate Pitch Roll yaw Pitch Roll yaw Pitch Roll
Y ~ W
070 A27 R 1 070 A29 R 1 070 A 3 1 R 1 070 A27 R 2 070 1\29 R2 070 A 3 1 R2
070 070 C70 070 070 070 070 070 070 070 070 070
A1
TP2 TP2 TP2
+1.56 vdc +1.66 udc +1.66 vdc 0 vdc 0 vdc 0 vdc -10 vdc -10 vdc -10 vdc - 1 . 6 6 ~ ~ ~ -1.66 vdc
A7
A10
~ 2 6T P 1 ~ 2 8TP1 A30 TP1
070 A27 R2 070 A29 R2 070 A 3 1 R2
~ 2 6TP1 A28 A30

A1
TP1 TP1 TP2 TP2
Pitch Roll yaw
A 7
A ~ O TP2
-1.66 vdc
Table 11-4.
ITEM ACTION
Avionics Ad justmente Data Sheet (continued)

C A NL H N E ( AXIS ) A . UT E T DT S M N POT , , O F ~ . E O 1 ~ T p . AVOI.TA(iE CARD
*
Check Hand C o n t r o l l e r Malfunction D e t e c t i o n C i r c u i t Amplifier output Pitch Roll Yaw Readjust t h e Hand C o n t r o l l e r ~ a l f u n c t i o n etection C i r c u i t D Pot t o t u r n on a m p l i f i e r Pitch Roll Yw a Monitor 070 A27 R 1 070 A29 R 1 070 A31 R1 070 0'70
070
-
0'70 070 070
TP1 TP1 TP1
A28 A30
0 .brl(:
0 vdc.
1
I
A20
TP1
+I0 bdc +10 vtlc
~ 2 3 TP1
A30
TP1
+lo
vdc
Fuel Level D e t e c t o r
Adjustment Procedure S e t t h e Rocket S e l e c t Switch a t t h e Both p o s i t i o n S e t t h e S a f e t y Switch a t t h e O position n Adjust t h e F u e l Level Detector Scaling Pots t o 5 turns Adjust t h e L i f t Rocket Transducer S c a l i n g Pot f u l l y CW P l a c e t h e S e t / ~ e s e t Switch a t t h e Off p o s i t i o n Adjust t h e L i f t Rocket Transducer S i g n a l t o 600 p s i a Adjust t h e L i f t Rocket Transducer S c a l i n g P o t f o r 57 mv/lb/sec Scale Factor
070 A24 R2, R3,~4,~5
070 A24 ~6
Transducer
+15 vdc
070 ~ 2 ~ 6 4
070
~ 2 4TP9
+4.08 vdc
R e a d j u s t t h e L i f t Rocket Transducer S i g n a l t o 14.7 p s i a S e l e c t t h e proper r e s i s t o r s f o r t h e B i a s O f f s e t Network Adjust t h e I n t e g r a t o r B i a s Pot f o r minimum d r i f t
Transducer
+368 m v
070
A12
T P ~
minimum drift
070 A12 R2
070
A12
T P ~
minimum drift
Data Sheet (continued) Table 1 1 -4. Avionics -AdjustmentsITEM ACTION CHANNEL ADJUSTMENT ( AXIS) POT TEST POTHT P. C . ,r, P. CARD
- --
V01 :I'ACIE
Backup
R a t e Command N u l l
Adjustment P l a c e t h e Hand C o n t r o l l e r i n the center neutral position pitch Roll yaw A d j u s t t h e Rate Command N u l l Pot f o r n u l l a t specified t e s t point Pitch Roll yaw 25 Backup 030 A10 R 1 030 A12 R 1 030 ~6 R1 030 A l l TP2 030 A13 TP2 030 A7 TP2 0 vdc 0 vdc 0 vdc
-
030 A10 T P ~ 030 A12 T P ~ 030 ~h T P ~
0 vac
r~ull)
0 vac ' n u l l ) 0 vac
r , u ~ )J
Rate Gyro N u l l
Adjustment A d j u s t t h e R a t e Feedback S c a l i n g P o t f u l l y CW Pitch Roll yaw A d j u s t t h e R a t e Feedback Null Pot f o r n u l l Pitch Roll yaw 26 Backup R a t e Command S c a l e F a c t o r Adjustment A d j u s t t h e Hand C o n t r o l l e r ( S t i c k ) Command t o 20S rnax. rate. Pitch Roll yaw A d j u s t t h e R a t e Command S c a l i n g P o t t o f u l l y CCW Pitch Roll yaw 030 A10 R 3 030 A12 R 3 030 ~6 2.8 vrm 2.8 vrm 2.8 vrm 030 A10 R2 030 A12 R2 030 ~6 R2 030 030 030 030 A10 R 3 030 A12 R 3 030 ~6
R3
A l l
T P ~
T P ~
0 vdc 0 vdc 0 vdc
A13 A7
T P ~
R3
Table 11-4.
ITEM ACTION

CHANNEL TEST POINT AD.JUSTMENT . BOX T.P. P. POT CARD
TI31 'PAGE
R e a d j u s t t h e Rate Command S c a l i n g P o t f o r 500 m v / " / ~ S c a l e F a c t o r Pitch Roll yaw 27 Backup Rate Gyro C i r c u i t S c a l e F a c t o r Adjustment A d j u s t t h e Backup Rate Gyro S i g n a l f o r 20a/S R a t e Feedback Pitch Roll yaw A d j u s t t h e Rate Feedback S c a l i n g P o t t o f u l l y CCW Pitch Roll yaw R e a d j u s t t h e Rate Feedback S c a l i n g P o t f o r 500 mv/O/s s c a l e Factor Pitch Roll yaw 28 Backup 030 A10 ~4 030 A12 ~4 030 ~6 ~4 030 030 030 030 A10 ~4 030 A12 ~4 030 ~6 ~4 3. 0
!rpris
030 A10 R3 030 A12 R3 030 ~6 R3
030 030 030
A l l
TP2 TP2 TP2
+10.0 +10.0
dc
Al3
A 7
+10.0 /(I(.
i
3.0 vrms 3.0 vrrns
A l l
A13 A7
T P ~ T P ~
+10.0 v d c +10.0 v d c +10.0 v d c
T P ~
Rate Threshold C i r c u i t
Adjustment Procedure P l a c e Hand C o n t r o l l e r i n center neutral position Pitch Roll Yaw A d j u s t t h e Backup Rate Gyro Signal t o zero Pitch Roll Yaw A d j u s t t h e Rate T h r e s h o l d ( ~ e a d b a n d )Adjustment P o t f u l l y CCW Pitch Roll
Y ~ W
030 ~3 R2 030 ~8 R 5 030 A5 R2
Table 1 1-4.
ITEM
ACTION

CHANNEL AD.JUSTMENT POT 030A8R3 030 A S TEST POLNT BOY C. CARD
VbI,'J1Af:E
Pitch Roll yaw Apply a Backup Rate Command I n j e c t v o l t a g e e q u a l t o 1.20/S pitch Roll Yaw R e a d j u s t t h e R a t e Threshold Adjustment P o t t o t u r n Jn amplifier Pitch Roll
Y ~ W
~4
030 A5 R 3
T.C. No. 31 T.C.
+10 1dc +10 +10 dc

(11-
No. 32
T.C.
Nrj. 33
030 A Y R2 030 A3 R5 030 A 5 R 2
030 C3O 030
A l l
TP7 TP7 TP7
+10 ddc +10 vdc +10 vdc
A13
A 7
Apply a Backup Rate Comrnand I n j e c t v o l t a g e e q u a l t o 1.20/s pitch Roll yaw Readjust the Rate Threshold Adjustment P o t t o t u r n on amplifier Pitch Roll
Y ~ W
T.C.
NG.
81 82
-10 ~ d c
T.C. N O . T.c.
NO.
-10 vdc -10 vdc
83
030 A 8 R 3 030 A 8 R 3 030 A5 R 3
030 030 030
A l l
TP7 TP7 TP7
-10 vdc -10 vdc -10

V ~ C
A13
A 7
29
Backup
R a t e Gyro Excess R a t e
S w i t c h i n g C i r c u i t Ad justrnent A d j u s t t h e Backup Rate Gyro s i g n a l f o r a 22.0 "/S r a t e Pitch Roll Yaw A d j u s t t h e Excess R a t e S w i t c h i n g Adjustment P o t CW Tar v o l t a g e Pitch Roll yaw Check t h e Backup Excess Rate Switching output Pitch Roll yaw
-
030 A14 R 1 030 ~ 1 R2 4 030 A14 R 3
030 030 030
A15
TP1
+6.7 vdc +b.7 vdc +6.7 vdc
A15 TP2 A15

T P ~
030 030 030
A14 A14
TP2 TP5
+2tj vdc
+28 vdc
~ 1 4 P ~ T
+28 vdc
[TEM
I~CTION Adjust t h e Excess Rate Switching A d j u s t m e n t P o t CCW
CIIANNET.
AD.IUSTMEIIT POT
TE T POlPlT
il. C.
,I.
VOT,TACE
CARD
Pitch
030 ~ 1 R41
0 3 0 ~ 1 R2 4 030 ~ 1 R3 4
030
A14
TP2 TP5
+7.0
~ d c
Roll
yaw
030
A1
+7.0 v d c
030
~ 1 4TP?J
+7.0
tdc
11-176. changed :
R T GYRO R P A E E T ADJUSTMENTS AE EL CMN
The following adjustments a r e required whenever t h e Rate gyros a r e
11-177.
MTE G R INITIAL POTENTIOMETER SETTINGS YO
A.
Adjust t h e r a t e gyro potentiometers f o r a s c a l e f a c t o r of 500 mv/ /sec i n t h e primary, monitor, and backup electronics circuits.
0
B. .
Adjust t h e r a t e gyro n u l l potentiometers t o compensate f o r t h e r a t e gyro n u l l s i n t h e primary, monitor, and backup electronics circuits.
C.
Adjust t h e excess r a t e switching c i r c u i t t o operate a t an excess r a t e of 25 k 1 O/sec i n t h e primary and t h e backup electronics circuits.
D.
Adjust t h e a t t i t u d e synchronization switching c i r c u i t t o switch f o r a r a t e gyro s i g n a l of 3.0 O/sec.
11-178.
R T GYRO TESTS REQUIFZD AE
The following t e s t s a r e required a f t e r t h e r a t e gyro i n i t i a l potentiometer s e t t i n g s have been performed: 11-179, YAW R T GYRO NON-REPEATABILITY AE
NOTE The purpose of t h i s measurement i s t o measure t h e h y s t e r e s i s of the yaw gyro.
A.
Mount r a t e gyro package on r a t e t a b l e i n yaw t o a yaw l e f t r a t e .
configuration
such t h a t a clockwise r o t a t i o n of t h e r a t e t a b l e corresponds
Report No, 7260-954002
B.
Adjust r a t e t a b l e f o r yaw r i g h t r a t e . continuously from oO/sec t o 25'/sec, slowly and continuously t o oO/sec.
Increase slowly and and then decrease r a t e
Record t h e r a t e gyro
DC n u l l a t TP9.
NT OE The r a t e gyro DC n u l l s h a l l not exceed 0.085 vdc ( 0.17O/sec.)
C.
Adjust r a t e t a b l e f o r yaw l e f t r a t e .
Increase slowly and
continuously. from oO/sec t o 25O/sec, and then decrease r a t e slowly and continuously t o oO/sec. Record t h e r a t e gyro
DC n u l l a t TP9.
NOTE The r a t e gyro DC n u l l s h a l l not exceed 0.085 vdc (0.17O/sec. )
D.
Reset from r a t e backup i f system has switched i n t o r a t e backup.
11-180
R T GYRO CIRCUITS YAW CALIBRATION AE
A.
Place t h e Yaw A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch i n t h e R T AE position.
B.
C.
Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF p o s i t i o n . Mount t h e r a t e gyro t r i a d on t h e r a t e t a b l e such t h a t a clockwise r o t a t i o n of t h e t a b l e corresponds t o a yaw l e f t r a t e .
D.
Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r a 20.0/sec
yaw l e f t r a t e .
E.
Perform t h e measurements and record data according t o t h e requirements of t a b l e
11-5.
Report No. 7260-954002
YAW LEFT R T GYRO TEST REQUEMENTS AE
Measurement Primary Rate Gyro Backup Rate Gyro Monitor Rate Gyro
output Name PRI

BU
MON
p;&
TP9 TP89
MON TP1
output v o l t Requirements -10.0
Actual vdc vdc
+ 0.75
vdc
-10.0 f 0.75 vdc -10.0 f 0.75 vdc

t
A9
vdc
F .
G.
Voltages s h a l l be w i t h i n l i m i t s specified i n t a b l e
11-5.
Rocket i n d i c a t o r s ET , FS, GT, and H s h a l l be illuminated.
H.
The AUTO PILOT B C U i n d i c a t o r s h a l l be extinguished. AKP
AKP I f t h e AUTO PILOT B C U i n d i c a t o r i s

ON, momentarily hold t h e AFCS switch
i n the. PRIMARY RESET positio.n and then release.
I Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r 20.0/sec yaw r i g h t r a t e . .

J.
Perform t h e measurements and record d a t a according t o t h e requirements of t a b l e 11-6. TABLE 11-6
-.------
YAW RIGHT R T GYRO TEST REQUIREMENTS AE
Measurement
Output Name PRI
Test Point TP9 TP89

MON A 9 TP1
Output Volt Requirements +10.0
Actual vdc vdc vdc
Primary Rate Gyro Backup Rate Gyro
+ 0.75
vdc
BU
+10.0 f 0.75 vdc +10.0 f 0.75 vdc
!Monitor Rate Gyro MON I Report No. 7260-954.002
11-141
K.
L.
Voltages s h a l l be w i t h i n limits s p e c i f i e d i n t a b l e 11-6. Rocket i n d i c a t o r s E S' FT, GS, and
s h a l l be illuminated.
M.
The AUTO PILOT B C U i n d i c a t o r s h a l l be extinguished. AKP
NOTE I f t h e AUTO PILOT B C U i n d i c a t o r AKP i s ON, momentarily holci t h e A C switch F i n t h e PRIMARY RESET p o s i t i o n and t h e n release.
N.
~ d j u s t h e r a t e t a b l e t o zero.
11-181.
RATE GYRO YAW ATTITUDE: H L SYNC. CIRCUIT OD

.A.
Place t h e Yaw A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch i n t h e U T E position.
B.
Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e GfF p o s i t i o n . Connect t h e t e s t c a r t TP23 and TP41 t o t h e recorder. Connect TPlOO and TPlOl t o t h e recorder.
C.
D.
Place t h e r a t e gyro package on t h e r a t e t a b l e and a d j u s t f o r a yaw r i g h t r a t e and s e t f o r +0.050 k 0.010 vdc a t TP9 corresponding t o a 0 . l o / s e c r a t e .
E.
Move and h o l d . t h e ACA out of yaw d e t e n t u n t i l t h e voltage a t t h e t e s t c a r t TP23 i s l e s s t h a n 100 mvdc and t h e n r e t u r n s t i c k t o zero.
F.
G.
Wait u n t i l t h e voltage a t TP23 i n t e g r a t e s t o -10.0 f 2.5 vdc. The steady s t a t e voltage a t TP23 s h a l l be -10.0 Rocket i n d i c a t o r s E
+ 2.5
vdc.
H.
GT, and HS s h a l l i l l u m i n a t e when T' F ~ ' voltage a t TP23 i s -7.0 f 1.25 vdc.
Report No. 7260-954002
I. Slowly increase t h e r a t e t a b l e t o simulate an increasing

yaw r i g h t r a t e .
J.
The voltage a t T ~ 4 1 h a l l change from a nominal zero v o l t s s t o 28.0 + O e 5 a t a yaw r a t e of 3.0' -3.5 table.
t 0.3O/sec on t h e r a t e
K.
The voltage a t TP23 s h a l l decrease t o 100 mvdc within 3.0 sec. a f t e r t e s t c a r t TP41 goes t o +28.0 vdc.
L. Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e t o zero r a t e .
11-182 R T GYRO DIRECT WITH MODEL, P I A Y AND B C U R T G R S AE RM R AK P AE YO
NOTE The primary r a t e gyro and t h e backup r a t e gyro connectors s h a l l be mated with t h e r a t e &yro t r i a d package.
A.
B.
Place t h e Moment Compensation switch t o t h e ON p o s i t i o n . Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r a yaw r i g h t r a t e u n t i l t h e B C U RATE B R MALFUNCTION and t h e AUTO PILOT B C U AKP YO AKP i n d i c a t o r s illuminate.
C.
The B C U R T GYRO MALFUNCTION and t h e AUTO PILOT B C U AKP AE AKP i n d i c a t o r s s h a l l illuminate a t a r a t e of 25 f 1/sec.
D.
E.
The voltage a t TP125 s h a l l be 28 + O g 5 vdc.
-3 5
Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r oO/sec. The B C U RATE G R MALFUNCTION i n d i c a t o r s h a l l extinguish. AKP YO The AUTO PILOT MCKUP i n d i c a t o r s h a l l remain illuminated. Hold t h e AFCS Primary Reset switch i n t h e PRIMARY RESET p o s i t i o n and then r e l e a s e .
F.
G.
H.
Report No. 7260-954002
I.
The AUTO PILOT B C U i n d i c a t o r s h a l l extinguish. AKP
J , Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r a yaw l e f t r a t e and increase u n t i l

t h e B C U R T GYRO MALFUNCTION AK P AE i n d i c a t o r s illuminate. and t h s AUTO PILOT BACKUP
K.
The BACKUP RATE GYRO MALFUNCTION and t h e AUTO PILOT B C U AKP i n d i c a t o r s s h a l l i l l u m i n a t e a t a r a t e of 25 f 1/sec.
L.
The voltage a t ~ ~ 1 s2h a l l be 28 + O m 5 vdc. 6
-3 5
M,
N.
0.
Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r oO/sec. The B C U R T GYRO MALFUNCTION i n d i c a t o r s h a l l exLinguish. A K P AE The AUTO PILOT BACK U i n d i c a t o r s h a l l remain illuminated. P
Po Hold t h e AFCS Primary Reset switch i n t h e PRIMARY RESET p o s i t i o n and r e l e a s e .
Q.
R.
The AUTO PILOT B C U i n d i c a t o r s h a l l extinguish. AKP Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF p o s i t i o n .
11-183.
U T E G R TORQUING C R E T SENSITIVITY YO URN

A.
- YAW CHANNEL,
PRIMARY
Place t h e Yaw A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch i n t h e R T AE position.
B.
C.
Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e ON p o s i t i o n . Rotate t h e ACA 3.0' yaw r i g h t .
G D. Rocket i n d i c a t o r s ET~ F S ~ T 9 and HS s h a l l i l l u m i n a t e .
E.
Record t h e voltage a t T P ( s t i c k command output V ~ TP~) NT OE The voltage reading a t T P ~ h a l l be s used i n a c a l c u l a t i o n t h a t w i l l follow.
Report No. 7260-954002
F. Apply a p o s i t i v e DC torquing current a t t h e t e s t c a r t T ~ 1 6 8

(yaw primary t o r q u e r ) , increasing t h e torquing c u r r e n t u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s
G.
5 9
FS9
GT9
and H
extinguish.
Measure t h e torquing current i n t o ~ ~ 1 6(Reading No. 1 ) 8. and record.
H. Increase t h e torquing current a t ~ ~ 1 u n 8i l rocket 6 t

i n d i c a t o r s ES 9 FT 9 GS, and
illuminate.
I. Measure t h e torquing c u r r e n t i n t o T ~ 1 6 8(Reading No. 2)

and record.
J.
Calculate t h e average torquing current where I No. 1 and I

2 = Reading No. 2.
+
= Reading
.K. The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be

L.
I1
I2 .
Calculate t h e value of 28 V from Step No. E , where TP6
M. The average torquing current s h a l l be equal t o 28 VT P + 20%. ~ N. Remove the torquing c u r r e n t from T~168.
0. P.
Return the ACA t o zero p o s i t i o n (yaw d e t e n t ) . Rotate t h e ACA 3.0' yaw l e f t .
Q.
R.
Rocket i n d i c a t o r s ES, FT, GS, and
Itp
s h a l l illuminate
Record t h e voltage a t T P ~ s t i c k command output VTp6)' (
NOTE The voltage reading a t T P s h a l l be ~ used i n a c a l c u l a t i o n t h a t w i l l follow.
Report No. 7260-954002
S.
Apply a negative DC t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t a t t h e t e s t c a r t ~ ~ 1 6 8 (yaw primary t o r q u e r ) , i n c r e a s i n g t h e t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t u n t i l r o c k e t i n d i c a t o r s ES, FT, GS, and H s h a l l e x t i n g u i s h . T
T.
Measure t h e torquing c u r r e n t i n t o ~ ~ 1 (Reading No. 3) 6 8 and r e c o r d .
U.
I n c r e a s e t h e torquing c u r r e n t a t ~ ~ 1 u n t i l rocket 6 8 i n d i c a t o r s ET 9
FS9
GT, and H~ i l l u m i n a t e .
V.
Measure t h e t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t i n t o ~ ~ 1 (Reading No. 4) 6 8 and record.
W.
C a l c u l a t e t h e average t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t where I No.
3 and I4 = Reading No. 4.

I
= Reading
X.
The average t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t s h a l l be
+ I
L.
Y. C a l c u l a t e t h e value of 28 VTp6 from Step R , where
Z. The average t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t s h a l l be equal t o 28 VTp6 f- 20%.

AA.
Remove t h e t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t from ~ ~ 1 6 8 . Return t h e ACA t o zero p o s i t i o n (yaw d e t e n t ) . Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF p o s i t i o n .
AB.
AC.
11-184.
RATE GYRO TORQUING CURRENT SENSITIVITY

A.
- YAW
CHANNEL BfiCKUP
P l a c e P r i m a r y / ~ a c k u p switch i n B C U p o s i t i o n . AKP
B. P l a c e P i t c h , R o l l and Paw Mode switches t o DIRECT.

C.
P l a c e t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF p o s i t i o n . yaw r i g h t .
D. Rotate t h e ACA 3.0'

E.
Roclet i n d i c a t o r s ET, FS, GT, and H S s h a l l i l l u m i n a t e .
Report No. 7260-954002
F.
Record t h e voltage a t T ~ 8 6( s t i c k command output V TP86)
NOTE The voltage reading a t ~
~ s h a l l be 8 6
used i n a c a l c u l a t i o n t h a t w i l l follow.
G.
Apply a p o s i t i v e DC torquing current a t t h e t e s t c a r t TPl72 (yaw backup t o r q u e r ) , increasing t h e torquing c u r r e n t u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s ET, FS, GT, and H extinguish. S
H. Measure t h e torquing c u r r e n t i n t o TPl72 (Reading No. 1 )

and record.
I.
Increase t h e torquing current a t TPl72 u n t i l rocket indicators E
s'
GT, GS, and
illuminate.
Measure t h e torquing c u r r e n t i n t o TPl72 (Reading No. 2) and record. Calculate t h e average torquing current current where
I = Reading No. 1 and I2 = Reading No. 2. 1 I +I2 The average torquing current s h a l l be 1
Calculate t h e value of 28 VTp86
2 from Step No. F, where
I + I2 1 2 = 28 ' ~ ~ 8 6 .
The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be equal t o 28 VTp86 t 20%. Remove t h e torquing c u r r e n t from TPl72. Return t h e ACA t o zero p o s i t i o n (yaw d e t e n t ) Rotate t h e ACA 3.0' yaw l e f t . s h a l l illuminate.
Rocket i n d i c a t o r s ES, FT, GS, and

S.
Record t h e voltage a t T ~ 8 6 s t i c k command output (
Report NO. 7260-954002
1 - 4? 11 .
NT OE The voltage reading a t ~ ~ s h a l l6be 8
used i n a c a l c u l a t i o n t h a t w i l l follow.
.T.
Apply a negative DC torquing c u r r e n t a t t h e t e s t c a r t TPl72 (yaw backup t o r q u e r ) , i n c r e a s i n g t h e torquing current u n t i l
? i rocket i n d i c a t o r s ES 9 FT, GS, and $
extinguish.
U. Measure t h e torquing current, i n t o TPl72 (Reading No. 3)

and record.
V.
Increase t h e torquing current a t TP172 u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s ET FS, GT
, and
H illuminate. S
W.
Measure t h e torquing c u r r e n t i n t o TPl72 (Reading No. 4 ) and record.
X.
Calculate t h e average torquing current where I No. 3 and I4 = Reading No. 4.
= Reading
Y.
Z.
The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be Calculate t h e value of 28 VTp86
I3 + I4
2 from Step No. S, where
AA. The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be equal t o 28 VTp86 i 2@.

AB.
AC
Remove t h e torquing c u r r e n t from TPl72. Return t h e ACA t o zero p o s i t i o n (yaw detent)
AD.
Return t h e ~ r i m a r y / ~ a c kswitch t o t h e PRIMARY p o s i t i o n . u~ Actuate t h e Primary Reset switch t o extinguish t h e AUTO PIL(YT BACK U i n d i c a t o r . P
Report No. 7260-954002
11-185.
PITCH R T G R S AE YO
- CALIBRATION OF RATE GYRO CIRCUITS,
PITCH
A.
Place t h e P i t c h A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch t o t h e R T position. AE
B.
C.
Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF position. Mount t h e r a t e a r o t r i a d on t h e r a t e t a b l e such t h a t a clockwise r o t a t i o n of t h e t a b l e corresponds t o a p i t c h up r a t e .
D..
E.
Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r a 20.0/sec
p i t c h down r a t e
Perform t h e measurements and mcord d a t a according t o t h e requirements of t a b l e 11-7.
PITCH DOWN R T GYRO TEST RXQUIREMENTS AE Measurement Primary Rate Gyro Backup Rate Gyro Monitor Rate Gyro
i
Output Name PRI

BU
Test Point TP7 TP87n

.
Output Volt Requirements -10.0
Actual vdc vdc vdc
+ 0.75
vdc
-10.0 f 0.75 vdc -10.0 f 0.75 vdc
MON
MON A2 TP1
F.
G.
Voltages s h a l l be within t h e l i m i t s s p e c i f i e d i n t a b l e 11-7. Rocket i n d i c a t o r s
+, BS,
CS, and DT s h a l l be illuminated.
H.
The AUTO PILOT B C U i n d i c a t o r s h a l l be extinguished. AK P
I f t h e AUTO PILOT BACK UP i n d i c a t o r i s

ON, momentarily hold t h e AFCS switch i n
t h e PRIMARY RESET p o s i t i o n and then release. Report No. 7260-954002
I.
Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r 20.0/sec p i t c h up r a t e . Perform t h e measurements and record d a t a according t o t h e requirements of t a b l e 11-8. TABU 11-8 PITCH U RATE GYRO TEST REQUIREMENTS P Output Name PRI B U MON
J.
Test
Point TP7
Output Volt Requirement +10.0
Actual vdc vdc vdc vdc
* 0.75
+10.0 ~ ~ 8 7
f 0.75 vdc
MON A2 TP1
+10.0 f 0.75 vdc
K.
Voltages s h a l l be w i t h i n t h e l i m i t s s p e c i f i e d i n t a b l e 11-8.
BT9
CT9
L. Rocket i n d i c a t o r s A ~9
and DS s h a l l be illuminated.
M. The AUTO PILOT B C U i n d i c a t o r s h a l l be extinguished. AK P
I f t h e AUTO PILOT BACK U i n d i c a t o r i s P
ON, momentarily hold t h e AFCS switch i n t h e PRIMARY RESET p o s i t i o n and then

release.
N.
11-186.
Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e t o zero.
ATTITUDE H L SYNC. CIRCUIT OD
PITCH C A N L HNE
A.
B.
C.
Place P i t c h A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch i n RATE p o s i t i o n . Place the.Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF p o s i t i o n . Place t h e a t t i t u d e gyro package on t h e p r e c i s i o n angle i n d i c a t o r and a d j u s t f o r 0' pitch attitude. Report No. 7260-954002
D.
Connect TP21 and TP39 t o t h e recorder inputs on t h e t e s t cart. Turn on t h e recorder.
E.
Move and hold t h e ACA out of p i t c h d e t e n t u n t i l t h e voltage a t TP21 i s l e s s than 100 mvdc, then r e t u r n t h e ACA t o zero.
F .
G.
Adjust t h e a t t i t u d e gyro f o r a 2.0
;t
O.lopitch up a t t i t u d e .
The voltage a t TP21 s h a l l be +10.0 k 2.5 vdc. .Place t h e r a t e gyro on t h e r a t e t a b l e such t h a t a p i t c h up r a t e .corresponds t o a clockwise r o t a t i o n of t h e t a b l e .
H.
I S t a r t the r a t e t a b l e and slowly increase t h e r a t e t o .

simulate a p i t c h up r a t e .
J..
.
Voltage a t TP39 s h a l l change from a nominal 0 v o l t s t o a nominal +28 vdc a t a p i t c h up r a t e of 3 .O f 0 .lo/sec.
K.
L.
Voltage a t TP21 s h a l l decrease t o 100 mvdc i n l e s s than
3 seconds a f t e r voltage a t TP39 changes t o +28 vdc.

Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e t o oO/sec. r a t e .
11-18?,
EXCESS R T AE
- DIRECT WITH MODEL,

NT OE -
PRI AND B/U RATE G R S YO
The primary r a t e gyro and t h e backup gyro connectors s h a l l be mated with t h e r a t e gyro t r i a d package. A. Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e ON position. Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r a p i t c h up , r a t e u n t i l t h e B C U AKP RATE GYRO MALFUNCTION and t h e A T PILOT BACK UP i n d i c a t o r s UO illuminate'.
B .
Report No. 7260-954002
C.
The BACKUP R T G R MALFUNCTION and t h e AUTO PILOT BACK UP A E YO i n d i c a t o r s s h a l l i l l u m i n a t e a t a r a t e of 25 f 1/sec.

+
D.
E.
The voltage a t TP122 s h a l l be 28
O g 5 vdc.
3.5
Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r oO/sec. The B C U RATE GYRO MALFUNCTION i n d i c a t o r s h a l l extinguish. AKP The AUTO PILOT BACK UP i n d i c a t o r s h a l l remain illuminated.
F.
G.
H Momentarily hold t h e AFCS Frimary Reset switch i n t h e .

PRIMARY RESET p o s i t i o n and t h e n ' r e l e a s e .
I.
J.
The AUTO PILOT BACK UP i n d i c a t o r s h a l l extinguish. Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r a p i t c h down r a t e u n t i l t h e P B C U R T GYRO MALFUNCTION and t h e AUTO PILOT BACK U AK P AE
K.
The B C U R T GYRO MALFUNCTION and t h e AUTO PILOT BACK UP AK P AE i n d i c a t o r s s h a l l i l l u m i n a t e a t a r a t e of 25 +_ 1/sec.

+
L.
The v o l t a g e at; TP113 s h a l l be 28
- Oe5 3.5
vdc.
M. Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r oO/sec.
N.
0. P. The B C U R T GYRO MALFUNCTION i n d i c a t o r s h a l l extinguish. AK P AE The AUTO PILOT BACK UP i n d i c a t o r s h a l l remain illuminated. Momentarily hold t h e AFCS Primary Reset switch i n t h e PRIMARY RESET p o s i t i o n and r e l e a s e .
Q .
R.
The AUTO PILOT BACK UP i n d i c a t o r s h a l l extinguish. Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF p o s i t i o n .
Report No. 7260-954002
11-188.
R T GYRO TORQUING C R E T SENSITIVITY. PITCH CHANNEL,PRIMARY AE URN
A.
Place t h e P i t c h A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch i n t h e R T position, AE
B. Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e ON p o s i t i o n .

C. Rotate t h e ACA 3.0' p i t c h up.
D.
Rocket i n d i c a t o r s AT, BS, CS, and D
T s h a l l illuminate.
E.
Record t h e v o l t a t e a t TP4 ( s t i c k command output VTp4). NT OE The voltage reading a t TP4 s h a l l be used i n a c a l c u l a t i o n t h a t w i l l follow.
F.
Apply a p o s i t i v e DC torquing current a t t h e t e s t c a r t ~ ~ 1 (6 i6 c h primary t o r q u e r ) , increasing t h e torquing p t c u r r e n t u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s AT, BS 9 CS9 and DT s h a l l extinguish.
G.
Measure t h e torquing c u r r e n t i n t o T ~ 1 6 6(Reading No. 1 ) and record.
H.
Increase t h e torquing c u r r e n t a t ~ ~ 1 u n t i l rocket 6 6 i n d i c a t o r s AS ,
%,
CT, and D
illuminate.
2)
I Measure t h e torquing c u r r e n t i n t o ~ ~ 1 (6~ e a d i n gNO. . 6

and record.
J.
Calculate t h e average torquing current where I = Reading 1 No. 1 and I2 = Reading No. 2. The average torquing current s h a l l be
1 + I
K.
L.
Calculate t h e value of 28 VTp4 from Step No. E, where
Report No. 7260-954002
M.
The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be equal t o 28 V TP4 Remove t h e torquing c u r r e n t from T ~ 1 6 6 . Return t h e ACA t o zero p o s i t i o n Rotate t h e ACA 3.0' Rocket i n d i c a t o r s A p i t c h down. S'
20$.
N.
0.
i itch
detent)
P.
Q.
%''T'
NT OE -
and D
s h a l l illuminate.
R.
Record t h e voltage a t TP4 ( s t i c k command output V TP4) '
The voltage reading a t TP4 s h a l l be used i n a c a l c u l a t i o n t h a t w i l l follow. S. Apply a negative DC torquing current a t t h e t e s t c a r t ~ ~ 1 6 6 ( p i t c h primary t o r q u e r ) , i n c r e a s i n g t h e torquing current u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s A s, BT, CT, and D S s h a l l extinguish.
T.
Measure t h e torquing current i n t o T ~ 1 6 6( ~ e a d i n g No. 3) and record.

.
U.
Increase t h e torquing c u r r e n t a t ~ ~ 1 u6n t i l rocket 6 indicators
%,
BS, CS, and DT illuminate.
V.
Measure t h e torquing c u r r e n t i n t o T ~ 1 6 6(Reading No. 4) and record.
W.
Calculate t h e average torquing c u r r e n t , where I No.
and I4 = Reading No. 4.
= Reading
X.
Y.
The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be
I3 + I 4
2
Calculate t h e v a l u e o f 2 8 V fromStepNo.R,where TP4
Z.
The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be equal t o 28VTp4 t 20%.
11-154
Report No. 7260-954.002
AA.
Remove t h e torquing current from ~ ~ 1 6 6 . Return t h e ACA t o zero p o s i t i o n
AB.
AC.
i itch
detent).
Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF position.
11-189.
R T GYRO TORQUING C R E T SENSITIVITY AE URN
PITCH CHANNEL, B C U AKP
A.
Place t h e ~ r i m a r ~ / B a c kswitch i n t h e BACKUP p o s i t i o n . u~ Place t h e P i t c h , R o l l , and Y w Mode switches t o DIRECT. a Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF position. Rotate t h e ACA
B.
C'.
D. E. F.
3 .oO p i t c h up.
Rocket i n d i c a t o r s
%,
BS, CS, and DT s h a l l illuminate.
Record t h e voltage a t Tp84 ( s t i c k command output VTP84) ' NT OE The voltage reading a t TP84 s h a l l be used i n a c a l c u l a t i o n t h a t w i l l follow.
G.
Apply a p o s i t i v e DC torquing current a t t h e t e s t c a r t TPl7O ( p i t c h backup t o r q u e r ) , increasing t h e torquing current u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s A
CS, and D extinguish. T' B ~ ' T
H.
Measure t h e torquing c u r r e n t i n t o TPl7O (Reading No. 1) and record.
I. Increase t h e torquing current a t TPl7O u n t i l rocket

indicators A
S'
BT, CT, and DS illuminate.
Measure t h e torquing current i n t o TPl7O ( ~ e a d i n gNo. 2) and record.
K.
Calculate t h e average torquing current where I No. 1 and I2 = Reading No. 2.
= Reading
Report No. 7260-954002
L.
The average torquing current s h a l l be I + I 2 1
--2
.
+
M.
Calculate t h e value of 28 VTpg4
from Step No. F, where
N,
0.
The average torquing current s h a l l be equal t o 28 VTp8& Remove t h e torquing c u r r e n t from TPl7O. Return t h e ACA t o zero p o s i t i o n ( p i t c h d e t e n t )
'
2%.
P.
Q.
R. S.
Rotate t h e ACA 3.0'
p i t c h down.
'
Rocket i n d i c a t o r s AS, BT, CT and D
s h a l l illuminate
Record t h e voltage a t TP84 ( s t i c k command output VTpg4).
NOTE The voltage reading a t TP84 s h a l l be used i n a c a l c u l a t i o n t h a t w i l l follow.
T.
Apply a negative DC torquing c u r r e n t a t t h e t e s t c a r t TP170 ( p i t c h backup t o r q u e r ) , i n c r e a s i n g t h e torquing c u r r e n t u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s A S , BT, CT, and D extinguish. S
U.
Measure t h e torquing current i n t o TPl7O (Reading No. 3 ) and record.
V.
I n c r e a s e t h e torquing c u r r e n t a t TPl7O u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s AT , BS, CS, and D
s h a l l illiuninate.
W Measure t h e torquing current i n t o TPl7O (Reading No. 4) .

and record.
X.
Calculate t h e average torquing current, where I No.
3 and I&
= Reading No. 4.
= Reading
Report No. 7260-954002
Y.
Z.
The average t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t s h a l l be I 3 + I 4 2 C a l c u l a t e t h e value of 28 VTpg4 from S t e p No.
.
S, where
AA.
AB. AC.
The average t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t s h a l l be equal t o 28VTpg4 t 20%. Remove t h e t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t from TPl7O. Return t h e ACA t o zero p o s i t i o n
i itch
detent)
AD.
Return t h e p r i m a r y / ~ a c k u pswitch t o t h e PRIMARY p o s i t i o n . Actuate t h e Primary Reset switch t o e x t i n g u i s h t h e A T UO PILOT BACK U i n d i c a t o r . P
11-190
CALIBRATION O RATE GYRO CIRCUITS, ROLL F
A.
P l a c e t h e R o l l A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch t o RATE p o s i t i o n . P l a c e t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF p o s i t i o n . Mount t h e r a t e gyro t r i a d on t h e r a t e t a b l e such t h a t a clockwise r a t a t i o n of t h e t a b l e corresponds t o a r o l l r i g h t rate.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r a 20.0/sec.
r o l l l e f t rate.
Perform t h e measurements and record d a t a according t o t h e requirements of t a b l e 11-9. TABLE 11-9 ROLL LEFT RATE GYRO TEST REQUIREMENTS
3
Output Name PRI B U
Test Point TP8 TP88
Output Volt Requirement -10.0 f 0.75 vdc -10.0 f 0.75 vdc -10.0k0.75vdc
Actual vdc vdc vdc
MON
MONA6
TP1
Report No. 7260-954002
11-15?
F.
G.
Voltages s h a l l be w i t h i n t h e limits s p e c i f i e d i n t a b l e 11-9. Rocket i n d i c a t o r s AT, BT, CS, and D S s h a l l be illuminated.
H .
The AUTO PILOT B C UP i n d i c a t o r s h a l l be extinguished. AK
NOTE I f t h e A T PILOT BACK U i n d i c a t o r i s On, UO P momentarily hold t h e AFCS switch i n t h e PRIMARY RESET. p o s i t i o n and t h e n release.
I. Adjdst t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r 20 .oO/sec r o l l r i g h t r a t e .
J.
Perform t h e measurements and record data according t o t h e requirements of t a b l e 11-10. TABLE 11-10 AE R L RIGHT R T GYRO TEST REQUIREMENTS OL Output ~ame PRI Test Point TP8 TP88 Output Volt Requirement +10.0 +10.0
Actual vdc vdc vdc
BU
MON
+ + -
0.75 vdc 0.75 vdc 0.75vdc
MONA^
TP1
+10.0f
K.
Voltages s h a l l be w i t h i n t h e l i m i t s s p e c i f i e d i n t a b l e 11-10. Rocket i n d i c a t o r s AS,

BS9
L. M.
CT, and D s h a l l be illuminated. T
The AUTO PILOT BACK U i n d i c a t o r s h a l l be extinguished. P
NOTE If t h e A T PILOT BACK UP i n d i c a t o r i s UO

ON, momentarily hold t h e AFCS switch i n
t h e PRIMARY RESET p o s i t i o n and then r e l e a s e . Report No. 7260-954002
N.
Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e t o zero.
11-191.
ATTITUDE HOLD SYNC. CIRCUIT
A.
Place t h e R o l l A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch i n R T position. AE
B. Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF position.

C.
Place t h e a t t i t u d e gyro package on t h e p r e c i s i o n angle i n d i c a t o r and a d j u s t f o r 0' r o l l attitude.
D.
Connect TP22 and TP40 t o t h e recorder i n p u t s on t h e t e s t cart. Turn on t h e recorder.
E.
Move and hold t h e ACA out of r o l l d e t e n t u n t i l t h e voltage a t TP22 i s l e s s than 100 rnvdc, then r e t u r n t h e ACA t o zero.
F.
G.
Adjust t h e a t t i t u d e gyro f o r a 2.0 Voltage a t TP22 s h a l l be
0.1'
r o l l right attitude.
10.0
2.5 vdc.
H.
Place t h e r a t e gyro on t h e r a t e t a b l e such t h a t a r o l l r i g h t r a t e corresponds t o a clockwise r o t a t i o n of t h e t a b l e .
I. S t a r t t h e r a t e t a b l e and slowly increase t h e r a t e t o

simulate a r o l l r i g h t r a t e .
J.
Voltage a t TPM s h a l l change from a nominal 0 v o l t s t o a nominal +28 vdc a t a r o l l r i g h t r a t e of 3.0 f O.jO/sec.
K. A f t e r t h e voltage a t T P ~ Ochanges t o +28 vdc, voltage a t TP22 s h a l l decrease t o 100 mvdc i n l e s s than 3 seconds.
L. Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e t o oO/sec. r a t e .
NOTE The primary r a t e gyro and t h e backup r a t e gyro connectors s h a l l be mated with t h e r a t e gyro t r i a d package. Report No. 7260-954.002
(11-192)
A.
Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e ON position. Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r a r o l l r i g h t r a t e u n t i l t h e B C U RATE GYRO M L U C I N and t h e AUTO PILOT BACK UP AKP A F N TO i n d i c a t o r s illuminate.
B.
C.
The B C U RATE GYRO M L U C I N and t h e AUTO PILOT BACK UP AKP A F N TO i n d i c a t o r s s h a l l illuminate a t a r a t e of 25

+
+ 1/sec,
D.
E.
F.
G.
O o 5 vdc.
3.5
.Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r o0/sec,. The B C U RATE GYRO MALFUNCTION indicator s h a l l extinguish. AKP The AUTO PILOT BACK UP i n d i c a t o r s h a l l remain illuminated. Hold the AFCS Primary Reset switch i n the PRDIARY RESET p o s i t i o n and then release.
H.
I.
J.
The AUTO PILOT BACK U i n d i c a t o r s h a l l extinguish. P Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r a r o l l l e f t r a t e u n t i l t h e B C U RATE GYRO M L U C I N and t h e AUTO PILOT BACK UP AKP A F N TO i n d i c a t o r s illuminate.
K.
The B C U RATE GYRO M L U C I N and the AUTO PILOT BACK U AKP A F N TO P i n d i c a t o r s s h a l l illuminate a t a r a t e of 25 -f; 1/sec.
+
L.
O m 5 vdc.
3.5
M.
N.
0. P.
Adjust t h e r a t e t a b l e f o r oO/sec. The B C U U T E GYRO M L U C I N indicator s h a l l extinguish. AKP A F N TO The AUTO PILOT BACK U i n d i c a t o r s h a l l remain illuminated. P Hold t h e AFCS Primary Reset switch i n the PRlMARY RESET p o s i t i o n and then r e l e a s e .
Q.
R.
The AUTO PILOT BACK UP i n d i c a t o r s h a l l extinguish. Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n the OFF position.
11-160
Report No. 7260-954002
11-193
RATE G R TORQUING CURRENT SENSITIVITY, ROLL CHANNEL, PRIMARY YO
A.
P l a c e t h e R o l l A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch i n t h e RATE position.
B.
C..
P l a c e t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e ON p o s i t i o n . R o t a t e t h e ACA 3.0' Rocket i n d i c a t o r s r o l l right.
D.
E.
%'
'T'
's'
and DS s h a l l i l l u m i n a t e .
Record t h e v o l t a g e a t TP5 ( s t i c k comand output vTp5). NT OE The v o l t a g e r e a d i n g a t TP5 s h a l l be used i n a c a l c u l a t i o n t h a t w i l l follow.
F.
Apply a p o s i t i v e DC t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t a t t h e t e s t c a r t
~ ~ 1 (6r o l l primary t o r q u e r ) , i n c r e a s i n g t h e t o r q u i n g 7 c u r r e n t u n t i l r o c k e t i n d i c a t o r s AT Y BT CS and S

extinguish,
G.
Measure t h e t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t i n t o ~ ~ 1 (6~ e a d i n g 7 No. 1) and record.
H. I n c r e a s e t h e t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t a t ~ ~ 1 u n 7i l r o c k e t 6 t
i n d i c a t o r s AS, BS, CT, and D
illuminate.
I.
Measure t h e t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t i n t o ~ ~ 1 (Reading No. 2 ) 6 7 and record.
J.
C a l c u l a t e t h e average t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t where I = Reading 1 No. 1 and I2 = Reading No. 2. The average t o r q u i n g c u r r e n t s h a l l b e C a l c u l a t e t h e value of 28 V TP5
K. L.
I +I2 1
2 from S t e p No. E , where
Report No. 7260-954002
M. The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be equal t o 28 V

N.
0.
TP5
+ -
20%.
Remove t h e torquing c u r r e n t from ~ ~ 1 6 7 . Return t.he ACA t o zero p o s i t i o n ( r o l l d e t e n t ) . Rotate t h e ACA 3 .oO r o l l l e f t . Rocket i n d i c a t o r s A s,
Bs9
'T9
P.
Q.
and D s h a l l i l l u m i n a t e . T
R.
Record t h e voltage a t TP5 ( s t i c k command output V TP~) NT OE The voltage reading a t TP5 s h a l l be used in a c a l c u l a t i o n t h a t w i l l follow.
S.
Apply a negative DC torquing c u r r e n t a t t h e t e s t c a r t u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s A
~ ~ 1 6 7
( r o l l primary t o r q u e r ) , i n c r e a s i n g t h e torquing current S'
Bs' C T ,
and DT s h a l l extinguish.
T.
Measure t h e torquing c u r r e n t i n t o ~ ~ 1 ( ~ e a d i n g 6 7 No. 3) and record.
U.
I n c r e a s e t h e torquing c u r r e n t a t ~ ~ 1 u n t i l rocket 6 7 i n d i c a t o r s AT ' BT, CS, and D

S
illuminate.
V.
W.
Measure t h e torquing c u r r e n t i n t o ~ ~ 1 (Reading No. 4) 6 7 and record. C a l c u l a t e t h e average torquing c u r r e n t where I No.
3 and I4 = Reading No. 4.

I +I 3 4
3
L.
= Reading
X. Y.
The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be
Calculate t h e v a l u e o f 2 8 V fromStepNo.R,where TP5
Z.
The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be equal t o 28 V TP5
2@.
Report No. 7260-954002
AA. Remove t h e torquing current from ~ ~ 1 6 7 . AB. Return t h e ACA t o zero p o s i t i o n ( r o l l detent). AC. Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF position. 11-194. RATE GYRO TORQUING C R E T SENSITIVITY, R L CHANNEL, BACK UP URN OL A. Place t h e ~ a t e / ~ a c k u p switch i n the B C U position. AKP
B. Place t h e Pitch, R o l l , and Yaw Attitude Control Mode switches

t o DIRECT.
C. Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF position.
D. Place t h e Roll A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch i n t h e R T AE

position.
E. place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e ON position.

F. Rotate t h e ACA 3.0' r o l l right.
BT9
G. Rocket i n d i c a t o r s AT,
Cs, and
DS s h a l l illuminate.
~ ~ ~ ~ ) .
H Record t h e voltage a t TP85 ( s t i c k command output v .
The voltage reading a t TP85 s h a l l be used i n a c a l c u l a t i o n t h a t w i l l follow
1 Apply a positive DC torquing current a t t h e t e s t c a r t TP171 .

( r o l l backup t o r q u e r ) , increasing t h e torquing current u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s AT, BT, CS, and D S extinguish.
J . Measure the torquing current i n t o TPl7l (Reading No. 1 ) and record.
K. Increase t h e torquing current a t TPl7l u n t i l rocket

i n d i c a t o r s AS, BS,
C~
' and
D illuminate. T
Report No. 7260-954002
11-163
L. Measure t h e torquing c u r r e n t i n t o TPl7l (Reading No. 2)

and record.
M.
Calculate t h e average torquing c u r r e n t where I = Reading 1 No. 1 and I2 = Reading No. 2. The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be C a l c u l a t e t h e value of 28 VTp85
N.
0.
I1+ I2
from Step No. H, where
P.
The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be equal t o 28 V TP85 Remove t h e torquing c u r r e n t from TPl7l. Return t h e ACA t o zero p o s i t i o n ( r o l l d e t e n t ) . roll left.
+ -
20%.
Q.
R.
S.. Rotate t h e ACA 3.0'
T.
Rocket i n d i c a t o r s A S, BS, CT, and D s h a l l i l l u m i n a t e . T ~ ~ ~ ~ ) .
U. Record t h e voltage a t TP85 ( s t i c k command output v
NOTE The voltage reading a t TP85 s h a l l be used i n a c a l c u l a t i o n t h a t w i l l follow.
V.
Apply a negative DC torquing c u r r e n t a t t h e t e s t c a r t TPl7l ( r o l l backup t o r q u e r ) , i n c r e a s i n g t h e torquing c u r r e n t u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s A

CT, and D extinguish. S' B ~ ' T
No. 3) W Measure t h e torguing c u r r e n t i n t o TPl7l ( ~ e a d i n g . and record.
X.
I n c r e a s e t h e torquing c u r r e n t a t T P l 7 l u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s AT, BT, CS, and D S illuminate.
Y. Measure t h e torquing current i n t o TPl7l (Reading No. 4)

and record.
11-1-64.
Report No. 7260-954002
Z.
Calculate t h e average torquing c u r r e n t where I No.
3 and I
= Reading No. 4.
= Reading
AA.
AB.
The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be Calculate t h e values of 28 V TP85
I + I 3 4
2 from Step No. U , where
AC.
The average torquing c u r r e n t s h a l l be equal t o 28 VTp85 f 20%. Remove t h e torquing c u r r e n t from TP171. Return t h e ACA t o zero p o s i t i o n ( r o l l d e t e n t ) . ~ Return t h e P r i m a r y / ~ a c k uswitch t o t h e PRIMARY position.
AD.
AE. AF.
11-195.
VERTICAL GYRO WITH S N H O ADJUSTMENTS YCRS
The following adjustments a r e required whenever t h e v e r t i c a l gyro with synchros i s changed.
A.
With gyro pPckage mounted on a h o r i z o n t a l plane (0'
+ 6 -
min)
a d j u s t gyros f o r an AC n u l l a t PRI A4 TP7 i itch) and PRI A10 TP7.
11-196.
VERTICAL GYRO WT S N H O INITIAL POTENTIOMETER SETTINGS IH Y C R S
A.
The primary e l e c t r o n i c s a t t i t u d e gyro gain potentiometer s h a l l be adjusted f o r 200 mv/deg i n p i t c h and r o l l .
B.
The primary e l e c t r o n i c s a t t i t u d e gyro n u l l potentiometer s h a l l be adjusted t o compensate f o r t h e n u l l i n t h e gyro.
11-197.
VERTICAL GYRO WT S N H O TESTS FtEQUIRED IH Y C R S
The following t e s t s a r e required a f t e r t h e v e r t i c a l gyro w i t h synchros i n i t i a l potentiometer s e t t i n g s have been performed.
Report No. 7260-954.002
11-198.
ATTITUDE THRJISHOLD, PITCH C A N L HNE
A.
Place t h e P i t c h A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch i n t h e RATE position.
B.
C.
Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n OFF p o s i t i o n . Place t h e p i t c h a t t i t u d e gyro package on t h e p r e c i s i o n angle i n d i c a t o r and s e t t a b l e f o r 0' pitch attitude.
D.
Move t h e ACA out of t h e p i t c h d e t e n t u n t i l t h e voltage a t t e s t p o i n t TP21 i s l e s s than 100 mvdc and then r e t u r n t o zero, ( p i t c h d e t e n t )
E.
Slowly r o t a t e t h e a t t i t u d e gyro f o r a p i t c h down p o s i t i o n of 1.0 f 0.3'
F.
G.
Rocket i n d i c a t o r s AT, BS,
Cs' and
DT s h a l l illuminate.
The a t t i t u d e gyro s h a l l be r o t a t e d f o r a p i t c h down p o s i t i o n of 1.0
+
0.3
0.3'.
0
H.
Slowly r o t a t e ' t h e A t t i t u d e Gyro f o r a p i t c h up p o s i t i o n of 1.0
I.
J.
Rocket i n d i c a t o r s AS,
BT, CT, and DS s h a l l illuminate.
The a t t i t u d e gyro s h a l l be r o t a t e d f o r a p i t c h up p o s i t i o n of 1.0
+ 0.3O
11-199.
ATTITUDE THRESHOLD, R L C A N L OL H N E
A.
Place t h e R o l l A t t i t u d e Control Mode switch i n t h e RATE position.
B. Place t h e Moment Compensation switch i n t h e OFF p o s i t i o n .

C.
Move t h e ACA out of t h e r o l l d e t e n t u n t i l t h e voltage a t t e s t p o i n t TP22 i s l e s s t h a n 100 mvdc and then r e t u r n t o zero ( r o l l d e t e n t )
11-166
Report No. 7260-954.002
D.
Slowly r o t a t e t h e a t t i t u d e gyro r o l l :.eft u n t i l rocket indicators A
T'
BT, CS, and D
illuminate.
E.
The r o l l l e f t a t t i t u d e s h a l l be 1.0
+ -
0.3'
. .
F.
Slowly r o t a t e t h e a t t i t u d e gyro r o l l r i g h t u n t i l rocket i n d i c a t o r s AS, BS, C and D illuminate. T T
G. 11-200.
The r o l l r i g h t a t t i t u d e s h a l l be 1.0
+ 0.3~
ATTITUDE INDICATOR, PITCH UP C A N L HNE

A.
Move t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r f u l l a f t u n t i l t h e hardstop i s contacted.
B.
The M S E WARNING and HARDOVER BOTH 3.ndicator.s i n t h e AT R cockpit s h a l l be illuminated.
C.
STD and M D L i n d i c a t o r s on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l be OE extinguished.
D.
BOTH i n d i c a t o r on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l be illuminated.
E. Rocket i n d i c a t o r s
F.
%,
BS, CS, and DT s h a l l be illuminated.
Return t h e hand c o n t r c l l e r t o t h e c e n t e r p o s i t i o n and release.
G.
The M S E WARNING and H R O E B T i n d i c a t o r s i n t h e AT R A D VR OH cockpit s h a l l remain illuminated.
H.
S D and M D L i n d i c a t o r s on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l remain T OE extinguished.
I.
J.
BOTH i n d i c a t o r on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l remain illuminated.
A l l rocket i n d i c a t o r s s h a l l be extinguished.
K. Press Hardover Reset switch i n t h e cockpit.
Report No. 7260-99002
L.
GH The HARDOVER B T i n d i c a t o r i n t h e cockpit s h a l l be extinguished. S D and MODEL i n d i c a t o r s on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l be i l l u h i n a t e d . T
M.
N.
11-201.
BOTH i n d i c a t o r on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l be extinguished.
ATTITUDE INDICATOR, PITCH DOWN CHANNEL
A.
Move t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r f u l l forward u n t i l the hardstop i s contacted.
B. .The M S E WARNING and H R O E BOTH i n d i c a t o r s in t h e cockpit AT R A D VR

C.
D. E. F.
G.
S D and M D L i n d i c a t o r s on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l be extinguished. T OE
Rocket i n d i c a t o r s A S ,
Bp,
CT, and DS s h a l l be illuminated.
Return t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r t o t h e center p o s i t i o n and release. The M S E WARNING and HARDOVER BOTH i n d i c a t o r s i n t h e cockpit AT R s h a l l remain illuminated.
H.
STD and M D L i n d i c a t o r s on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l remain OE extinguished.
I.
J.
BOTH i n d i c a t o r on the t e s t c a r t s h a l l remain illuminated.

Press t h e Hardover Reset switch i n t h e cockpit. The HARDOVER BOTH i n d i c a t o r i n t h e cockpit s h a l l be extinguished.
K.
L.
M.
N.
S D and M D L i n d i c a t o r s on the t e s t c a r t s h a l l be illuminated. T OE Both i n d i c a t o r on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l be extinguished.
Report No. 7260-954002
11-202.
ATTITUDE INDICATOR, R L RIGHT C A N L OL HNE
A.
Move t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r f u l l r i g h t u n t i l t h e hardstop
i s contacted.
B.
The M S E WARNING and H R O E BOTH i n d i c a t o r s i n t h e AT R A D VR cockpit s h a l l be illuminated.
C.
S D and M D L i n d i c a t o r s i n t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l be T OE extinguished.
D. E
Rocket indicators AT, BT, CS
, and DS
F.
Return the hand c o n t r o l l e r t o the center p o s i t i o n and release.
G.
The M S E WARNING and H R O E BOTH i n d i c a t o r s i n t h e AT R A D VR cockpit s h a l l remain illuminated.
H.
S D and MODEL i n d i c a t o r s on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l remain T extinguished.

'
I.
J.
BOTH i n d i c a t o r s on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l remain illuminated.

Press Hardover Reset switch i n the cockpit. A D VR The H R O E BOTH i n d i c a t o r i n t h e cockpit s h a l l be extinguished.
K.
L.
M.
S D and MODEL i n d i c a t o r s on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l be T illuminated.
N.
BOTH i n d i c a t o r on the t e s t c a r t s h a l l be extinguished.
Report No. 7260-954.002
11-203.
ATTITUDE INDICATOR, ROLL LEFT C A N L HNE A.

Move t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r f u l l l e f t u n t i l t h e hardstop i s contacted.
B.
The M S E WARNING and H R O E BOTH i n d i c a t o r s i n t h e AT R A D VR cockpit s h a l l be illuminated.
C.
S D and MODEL i n d i c a t o r s on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l be T extinguished.
D.
Rocket i n d i c a t o r s A ~9
BS9
E. F.
CT9
and D
Return t h e hand c o n t r o l l e r t o t h e center position and release.
G.
The M S E WARNING and HARDOVER BOTH indicators i n t h e AT R cockpit s h a l l remain illuminated.
H.
S D and M D L i n d i c a t o r s on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l remain T OE extinguished;
I.
J.
BOTH i n d i c a t o r on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l remain illuminated.

A l l rocket indicators s h a l l be extinguished.
K. P r s s s t h e Hardover Reset switch i n the cockpit.

L. The HARDOVER BOTH i n d i c a t o r i n t h e cockpit s h a l l be extinguished.
M.
S D and M D L i n d i c a t o r s on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l be T OE illuminated.
N.
BOTH i n d i c a t o r on t h e t e s t c a r t s h a l l be extinguished.
Report No. 7260-954002
11-204.
L C L VERTICAL M D OA OE
A.
Place t h e Emergency Gimbal Lock switch i n t h e ON p o s i t i o n . The EMERG GIMBALS L C E i n d i c a t o r s h a l l be illuminated. OKD Remove the j e t engine r e s t r a i n t cables.,
B.
C.
D. Apply hydraulic power t o t h e vehicle.

E. Place t h e Local V e r t i c a l switch i n t h e ON p o s i t i o n . Apply
28 vdc t o t e s t c a r t TP159 ( l e g microswitch bypass r e l a y ) .

F.
'
Adjust t h e angle computer (with' a t t i t u d e gryo package) f o r 0' i n p i t c h and r o l l .
G.
Place t h e Emergency Gimbal Lock switch i n t h e OFF p o s i t i o n and momentarily depress t h e Emergency Gimbal Lock Reset switch.
H.
The L C L VERTICAL i n d i c a t o r s h a l l remain illuminated. OA
MR I. The E E G GDBALS LOCKED i n d i c a t o r s h a l l extinguish.

J.
The j e t engin& s h a l l be a t 0.0' Rotate t h e gyro package from p i t c h angle.
0.5'
i n p i t c h and r o l l .
5O
K.
-15'
t o +15O i n p i t c h i n
s t e p s . A t e w h angle record gyro p i t c h angle and j e t engine Refer t o Table 1 - 1 11 .
TABLE 1 - 1 11
GYRO PITCH AND JET ENGINE PITCH ANGLES
t
Gyro P i t c h Angle -15O
Actual
J e t Engine P i t c h Angle
-15O
Actual
-lo0
-lo0
5O
5O
oO
5O
oO
+ 5O
+lo0 +15O Report No. 7260-954002
+lo0 +15O
11-171
NT OE The j e t engine p i t c h angle must be i d e n t i c a l i d e n t i c a l t o t h e gyro p i t c h angle within
+ -
0.7'.
L. Return t h e gyro package t o 0'.
M. Rotate t h e gyro package from -15' t o +15O i n r o l l i n 5' s t e p s .

A t each angle record gyro r o l l angle and j e t engine r o l l
angle. Refer t o t a b l e 11-12. TABLE 11-12
GYRO ROIL AND JET ENGINE ROLL ANGLES

r d
Gyro R o l l Angle
-15O
Actual
J e t Engine R o l l Angle
-15O
Actual
-lo0
-lo0
5O
- 5O
oO
+ 5O
oO
+ 5O
+lo0 +15O
L
+lo0 +15O NT OE The j e t engine r o l l angle must be i d e n t i c a l t o t h e gyro r o l l angle withing f 0.7'.
N. 0. P.
Return t h e gyro package t o 0'. Apply 1 vdc t o TP139 (X torquer) t o r q u e r ) and TP141 (Y 1, 2 1, 2 The j e t engine s h a l l not move.
..
Q .
11-172
Remove l e a d s from TP139 and TP141. Report No. 7260-954002
11-205.
VERTICAL GYRO WITH RESOLVERS ADJUSTMENT
The f o l l o w i n g adjustments a r e r e q u i r e d whenever t h e V e r t i c a l Gyro w i t h Resolvers i s changed.
A.
With gyro package mounted on a h o r i z o n t a l plane (0' f 6 min) a d j u s t gyro f o r a DC n u l l a t W and D A8 TP5 i itch), and
W and D A 8 TP7 ( r o l l ) . Also ad j u s t a t t i t u d e gyro package

potentiometer T B ~ R o~r 1.88 vdc a t W and D ~6 iP2. f 11-206. VERTICAL G R WITH RESOLVERS TESTS REQUIRED YO
The f o l l o w i n g t e s t s a r e r e q u i r e d a f t e r t h e V e r t i c a l Gyro w i t h Resolvers adjustments have been performed. 11-207.
LUNAR S ~ L A T I O N CHECK
A.
Apply 28 vdc t o t e s t c a r t simulation loop). l e g microswitch.
TP154 (ground t e s t r e l a y f o r l u n a r
Apply 28 vdc .Lo t e s t c a r t TP159 t o bypass
B.
C.
Adjust a t t i t u d e gyro package t o 0 i 0.2'
i n p i t c h and r o l l .
Place t h e Local V e r t i c a l switch i n t h e OFF p o s i t i o n and momentarily depress t h e Loc Vert Release switch.
D.
Place t h e Lunar Sim switch i n t h e L N R SIM p o s i t i o n . UA Adjust t h e j e t t h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n t o give 0 f 0.5 vdc a t weight-drag t e s t p o i n t A7 TP2.
E.
F.
Place t h e Emergency Gimbal Lock switch i n t h e OFF p o s i t i o n , and momentarily d e p r e s s t h e Emergency Gimbal Lock Reset switch.
G.
The E E G GIMBllLS L C E i n d i c a t o r s h a l l e x t i n g u i s h . MR OKD
H. The JET STAB i n d i c a t o r s h a l l i l l u m i n a t e .
Report No. 7260-954002
I The j e t engine s h a l l be a t 0' + 0.8' i n p i t c h and r o l l . (measure 0 f 100 mvdc a t A 9 TP7 and A 9 TP3 of weight drag box).
Pitch A T A CU L Roll A T A CU L
A 9 TP7 ACTUAL A 9 TP3 ACTUAL

J.
Connect a v a r i a b l e DC v a r i a b l e DC voltage i n i t i a l l y s e t a t 0 vdc t o TP139
K o
8
(3,
torquer)
Rotate t h e p i t c h gyro t o 5.0'
+ -
0.1'
( p i t c h up).
L.
The t o p of t h e j e t engine w i l l r o t a t e forward. Measure and record t h e voltage a t weight drag t e s t p o i n t s
M.
A9 TP5
N.
(4) and A9 T P ~(i2).
(0'
reading).
Increase the DC voltage a t TP139 u n t i l the reading a t i n S t e p F.
A 9 TP7
i s w i t h i n 12 mvdc of t h e reading obtained on t h i s t e s t point
0. The average of t h e voltages a t weight drag t e s t p o i n t s
A 9 TP5
P.
(4)and A 9 T P ~(i2)
s h a l l change -0.356
i 0.080 .
vdc.
The voltage a t TP139 s h a l l be +1.33 Rotate t h e p i t c h gyro t o 10.0'
0.30 vdc. up),
9.
R.
S.
t 0.1'
The t o p of t h e j e t engine w i l l r o t a t e forward. I n c r e a s e t h e DC voltage a t TP139 u n t i l t h e reading a t
A 9 TP7 i s w i t h i n 1 2 mvdc of t h e reading obtained on t h i s

t e s t p o i n t i n Step F.
T.
The average of t h e voltages a t weight drag t e s t p o i n t s
A 9 TP5
U.
( i and A9 y)
T P (y2) s h a l l change -0.712 f 0.080 vdc. ~
Return t h e gyro t o 0' TP139 t o 0 vdc.
0.2'
and t h e torquer voltage a t
Report NO. 7260-954002
V.
Rotate t h e p i t c h gyro 5.0 2 0.1'
( p i t c h down).
W.
The t o p of t h e j e t engine w i l l r o t a t e backward. Increase t h e DC voltage a t TP139 negatively u n t i l t h e readin; a t A 9 TP7 i s w i t h i n 12 mvdc of t h e reading obtained on t h i s t e s t point i n Step F.
X .
Y The average of t h e voltages a t weight drag t e s t points . A 9 TP5 and A 9 T P ~ (i2) s h a l l change +0.356 f 0.080 vdc.
K)
.Z.
The voltage a t TP139 s h a l l be -1.33 +, 0.30 vdc. Rotate t h e p i t c h gyro t o 10.0'

+_ 0.1'
AA.
AB.
i itch
down)
The t o p of t h e j e t engine w i l l r o t a t e backward. Increase t h e DC voltage a t TP139 negatively u n t i l t h e reading a t A 9 TP7 i s within 12 mvdc of t h e reading obtained on t h i s t e s t p o i n t i n Step F.
AC.
AD.
The average of t h e voltages a t weight drag t e s t p o i n t s
A 9 TP5
AE. AF.
(5.) A 9 T P (jf2) s h a l l change + 0.712 and ~
5 0.080 vdc.
Remove the l e a d from TP139. Return t h e a t t i t u d e gyro package t o 0' p i t c h and r o l l .
AG.
Connect a v a r i a b l e DC voltage i n i t i a l l y s e t a t 0 vdc t o TPl4l

O Y (
12
) torquer.
f 0.1'
AH.
AI.
Rotate t h e r o l l gyro t o 5.0'
(roll right)
The t o p of t h e j e t engine w i l l r o t a t e t o t h e l e f t a s viewed from t h e a f t deck.
AJ.
Measure and record t h e voltage a t weight drag t e s t points
A 9 TP2 ($)
AK.
and
A9 TP4
if2).
(0'
reading).
Increase t h e DC voltage a t TP141 u n t i l t h e reading a t A9 TP3 i s within 1 2 mvdc of t h e reading obtained on t h i s t e s t p o i n t i n Step F.
Report No. 7260-954.002
AL. The average of t h e voltages a t weight drag t e s t p o i n t s
A9 TP2 (kl) and A 9 T P (y2) s h a l l change +0.356 f 0.080 vdc. ~

AM. The v o l t a g e a t ~ ~ 1 s4 a l l be -1.33 h1 AN. Rotate t h e r o l l gyro t o 10.0'
+ 0.30
vdc.
+ -
0.1'
( r o l l right).
AO. The t o p of t h e j e t engine w i l l r o t a t e l e f t a s viewed from

t h e a f t deck. AP. I n c r e a s e t h e DC voltage a t TP141 u n t i l t h e reading a t A 9 TP3
- i s w i t h i n 12 mvdc of t h e reading obtained on t h i s t e s t

p o i n t i n S t e p F.
A&. The average of t h e voltages a t weight drag t e s t p o i n t s A9 TP2

(kl) and A 9 T P ~ (k2) s h a l l change
0.712 f 0.080 vdc (roll left).
AR. Rotate t h e r o l l gyro t o 5.0'
f 0.1'
AS. The t o p of t h e j e t engine w i l l r o t a t e t o t h e r i g h t a s viewed from t h e a f t deck.
AT. Increase t h e DC v o l t a t e a t TP141 u n t i l t h e reading a t A 9 TP3

i s w i t h i n 12 mvdc of t h e reading obtained on t h i s t e s t
p o i n t i n Step F.
AU. The average of t h e v o l t a g e s a t weight drag t e s t p o i n t s A9 TP2

ifl) and A9 TP4 ) s h a l l change -0356 t 0.080 vdc.
AV. The voltage a t T ~ 1 4 . 1s h a l l be +1.33 f 0.30 vdc.

AW. Rotate t h e r o l l gyro 10.0'
0.1'
(roll left).
AX. The t o p of t h e j e t engine w i l l r o t a t e t o t h e r i g h t a s viewed

from t h e a f t deck.
AY. I n c r e a s e t h e DC voltage a t TP141 u n t i l t h e reading a t A 9 TP3 i s w i t h i n 12 mvdc of t h e reading obtained on t h i s t e s t

p o i n t i n Step F.
Report No. 7260-954002
AZ.
The average of t h e voltage a t weight drag t e s t p o i n t s ) ) A9 TP2 ( Y ~ and A 9 TP4 ( Y ~ s h a l l change -0 -712
0.080 vdc.
AAA
11-208.
Remove lead from TP141.
DIRECTIONAL GYRO ADJUSTMENTS
The following adjustments a r e required whenever t h e D i r e c t i o n a l gyro i s changed. 11-209,
DIRECTIONAL G R INITIAL POTENTIOMETER SETTINGS YO
A.
The primary e l e c t r o n i c s a t t i t u d e gyro gain potentiometer s h a l l be adjusted f o r maximum s e n s i t i v i t y i n yaw.
B. The primary e l e c t r o n i c s a t t i t u d e gyro n u l l potentiometer

s h a l l be adjusted t o compensate f o r t h e n u l l i n t h e gyro. 11-210 DIRECTIONAL GYRO TEST REQUIRED
The following t e s t s a r e required a f t e r t h e D i r e c t i o n a l gyro adjustments have been performed. 11-211. ATTITUDE INDICATOR, YAW C A N L HNE
A.
Place t h e a t t i t u d e gyro package on t h e yaw a t t i t u d e t a b l e i n t h e yaw a x i s .
B.
C.
Adjust t h e yaw a t t i t u d e t a b l e f o r 0'
i n yaw. i n yaw,
A t t i t u d e i n d i c a t o r (3 a x i s b a l l ) s h a l l read 0 f 0.5' ' NT OE The t r i m adjustment (yaw a x i s ) i n t h e cockpit may be u t i l i z e d t o meet t h i s requirement.
D.
The h o r i z o n t a l needle s h a l l i n d i c a t e zero.
Report No. 7260-954002
E.
Rotate t h e yaw a t t i t u d e t a b l e a s indicated i n t a b l e and record t h e measurements.
11-13
T BE AL
--
11-13
YAW ATTITUDE INDICATOR TEST REQUIREMENTS

---
Rotate t h e Y w A t t i t u d e a Table t o t h e Following Positions
REQUIREMENTS
3 Axis B a l l A t t i t u d e
Indicator ATA CU L
Yaw
o0
30 60' 90 120 150' 180' 210 24a0 270' 300' 330
o0 + 30' 60'
lo lo
+ + + -
lo
I
Y
qoO + lo 120 150' 180' 210

lo
+ + -
lo
lo
+ lo 24a0 + lo 270' 300' 330'
+ + -
lo
lo
+ lo -
Yaw
360'
360'
+ -
lo
F. The measurements s h a l l be w i t h i n t h e l i m i t s s p e c i f i e d i n t a b l e 11-13.

G.
Conduct yaw a t t i t u d e c a l i b r a t i o n with instrumentation.
Report No. 7260-954.002
" .v-
SCLECT
~ ~,I U Y I ~ Y ~ :
2 JET 4 JET MOOF SELECT
- - . .. ....
) OPPOSING ROCKET
NETWORK B
K7C
<
PITCH R ROLL
-INHIBIT LOGIC
THRESHOLD AND C ROCMET LOGIC CIRCUITRY
r------1
I
ATTITUDE I M L L NEEDLE I I (PITCMI I L J
------9s
TO MONITOR
6
'.'-OIICCT
2 JET
(OI Z ? & T
SELECT
z2
See Fi&e 11-50 (sheet 2 of 3) Report l o . 7260-954002
See Figure 11-50 Sheet 2 of 3 itude Control Electronics Functional Block Diagram (sheet 1 o f 3)
Figure 1 1-45
See F i g u r e 11-50 S h e e t 1 of 3
A
See F i g u r e 11-50 S h e e t 1 of 3
I ~ ~s T C L
2 JET
SUMMINI NETWORM
PITCH R Q ~ J L L
n
DIRCCI
121131 1 4 1 15) 161 171
(ail
1101
1111 I
h2?@
r+ K 4 0 A
ar.ri
FSNOLO A N 0 C n i T LOC!C IRCtJIlRV
COHMBCli. ?%CT*:,Qr
.
)OPPOSlK4r*)CdC? INHIEWGIL
C36
=
COMPARATOR ONITUP ,?INEL A S i : S T R,, ,A C ,rR
2BV
,)ii
gc CR3N
PRl
;14CI'T
MLL,i
e)p/src
KZ3L OlRtCT MDnC SELMr
'
t
)
MODE SWITCH YONITOR
2 :El
4 JET LOGIC
SWITCH
STICK DETENT SiVIICH '
4 JET MODE SELECT
PlTCH RATE SWITCMtNS 10/SEC VEH!CLE RATE LCGIC
DETECTOR-
KI
RATE COMMAND SUMYll NETWORI ESHOLD A N 0 :NET LOGIC IRCUITRV ITrn MNEL ASSIST
. =
a
NETWORK
PITCH RATE GYRO EXCESS
,tc
be FROM P R l
DIRECT MODE
KZOB
3 --------4 '
'
III
YALFUNCTION DETECTOR-
dc
I
RATE (GYRO1 COMMAND
NETWORK
I
1
I
ROLL RATE GYRO EXCESS RATE MONITOR K36
BACK U P
RATE
P I T C H RATE
COMMAND
GYRO
NETWORK
'
BACK UP
)ROCKET AMPLS
1
THIIESHO ClRCU
BACK UP PITCH 8 R O L L OPPOSING ROCKET INHIBIT LOGIC
.
(JET DRIVERS1
+c
RATE
PITCH RATE GYRO EKCCSS
COMMAND
NETWORK
BACK UP
RATE
R O L L RATE
COMMAND
GYRO EXCESS R L T E MONITOR
GYRO
WETWORK
F i g u r e 11-49. A t t i t u d e Control E l e c t r o n i c s Func ( s h e e t 2 of 3 )
Block D i a g m m
Report No. 7260-954002
...
MODE SEL"' SUMMING NETWORK 8
-v
SELECT
1 1 p,-. -- .
1 AXIS
RATE COMMAND NETWORK
"'
ROCNET AMPLS (JET DRIVERS) MPNcTO$ AAYNEL a5SIST
K 7 ABCD KBABCO
,
ROCKET FIRING CONTROL
COYTROLLR
4 ,
- MODE SELECT
ROCKET L0G:C CIRCUITRY
Utqsl7 MOI;
KtC DIQEC' MODE SELECT
&
IREC r
*as
*
*i
YAW R A T t SnITCnlNG
PRIMARY /
1
,
BACK.
2 JET 4 JET LOGIC
I
STICK DETENT SW
I
1
m;o/SE~ YAW RATE SWITCHING VEHICLE RATE LOGIC
I
K4
ATTITUDE
K39
ATTITUDE Eu; l ; i -; T BALL MEEOLES
( YAW
1
I
ATTITUDE HOLD
7
I
!2
L------J
OlRECT YODC SELECT
NISI
f
2 SET 4SET YODC SELECT
ye
COYCARATOR
137 COYNRATOII RELAY 2 v .
DIRECT
RATE NO NODCL
SELECT
NODCL
DIRECT MO N O M L
HLND CONTROLLER MALFU*CTIOM DETECTOR-DIRECT ) Y O N SWITCH MONITOR
COMMAND NETWOW
I
THRESHOLD AN
HAND CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION OETECTORSYNCMRO MONITOR
K3
YAW R A T E GYRO EXCESS RATE MONITOR ROCKET AYPLS (JET W I V E R S I
*c
RATE COIIAM
IKTwn*
YAW RATE
COMMAND
YAW RATE GYRO EXCESS RATE klONlTOR
Report No. 7260-954002
Figure 1 1 -49
ttitude Control Electronics Functional Block Diagram (sheet 3 of 3)
WEIGHT AND DRAG
JET S T A B I L I Z A T I O N
POT NO. l ANGLE ClLClJlT (WITH RESPCCT TO IS0 EXCCSS
XEv 4 DEIYOOULATOR
X ERROR LUNAR SIY RELAY ~ ( g bVERTIC,. RELAY SUllMlNG INTEG KT1 FEEMACI
BAT~ITUOE
GYRO FROM ATTITUDE CONTROL SYSTEY POT
RELAY PITCH ACTUATOR DRIVE AMPLIFIER
m. 2
PITCH ACTUATOR VALVE CURIIEYT FEEDIUI LOW
TO JET STAOILIZATION IPITCH SERVO) EV
I
6ATTITUDE
ATTITUDE CONTROL SYSTEM
ERROR MMODULATOR
LUNAR 511. RELAY
B RELAY
v AXIS SUYYlNG JV P AYPLIFIER
I
POT
NO
RELAY KTUATOII DRIVE A * P t l F IER
OSTER
10 AUTO THROTTLE
ENGINE NOAL
-S L" mz :: Y , (ROLL SCRVOI
ROLL ACTWTOn VALVE COILS

CURRENT FEEDBACK LOO?
L;"
JP4-INITIAL WEIGHT
AC AMPLIFIER NETWORK
I
STAGE A SERVO moron CONTROL WINDING THROTTLE BACK SVNCHRO
TL/W
COMPUTER
wo
AFT LIMIT SWITCH OFF C Y
E 4 \ ON
RELAY
04-
zev
+ V J I Y AXIS INSTRUFOR TELEMETRV
POT YO I
j-k?"'
SWITCH
L
K2b 7 2 2 5" DC GNO
r'
CNO
NC
r-t
G ~ O
5
tle-Electronic Block Diagram
Go
Figure 11-50. Weight and Drag, J e t S t a b i l i z a t i o n , and Autc
Report No. 7260-954002
SECTION X I 1
INSPECTIONS AND FHWENTIVE

MAI~ANCE
72-1.
12-2.
SCOPE OF SECTION
Inspection intervals and preventhe maintenance procedures are
provided f o r t h e LLTV components, by system, in t a b l e 12-1.
Referencea
are provided f o r the procedures t o be followed in performing the inspec-
tions.
Refer also to LLTV Preflight Checklist Number 7260-931005 and
Postflight Checklist Number 7260-931010 .
Daily inapect i o n s are usually

Some items
performed as part of preflight and postflight inspections.
of inspection are also included in the LLTV Turnaround Checklist Number
7260-931 012 .
Report No.
7260-954002
APPENDIX A
EMGTNEErnG DRAWINGS
A-2.
Table A-1 provides a p a r t i a l listing of Bell engineering drawings f o r the
Lunar Landing Training Vehicle.
The l i s t i n g i s generally f o m t t e d according
to system and provides the major drawings,
Refer Lo the Numerical Index, Report
Number 7260-950070 for a complete l i s t i n g , by drawing number, of a l l components
f o r the LLTV.
TABLE: A-1
ENGINEEFSNG DRAMING LIST Title Ilrawinff Number
?260-~9001
Lunar hnding T r a h i n g Vehicle Assembly

Structural A f t Structural Section Installation
7260-1 53007
7260-1 52001
7260- 153004 7260-1 50001
Center Body Assembly

Equipment Platform I n s t a l l a t i o n
F o m r d Section Structural I n s t a l l a t i o n & Assembly
Glmbal Installation
7260-42 1003
7260-1 5 5003
Leg Structural I n s t a l l a t i o n
S t r u t Landing I n s t a l l a t i o n
1
7161-1 9 1005
Fieport No, 7260-954002
Eiection Seat
Enclosure, Cockpit Inatallation
Seat I n s t a l l a t i o n
*7260-150008 7260-503 001
Oxygen System
w g e n System Installation
'7260-501001
7260-501 002
-*
Oxygen Equipment
Hydraulic Ghbal.
Hydraulic System Power Source I n s t a l l a t i o n
Hydraulic Actuators I n s t a l l a t i o n
7 6 -382003 11
7260-382004 7260-390008
Hydraulic Actuator
Jet E n ~ h e
Engine I n s t a l l a t i o n
Jet Fuel System I n s t a l l a t i o n
7260-421 010 7260-4Z001 7260-43 5007 7260-200004
Power Control I n s t a l l a t i o n
Engine E l e c t r i c a l Installation & Wiring
Rocket Psopulsion
Rocket Propulsion System Propulsion System I n s t a l l a t i o n

Tank Assembly, Propellant
7260-460007 7260-460003
,7260471001
Tank Pressure
Thrust Unit, 90-Pound, A t t i t u d e Control
T-Handle Lift Rocket Control Installation
Cockpit Indicators
7260-471 009
7 61-470020 1
'7240-541001
Pedestal Assembly, Instrument Panel

6-2
7260-561 004, Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE A-1
(Continued)
7260-561 021 7260- 561022
Instrument Box
hstmment Panel Assembly
Wind Direction Indicatbr
- Anemometer Installation
7260-561 023
Wiring Diagram - Warning Lights

Wiring Diagram
7260-201 005
7260-201 003 7260-301 700
- Miscellaneous
&ster Warning Control

v
Electrical
Electrical Installation A f t Platform
7260-200006
Electrical Equipment Installation & Wiring

Wiring Diagram, Power Generation & Distribution
7260-200003
7260-201 001
7260-1 53502
7260-200002
Inverter h s t a l l a t f o n A f t S t m c t u r e
Inverter Installation
Battery
7240-202002
~ommnications/~ata Instmmentat i o n
Electrical Egutpment I n s t a l l a t i o n & Wirtng

Electrical I n s t a l l a t i o n Aft Platform
AC/DC Condit Toner
7260-200001
7260-200006
7260-242002 7260-242003 7260-242001
Wiring Diagram Instrumentation Instrumentatton Electrkcal h a t a l l a t i o n

Attitude Transducers Installation
7260-UO15
7260-26201 0
Instrumentation Package
Wiring Diagram, Radio & Radar
7260-201 002
7260-561 001
Console, P i l o t s , I n a t a l l a t i o n Transceiver, Model TR-31 UIEF
7260-561 019
Report No. 7260-954002
TABLE A-1
4
(Continued)
AVIONICS ACS
Electronics Package Installation
Attitude Gyro Installation
W r i n g Diagram Avionics System 7260-301 001
7260-301 050 7260-201 004
Drag Compensation System
7260-301 010
Back-Up Electronics, Rocket Valve Amplifier

& Power Supply
7260-301 030
7260-301 050
7260-301 070
ACS
ACS
- PrEmary Electronics - Monitor Electronics
Attitude Contmller Mounting Box I n s t a l l a t i o n

Attitude Control Assembly
7240-541 503
7260-541 004 7260-561 002
Accelerometer, Mount Assembly
Report No. 7260-954002

Lunar Landing Training Vehicle Service and Maintenance Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lunar Landing Training Vehicle Service and Maintenance Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ...........

........... ........... ........... ............ . ...

H&~*~ONALE R O N A U T ' I C S I A N D SPACE ADMINISTRATION A

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

MAMUAL REPORT NO. 7260-954002

MANNE-D SPACECRAFT CENTER

Fiepcu-t No. 7260-954002

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I (CONT)

1-66 1-68 1-69

1-83 18 -4 1-85 1 -87 1- 9 8 19 -1

Report No. 7260-954002

SECTION I1 Para Title

Report No. 7260-954002

Report No. 7260-954002

JP4 Tank Removal

Report No. 7260-954002

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION V HYI3RAULIC GIMBAL SYSTEM

Report No. 7260-954002

SECTION V I Para Title

Report No. 7260-954002

Fteport No. 7260-354002

Report No. 7260*954002

Report No. 7260-954002

TABLE 9F CONTENTS SECTION X I (CONT) AVIONICS SYSTPara Title MAINTENANCE

Report No. 7260-954002

Report No. 7260-954002

1-34 1-35 1-36

3-7 3-8 3-9

Report No. 7260-954002

11-3 11-4 11-5 11-6 11-7

Report No. 7260-954002

Report No. 7260-954002

Report No. 7260-954002

s k i l l e d , t r a i n e d personnel, a s an a i d i n s e r v i c i n g and maintaining t h e

It contains a l l necessary informatlon and i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t r a n s -

TABLE 1-1. DOCUMENT NO.

DOCUMENT TITLE Bell Aerossstems Company

Report No. 7260-954002

The Lunar Landing Training Vehicle ( h e r e a f t e r r e f e r r e d t o a s e i t h e r

s k i l l e d , t r a i n e d personnel, a s an a i d i n s e r v i c i n g and maintaining t h e LLTV.

It contains a l l necessary information and i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t r a n s -

Handbooks and Manuals 7260-954001 7260-954003 7260-954004 L T Flight Manual LV

Report No. 7260-954002

Weber Seat Manual Manual DR 5773-1

Report No. 7260-954002

The LLTV i s a v e r t i c a l l y r i s i n g f r e e - f l i g h t l u n a r landing t r a i n i n g

s t r u c t u r e with four truss-type legs. extends rearward. of t h e v e h i c l e . f i g u r e 4-1.

MAJOR STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS

The major s t r u c t u r a l components of t h e

v e h i c l e a r e : c e n t e r body, engine mounted, gimbal r i n g , peroxide t a n k s , f u e l

Report No. 7260-954002

The c e n t e r body s t r u c t u r e c o n s i s t s of an upper and a Refer t,o s e c t i o n I V and Draw-

lower frame connected by d i a g o n a l t u b e s .

i n g No. 7260-152001 f o r more d e t a i l e d information.

The engine mount i s a b u i l t - u p s h e e t metal r i n g ,

The gimbal r i n g i s a machined aluminum r i n g t h a t The

s u p p o r t s t h e engine mount t h a t i s supported by t h e c e n t e r body. maintenance o p e r a t i o n s .

Two hydrogen peroxide t a n k s a r e mounted Refer t o s e c t i c n VI and Drawing No. I

7260-471001 f o r more d e t a i l e d information.

FUEL (JP4) TANKS

Two JP4 t a n k s a r e mounted on t h e v e h i c l e and one i n Refer t o

a r e spaced symmetrically about t h e v e h i c l e c e n t e r of g r a v i t y : f r o n t of t h e engine and t h e o t h e r d i r e c t l y behind t h e engine.

s e c t i o n VI: and Drawing No. 7260-424017 f o r more d e t a i l e d information.

Report No. 7260-9'54002